JP2017196526A - Game machine - Google Patents

Abstract

PROBLEM TO BE SOLVED: To provide a game machine capable of facilitating adjustment to an original amount of operation.SOLUTION: A handle ring 540 can be operated in a section between an initial position θ0 and an operation end point, and a position of the operation end point can be changed. Therefore, by changing (setting) the position of the operation end point to a position corresponding to a desired amount of operation (target position), a player can easily adjust the amount of operation of the handle ring 540 to an original amount of operation by operating the handle ring 540 to the operation end point (more specifically, by operating the handle ring 540 to a position where operation is controlled by the operation end point and further operation is disabled).SELECTED DRAWING: Figure 30

Description

  The present invention relates to a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine.

  In a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, there is a machine in which a handle rotation part is rotatably attached to a handle base, and the launch strength of a sphere is adjusted according to the amount of rotation of the handle rotation part. In addition, when the desired launch intensity is obtained by the turning operation of the handle turning part, the turning of the handle turning part is fixed in order to maintain the launch intensity and reduce the player's fatigue. There is a thing of the structure to do.

JP 2012-005759 A

  The operating element (handle rotating portion) is applied with an urging force by an urging spring, and when the player releases the hand, the operating position of the operating element is returned to the initial position. Therefore, for example, when the game is interrupted, it is difficult to adjust the operation position of the operator to the original operation position before the game is interrupted.

  The present invention has been made to solve the above-described problems, and an object thereof is to provide a gaming machine that can easily adjust the operation position of the operator to the original operation position.

  In order to achieve this object, the gaming machine according to claim 1 is provided with an operation element operated by a player, and the launch intensity of the game ball is adjusted according to the operation amount of the operation element, The player can operate in the section from the initial position to the operation end point, the position of the operation end point can be changed, and the player identifies whether the position of the operation end point has been changed from the maximum position Formed possible.

  The gaming machine according to claim 2 is provided with a button member that is pushed in by a player in the gaming machine according to claim 1, and the position of the operation end point is the maximum position when the button member is pushed in. In the state where the position of the operation end point is changed from the maximum position, the push position of the button member is different from the state where the position of the operation end point is at the maximum position.

  A gaming machine according to a third aspect is the gaming machine according to the second aspect, wherein a wall portion disposed on the outer peripheral surface side of the button member and an opening formed in the wall portion and at least one of the outer peripheral surfaces of the button member. In a state in which the position of the operation end point is changed from the maximum position, compared to a state in which the position of the operation end point is at the maximum position, the portion is visually recognized through the opening. The target form is different.

  According to the gaming machine of the first aspect, it is possible to easily adjust the operation amount of the operator to the original operation amount.

  Here, as a method of adjusting the operation amount of the operation element to a desired operation amount, for example, a method of providing a scale line along the movement locus of the operation element, or a reference at an arbitrary position along the movement locus of the operation element A method of fixing the piece is conceivable. According to these methods, the operation amount of the manipulator can be reduced by operating the manipulator using the scale line or the reference piece as the target position (that is, the operation position of the manipulator coincides with the scale line or the reference piece). It can be easily adjusted to a desired operation amount.

  However, in the method described above, the accuracy of adjusting the operating element depends on the skill of the player. That is, since it is necessary to finely adjust the operation position of the operator with respect to the target position while visually determining whether or not the operation position of the operation element matches the target position (scale line or reference piece) Adjustment is difficult. Further, for example, if the operating speed of the operating element is increased, the operating position may pass, so that the operating speed of the operating element needs to be reduced in the vicinity of the target position, and quick adjustment is difficult.

  On the other hand, according to the first aspect, when the operation element can be operated in the section from the initial position to the operation end point, the position of the operation end point can be changed. ) By changing (setting) the position of the operation end point to a position corresponding to (), if the player operates the operation element to the operation end point (that is, the operation is restricted by the operation end point and further operations are performed). If the operation element is operated to a position where it becomes impossible to perform the operation), the operation amount of the operation element can be easily adjusted to a desired operation amount.

  Thereby, for example, it is not necessary to make fine adjustment while visually determining whether or not the operation position of the operation element matches the target position, and it is possible to accurately adjust to a desired operation amount. Moreover, since the target position is not passed, the operation speed of the operator can be increased, and the desired operation amount can be quickly adjusted.

  More specifically, as a result of adjusting the operation amount of the operation element, when the launch intensity of the game ball becomes a desired launch intensity, the position corresponding to the state (the operation element having the desired launch intensity is obtained). The position of the operation end point is changed (set) to the position corresponding to the operation amount. Thus, for example, even after the game is interrupted for a break and the operating element is returned to the initial position, the player can operate the operating element only by operating the operating element to the operation end point as described above. The operation amount of the child can be returned (adjusted) to the original operation amount (that is, the operation amount before the game is interrupted), and the return operation can be performed accurately and quickly.

  Furthermore, since the player can identify whether the position of the operation end point has been changed from the maximum position, the situation where the game is played without knowing that the adjustment range of the launch intensity of the game ball is regulated is suppressed. It is possible to make it difficult for the player to suffer a disadvantage.

  That is, when the operation element can be operated in the section from the initial position to the operation end point, in the configuration in which the position of the operation end point can be changed, the player determines that the position of the operation end point has been changed. If a game is played without being noticed, the game is played in a state where the adjustment range of the launch intensity of the game ball is restricted, that is, in a state where the launch of the game ball at a predetermined maximum launch intensity is not possible. As a result, the player may suffer a disadvantage.

  On the other hand, according to claim 1, since the player can identify whether the position of the operation end point has been changed from the maximum position, the position of the operation end point has been changed from the maximum position (that is, It is possible to prevent the player from suffering a disadvantage by preventing the player from playing the game without noticing that the adjustment range of the launch intensity of the game ball is regulated.

  According to the gaming machine according to claim 2, in addition to the effect achieved by the gaming machine according to claim 1, the position of the operation end point can be changed from the maximum position by pushing the button member, and the position of the operation end point is maximized. In the state changed from the position, the push position of the button member is different compared to the state where the position of the operation end point is at the maximum position. Therefore, the position of the operation end point is maximized based on the difference in the push position of the button member. The player can be identified whether the position has been changed. Accordingly, it is possible to suppress the player from playing the game without noticing that the position of the operation end point has been changed from the maximum position, and to make it difficult for the player to suffer a disadvantage.

  In this case, according to the second aspect, the operation member (button member) operated to change the position of the operation end point from the maximum position is used to identify whether the position of the operation end point is changed from the maximum position. Since it is also used as an identification member, the number of parts can be reduced accordingly, and the product cost can be reduced.

  According to the gaming machine according to claim 3, in addition to the effect achieved by the gaming machine according to claim 2, when the position of the operation end point is changed from the maximum position, the position of the operation end point is compared with the state at the maximum position. Since the form of the object visually recognized through the opening is different, the player can easily and surely determine whether the position of the operation end point has been changed from the maximum position based on the difference in the form of the object visually recognized. Can be identified.

  That is, in the configuration in which whether the position of the operation end point has been changed from the maximum position is identified based on the difference in the push-in position of the button member, the determination criterion is the difference in the push-in amount, so the two states are clear. It is difficult to distinguish between

  On the other hand, according to Claim 3, since the form of the object visually recognized through the opening is different, the determination criterion can be binarized, and it is easy to clearly distinguish the two states. This allows the player to easily and reliably identify whether the position of the operation end point has been changed from the maximum position. As a result, the game can be performed without noticing that the position of the operation end point has been changed from the maximum position. It is possible to prevent the player from playing a game and to make it difficult for the player to suffer a disadvantage.

  Note that the form of the object visually recognized through the opening is different, for example, in the two states of the state where the position of the operation end point is at the maximum position and the state where the position of the operation end point is changed from the maximum position, In the state, only the outer peripheral surface of the button member is visually recognized through the opening, and in the other state, only the members other than the outer peripheral surface of the button member are visually recognized through the opening (that is, the button member is The binarization is performed based on whether or not the outer peripheral surface is visually recognized, and the configuration is distinguished based on these binary values).

  Second, in one state and the other state, the outer peripheral surface of the button member is visually recognized, but the color of the outer peripheral surface of the visually recognized button member is different between one state and the other state (that is, The color of the button member visually recognized through the opening (for example, a configuration that is binarized by white and black and distinguishes based on the binary) is exemplified.

  Third, in one state and the other state, the outer peripheral surface of the button member is visually recognized, but the area (percentage occupied in the opening) of the outer peripheral surface of the button member that is visually recognized is Different configurations depending on the state (that is, a configuration that is binarized by the area of the button member visually recognized through the opening (the area that the outer peripheral surface of the button member occupies in the opening) is distinguished based on these two values) Is done.

  Fourthly, in one state and the other state, the outer peripheral surface of the button member is visually recognized, but the shape drawn in the opening by the outer peripheral surface of the visually recognized button member is in one state and the other state. A different configuration (that is, a configuration in which the outer peripheral surface of the button member is binarized by a shape drawn in the opening and distinguished based on the binary values) is exemplified.

  Fifth, in one state and the other state, the outer peripheral surface of the button member is visually recognized, and the area of the outer peripheral surface of the button member visually recognized and the shape drawn by the outer peripheral surface of the button member are the same. The position of the outer peripheral surface of the button member in the visually recognizable opening is different between one state and the other state (that is, binarized by the position of the outer peripheral surface of the button member in the opening, and is distinguished based on these two values. Configuration) is exemplified.

It is a front view of the pachinko machine in a 1st embodiment. It is a front view of the game board of a pachinko machine. It is a rear view of a pachinko machine. It is a block diagram which shows the electric constitution of a pachinko machine. (A) is a top view of the handle device, (b) is a front view of the handle device. FIG. 6 is a side view of the handle device in the direction of arrow VI in FIG. It is a front perspective view of a handle mounting base and a handle base. It is a back perspective view of a handle ring. (A) is a rear perspective view of the front cover, and (b) is a front view of the guide groove. (A) is a top view of the front cover in the direction of arrow Xa in FIG. 9 (a), and (b) is a partially enlarged cross-sectional view of the front cover along the line Xa-Xa in FIG. 10 (a). It is a back perspective view of a tongue member. It is a disassembled perspective view of the button member which illustrates the connection structure of a handle shaft support body and a shaft body. (A) is a front view of a switching apparatus, (b) is a side view of the switching apparatus in the arrow XIIIb direction view of Fig.13 (a). (A) is sectional drawing of the switching apparatus in the XIVb-XIVb line | wire of Fig.13 (a), (b) is a side view of the switching apparatus in the arrow XIVb direction view of Fig.13 (a). (A) And (b) is sectional drawing of a switching apparatus, (c) is a front view of the switching apparatus in the arrow XVc direction view of Fig.15 (a), (d) is FIG.15 (b). It is a front view of the switching apparatus in the arrow XVd direction view of). It is a back perspective view of a handle base. It is a perspective view in the disassembled state of a handle mounting base. (A) is a perspective view in the assembly state of a handle mounting base, (b) is an inner side view of a 1st main body. It is a rear perspective view of a handle mounting base and a handle base. It is a front perspective view of a handle base in the state where a handle restricting member was attached. It is a front perspective view of a handle base in the state where a handle control member was removed. (A) And (b) is a perspective view of a handle control member. It is a partial cross section side view of a handle device in the state before being displaced. It is a partial section side view of a handle device in the state after being operated for displacement. It is a partial cross section side view of a handle apparatus. It is a partial cross section side view of a handle apparatus. It is a partial cross section side view of a handle apparatus. It is a front schematic diagram of the handle device schematically showing the handle ring and the switching device. It is a front schematic diagram of the handle device schematically showing the handle ring and the switching device. It is a schematic diagram which illustrates typically the state of rotation operation of a handle apparatus. It is a schematic diagram which illustrates typically the state of rotation operation of a handle apparatus. (A) And (b) is the elements on larger scale of a handle apparatus. (A) is a top view of the handle apparatus in 2nd Embodiment, (b) is a front view of a handle apparatus. FIG. 34 is a side view of the handle device as viewed in the direction of arrow XXXII in FIG. It is a front perspective view of a handle mounting base and a handle base. It is a back perspective view of a handle ring. It is a back perspective view of a front cover. (A) is a front view of the switching device, (b) is a side view of the switching device in the direction of arrow XXXVIb in FIG. 38 (a), and (c) is an arrow XXXVIc in FIG. 38 (a). It is a rear view of the switching device in the direction view. (A) is sectional drawing of the switching apparatus in the XXXVIIa-XXXVIIa line | wire of Fig.38 (a), (b) is a side view of the switching apparatus in the arrow XXXVIIb direction view of Fig.38 (a). (A) And (b) is sectional drawing of a switching apparatus, (c) is a rear view of the switching apparatus in the arrow XXXVIIIc direction view of Fig.40 (a), (d) is FIG.40 (b). It is a rear view of the switching apparatus in the arrow XXXVIIId direction view of). (A) is a front view of a pushing member, (b) is a side view of the pushing member in the arrow XLIb direction view of FIG. 41 (a), (c) is XLIc- of FIG. 41 (a). It is sectional drawing of the pushing member in a XLIc line. (A) is a front view of a switch member, (b) is a side view of the switch member as viewed in the direction of the arrow XLIIb in FIG. 42 (a), and (c) is XLIIc− in FIG. 42 (a). It is sectional drawing of the switch member in a XLIIc line. (A) is a front view of a base body, (b) is sectional drawing of the base body in the XLIIIb-XLIIIb line | wire of Fig.43 (a). (A) is a side view of the transmission rod, and (b) is a cross-sectional view of the transmission rod along the XLIVb-XLIVb line in FIG. 44 (a). It is the plane development view which expanded and illustrated the inner peripheral surface of the penetration hole of a base object on a plane. FIG. 46 is a partially enlarged development view of a guide groove in which a range XLVI in FIG. 45 is partially enlarged. (A) to (c) is a side view of the switch member. It is a rear perspective view in the disassembled state of a handle base, a handle mounting base, and a linear motion conversion member. FIG. 11 is a rear perspective view of the handle base 530, the handle mounting base 2520, and the linear motion conversion member 2800 in an assembled state. It is a back perspective view in the assembly state of a handle base, a handle mounting base, and a linear motion conversion member. It is a perspective view in the disassembled state of a handle mounting base. (A) is a perspective view in the assembly state of a handle mounting base, (b) is an inner side view of a 1st main body. (A) is a side view of the linear motion conversion member as viewed in the direction of the arrow LIIa in FIG. 48, and (b) is a front view of the linear motion conversion member as viewed in the direction of the arrow LIIb in FIG. 52 (c) is a side view of the linear motion conversion member as viewed in the direction of the arrow LIIc in FIG. 52 (b). It is a partial cross section side view of a handle apparatus. It is a partial cross section side view of a handle apparatus. It is a partial cross section side view of a handle apparatus. (A) is a partial enlarged side view of the handle device, and (b) is a partially enlarged top view of the handle device. (A) is a partial enlarged side view of the handle device, and (b) is a partially enlarged top view of the handle device. (A) is a top view of the handle apparatus in 3rd Embodiment, (b) is a side view of the handle apparatus in the arrow LVIIIb direction view of Fig.58 (a). It is sectional drawing of the handle apparatus in the LVIX-LVIX line | wire of Fig.58 (a). (A) is a side view of the lower base, (b) is a top view of the lower base as viewed in the direction of the arrow LXb in FIG. 60 (a), and (c) is a diagram of FIG. 60 (b). It is sectional drawing of the lower base in the LXc-LXc line. (A) is a side view of the intermediate base, (b) is a top view of the intermediate base as viewed in the direction of arrow LXIb in FIG. 61 (a), and (c) is LXIc− in FIG. 61 (b). It is sectional drawing of the intermediate | middle base in a LXIc line. (A) is a side view of the upper base, (b) is a bottom view of the upper base as viewed in the direction of arrow LXIIb in FIG. 62 (a), and (c) is LXIIc− in FIG. 62 (b). It is sectional drawing of the upper side base in a LXIIc line. (A) is a front view of a closing member, (b) is a bottom view of the closing member as seen in the direction of arrow LXIIIb in FIG. 63 (a), and (c) is a view in FIG. 63 (a). It is sectional drawing of the sealing member in a LXIIIc-LXIIIc line. (A) And (b) is a partial cross section side view of a rotating shaft part and an operation element. (A) is a side view of a rotating shaft part, (b) is a rear view of the rotating shaft part in the arrow LXVb direction view of FIG. 65 (a), and (c) is a partial cross-sectional rear surface of the push-up member. FIG. (A) is a top view of the rotating shaft part in the arrow LXVIa direction view of Fig.65 (a), (b) is sectional drawing of the rotating shaft part in the LXIVb-LXVIb line | wire of Fig.66 (a). (A) is a side view of the operation element, and (b) is a top view of the operation element as viewed in the direction of the arrow LXVIb in FIG. 67 (a). (A) is a partial enlarged cross-sectional view of the operation element taken along line LXVIIIa-LXVIIIa in FIG. 67 (b), and (b) is a partial enlarged cross-sectional view of the operation element taken along line LXVIIIb-LXVIIIb in FIG. 67 (b). is there. It is a partial expanded sectional view of a handle device. (A) is a top view of the switching device, (b) is a side view of the switching device as viewed in the direction of arrow LXXb in FIG. 70 (a), and (c) is an arrow LXXc in FIG. 70 (b). It is a bottom view of the switching device in the direction view. (A) is sectional drawing of the switching apparatus in the LXXIAa-LXXIa line | wire of Fig.70 (a), (b) is a side view of the switching apparatus in the arrow LXXIb direction view of FIG.70 (b). (A) is a front view of a pushing member, (b) is a side view of the pushing member as viewed in the direction of arrow LXXIIb in FIG. 72 (a), and (c) is LXXIIc− in FIG. 72 (a). It is sectional drawing of the pushing member in a LXXIIc line. (A) is a side view of a transmission rod, (b) is a top view of the transmission rod in the direction of arrow LXXIIIb in FIG. 73 (a). It is a partial cross section side view of a handle apparatus. It is a partial cross section side view of a handle apparatus. It is a partial cross section side view of a handle apparatus. It is a partial expansion perspective view of a rotating shaft part and a switching device. It is a partial expansion perspective view of a rotating shaft part and a switching device. It is a schematic diagram which illustrates typically the state of the slide operation of a handle apparatus. It is a schematic diagram which illustrates typically the state of the slide operation of a handle apparatus.

  Embodiments of the present invention will be described below with reference to the accompanying drawings. First, referring to FIG. 1 to FIG. 1, an embodiment in which the present invention is applied to a pachinko gaming machine (hereinafter simply referred to as “pachinko machine”) 10 will be described as a first embodiment. 1 is a front view of a pachinko machine 10 according to the first embodiment, FIG. 2 is a front view of a game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10, and FIG. 3 is a rear view of the pachinko machine 10.

  As shown in FIG. 1, the pachinko machine 10 includes an outer frame 11 in which an outer shell is formed by a wooden frame combined in a substantially rectangular shape, and an outer shape that is substantially the same as the outer frame 11. And an inner frame 12 supported to be openable and closable. In order to support the inner frame 12, metal hinges 18 are attached to the outer frame 11 at two upper and lower portions on the left side when viewed from the front (see FIG. 1). The frame 12 is supported so as to be openable and closable to the front front side.

  A game board 13 (see FIG. 2) having a large number of nails, winning holes 63, 64 and the like is detachably mounted on the inner frame 12 from the back side. A ball ball game is played when a ball (game ball) flows down the front of the game board 13. The inner frame 12 has a ball launch unit 112a (see FIG. 4) that launches a ball to the front area of the game board 13 and a launch that guides the ball launched from the ball launch unit 112a to the front area of the game board 13. A rail (not shown) or the like is attached.

  On the front side of the inner frame 12, a front frame 14 that covers the upper side of the front surface and a lower dish unit 15 that covers the lower side of the front frame 14 are provided. In order to support the front frame 14 and the lower dish unit 15, metal hinges 19 are attached to two upper and lower portions on the left side when viewed from the front (see FIG. 1), and the side on which the hinges 19 are provided is used as an opening / closing axis. 14 and the lower pan unit 15 are supported so as to be openable and closable toward the front front side. The locking of the inner frame 12 and the locking of the front frame 14 are respectively released by inserting a dedicated key into the key hole 21 of the cylinder lock 20 and performing a predetermined operation.

  The front frame 14 is assembled with decorative resin parts, electrical parts, and the like, and a window part 14c that is formed in an approximately elliptical shape is provided at a substantially central part thereof. A glass unit 16 having two plate glasses is disposed on the back side of the front frame 14, and the front surface of the game board 13 can be seen on the front side of the pachinko machine 10 through the glass unit 16.

  On the front frame 14, an upper plate 17 that stores balls is formed in a substantially box shape that protrudes forward and the upper surface is opened, and prize balls and rental balls are discharged to the upper plate 17. The bottom surface of the upper plate 17 is formed to be inclined downward to the right when viewed from the front (see FIG. 1), and the sphere thrown into the upper plate 17 is guided to the ball launch unit 112a by the inclination. A frame button 22 is provided on the upper surface of the upper plate 17. The frame button 22 is operated by the player when, for example, changing the stage of the effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 (see FIG. 2) or changing the contents of the effect of super reach. The

  The front frame 14 is provided with light emitting means such as various lamps around it (for example, a corner portion). These light-emitting means play a role of enhancing the effect of the game during the game by changing or controlling the light-emitting mode by turning on or flashing according to the change in the gaming state at the time of big hit or predetermined reach. On the peripheral edge of the window portion 14c, there are provided electric decoration portions 29 to 33 incorporating light emitting means such as LEDs. In the pachinko machine 10, these lighting parts 29 to 33 function as effect lamps such as jackpot lamps, and the lighting parts 29 to 33 are turned on by lighting or blinking of the built-in LEDs at the time of jackpot or reach effects. Alternatively, it flashes to notify that the jackpot is being hit or that the reach is one step before the jackpot. Further, in the upper left part of the front frame 14 as viewed from the front (see FIG. 1), there is provided a display lamp 34 which has built-in light emitting means such as LEDs and can display the payout of a prize ball and when an error occurs.

  In addition, a small window 35 is formed by attaching a transparent resin from the back side so that the back side of the front frame 14 can be visually recognized, on the lower side of the right illumination part 32, and a sticking space K1 on the front side of the game board 13 (FIG. 2) is visible from the front surface of the pachinko machine 10. In addition, in the pachinko machine 10, a plated member 36 made of ABS resin that is chrome-plated is attached to an area around the electric decoration parts 29 to 33 in order to bring out more gorgeousness.

  A ball rental operation unit 40 is disposed below the window 14c. The ball lending operation unit 40 is provided with a frequency display unit 41, a ball lending button 42 and a return button 43. When the ball lending operation unit 40 is operated in a state where a bill or a card is inserted into a card unit (ball lending unit) (not shown) arranged on the side of the pachinko machine 10, Loans are made. Specifically, the frequency display unit 41 is an area in which the remaining amount information such as a card is displayed, and the built-in LED is lit to display the remaining amount as the remaining amount information. The ball lending button 42 is operated to obtain a lending ball based on information recorded on a card or the like (recording medium), and the lending ball is supplied to the upper plate 17 as long as there is a remaining amount on the card or the like. Is done. The return button 43 is operated when requesting the return of a card or the like inserted into the card unit. In addition, in a pachinko machine in which a ball is lent directly to the upper plate 17 from a ball lending device or the like without using a card unit, a so-called cash machine does not require the ball lending operation unit 40. In this case, the ball lending operation unit 40 It is also possible to add a decorative seal or the like to the installation portion of the parts so that the component configuration is common. A pachinko machine using a card unit and a cash machine can be shared.

  In the lower plate unit 15 located on the lower side of the upper plate 17, a lower plate 50 for storing a ball that could not be stored in the upper plate 17 is formed in a substantially box shape having an open upper surface. Yes. On the right side of the lower plate 50, an operation handle 51 that is operated by a player to drive a ball into the front surface of the game board 13 is disposed.

  Inside the operation handle 51, a touch sensor 51a for permitting driving of the ball launch unit 112a, a launch stop switch 51b for stopping the launch of the ball during the pressing operation, and a rotation of the operation handle 51. A variable resistor (not shown) that detects the amount of movement (rotation position) based on a change in electrical resistance is incorporated. When the operation handle 51 is rotated clockwise by the player, the touch sensor 51a is turned on and the resistance value of the variable resistor changes in accordance with the amount of rotation operation. The resistance value of the variable resistor A ball is fired with a strength corresponding to (shooting strength), and the ball is driven into the front surface of the game board 13 with a jump amount corresponding to the player's operation. Further, when the operation handle 51 is not operated by the player, the touch sensor 51a and the firing stop switch 51b are turned off.

  In the lower part of the front of the lower plate 50, a ball removal lever 52 is provided for operating when the balls stored in the lower plate 50 are discharged downward. The ball removal lever 52 is always urged in the right direction. By sliding the ball release lever 52 in the left direction against the urge, the bottom opening formed in the bottom surface of the lower plate 50 is opened. A ball naturally falls from the bottom opening and is discharged. The operation of the ball removal lever 52 is normally performed in a state where a box (generally referred to as “a thousand box”) for receiving the balls discharged from the lower plate 50 is placed below the lower plate 50. As described above, the operation handle 51 is disposed on the right side of the lower plate 50, and the ashtray 53 is attached on the left side of the lower plate 50.

  As shown in FIG. 2, the game board 13 has a wooden base plate 60 cut into a substantially square shape when viewed from the front, a number of nails (not shown) for ball guidance, a windmill, rails 61, 62, General winning port 63, first winning port 64, second winning port 640, first variable winning device 65, second variable winning device 650, first through gate 67, second through gate 670, variable display unit 80 Etc., and its peripheral edge is attached to the back side of the inner frame 12 (see FIG. 1). The general winning port 63, the first winning port 64, the second winning port 640, the first variable winning device 65, the second variable winning device 650, and the variable display device unit 80 are formed on the base plate 60 by router processing. It is disposed in the through hole and is fixed from the front side of the game board 13 with wood screws or the like.

  The front center portion of the game board 13 can be viewed from the front side of the inner frame 12 through the window portion 14c (see FIG. 1) of the front frame 14. The configuration of the game board 13 will be described below mainly with reference to FIG.

  An outer rail 62 formed by bending a strip-shaped metal plate into a substantially arc shape is planted on the front surface of the game board 13, and the strip-shaped metal plate is located on the inner side of the outer rail 62 in the same manner as the outer rail 62. The arc-shaped inner rail 61 formed by the above is planted. The inner rail 61 and the outer rail 62 surround the outer periphery of the front surface of the game board 13, and the game board 13 and the glass unit 16 (see FIG. 1) surround the front and rear. A game area in which a game is played is formed by the behavior of. The game area is a front surface of the game board 13 and is a substantially circular area formed by dividing the two rails 61 and 62 and the arc member 70 (a winning hole or the like is provided, Area).

  The two rails 61 and 62 are provided to guide the ball fired from the ball launch unit 112a (see FIG. 4) to the upper part of the game board 13. A return ball preventing member 68 is attached to the front end portion of the inner rail 61 (upper left portion in FIG. 2) to prevent the ball once guided to the upper portion of the game board 13 from returning to the ball guide path again. Is done. A return rubber 69 is attached to the tip of the outer rail 62 (upper right part in FIG. 2) at a position corresponding to the maximum flying portion of the sphere, and the ball launched at a predetermined momentum or more hits the return rubber 69 and gains momentum. Is bounced back to the center while being attenuated. A resin arc member 70 formed by providing an arc connecting the rails on the inner surface side between the lower right end of the inner rail 61 and the upper right end of the outer rail 62 is a base. The plate 60 is driven and fixed.

  Two first symbol display devices 37A and 37B are disposed in the upper right portion of the game area when viewed from the front (upper right portion of FIG. 2). The first symbol display device 37A is provided with a plurality of LEDs 37Aa which are light emitting means and a 7-segment display 37Ab. Similarly, the other first symbol display device 37B is provided with a plurality of LEDs 37Ba and a 7-segment display 37Bb which are light emitting means.

  The first symbol display devices 37 </ b> A and 37 </ b> B display according to each control performed by the main control device 110, and mainly display the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10. In the present embodiment, these first symbol display devices 37 </ b> A and 37 </ b> B are configured to be selectively used depending on whether the ball has won the first entrance 64 or the second entrance 640. ing. Specifically, when the ball wins the first entrance 64, the first symbol display device 37A operates, while when the ball wins the second entrance 640, The first symbol display device 37B is configured to operate.

  Each of the plurality of LEDs 37Aa and 37Ba indicates whether the pachinko machine 10 is in a certain change, in a short time, or in a normal state by a lighting state, indicates whether or not it is fluctuating by a lighting state, and a stop pattern is definitely changed. Whether the symbol corresponds to the jackpot, the symbol corresponding to the normal jackpot or the off symbol is indicated by a lighting state, or the number of reserved balls is indicated by a lighting state. Each of the 7-segment display devices 37Ab and 37Bb displays the number of rounds that are a big hit and an error display. The LEDs 37Aa and 37Ba are configured so that the emission colors (for example, red, green, and blue) of the respective LEDs are different, and the combination of the emission colors may suggest various gaming states of the pachinko machine 10 with a small number of LEDs. it can.

  In the pachinko machine 10, lottery is performed when the first entrance 64 and the second entrance 640 are entered. In the lottery, the pachinko machine 10 determines whether or not it is a big hit (big hit lottery), and also determines the type of the big hit if it is determined to be a big hit. As the jackpot type determined here, 15R probability variation jackpot, 4R probability variation jackpot, and 15R normal jackpot are prepared. The LEDs 37Aa and 37Ba not only indicate whether or not the lottery result is a jackpot as a stop symbol after the end of the change, but if the jackpot is a jackpot, a symbol corresponding to the jackpot type is displayed.

  Here, the “15R probability variation jackpot” is a probability variation jackpot in which the maximum number of rounds shifts to a high probability state after a jackpot of 15 rounds, and “4R probability variation jackpot” is a jackpot with a maximum number of rounds of four. It is a probabilistic jackpot that shifts to a high probability state after. In addition, “15R normal jackpot” is a jackpot that shifts to a low probability state after the maximum number of rounds of 15 rounds and hits a short time during a predetermined number of fluctuations (for example, 100 fluctuations). is there.

  In addition, the “high probability state” means a state in which the jackpot probability thereafter increases as an added value after the jackpot ends, that is, when the probability change is in progress (probability change), in other words, a game that easily shifts to the special game state. It is a state of. The high probability state (during probability change) in the present embodiment includes a game state in which the hit probability of the second symbol, which will be described later, is increased and a ball is likely to enter the second entrance 640. The “low probability state” refers to a time when the probability of jackpot change is not occurring, and a state where the jackpot probability is normal, that is, a state where the jackpot probability is lower than that at the time of probability change. The short time state (short time) of the “low probability state” means that the jackpot probability is a normal state, and the jackpot probability remains as it is and only the hit probability of the second symbol is increased. It means a game state in which a ball can easily enter 640. On the other hand, when the pachinko machine 10 is in a normal state is a game state (a state where neither the big hit probability nor the second symbol hit probability is increased) which is neither probabilistic nor short in time.

  During probability change and time reduction, not only the probability of hitting the second symbol is increased, but also the time when the electric accessory 640a attached to the second entrance 640 is opened is changed, which is longer than normal Is set. When the electric accessory 640a is in an opened state (open state), a ball enters the second entrance 640 as compared with a case where the electric accessory 640a is in a closed state (closed state). It becomes easy to sphere. Thus, during the probability change or during the short time, it becomes easy for the ball to enter the second entrance 640, and the number of jackpot lotteries can be increased.

  In addition, during the probability change or in the short time, the opening time of the electric accessory 640a associated with the second entrance 640a is not changed, or in addition to changing the opening time, It is good also as what changes the frequency | count that the electrically-driven accessory 640a opens rather than usual. In addition, the probability of winning the second symbol is not changed during the probability change or in the short time, and the electric accessory 640a is opened at the time when the electric accessory 640a associated with the second entrance 640 is opened and once. It is good also as what changes at least one of the frequency | count to do. In addition, during the probability change or in the short time, the time for opening the electric accessory 640a associated with the second entrance 640 or the number of times of opening the electric accessory 640a per time is not shown. Only the hit probability may be changed so as to be higher than normal.

  The game area is provided with a plurality of general winning ports 63 through which 5 to 15 balls are paid out as winning balls when the balls win. In addition, a variable display device unit 80 is disposed in the central portion of the game area. The variable display device unit 80 has a first entry port 64 and a second entry port 640 as a trigger (start winning prize) as a trigger while synchronizing with the variable display on the first symbol display units 37A and 37B. The third symbol display device 81 composed of a liquid crystal display (hereinafter simply referred to as “display device”) that displays three symbols in a variable manner, and the first through gate 67 and the second through gate 670 passing through the sphere as a trigger. There is provided a second symbol display device 83 composed of LEDs that variably display two symbols. The variable display device unit 80 is provided with a center frame 86 so as to surround the outer periphery of the third symbol display device 81.

  The third symbol display device 81 is constituted by a large liquid crystal display of 8 inch size, and the display content is controlled by the display control device 114 (see FIG. 4). One symbol row is displayed. Each symbol row is composed of a plurality of symbols (third symbol). These third symbols are horizontally scrolled for each symbol column, and the third symbol is variably displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81. It is like that. In the third symbol display device 81 of the present embodiment, the display of the gaming state accompanying the control of the main controller 110 (see FIG. 4) is performed on the first symbol display device 37, whereas the first symbol display thereof is performed. A decorative display corresponding to the display of the device 37 is performed. Instead of the display device, the third symbol display device 81 may be configured using, for example, a reel.

  Each time the sphere passes through the first through gate 67 and the second through gate 670, the second symbol display device 83 displays the symbol “◯” and the symbol “X” as the display symbol (second symbol) for a predetermined time. The variable display is alternately turned on. In the pachinko machine 10, when it is detected that the ball has passed the first through gate 67 or the second through gate 670, a winning lottery is performed. As a result of the winning lottery, if it is a win, the second symbol display device 83 stops and displays the symbol “◯” after the second symbol variation is displayed. If the winning lottery results, the symbol of “x” is stopped and displayed on the second symbol display device 83 after the variation of the third symbol is displayed.

  When the variation display on the second symbol display device 83 stops at a predetermined symbol (in this embodiment, a symbol “◯”), the pachinko machine 10 has the electric accessory 640a attached to the second entrance 640. It is configured to be activated (opened) for a predetermined time.

  The time required for the variable display of the second symbol is set to be shorter during the probability change or during the shorter time than when the game state is normal. As a result, during the probability change and during the time reduction, since the variation display of the second symbol is performed in a short time, the winning lottery can be performed more than during normal. Therefore, since the chance of winning in the winning lottery increases, it is possible to give the player many opportunities for the electric accessory 640a of the second entrance 640 to be opened. Therefore, it is possible to make it easier for the ball to enter the second entrance 640 during the probability change and during the time reduction.

  It should be noted that the second entrance 640 may be changed during the probability change or in a short time by other methods such as increasing the probability of hitting during the probability change or in the time reduction, or increasing the opening time or the number of times of opening of the electric accessory 640a per hit. When the ball is in a state where it is easy to enter the ball, the time required for the variable display of the second symbol may be constant regardless of the gaming state. On the other hand, when the time required for displaying the variation of the second symbol is set shorter than normal during probability change or short time, the winning probability may be constant regardless of the gaming state, The opening time and the number of opening times of the electric accessory 640a may be constant regardless of the gaming state.

  The first through gate 67 is assembled to the game board on the left side of the variable display device unit 80, and is configured so that a part of the ball flowing down to the left of the game board can pass through the balls launched to the game board. ing. In addition, the second through gate 670 is assembled to the game board on the right side of the variable display device unit 80, and among the balls launched to the game board, a part of the ball flowing down to the right of the game board can pass. It is configured. When the ball passes through the first through gate 67 or the second through gate 670, a lottery for the second symbol is performed. After the winning lottery, the second symbol display device 83 displays the variation. If the winning lottery results, the symbol “○” is displayed as the variation display stop symbol, and the winning lottery result is out. If there is, the symbol “x” is displayed as the symbol for stopping the variable display.

  The total number of passages of the first through gate 67 and the second through gate 670 of the sphere is reserved up to a total of four times, and the number of retained balls is displayed by the above-described first symbol display device 37 and the second symbol hold lamp. 84 is also lit up. Four second symbol holding lamps 84 are provided corresponding to the maximum number of holdings, and are arranged symmetrically below the third symbol display device 81.

  Note that the variable display of the second symbol is performed by switching on and off of a plurality of lamps in the second symbol display device 83 as in this embodiment, as well as the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol. Alternatively, a part of the display device 81 may be used. Similarly, the second symbol holding lamp 84 may be turned on by a part of the third symbol display device 81. Further, the maximum number of balls held for passing the first through gate 67 and the second through gate 670 is not limited to four times, and is three times or less, or five times or more (for example, eight times). It may be set to. Further, since the number of reserved balls is indicated by the first symbol display device 37, the second symbol reservation lamp 84 may not perform the lighting display.

  Below the variable display device unit 80, a first entrance 64 into which a sphere can enter is disposed. When a ball enters the first entrance 64, a first entrance switch (not shown) provided on the back side of the game board 13 is turned on, and the first entrance switch is turned on. The main control device 110 (see FIG. 4) draws a jackpot, and a display corresponding to the lottery result is indicated by the LED 37Aa of the first symbol display device 37A.

  On the other hand, a second entrance 640 through which a sphere can enter is arranged on the right side of the variable display device unit 80 in front view. When a ball enters the second entrance 640, a second entrance switch (not shown) provided on the back side of the game board 13 is turned on, and the second entrance switch is turned on. The main control device 110 (see FIG. 4) performs a lottery lottery, and the display corresponding to the lottery result is indicated by the LED 37Ba of the first symbol display device 37B.

  Each of the first entrance 64 and the second entrance 640 is also one of the entrances for paying out 5 balls as prize balls when a ball enters. In the present embodiment, the number of prize balls paid out when a ball enters the first entrance 64 and the number of prize balls paid out when a ball enters the second entrance 640 are the same. However, the number of prize balls to be paid out when a ball enters the first entrance 64 is different from the number of prize balls to be paid out when a ball enters the second entrance 640, for example, The number of prize balls to be paid out when a ball enters the first entrance 64 is three, and the number of prize balls to be paid out when a ball enters the second entrance 640 is five. May be.

  The second entrance 640 is accompanied by an electric accessory 640a. The electric combination 640a is configured to be openable and closable. Normally, the electric combination 640a is in a closed state (reduced state), and it is difficult for the ball to enter the second entrance 640. On the other hand, as a result of the variation display of the second symbol that is triggered by the passage of the sphere to the first through gate 67 and the second through gate 670, the symbol “◯” is displayed on the second symbol display device 83, The electric accessory 640a is in an open state (enlarged state), and the ball is likely to enter the second entrance 640.

  As described above, the probability of hitting the second symbol is higher than that during normal change during the probability change and the short time, and the time required for the variation display of the second symbol is short. "Is easily displayed, and the number of times that the electric accessory 640a is opened (enlarged) is increased. Further, during the probability change and the time reduction, the time for opening the electric accessory 640a also becomes longer than during the normal time. Therefore, it is possible to create a state in which the ball is likely to enter the second entrance 640 during the probability change and during the short time compared to the normal time.

  Here, the probability of a big hit between when the ball enters the first entrance 64 and when the ball enters the second entrance 640 is low or high. Are the same. However, the probability of a 15R probability variable jackpot as the jackpot type selected when the jackpot is won is that the ball enters the first slot 64 when the ball enters the second slot 640. It is set higher than the case. On the other hand, the first entrance 64 does not have an electric accessory as in the second entrance 640 and is in a state in which a ball can always enter.

  Therefore, during normal times, the electric accessory associated with the second entrance 640 is often in a closed state, and it is difficult to enter the second entrance 640, so the first entrance without the electric accessory The ball is fired toward the mouth 64 so that the ball passes through the left side of the variable display device unit 80 (so-called “left-handed”). It is advantageous for the player to aim for a big hit.

  On the other hand, during the probability change or during the short time, the electric accessory attached to the second entrance 640 is likely to be in an open state and is easy to enter the second entrance 640. Toward the right side of the variable display device 80 so as to pass the ball (so-called “right-handed”), and aiming at 15R probability variation big hit by entering the second entrance 640 However, it is advantageous for the player.

  As described above, the pachinko machine 10 according to the present embodiment launches a ball to the player in accordance with the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 (whether it is probable, short, or normal). Can be changed between “left-handed” and “right-handed”. Thus, the player can be changed in the way the ball is hit, so that the game can be enjoyed.

  A first variable winning device 65 is disposed below the first winning hole 64, and a horizontally-long rectangular specific winning opening (large opening) 65a is provided at a substantially central portion thereof. In the pachinko machine 10, when the jackpot lottery performed due to the entrance to the first entrance 64 becomes a jackpot, after a predetermined time (fluctuation time) has elapsed, a first jackpot stop pattern is set. The LED 37Aa of the symbol display device 37A is turned on and a stop symbol corresponding to the jackpot is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 to indicate the occurrence of the jackpot. Thereafter, the gaming state transitions to a special gaming state (big hit) where the ball is easy to win. In this special gaming state, the special winning opening 65a that is normally closed is opened for a predetermined time (for example, until 30 seconds have elapsed or ten balls have been won).

  Further, a second variable winning device 650 is disposed below the second winning hole 640, and a horizontally-long rectangular specific winning opening (large opening) 650a is provided at a substantially central portion thereof. In the pachinko machine 10, when the big win lottery performed due to the entrance to the second entrance 640 becomes a big win, after a predetermined time (fluctuation time) has passed, the first big win will be stopped. The LED 37Ba of the symbol display device 37B is turned on and a stop symbol corresponding to the jackpot is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 to indicate the occurrence of the jackpot. Thereafter, the gaming state transitions to a special gaming state (big hit) where the ball is easy to win. As this special gaming state, the special winning opening 650a that is normally closed is opened for a predetermined time (for example, until 30 seconds elapses or 10 balls are won).

  The specific winning ports 65a and 650a are closed when a predetermined time has elapsed, and after the closing, the specific winning ports 65a and 650a are opened again for a predetermined time. The opening / closing operation of the specific winning ports 65a and 650a can be repeated up to 15 times (15 rounds), for example. The state in which the opening / closing operation is performed is one form of a special gaming state that is advantageous to the player. Is done.

  Specifically, the first variable prize-winning device 65 and the second variable prize-winning device 650 have a horizontally long rectangular opening / closing plate that covers the specific winning opening 65a or the specific winning opening 650a, and a front side about the lower side of the opening / closing plate. A large opening solenoid (not shown) for opening and closing is provided. The special winning openings 65a and 650a are normally closed so that the ball cannot win or is difficult to win. In the case of a big hit, the large opening opening solenoid is driven to tilt the opening / closing plate to the lower front side to temporarily form an open state in which the ball is likely to win the specific winning opening 65a. It operates to repeat the state and the state alternately.

  Note that the special gaming state is not limited to the above-described form. When the game area is provided with a large opening that can be opened and closed separately from the specific winning openings 65a and 650a, and the LED 37Aa and LED 37Ba corresponding to the big win in the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B are turned on, the specific winning openings 65a and 650a are A predetermined opening is provided for a predetermined time, and a large opening provided separately from the specific winning openings 65a and 650a is triggered by the ball winning in the specific winning openings 65a and 650a while the specific winning openings 65a and 650a are opened. A gaming state that is released a predetermined number of times may be formed as a special gaming state.

  Adhesive spaces K1 and K2 for adhering certificate stamps, identification labels, and the like are provided at the left and right corners on the lower side of the game board 13. It can be visually recognized through the small window 35 (see FIG. 1).

  Further, the game board 13 is provided with an out port 66. A ball that has not entered any of the winning openings 63, 64, 65a, 640, 650a is guided to a ball discharge path (not shown) through the out opening 66. A number of nails are planted on the game board 13 in order to appropriately disperse and adjust the falling direction of the ball, and various members (instruments) such as a windmill are arranged.

  As shown in FIG. 3, control board units 90 and 91 and a back pack unit 94 are mainly provided on the back side of the pachinko machine 10. The control board unit 90 is unitized by mounting a main board (main control apparatus 110), an audio lamp control board (audio lamp control apparatus 113), and a display control board (display control apparatus 114). The control board unit 91 is unitized by mounting a payout control board (payout control apparatus 111), a firing control board (launching control apparatus 112), a power supply board (power supply apparatus 115), and a card unit connection board 116.

  The back pack unit 94 includes a back pack 92 and a dispensing unit 93 that form a protective cover. In addition, each control board is used for MPU as a one-chip microcomputer that controls each control, a port for communicating with various devices, a random number generator used for various lotteries, time counting and synchronization. A clock pulse generation circuit or the like is mounted as necessary.

  The main control device 110, the sound lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114, the payout control device 111 and the firing control device 112, the power supply device 115, and the card unit connection board 116 are housed in the board boxes 100 to 104, respectively. . The board boxes 100 to 104 include a box base and a box cover that covers the opening of the box base. The box base and the box cover are connected to each other, and each control device and each board are accommodated.

  Further, the substrate box 100 (main control device 110) and the substrate box 102 (dispensing control device 111 and launch control device 112) connect the box base and the box cover so that they cannot be opened by a sealing unit (not shown) (caulking structure). Consolidated). In addition, a seal (not shown) is attached to the connecting portion between the box base and the box cover so as to cover the box base and the box cover. This seal seal is made of a brittle material. If the seal is to be peeled off in order to open the substrate boxes 100, 102, or if the substrate boxes 100, 102 are forcibly opened, the box base side and the box cover are removed. Cut to the side. Therefore, it is possible to know whether or not the substrate boxes 100 and 102 have been opened by checking the sealing unit or the sealing seal.

  The payout unit 93 includes a tank 130 that is located at the top of the back pack unit 94 and opens upward, a tank rail 131 that is connected to the lower side of the tank 130 and is gently inclined toward the downstream side, and downstream of the tank rail 131. A case rail 132 that is vertically connected to the side, and a payout device 133 that is provided at the most downstream portion of the case rail 132 and that pays out a ball by a predetermined electrical configuration of the payout motor 216 (see FIG. 4). ing. Balls supplied from the island facilities of the game hall are sequentially replenished to the tank 130, and a required number of balls are paid out by the payout device 133 as appropriate. A vibrator 134 for applying vibration to the tank rail 131 is attached to the tank rail 131.

  The payout control device 111 is provided with a state return switch 120, the firing control device 112 is provided with a variable resistor operation knob 121, and the power supply device 115 is provided with a RAM erase switch 122. The state return switch 120 is operated, for example, to eliminate ball clogging (return to a normal state) when a payout error occurs, such as ball clogging in the payout motor 216 (see FIG. 4). The operation knob 121 is operated to adjust the firing force of the firing solenoid. The RAM erase switch 122 is operated when the power is turned on to return the pachinko machine 10 to the initial state.

  Next, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 4 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10.

  The main controller 110 is equipped with an MPU 201 as a one-chip microcomputer that is an arithmetic unit. The MPU 201 includes a ROM 202 that stores various control programs executed by the MPU 201 and fixed value data, and a memory that temporarily stores various data when the control program stored in the ROM 202 is executed. A certain RAM 203 and various other circuits such as an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, and a data transmission / reception circuit are incorporated. In the main control device 110, the MPU 201 performs main processing of the pachinko machine 10 such as jackpot lottery, display setting in the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81, and lottery of display results in the second symbol display device 83. Run.

  Various commands are transmitted from the main control device 110 to the sub control device by the data transmission / reception circuit in order to instruct the sub control device such as the payout control device 111 and the sound lamp control device 113 to operate. Such a command is transmitted from the main controller 110 to the sub controller only in one direction.

  The RAM 203 stores various areas, counters, flags, a stack area for storing the contents of the internal registers of the MPU 201 and a return address of a control program executed by the MPU 201, various flags, counters, I / O, and the like. And a work area (work area) in which values are stored. Note that the RAM 203 is configured so that the backup voltage is supplied from the power supply device 115 and the data can be retained (backed up) even after the power of the pachinko machine 10 is shut off, and all data stored in the RAM 203 is backed up. .

  When the power is shut down due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like, the stack pointer and the value of each register when the power is shut off (including when the power failure occurs, the same applies hereinafter) are stored in the RAM 203. On the other hand, at the time of power-on (including power-on due to power failure cancellation, the same applies hereinafter), the state of the pachinko machine 10 is restored to the state before power-off based on information stored in the RAM 203. Writing to the RAM 203 is executed when the power is shut off by a main process (not shown), and restoration of each value written to the RAM 203 is executed in a start-up process (not shown) when the power is turned on. Note that the power failure signal SG1 from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 is input to the NMI terminal (non-maskable interrupt terminal) of the MPU 201 when the power is interrupted due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. Is input immediately, an NMI interrupt process (not shown) as a power failure process is immediately executed.

  An input / output port 205 is connected to the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 via a bus line 204 constituted by an address bus and a data bus. The input / output port 205 includes a payout control device 111, a sound lamp control device 113, a first symbol display device 37, a second symbol display device 83, a second symbol hold lamp 84, and lower sides of the opening / closing plates of the specific winning openings 65a and 650a. A solenoid 209 made up of a large opening solenoid for opening and closing forward with respect to the axis and a solenoid for driving an electric accessory is connected, and the MPU 201 receives various commands and commands via the input / output port 205. Send a control signal.

  The input / output port 205 is connected to various switches 208 including a switch group and a sensor group (not shown) and a RAM erasure switch circuit 253 described later provided in the power supply device 115, and the MPU 201 is output from the various switches 208. And various processes are executed based on the RAM erase signal SG2 output from the RAM erase switch circuit 253.

  The payout control device 111 drives the payout motor 216 to perform payout control of prize balls and rental balls. The MPU 211, which is an arithmetic unit, includes a ROM 212 that stores a control program executed by the MPU 211, fixed value data, and the like, and a RAM 213 that is used as a work memory or the like.

  The RAM 213 of the payout control device 111, like the RAM 203 of the main control device 110, has a stack area for storing the contents of the internal registers of the MPU 211, the return address of the control program executed by the MPU 211, and various flags and counters. And a work area (work area) in which values such as I / O are stored. The RAM 213 is configured to be able to retain (backup) data by being supplied with a backup voltage from the power supply device 115 even after the power of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off, and all data stored in the RAM 213 is backed up. As with the MPU 201 of the main controller 110, the power failure signal SG1 is also input to the NMI terminal of the MPU 211 from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 when the power is interrupted due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. When input to the MPU 211, an NMI interrupt process (not shown) as a power failure process is immediately executed.

  An input / output port 215 is connected to the MPU 211 of the payout control device 111 via a bus line 214 composed of an address bus and a data bus. The main control device 110, the payout motor 216, the firing control device 112, and the like are connected to the input / output port 215, respectively. Although not shown, the payout control device 111 is connected to a prize ball detection switch for detecting a prize ball that has been paid out. The prize ball detection switch is connected to the payout control device 111 but is not connected to the main control device 110.

  The launch control device 112 controls the ball launch unit 112a so that the launch strength of the ball according to the rotation operation amount of the operation handle 51 is obtained when the main control device 110 gives an instruction to launch a ball. . The ball launching unit 112a includes a launching solenoid and an electromagnet (not shown), and the firing solenoid and the electromagnet are permitted to be driven when predetermined conditions are met. Specifically, the touch sensor 51a detects that the player is touching the operation handle 51, and the operation is performed on the condition that the launch stop switch 51b for stopping the launch of the ball is off (not operated). The firing solenoid is excited corresponding to the amount of rotation (rotation position) of the handle 51, and a ball is launched with a strength corresponding to the amount of operation of the operation handle 51.

  The sound lamp control device 113 outputs sound in a sound output device (such as a speaker (not shown)) 226, outputs lighting and extinguishing in a lamp display device (lighting units 29 to 33, display lamp 34, and the like) 227, and variable effects (variation Display) and setting of the display mode of the third symbol display device 81 performed by the display control device 114 such as a notice effect. The MPU 221 that is an arithmetic unit includes a ROM 222 that stores a control program executed by the MPU 221, fixed value data, and the like, and a RAM 223 that is used as a work memory or the like.

  An input / output port 225 is connected to the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 via a bus line 224 including an address bus and a data bus. Main controller 110, display controller 114, audio output device 226, lamp display device 227, frame button 22 and the like are connected to input / output port 225, respectively.

  The sound lamp control device 113 determines the display mode of the third symbol display device 81 based on various commands (variation pattern command, stop type command, etc.) received from the main control device 110, and uses the determined display mode as a command. The display control device 114 is notified by (display variation pattern command, display stop type command, etc.). The sound lamp control device 113 monitors the input from the frame button 22, and when the player operates the frame button 22, the stage displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is changed, or the super reach is performed. The display control device 114 is instructed to change the production contents at the time. When the stage is changed, a rear image change command including information about the changed stage is transmitted to the display control device 114 so that the rear image corresponding to the changed stage is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. . Here, the back image is an image displayed on the back side of the third symbol, which is a main image displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The display control device 114 displays various images on the third symbol display device 81 according to the command transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113.

  Further, the sound lamp control device 113 receives a command (display command) representing the display content of the third symbol display device 81 from the display control device 114. The voice lamp control device 113 outputs the voice corresponding to the display content from the voice output device 226 in accordance with the display content of the third symbol display device 81 based on the display command received from the display control device 114, The lighting and extinguishing of the lamp display device 227 are controlled in accordance with the display contents.

  The display control device 114 is connected to the sound lamp control device 113 and the third symbol display device 81, and based on a command received from the sound lamp control device 113, the third symbol display device 81 can produce a variation effect of the third symbol. The display is controlled. Further, the display control device 114 appropriately transmits a display command for notifying the display content of the third symbol display device 81 to the sound lamp control device 113. The voice lamp control device 113 outputs the voice from the voice output device 226 in accordance with the display content indicated by the display command, thereby matching the display of the third symbol display device 81 with the voice output from the voice output device 226. be able to.

  The power supply device 115 includes a power supply unit 251 for supplying power to each unit of the pachinko machine 10, a power failure monitoring circuit 252 for monitoring power interruption due to a power failure, and a RAM deletion switch 122 (see FIG. 3). And an erasing switch circuit 253. The power supply unit 251 is a device that supplies a necessary operating voltage to each of the control devices 110 to 114 through a power supply path (not shown). As its outline, the power supply unit 251 takes in the voltage of AC 24 volts supplied from the outside, and drives various switches such as various switches 208, solenoids such as the solenoid 209, motors, etc. A 5 volt voltage for logic, a backup voltage for RAM backup, and the like are generated, and the 12 volt voltage, the 5 volt voltage, and the backup voltage are supplied to the control devices 110 to 114 as necessary voltages.

  The power failure monitoring circuit 252 is a circuit for outputting a power failure signal SG1 to each NMI terminal of the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 and the MPU 211 of the payout control device 111 when the power is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. The power failure monitoring circuit 252 monitors the DC stable voltage of 24 volts, which is the maximum voltage output from the power supply unit 251, and determines that a power failure (power interruption, power interruption) occurs when this voltage falls below 22 volts. Then, the power failure signal SG1 is output to the main controller 110 and the payout controller 111. By the output of the power failure signal SG1, the main controller 110 and the payout controller 111 recognize the occurrence of the power failure and execute the NMI interrupt process. Note that the power supply unit 251 outputs a voltage of 5 volts, which is a drive voltage of the control system, for a time sufficient to execute the NMI interrupt processing even after the DC stable voltage of 24 volts becomes less than 22 volts. Is maintained at a normal value. Therefore, main controller 110 and payout controller 111 can normally execute and complete the NMI interrupt process (not shown).

  The RAM erase switch circuit 253 is a circuit for outputting a RAM erase signal SG2 for clearing backup data to the main controller 110 when the RAM erase switch 122 (see FIG. 3) is pressed. When the RAM erase signal SG2 is input when the pachinko machine 10 is powered on, the main control device 110 clears the backup data, and the payout control device 111 issues a payout initialization command for clearing the backup data. Transmit to device 111.

  Next, the detailed configuration of the handle device 51 will be described with reference to FIGS.

  FIG. 5A is a top view of the handle device 51, and FIG. 5B is a front view of the handle device 51. FIG. 6 is a side view of the handle device 51 as viewed in the direction of the arrow VI in FIG. 5A and 6, the front surface of the lower dish unit 15 is schematically illustrated by a two-dot chain line.

  As shown in FIGS. 5 and 6, the handle device 51 mainly includes a handle mounting base 520, a handle base 530, a handle ring 540, a front cover 550, and a button member 570, and the pachinko machine 10 ( It protrudes in a horizontal posture from the front of FIG.

  The handle mounting base 520 has a back surface (left side in FIG. 5A) fixed to the front surface of the lower plate unit 15, and a handle base 530 is disposed on the front surface (right side in FIG. 5A). The These two members 520 and 530 are connected in a state where one is pivotally supported on the other, and the handle base 530 is integrated with the handle ring 540 with respect to the handle mounting base 520 around the pivotally supported portion. It can be displaced in the vertical direction (see FIGS. 23 and 24 (21)).

  The handle base 530 is provided with a firing stop switch operation unit 440. The firing stop switch operation unit 440 is a lever for switching on / off of the firing stop switch 51b (see FIG. 7) provided inside the handle base 530, and is a left side surface of the handle base 530 (FIG. 5B). Arranged in a state protruding from the left side. While the player presses the firing stop switch operation unit 440, the player can stop the firing of the game ball regardless of the amount of rotation operation (rotation position) of the handle ring 540.

  The handle ring 540 is rotatably attached to the front surface (right side of FIG. 5A) of the handle base 530, and on the outer peripheral side of the handle ring 540, three finger hooks 540a and 540b for a player to put a finger on. , 540c are formed to protrude.

  The player turns the handle ring 540 clockwise (clockwise) in the front view of the handle device 51 (see FIG. 5B) (that is, the direction from the initial position toward the operation end point (maximum position)). By dynamically operating, it is possible to increase the launch intensity of the game ball. That is, the handle ring 540 can be rotated in a section from the initial position to the operation end point, and the launch intensity of the game ball is adjusted according to the operation amount (rotation position) of the rotation operation.

  In this case, the handle device 51 is formed so that the position of the operation end point of the handle ring 540 can be changed. Specifically, in this embodiment, the central angle from the initial position to the maximum position (the rotation operation angle of the handle ring 540) is 120 degrees, and the position of the operation end point is changed within the range of the central angle of 120 degrees. (Setting) is possible.

  For example, when the position of the operation end point is changed (set) to a position where the central angle with respect to the initial position is 90 degrees (that is, a position where the central angle with respect to the maximum position is 30 degrees). When the handle ring 540 is rotated in the direction from the initial position toward the operation end point, the rotation operation can be performed as usual in the section from the initial position to the central angle of 90 degrees, while between the initial position and the initial position. When the center angle reaches 90 ° (that is, the operation end point), the rotation of the handle ring 540 is restricted (that is, the handle ring 540 cannot be further rotated).

  As described above, the launch intensity of the game ball is set according to the resistance value of the variable resistor (that is, the amount of rotation of the handle ring 540). That is, the launch intensity of the game ball is determined based on the operation amount (operation position) in which the handle ring 540 is rotated from the initial position regardless of whether the position of the operation end point has been changed (set). Therefore, when the position of the operation end point is not changed and the handle ring 540 can be rotated to a position where the central angle with respect to the initial position is 120 degrees (that is, the maximum position), the handle ring When the 540 is rotated from the initial position to a position with a central angle of 90 degrees, the launch intensity of the game ball is 90 degrees with the central angle between the operation end point and the initial position as described above. When the position is changed (set) to the position, the firing intensity is the same as the launching intensity of the game ball when the handle ring 540 is rotated from the initial position to the center angle of 90 degrees (that is, the operation end point). .

  When the turning operation of the player is released, the handle ring 540 is returned to its initial position by the urging force of the handle urging spring 537 (see FIG. 7). In this case, according to the handle ring 540, the handle base 530 is displaced with respect to the handle mounting base 520 around the pivotally supported portion (see FIG. 23), so that the rotation position of the handle ring 540 can be arbitrarily set. It is configured to be able to be fixed at the rotational position. That is, the launch intensity of the sphere can be fixed at an arbitrary intensity. The fixing structure of the handle ring 540 will be described later.

  The front cover 550 is formed in a hemispherical shape that protrudes forward (rightward in FIG. 5A and FIG. 6), and is attached to the front surface of the handle ring 540. A front opening 550a having a circular shape when viewed from the front is formed at the top of the front cover 550, and the button member 570 is projected (exposed) from the opening 550a.

  In addition, a confirmation window 550b is formed in the front cover 550. The confirmation window 550b is an opening for the player to confirm whether or not the position of the operation end point of the handle ring 540 has been changed (see FIG. 32), and the upper surface side of the handle device 51 (see FIG. 5A). A plurality (three in the present embodiment) of the front cover 550 that is the front side are arranged along the circumferential direction with a predetermined interval therebetween.

  Whether or not the player has changed the position of the operation end point of the handle ring 540 based on a state of being visually recognized through the confirmation window 550b (a difference in color visually recognized as will be described later in this embodiment). (In this embodiment, as described later, the position of the operation end point is not changed when black is visually recognized, and the position of the operation end point is changed when white is visually recognized). Can do. The identification structure using the confirmation window 550b will be described later.

  The button member 570 is formed in a hemispherical shape concentric with the front cover 550. In the initial position shown in FIGS. 5 and 6 (the state before being pushed in), the button member 570 is integrated with the front cover 550 to form one hemispherical body. On the other hand, when it is pushed in, it is immersed toward the inside of the front cover 550 (see FIG. 26). Here, the button member 570 is an operation member for changing (setting) and releasing the position of the operation end point.

  Specifically, when the button member 570 is pushed from the initial position, the position of the operation end point is changed (set) to the operation position of the handle ring 540 when the button member 570 is pushed. . For example, in a state where the handle ring 540 can be rotated in a section having a central angle of 120 degrees from the initial position to the maximum position (that is, the position of the operation end point is not changed), the handle ring 540 rotates. When the button member 570 is pushed in from the initial position when the operation amount reaches the position at which the central angle is 90 degrees from the initial position, the central angle between the initial position and the initial position is changed. The position of the operation end point is changed (set) to a position of 90 degrees.

  Therefore, the player can move to a rotation position where the launch intensity of the game ball becomes a desired launch intensity (for example, a left-turn rotation position suitable for entering the game ball into the first entrance 64). When the rotation position of the handle ring 540 can be adjusted, the push operation of the button member 570 is performed, and the position of the operation end point is changed (set) to a position corresponding to the rotation position of the handle ring 540. For example, to take a break, even if the game ring is interrupted by returning the rotation position of the handle ring 540 to the initial position, the rotation position of the handle ring 540 is changed to the original rotation position (that is, the game is interrupted). If the handle ring 540 is rotated to the operation end point (ie, the rotation operation is performed by the operation end point). Regulated, no more times If the handle ring 540 is rotated to a position where it cannot be operated), the operation amount (rotation position) of the rotation of the handle ring 540 is accurately and quickly adjusted to the original operation amount (rotation position). (The original rotation position can be reproduced accurately and quickly).

  For example, whether or not the operation position of the handle ring 540 coincides with the target position (predetermined scale line) as in the case of the structure in which the scale line is provided along the direction of the rotation operation of the handle ring 540 is visually confirmed. Since it is not necessary to make fine adjustment while making a determination, the original operation position can be adjusted accurately and quickly (the original operation position can be reproduced). Further, since the further turning operation is restricted by the operation end point, the handle ring 540 is not turned after passing through the target position, so that the operation speed of the handle ring 540 can be increased. Also from this point, it is possible to quickly adjust the original operation position (reproduce the original operation position).

  According to the handle device 51, the hemispherical front cover 550 is disposed on the front surface side of the handle ring 540 as described above, and the button member 570 protrudes from the opening 550a on the top side of the front cover. Thus, since one hemisphere is formed, it is possible to easily push the button member 570 with the palm of the hand using the operation of returning the wrist while maintaining the state in which the handle ring 540 is gripped with fingers. it can. Therefore, when the rotation position (operation amount) of the handle ring 540 can be adjusted so that the launch intensity of the game ball becomes a desired launch intensity, the rotation position (operation amount) of the handle ring 540 is maintained. The button member 570 can be pushed in while suppressing the rotation position of the handle ring 540 from being shifted and the launching intensity of the game ball from being inadvertently changed. As a result, the operation end point can be changed (set) quickly and at an accurate position.

  The change (setting) of the operation end point can be canceled by returning the pushed button member 570 to the initial position as shown in FIGS. 5 and 6, whereby the handle ring 540 is moved to the maximum position. It can be turned. The structure for returning the button member 570 to the initial position and the structure for releasing the operation end point will be described later.

  Next, the handle base 530 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 7 is a front perspective view of the handle mounting base 520 and the handle base 530, and corresponds to the front perspective view of the handle device 51 with the handle ring 540 and the front cover 550 (see FIGS. 5 and 6) removed. To do.

  As shown in FIG. 7, the handle base 530 has an outer peripheral wall 531 formed in a cylindrical shape when viewed from the front, and a bottom wall 532 that blocks an opening of one of the outer peripheral walls 531 (the rear surface, the left rear side in FIG. 7). These two members 531 and 532 form a container shape in which the inside is recessed toward the back side (that is, the front side is opened). On the bottom wall 532, guide columns 533a, 533b, and 533c, an inner peripheral wall 534, and a bearing portion 535 are erected from the front surface of the bottom wall 532 toward the front (front cover 550 side).

  The guide struts 533a to 533c are portions where the front cover 550 (see FIGS. 5 and 6) is fastened and fixed to the standing tip, and the fastening screws can be inserted (that is, the bottom wall 532 side and the standing tip It is formed in a hollow cylindrical shape (through holes having openings at both ends). The fastening screws inserted from the bottom wall 532 side into the through holes of the guide columns 533a to 533c are fastened to the screw bases 552a to 552c (see FIG. 9A) of the front cover 550, respectively. A front cover 550 is fixed to the front surface.

  The inner peripheral wall 534 is formed in a circular cylindrical shape when viewed from the front, and is arranged concentrically on the inner peripheral side of the outer peripheral wall 531 while being spaced apart from the outer peripheral wall 531. The inner peripheral wall 534 is divided at two places in the circumferential direction, and at the two divided parts (notches 534a and 534b), a firing stop switch operating part 440 is provided on one side and a handle restricting member on the other side. 700 are respectively disposed.

  The bearing portion 535 is formed in a cylindrical shape having an opening on the front side (the side opposite to the bottom wall 532), and the switching device 600 is rotatably inserted on the inner peripheral side thereof (see FIG. 25). The switching device 600 is a member for changing (setting) the position of the operation end point of the handle ring 540. The switching device 600 can be rotated relative to the bearing portion 535, and cannot be rotated. It is possible to switch between two states: a fixed engagement fixed state. The end surface on the opening side of the bearing portion 535 is formed as a flat surface perpendicular to the axial direction.

  The switching device 600 is formed with a regulation protrusion 630. The restricting protrusion 630 is a rod-like body protruding outward in the radial direction, and is located on the movement locus of the handle-side protrusion 546 (see FIG. 8) when the handle ring 540 is rotated. Therefore, when the handle ring 540 is rotated in a rotation direction (clockwise in front view (clockwise), hereinafter referred to as “increase direction”) that increases the firing strength of the game ball, the handle protrusion 546 is moved. It abuts on the restricting protrusion 630.

  In this case, when the switching device 600 is in a rotatable state, the switching projection 600 is pushed in the increasing direction by the handle side projection 546, so that the switching device 600 is also increased in the bearing portion 535. Is rotated. On the other hand, when the state of the switching device 600 is switched to the engaged and fixed state, the relative rotation with respect to the bearing portion 535 of the switching device 600 is disabled (fixed to the bearing portion 535), so Movement of 546 in the increasing direction is restricted by the restriction protrusion 630. As a result, the turning operation of the handle ring 540 in the increasing direction is restricted. That is, the position (rotation position) where the state of the switching device 600 is switched from the rotatable state to the engaged and fixed state is the position of the operation end point of the handle ring 540.

  Note that the rotation direction of the handle ring 540 that reduces the firing strength of the game ball is hereinafter referred to as a “decreasing direction”.

  The switching device 600 is provided with a biasing force in a counterclockwise direction (counterclockwise) when viewed from the front from a switching device biasing spring 539 formed as a torsion spring, and the biasing force causes the initial position (the restricting protrusion 630 to be formed). The handle ring 540 at the initial position is brought into contact with the handle-side protrusion 546 and returned to the position where the rotation of the switching device 600 is restricted.

  The detailed configuration of the switching device 600 and the engagement and fixing structure with respect to the bearing portion 535 will be described later. In addition, switching of the switching device 600 between the rotatable state and the restricted fixed state is performed by pressing the button member 570 as described later.

  A driven gear 536 is disposed on the side of the bearing portion 535. The driven gear 536 is a gear with which the main driving gear 544 (see FIG. 8) of the handle ring 540 is engaged, and is fixed to the resistance shaft VRa of the variable resistor (not shown). Therefore, when the driven gear 536 is rotated, the resistance value of the variable resistor VR is changed according to the rotation amount (rotation position).

  The driven gear 536 is given a biasing force in a clockwise (clockwise) direction when viewed from the front from a handle biasing spring 537 formed as a torsion spring, and the biasing force causes the initial position (the stopper portion 536a to be the bearing portion 535). To the outer peripheral projection 535b to return to a position where rotation is restricted. The variable resistor is fixed to the bottom wall 532.

  On the side of the bearing portion 535 and on the opposite side of the driven gear 536, a firing stop switch 51b is fixed. A swingable swing piece 51b1 protrudes to the side of the firing stop switch 51b, and the firing stop switch 51b is turned on / off when the swinging piece 51b1 is pressed by the firing stop switch operation unit 440. Is done.

  Next, the handle ring 540 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 8 is a rear perspective view of the handle ring 540.

  As shown in FIG. 8, the handle ring 540 includes a disk portion 541 formed in a circular shape in front view covering the front surface of the handle base 530, and the outer peripheral edge of the disk portion 541 toward the back side. An outer peripheral wall 542 that is standing and is formed in a cylindrical shape in a front view, a main drive gear 544 that is fixed to the center of the disk portion 541 so as to project toward the back, the main drive gear 544 and the circle A central hole 544a formed through the central portion of the plate portion 541 in the plate thickness direction, and a guide hole 545a formed through the disc portion 541 in the plate thickness direction along the periphery of the central hole 544a, 545b and a handle-side protrusion 546 that is erected from the disc portion 542 toward the back side.

  The handle ring 540 is rotatably held with respect to the handle base 530 by inserting the handle shaft support 574 (see FIG. 11A) of the button member 570 into the center hole 544a of the handle ring 540 (see FIG. 11A). In this case, the main driving gear 544 is meshed with the driven gear 536 (see FIG. 7) of the handle base 530. Therefore, when the handle ring 540 is rotated, the driven gear 536 is rotated via the main driving gear 544, and the rotation of the resistance shaft VRa due to the rotation of the driven gear 536 changes the resistance of the variable resistor. Therefore, the launch intensity of the sphere can be adjusted according to the resistance value of the variable resistor (that is, the amount of rotation of the handle ring 540).

  In the present embodiment, the axial direction of the bearing portion 535 and the resistance shaft VRa are parallel to each other, and the teeth (tooth grooves) of the driven gear 536 extend in parallel to the axial direction (see FIG. 7). ). Further, teeth (tooth grooves) of the main driving gear 544 extend in parallel to the axial direction of the central hole 544a of the handle ring 540.

  The guide holes 545a and 545b are holes that are opened to allow the guide columns 533a to 533c (see FIG. 7) to be inserted, and each has an elongated hole shape that curves along the outer edge of the handle ring 540 (that is, the central hole 544a). An annular shape centering on the axis is divided into two portions whose phases are different from each other by 180 °. A guide column 533a is inserted into the guide hole 545a, and guide columns 533b and 533c are inserted into the guide hole 545b.

  Therefore, the guide column 533a and the guide columns 533b and 533c are guided in the guide hole 545a and the guide hole 545b, respectively, as the handle ring 540 rotates. Therefore, the rotatable range of the handle ring 540 is limited to a range in which the guide columns 533a to 533c are relatively movable in the guide holes 545a and 545b. Specifically, the rotation range of the handle ring 540 is defined by the guide hole 545b through which the two columns (guide columns 533b and 533c) are inserted. In this embodiment, the rotation range is approximately 90 degrees (1). / 4 laps).

  The handle side protrusion 546 is a part for transmitting the rotation of the handle ring 540 to the switching device 600, and is formed as a rod-shaped body having a rectangular cross section. When the handle ring 540 is rotated, the side surface of the handle side projection 546 is brought into contact with the side surface of the regulation projection 630 of the switching device 600, and the handle ring 540 is interposed via both the projections 546 and 630. Is transmitted to the switching device 600.

  Next, the front cover 550 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 9A is a rear perspective view of the front cover 550.

  As shown in FIG. 9 (a), the front cover 550 is formed in a hemispherical container shape whose interior is recessed toward the front side (that is, the back side is opened), and the top portion is formed with a circular hole in front view. A certain opening 550a is formed, and screw bases 552a to 552c are erected on the inner wall surface toward the back surface. Guide struts 533a to 533c (see FIG. 7) are fastened and fixed to the screw bases 552a to 552c, respectively. In addition, on the inner wall surface of the front cover 550, a cylindrical guide portion 554 having the same inner diameter as the opening 550a is extended along the rotation axis direction. The cylindrical guide portion 554 guides the inner fitting wall portion 577 of the button member 570 along the rotation axis direction by the inner peripheral surface thereof.

  Confirmation windows 550b and 554b are formed in the front cover 550 and the cylindrical guide portion 554, respectively. Here, the confirmation windows 550b and 554b will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 10A is a top view of the front cover 550 as viewed in the direction of arrow Xa in FIG. 9A, and FIG. 10B is a portion of the front cover 550 along the line Xa-Xa in FIG. It is an expanded sectional view.

  As shown in FIGS. 10A and 10B, the confirmation window 550b formed in the front cover 550 is composed of a plurality of (three in this embodiment) openings that are rectangular in front view, and each of these openings. Are arranged in a straight line along the longitudinal direction in the circumferential direction of the front cover 550 (the vertical direction in FIG. 10A). The confirmation window 554b disposed in the cylindrical guide portion 554 is an opening formed in the same shape as the confirmation window 550b formed in the front cover 550, and as shown in FIG. It arrange | positions in the position which faces. Therefore, the player can visually recognize the outer wall surface of the button member 570 through the confirmation window 554b of the cylindrical guide portion 554 by visually recognizing the inside from the confirmation window 550b of the front cover 550 (see FIG. 32). ).

  Note that the confirmation windows 550b and 554b are openings for confirming whether or not the position of the operation end point of the handle ring 540 has been changed based on the state visually recognized through the confirmation window 550b, as described above. is there. In this case, the confirmation windows 550b and 554b are disposed on the upper surface side of the front cover 550 in the assembled state of the handle device 51 (see FIG. 5A), so that the player facing the pachinko machine 10 to be played can be used. When starting the game, the confirmation windows 550b and 554b can be easily viewed by the player. In addition, since a plurality of confirmation windows 550b and 554b are arranged along the circumferential direction, even if the player is at a position shifted to the left or right from the front of the handle device 51, the confirmation windows 550b and 554b are used as the player. It is possible to make it visible.

  Returning to FIG. A handle biasing spring (not shown) formed as a torsion spring is disposed between the front cover 550 and the handle ring 540. This handle biasing spring biases the handle ring 540 counterclockwise (counterclockwise) when viewed from the front. This biasing direction coincides with the biasing direction in which the handle biasing spring 537 that biases the driven gear 536 described above (see FIG. 7) biases the handle ring 540 via the driven gear 536 and the main driving gear 544. To do. Therefore, when the player releases his hand from the handle ring 540, the handle ring 540 has a handle biasing spring (not shown) disposed between the front cover 550 and the handle ring 540 and a handle for biasing the driven gear 536. The two springs and the biasing spring 536 return to the initial position.

  A base portion 551 is disposed on the inner wall surface of the front cover 550, and a guide groove 553 is recessed in the flat surface of the base portion 551. The guide groove 553 is a groove in a known “heart cam system” for causing the button member 570 to function as a push button switch that can be held at the first position or the second position. The guide groove 553 will be described later (see FIG. 9B).

  Next, the button member 570 will be described. FIG. 11 is a rear perspective view of the button member 570, and FIG. 12 is an exploded perspective view of the button member 570 illustrating the connection structure between the handle shaft support body 574 and the shaft body 573.

  As shown in FIGS. 11 and 12, the button member 570 includes an operation portion 571 that forms the front surface of the button member 570, a back surface base 572 that protrudes from the center of the back surface of the operation portion 571, and a back surface base 572. An extended shaft body 573, a handle shaft support body 574 that is pivotally attached to the extended end of the shaft body 573 and formed in a columnar shape, and an end face of the handle shaft support body 574 A connecting shaft 575 and a pushing piece 576 provided, a cylindrical inner fitting wall portion 577 protruding from the back surface of the operation portion 571, and a guide pin piece 578 disposed on the outer surface of the back surface base 572, The operation unit 571, the back surface base 572, the shaft body 573, the handle shaft support body 574, the connecting shaft 575, and the inner fitting wall portion 577 are disposed concentrically.

  The operation portion 571 is formed in a shape obtained by cutting a part of a sphere, and is protruded from an opening 550a (see FIG. 9A) of the front cover 550, so that it can be pushed in by a player. (See FIGS. 25 to 27).

  The back base 572 is a part that forms a seating surface of the button urging spring 590 (see FIGS. 25 to 27). That is, the button urging spring 590 is formed as a coil spring, and the shaft 573 and the handle shaft support 574 are inserted into the inner peripheral side of the button urging spring 590 and between the front side of the handle ring 540 and the back side of the back base 572. Are arranged in a state of being elastically compressed in the axial direction. As a result, the button member 570 is always urged in the direction away from the handle ring 540 by the elastic recovery force of the button urging spring 590.

  The shaft body 573 includes a shaft-shaped shaft portion 573a having a circular cross section, and a spherical portion 573b disposed at the tip of the shaft-shaped portion 573a and having a larger diameter than the shaft-shaped portion 573a. . The operation portion 571 is integrally formed of a base portion 572, a shaft body 573, an inner fitting wall portion 577, and a resin material.

  The handle shaft support 574 is a cylindrical portion for pivotally supporting the handle ring 540, and is inserted through the central hole 544a of the handle ring 540 (see FIGS. 25 to 27). That is, the outer diameter of the handle shaft support 574 is set to be slightly smaller than the inner diameter of the center hole 544a of the handle ring 540, and the handle shaft support 574 is inserted into the center hole 544a. A handle ring 540 is pivotally supported on the handle shaft support 574 so as to be rotatable.

  The handle shaft support 574 is formed by bonding two members formed by dividing a cylindrical shape into two on a plane including the shaft. These two members include a ball receiving portion 574b that becomes a space for receiving the spherical portion 573b of the shaft body 573, and a bearing insertion portion 574a that receives the shaft-like portion 573a of the shaft body 573 and cannot pass the spherical portion 573b. And are formed. As a result, the handle shaft support body 574 is attached to the shaft body 573 so as to be rotatable around the axis and not movable in the axial direction.

  Thus, as will be described later, when the switching device 600 is rotated in accordance with the rotation operation of the handle ring 540, only the handle shaft support body 574 can be rotated independently from the shaft body 573. It is possible to suppress rotation of the operation portion 571 serving as the operated portion. That is, when the player rotates the handle ring 540, it is possible to suppress the operation unit 571 from rotating in the palm of the player and giving the player an uncomfortable feeling.

  The connection shaft 575 is a part formed as a trapezoidal shaft body inserted into the connection hole 620 of the switching device 600 (see FIGS. 25 to 27), and extends on the shaft of the handle shaft support 574. (Ie, formed concentrically with the handle shaft support 574). The connecting hole 620 of the switching device 600 is formed as a trapezoidal hole corresponding to the outer shape of the connecting shaft 575, so that the connecting shaft 575 is relative to the connecting hole 620 of the switching device 600 in the axial direction. It is coupled so that it can move and cannot rotate relative to the circumferential direction.

  Further, since the connecting shaft 575 is formed as a trapezoidal shaft body, the connecting shaft 575 and the connecting hole 620 can be coupled so as not to be rotatable relative to each other, and the positions (phases) of both of the rotating directions can be positioned. (The phase that can be combined by both is restricted to only one location). That is, in the assembly process of the handle device 51, it is necessary to connect the connecting shaft 575 and the connecting hole 620 after making the rotational direction position of the pushing piece 576 coincide with the escape space 661 of the switching device 600. (Refer to FIGS. 25 to 27) In the present embodiment, the rotational direction positions (phases) of the connecting shaft 575 and the connecting hole 620 are positioned at one place, so that the rotational direction position is wrong (the pushing piece 576). Can be prevented from being coupled (with the rotational direction position of) not matching the clearance space 661 of the switching device 600. As a result, it is possible to improve the efficiency of the assembly work and suppress the assembly failure.

  The pushing piece 576 is a portion for pushing the biting spheres 670a and 670b of the switching device 600 into the biting space 651 (see FIGS. 15 and 26), and the handle shaft support body 574 is located on the side of the connecting shaft 575. It extends along the axis and is formed in a plate shape having a cross-sectional shape corresponding to the biting space 651 of the switching device 600 (that is, a shape that can be inserted into the biting space 651). Accordingly, when the button member 570 is pushed in, the biting spheres 670 a and 670 b are pushed into the biting space 651 by the extended distal end surface of the pressing piece 576.

  The connecting shaft 575 and the pushing piece 576 are formed integrally with the handle shaft support body 574. As described above, the button member 570 has the connecting shaft 575 coupled to the connecting hole 620 of the switching device 600 so as not to be relatively rotatable. Therefore, the handle shaft support 574 and the switching device 600 are integrally rotated through the coupling of the coupling shaft 575 and the coupling hole 620, so that the phases of the pushing piece 576 and the escape space 661 are always matched. Can be maintained. That is, even if the switching device 600 is rotated to any rotation position (phase) with respect to the handle base 530 (bearing portion 535), when the button member 570 is pressed, the switching device 600 is pressed. The biting spheres 670 a and 670 b of the switching device 600 can be pushed into the biting space 651 by the piece 576.

  The internal fitting wall portion 577 is a cylindrical portion for holding the button member 570 so as to be movable relative to the front cover 550 in the axial direction, and is inserted through the cylindrical guide portion 554 of the front cover 550 (see FIG. 25 to FIG. 27). That is, the outer diameter of the inner fitting wall portion 577 is set to be slightly smaller than the inner diameter of the cylindrical guide portion 554 of the front cover 550, and the inner fitting wall portion 577 is inserted into the cylindrical guide portion 554. Thus, the button member 570 is held (axially supported) by the front cover 550 so as to be rotatable and movable in the axial direction.

  Therefore, as described above, the button member 570 has the connecting shaft 575 held by the bearing portion 535 of the handle base 530 via the switching device 600 (that is, the connection of the connecting shaft 575 and the connecting hole 620). The inner fitting wall portion 577 is held by the cylindrical guide portion 554 of the front cover 550. That is, since the button member 570 is held at two positions spaced apart from each other in the axial direction with respect to the handle base 530 and the front cover 550 as a fixing system, the button member 570 can be held in a stable state without rattling. As a result, a smooth pushing operation can be achieved.

  Here, the outer peripheral surface of the inner fitting wall portion 577 is formed in a color different from the outer peripheral surface of the operation portion 571. Specifically, in the present embodiment, the outer peripheral surface of the inner fitting wall portion 577 is formed in black, while the outer peripheral surface of the operation portion 571 is formed in white. Therefore, when the button member 570 is in the first position (initial position), the player can visually recognize the outer peripheral surface (black) of the inner fitting wall portion 577 through the confirmation window 550b of the front cover 550 (FIG. 32 ( a)), in the state where the button member 570 is in the second position (the position where the push-in operation has been performed), the player can visually recognize the outer peripheral surface (white color) of the operation unit 571 through the confirmation window 550b of the front cover 550. (See FIG. 32B). Thereby, the player determines whether the button member 570 is arranged at the first position or the second position based on the difference in color visually recognized through the confirmation window 550b (that is, the handle ring 540). It is possible to easily identify whether or not the position of the operation end point is changed.

  The guide pin piece 578 is a member that is guided in a guide groove 553 (see FIGS. 9A and 9B) formed in the base portion 551 of the front cover 550, and has a circular cross-section made of a metal material. Formed by bending the body. The guide pin piece 578 includes a base end portion rotatably embedded in the back base 572, a main body portion extending from the base end portion in the axial direction of the button member 570 (that is, the direction of pushing operation), The front end portion of the main body portion is formed by bending the button member 570 radially outwardly by 90 degrees, and the front end portion contacts the guide groove 553 at an angle of 90 degrees.

  When the button member 570 is pushed, as described above, the guide pin piece 578 moves in the guide groove 553 (see FIGS. 9A and 9B), so that the push position of the button member 570 is changed. It is switched to the first position or the second position. Here, returning to FIG. 9B, a structure in which the button member 570 is held at the first position or the second position by the guide pin piece 578 being guided by the guide groove 553 will be described.

  FIG. 9B is a front view of the guide groove 553. 9B, the right side of FIG. 9B corresponds to the operation portion 571 side of the button member 570, and the left side of FIG. 9B corresponds to the handle ring 540 side.

  As shown in FIG. 9B, the guide groove 553 is a concave groove for guiding the guide pin piece 578 (see FIG. 11) of the button member 570, and is formed as a circular path having a heart shape in front view. At the same time, a plurality of steps are formed in the path with directivity.

  As the guide pin piece 578 moves (guides) along the guide groove 553, the button member 570 is held in either the first position or the second position (see FIGS. 25 and 26). Further, in the process of returning from the second position to the first position, the button member 570 is held at the third position only while being kept pushed by the player (see FIG. 27).

  Specifically, in a state where the guide pin piece 578 is located at the position P1, the button member 570 is located at the first position. In this state, the guide pin piece 578 has a biasing force of the button biasing spring 590 (see FIGS. 25 to 27) (as described above, the direction in which the button member 570 is separated from the handle ring 540 (right of FIG. 9B)). The force urging in the direction) is pressed against the wall portion 553a of the guide groove 553 and is maintained at the position P1.

  When the button member 570 at the first position is pushed in, the guide pin piece 578 is guided along the shape of the guide groove 553 (path L1), and after climbing over the end 553b of the first step, the wall portion 553c. I hit it. Thereby, pushing operation of the button member 570 becomes impossible. Therefore, the player releases his / her hand from the button member 570, and the operation force in the pushing direction is released.

  As a result, the guide pin piece 578 is guided along the shape of the guide groove 553 by the urging force of the button urging spring 590 (path L2), and after climbing over the end 553d of the second step, the wall 553e By hitting, it is located at position P2. In this case, the guide pin piece 578 is maintained at the position P <b> 2 by being pressed against the wall portion 553 e of the guide groove 553 by the biasing force of the button biasing spring 590. As a result, the button member 570 is set (held) at the second position.

  When the button member 570 in the second position is pushed in, the guide pin piece 578 is guided along the shape of the guide groove 553 (path L3), and after climbing over the end 553f of the third step, the wall portion 553g (Position P3). Thereby, pushing operation of the button member 570 becomes impossible. Therefore, the player releases his / her hand from the button member 570, and the operation force in the pushing direction is released.

  As a result, the guide pin piece 578 is guided along the shape of the guide groove 553 by the urging force of the button urging spring 590 (path L4), and after climbing over the end 553h of the fourth step, the wall 553a By hitting, it is positioned at the position P1. In this case, the guide pin piece 578 is maintained at the position P <b> 1 by being pressed against the wall portion 553 a of the guide groove 553 by the biasing force of the button biasing spring 590. As a result, the button member 570 is set (held) at the first position. That is, the button member 570 is returned to the first position when the guide pin piece 578 makes one round of the guide groove 553 (circular path of heart shape).

  The button member 570 at the second position is pushed in, the guide pin piece 578 is abutted against the wall portion 553g, and the state at the position P3 is the third position of the button member 570. That is, the third position is the time when the button member 570 in the second position is pushed by the player to the pushable position (position P3) against the urging force of the button urging spring 590 (ie, the position P3). The guide pin piece 578 is formed only while the state where the guide pin piece 578 is abutted against the wall portion 553g is maintained.

  In this case, the pushing piece 576 of the button member 570 is in the second position and the third position at the first position at a position where the biting spheres 670a and 670b of the switching device 600 are retracted from the biting space 651 to the clearance surface space 761. Then, the biting spheres 670a and 670b of the switching device 600 are respectively arranged at positions where the biting spaces 651 are pushed into the biting space 651 (see FIGS. 25 to 27).

  Next, the switching device 600 will be described with reference to FIGS. First, the basic configuration of the switching device 600 will be described with reference to FIGS. 13 and 14.

  13A is a front view of the switching device 600, and FIG. 13B is a side view of the switching device 600 as viewed in the direction of arrow XIIIb in FIG. 13A. 14A is a cross-sectional view of the switching device 600 taken along line XIVa-XIVa in FIG. 13A, and FIG. 14B is a side view of the switching device 600 viewed in the direction of arrow XIVb in FIG. FIG. 13 and 14, the illustration of the biting spheres 670a and 670b, the push-side biasing spring 680, and the biting-side biasing spring 690 is omitted.

  As shown in FIG. 13 and FIG. 14, the switching device 600 protrudes radially outward from the main body 610, the connection hole 620 formed through the main body 610, and the outer peripheral surface of the main body 610. A regulating projection 630 and a spring receiving portion 640, and a biting surface 650 and a relief surface 660 formed by recessing the outer peripheral surface of the main body 610.

  The main body 610 is a part forming the skeleton of the switching device 600 and is formed in a columnar shape. The outer diameter of the main body 610 is set to be slightly smaller than the inner diameter of the bearing 535 (see FIG. 7) of the handle base 530. Therefore, the main body 610 is rotatably inserted into the bearing 535 by being inserted into the bearing 535 of the handle base 530 (see FIG. 25).

  The connection hole 620 is a through hole to which the connection shaft 575 (see FIG. 11) of the button member 570 is coupled, and is formed through the shaft of the main body 610 (that is, as a hole concentric with the main body 610). The cross-sectional shape of the connection hole 620 is formed in a shape (trapezoidal shape) corresponding to the connection shaft 575 of the button member 570, so that the connection shaft 575 is relatively movable in the axial direction and circumferentially as described above. They are coupled so that they cannot rotate relative to each other.

  Further, as described above, the cross-sectional shape of the connecting hole 620 and the connecting shaft 575 is trapezoidal, thereby positioning the rotational direction position (phase) of both (the phase where both can be coupled is set at one place). Can only be regulated). That is, in the assembly process of the handle device 51, it is necessary to connect the connecting shaft 575 and the connecting hole 620 after making the rotational direction position of the pushing piece 576 coincide with the escape space 661 of the switching device 600 ( In this embodiment, the rotational direction positions (phases) of the connection shaft 575 and the connection hole 620 are positioned at one place, so that the rotational direction positions are incorrect (the button member 570 It can be avoided that the pushing piece 576 is coupled in a state where the rotational direction position of the pushing piece 576 does not coincide with the escape space 661. As a result, it is possible to improve the efficiency of the assembly work and suppress the assembly failure.

  The restricting protrusion 630 is a part that comes into contact with the handle-side protrusion 546 of the handle ring 540 and is formed as a rod-shaped body having a rectangular cross section. The spring receiving portion 640 is a portion serving as a seating surface for receiving a biasing force acting from the switching device biasing spring 539 (see FIG. 7).

  These restricting projections 630 and spring receivers 640 are located on the front side (front side, upper side in FIG. 13 (b)) in the axial direction (FIG. 13 (b) vertical direction) of the main body 610, and these restricting projections The back surfaces (the lower surface in FIG. 13B) of the portion 630 and the spring receiving portion 640 are formed as flat surfaces that are flush with each other (that is, the position of the main body portion 610 in the axial direction is the same). As a result, in a state where the switching device 600 is inserted through the bearing portion 535 of the handle base 530, the switching projection device 630 and the back surface of the spring receiving portion 640 come into contact with the end surface on the opening side of the bearing portion 535, thereby (Main body 610) can be positioned in the axial direction (see FIG. 15). In addition, since the restricting protrusion 630 and the spring receiving portion 640 are arranged at intervals in the circumferential direction, two switching devices 600 (main body portions 610) are provided on the end surface on the opening side of the bearing portion 535. The switching device 600 can be stably rotated in the bearing portion 535 accordingly.

  The biting surface 650 engages the ball spheres 670 a and 670 b with the inner peripheral surface of the bearing portion 530 of the handle base 530 so that the switching device 600 (the main body portion 610) is relative to the bearing portion 535. This is a part for making it impossible to rotate (engaged and fixed state) (see FIG. 15B and FIG. 15D), and the flank 660 is an inner peripheral surface of the bearing portion 530 in the handle base 530. It is a part for making the switching device 600 (main body part 610) relatively rotatable with respect to the bearing part 535 (rotatable state) by making the engaging spheres 670a and 670b incapable of being in between ( FIG. 15 (a) and FIG. 15 (c)).

  As shown in FIG. 13A, the biting surface 650 and the flank 660 are a part of a recess (bottom surface of the recess) formed by recessing the outer peripheral surface of the main body 610 in a U-shape when viewed from the front. The biting surface 650 is formed as a flat surface parallel to the axis of the main body 610 (FIG. 14A), and the clearance surface 660 is the upper end of the biting surface 650 (FIG. a) It is formed as a flat surface that is connected to the upper side) and is inclined in a direction closer to the axis of the main body 610 as it is separated from the connected portion.

  Therefore, the biting space 651 formed corresponding to the biting surface 650 (that is, the space formed between the biting surface 650 and the inner peripheral surface of the bearing portion 535 in the handle base 530) is the main body portion. It is formed as a space having the same cross-sectional shape along the axial direction of 610. In this case, in the biting space 651, a gap that gradually decreases in the circumferential direction is formed at both ends between the inner peripheral surface of the bearing portion 535 and the biting surface 650 when viewed from the front shown in FIG. (See FIG. 15C or FIG. 15D).

Further, a clearance space 661 formed corresponding to the clearance surface 660 (that is, a space formed between the clearance surface 660 and the inner peripheral surface of the bearing portion 535 in the handle base 530) is from the biting space 651. It is formed as a space whose cross-sectional area increases as the distance increases. That is, the distance between the inner peripheral surface of the bearing portion 535 and the biting surface 650 increases as the distance from the biting space 651 increases. (See FIG. 15 (c) or FIG. 15 (d))
Next, with reference to FIG. 15, a description will be given of a pivotable state and a regulation fixed state of the switching device 600 and a switching structure between these two states.

  FIGS. 15A and 15B are cross-sectional views of the switching device 600 and correspond to a cross section taken along line XIVa-XIVa in FIG. 15C is a front view of the switching device 600 as viewed in the direction of the arrow XVc in FIG. 15A, and FIG. 15D is a front view of the switching device 600 as viewed in the direction of the arrow XVd in FIG. FIG.

  FIG. 15 illustrates a state in which the switching device 600 is mounted (inserted) on the bearing portion 535 of the handle base 530. 15 (a) and 15 (c), the state where the biting spheres 670a and 670b are arranged in the escape space 661 is shown in FIGS. 15 (b) and 15 (d). The state in which 670b is disposed in the biting space 651 is illustrated.

  As shown in FIG. 15, the switching device 600 includes biting spheres 670a and 670b, a push-side biasing spring 680, and a biting-side biasing spring 690, which are disposed in the biting space 651 or the escape space 661. The The biting spheres 670a and 670b are members formed in a spherical shape, and when the spheres are arranged in the biting space 651, the diameters of the spheres are the inner peripheral surface of the bearing portion 535, the biting surface 650, and the like. The diameter dimension is set so as to be able to bite into the gaps at both ends that gradually decrease in the circumferential direction. In addition, when the sphere moves to the gap between the inner peripheral surface of the bearing portion 535 and the biting surface 650 and on the center side in the circumferential direction, the biting state is not formed between the gaps. The diameter is set to a rollable diameter.

  The pushing-side biasing spring 680 is interposed between the terminal end of the biting space 651 (the wall portion on the side opposite to the escape space 661) and the biting spheres 670a and 670b in an elastically compressed state, and its elastic recovery. The biting spheres 670 a and 670 b are pushed up in the axial direction of the main body 610 by the force. Thus, when the biting spheres 670a and 670b are not pushed by the pushing piece 576 of the button member 570 (see FIG. 25), as shown in FIGS. 15A and 15C, the escape space 661 is obtained. On the other hand, when the button member 570 is pushed in by the pushing piece 576 (see FIG. 26), it is arranged in the biting space 651 as shown in FIGS. 15B and 15D. .

  The biting side biasing spring 690 is interposed between the biting spheres 670a and 670b in an elastically compressed state, and the elastic recovery force causes the biting spheres 670a and 670b to be separated from each other. Energize. Thus, when the biting spheres 670a and 670b are arranged in the biting space 651 as shown in FIGS. 15B and 15D, the inner peripheral surface and the biting surface of the bearing portion 535 are arranged. It is bitten in a gap gradually decreasing in the circumferential direction between 650 and 650.

  The operation of the switching device 600 configured as described above will be described. As shown in FIGS. 15A and 15C, the biting spheres 670a and 670b are arranged in the escape space 661 (that is, the biting spheres 670a and 670b are bitten by the pushing piece 576 of the button member 570). In a state where it is not pushed into the insertion space 651 (see FIG. 25), the gap between the inner peripheral surface of the bearing portion 535 and the engagement surface 650 and the engagement spheres 670a and 670b are not formed. Therefore, the switching device 600 (main body portion 610) is set in a rotatable state, and can be rotated relative to the bearing portion 535 in both directions of arrows A and B shown in FIG. Is done.

  On the other hand, as shown in FIGS. 15B and 15D, the biting spheres 670a and 670b are disposed in the biting space 651 (that is, the biting spheres 670a and 670a are pushed by the pressing pieces 576 of the button member 570). In a state where 670b is pushed into the biting space 651 (see FIG. 26), the biasing force of the biting side biasing spring 690 causes a gap between the inner peripheral surface of the bearing portion 535 and the biting surface 650. Since the engaging spheres 670a and 670b are engaged with the clearance gradually decreasing in the circumferential direction, the switching device 600 is set to the engaged and fixed state, and the switching device 600 (main body portion 610) rotates relative to the bearing portion 535. Is blocked (fixed) as follows.

  That is, when the switching device 600 (main body portion 610) is about to rotate in the direction of arrow A shown in FIG. 15D, the biting that is the rear side of the main body portion 610 in the rotation direction (the rotation direction delay side). The circumferential end (the lower side in FIG. 15 (d)) of the insertion surface 650 acts so as to further engage the engagement sphere 670b between the facing portion 535 and the inner peripheral surface of the bearing portion 535, whereby the bearing portion The relative rotation of the switching device 600 (main body 610) in the direction of arrow A with respect to 535 is prevented.

  Similarly, when the switching device 600 (main body portion 610) is to rotate in the direction of arrow B shown in FIG. 15D, the main body portion 610 is on the rear side in the rotation direction (rotation direction delay side). The circumferential end of the biting surface 650 (upper side in FIG. 15 (d)) acts to further bite the biting sphere 670a while facing the inner peripheral surface of the bearing portion 535, whereby the bearing portion The relative rotation of the switching device 600 (main body portion 610) with respect to 535 in the arrow B direction is prevented.

  Next, the boss member 560 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 16 is a rear perspective view of the handle base 530. FIG. 16 illustrates a state in which the variable resistor, the firing stop switch operation unit 440, and the like are removed, and the positional relationship between the shaft 563 and the bearing 523 is schematically illustrated using a two-dot chain line. .

  As shown in FIG. 16, the boss member 560 is a member for connecting the handle base 530 to the handle mounting base 520 so that the handle base 530 can be displaced about the pivotally supported portion. Projected. That is, as will be described later, a bearing 523 is formed on the handle mounting base 520, a shaft 563 is formed on the boss member 560, and the shaft 563 is pivotally supported on the bearing 523. The handle base 530 can be displaced with respect to the handle mounting base 520 with the pivotally supported portion as the center (fulcrum). Note that the displacement of the handle base 530 with respect to the handle mount 520 around the pivotally supported portion as a center (fulcrum) may be expressed as “swing” or “turn”.

  The boss member 560 includes a flat plate-like base portion 561 that is fastened and fixed to the back surface (bottom wall 532) of the handle base 530, a protrusion portion 562 that protrudes from the base portion 561 toward the back surface and is formed in a rod-like cross section. A pair of shafts 563 projecting from the outer surface of the projecting portion 562 to the left and right, and a harness guide 564 disposed on the lower surface of the projecting tip of the projecting portion 562 are mainly provided.

  On the upper surface of the protruding portion 562, an inclined surface 562a is formed that is inclined downward as it is separated from the base portion 561 (the shaft 563) (that is, toward the harness guide 564 side). Here, the protruding portion 562 of the boss member 560 is protruded more than the protruding end side of the shaft 563 (harness guide 564) due to the displacement of the handle base 530 with respect to the handle mounting base 520 around the shaft support portion (the shaft 563 and the bearing 523). Since the side portion is a portion displaced upward (see FIGS. 23 and 24), other members located on the upper side (that is, switches, IC devices, and the like disposed in the handle mounting base 520) It is necessary to avoid interference with a harness or a reinforcing rib 526 formed integrally with the handle mounting base 520.

  In this case, if the arrangement position of the other member is moved upward, the handle mounting base 520 is increased in size, and the handle mounting base is formed by forming the inclined surface 562a on the upper surface of the protruding portion 562. Interference between other members and the protrusion 562 can be avoided while reducing the size of the 520. In particular, since the inclined surface 562a is formed as an inclined surface that is inclined downward as it is separated from the shaft 563 as described above, the escape amount increases toward the protruding tip side with a larger amount of displacement, and interference with other members occurs. While avoiding effectively, on the shaft 563 side where the amount of displacement is small, it is possible to secure the rigidity of the protruding portion 562 by minimizing the amount of cutting of the protruding portion 562.

  A pair of guide walls 562b for holding the base urging spring SP (see FIG. 19) is provided upright at the protruding tip of the protruding portion 562. In this way, by adopting a structure that holds the base biasing spring SP between the pair of guide walls 562a, the structure can be simplified, the cost of parts can be reduced, and the base biasing spring SP is assembled. It is possible to improve the ease of assembly. Note that the upper surface of the protruding portion 562 located between the opposing guide walls 562b is curved in an arc shape when viewed from the rear, and the base biasing spring SP can be smoothly elastically deformed.

  The harness guide 564 is a member for guiding electrical wiring, and is formed in a frame shape in a rear view. Wiring that enters the handle mounting base 520 from the handle base 530 through the opening of the bottom wall 532 (such as wiring of the firing stop switch 51b) and wiring that exists in the handle mounting base 520 (such as wiring of the variable resistor) By accommodating in the frame of the harness guide 564 (passing through the frame), when the handle base 530 is displaced around the shaft support portion (the shaft 563 and the bearing 523), the upper surface of the protruding portion 562, or It is possible to avoid breaking the wiring by pinching the wiring between the lower surface of the harness guide 564 and another member or the inner wall surface of the handle mounting base 520.

  Note that the protrusion of the guide wall 562b from the upper surface of the protrusion 562 increases the possibility that the wiring is sandwiched between other members and the handle mounting base 520. In the present embodiment, the harness guide 564 is provided, and by passing through the frame of the harness guide 564, it is possible to suppress pinching (disconnection) of the wiring. As a result, the guide wall 562b can be protruded from the upper surface of the protruding portion 562, and the structure for holding the base biasing spring SP can be simplified and its assemblability can be improved.

  A mating surface portion 532 a is formed on the back surface (bottom wall 532) of the handle base 530. The mating surface portion 532a is a part with which the upper mating surface portion 527 (and the lower mating surface portion 528) of the handle mounting base 520 comes into contact, and is entirely in a vertically long annular region surrounding the base portion 561 of the boss member 560. It is formed as a flat surface.

  Next, the handle mounting base 520 will be described with reference to FIGS. 17 and 18. FIG. 17 is a perspective view of the handle mounting base 520 in an exploded state. 18A is a perspective view of the handle mounting base 520 in an assembled state, and FIG. 18B is an inner side view of the first main body 520a.

  As shown in FIGS. 17 and 18, the handle mounting base 520 is formed as a vertically long cylindrical body, and is vertically divided into a first main body 520a and a second main body 520b. On the mating surfaces of the first main body 520a and the second main body 520b, a positioning projection 521a is projected from one side, and a positioning hole 521b for receiving and positioning the positioning projection 521a is positioned at the other corresponding position. It is recessed. Similarly, an insertion hole 522a for inserting a fastening screw is formed through one side, and the first main body 520a and the second main body 520b are fastened and fixed by fastening the fastening screw inserted through the insertion hole 522a. The fastening hole 522b for doing so is recessed at the other corresponding position.

  A bearing 523, a locking claw portion 524, an accommodation recess 525, and a reinforcing rib 526 are formed on the inner wall surfaces of the first main body 520a and the second main body 520b, respectively. The bearing 523 is a bearing part (concave part) for pivotally supporting the shaft 563 of the boss member 560 so that a pair of the bearings 523 are opposed to each other. The locking claw portion 524 is a portion for locking the end portion of the base urging spring SP (see FIG. 12), and is formed in a hook shape that is bent downward while projecting toward the back surface.

  The storage recess 525 and the reinforcing rib 526 are portions disposed at one and the other opposing positions of the first main body 520a and the second main body 520b. That is, the storage recess 525 is a recess for storing and holding a component such as an IC device, and is formed in a shape corresponding to the outer shape of the component to be stored, and the reinforcing rib 526 extends from the inner wall surface to the storage recess 525. The rigidity of the handle mounting base 520 as a whole is increased by pressing the components housed in the housing recess 525 by the projecting tip.

  On the front surface (the right side surface in FIG. 18A) of the first main body 520a and the second main body 520b, there are an upper mating surface portion 527 and a lower mating surface portion 528 that are in contact with the mating surface portion 532a (see FIG. 16) of the handle base 530. It is formed. The upper mating surface portion 527 and the lower mating surface portion 528 are formed on the front end surface of the handle mounting base 520 (a vertically long annular surface in a front view), and each is formed as a flat surface. Note that the lower mating surface portion 528 is inclined toward the back surface as the distance from the upper mating surface portion 527 increases. As a result, the handle base 530 can be displaced with respect to the handle mount 520 around the shaft support portion (the shaft 563 and the bearing 523) (see FIGS. 23 and 24).

  Part of the lower surface portion 528 of the first main body 520a is enlarged (that is, a plate-like body projects radially inward from the inner wall surface of the first main body 520a), and the enlarged portion (projected portion). Is a pressing surface portion 528a for pressing the pressed surface portion 702a of the handle regulating member 700. A reinforcing portion 528b is continuously provided on the back side of the pressing surface portion 528a. The reinforcing portion 528b is formed in a plate shape, and only the upper end side of the pressing surface portion 528a is connected to the inner wall surface of the first main body 520a and the step surface 520a1. As a result, the space between the inner wall surface of the first main body 520a and the reinforcing portion 528b can be reduced, and the rigidity of the pressing surface portion 528a is effectively increased while suppressing the resin material and reducing the component cost. Durability can be improved.

  Next, the base urging spring SP will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 19 is a rear perspective view of the handle mounting base 520 and the handle base 530. In FIG. 19, the state where the variable resistor or the like is removed is shown, and the wiring of other components is not shown.

  As shown in FIG. 19, the base urging spring SP is formed as a coil spring, and the annular portions at both ends are locked to the locking claws 524 in a state of being elastically deformed (extended). At the same time, a substantially intermediate portion of the coil spring is stretched over the protruding tip (between the pair of guide walls 562b) of the protruding portion 562 of the boss member 560.

  Thereby, the boss member 560 is urged in the direction (downward) in which the protruding tip of the protruding portion 562 approaches the locking claw portion 524 around the shaft 563 by the elastic recovery force of the base urging member SP. As a result, the handle base 530 is displaced upward with respect to the handle mount 520 (see FIG. 23).

  Since the handle mounting base 520 is formed with the back surface open, the internal space of the handle mounting base 520 can be exposed from the open portion of the back surface. Thereby, the both ends of the base urging spring SP are locked to the locking claw portion 524, and the operation of laying the intermediate portion between the pair of guide walls 562b is performed from the open portion on the back surface of the handle mounting base 520. Since it can be performed, the workability of the mounting work can be improved.

  When the handle base 530 is displaced upward (bounced up), the upper fitting surface portion 527 of the handle mounting base 520 is in contact with the matching surface portion 532a of the handle base 530. That is, the opposing surfaces (mating surfaces) of the handle mounting base 520 and the handle base 530 are formed with flat mating surface portions (upper mating surface portion 527 and mating surface portion 532a), and these mating surface portions are formed on the handle base. In a state where the displacement position of 530 is disposed at the initial position (first position), the base urging spring SP is brought into close contact with the urging force. By this close contact, the handle base 530 can be maintained in a stable state in the initial position without causing the handle base 530 to rattle. As a result, for example, operability when the handle ring 540 is rotated can be improved.

  When the displacement position of the handle base 530 is disposed at the initial position, the mating surfaces (upper mating surface portion 527 and mating surface portion 532a) that are in close contact with each other are located above (upper surface) the handle mounting base 520 and the handle base 530. Therefore, when the mating surface is opened (see FIG. 20), it is possible to prevent foreign matters such as foreign matter, dust, and dust that have been dropped carelessly by the player from entering the handle mounting base 520. In particular, the handle base 530 is returned to the initial position (first position) by the urging force of the base urging spring SP, and since the period of time at the initial position is long, the mating surfaces (the upper mating surface portion 527 and the mating surface portion 532a) are moved. The configuration disposed above is effective.

  Next, the handle regulating member 700 will be described with reference to FIGS. 20 is a front perspective view of the handle base 530 in a state where the handle restricting member 700 is attached, and FIG. 21 is a front perspective view of the handle base 530 in a state where the handle restricting member 700 is removed. 20 and 21 illustrate a state in which the variable resistor, the firing stop switch operation unit 440, the switching device 600, and the like are removed.

  As shown in FIGS. 20 and 21, the handle restricting member 700 is mounted on the handle base 530 in the notch 534 b formed in the inner peripheral wall 534. The bottom wall 532 of the handle base 530 is formed with a circular through-hole 532b that penetrates from the front surface to the back surface (specifically, the mating surface portion 532a). The through hole 532b and the notch 534b are parallel to the rotation axis of the handle ring 540.

  The handle restricting member 700 is a member made of a resin material for restricting the return of the handle ring 540 to the initial position (that is, fixing the rotation operation amount (rotation position) of the handle ring 540). When the handle base 530 is displaced about the shaft support portion (the shaft 563 and the bearing 523) with respect to the mounting base 520, the handle base 530 is pushed toward the front by the handle mounting base 520 (pressing surface portion 528a), and the handle ring 540 has a circle. By pressing the plate portion 541, the rotation of the handle ring 540 is restricted (see FIG. 24). Here, the handle regulating member 700 will be described with reference to FIG.

  22A and 22B are perspective views of the handle restricting member 700. FIG. The handle restricting member 700 mainly includes a main body portion 701, a rod portion 702 protruding from the back surface of the main body portion 701, and a pair of arm portions 703 protruding from both sides of the main body portion 701.

  The main body 701 is a part formed in a plate shape, and at least the upper surface (the upper side surface in FIG. 22B) is formed in a concave shape. As a result, when mounted on the handle base 530, the internal space of the handle base 530 can be secured to increase the degree of freedom of attachment of other components, and the workability during the attachment operation can be improved. be able to.

  Slide guide grooves 701 a are recessed in the left and right side surfaces of the main body 701. The slide guide groove 701a is a linear concave groove having a U-shaped cross section, and extends in parallel with the protruding direction of the rod portion 702. The inner peripheral wall 534 of the handle base 530 (both sides of the notch 534b) is fitted into the slide guide groove 701a in a state where the handle restricting member 700 is mounted on the handle base 530. That is, the inner peripheral wall 534 of the handle base 530 is sandwiched between the portion protruding from the bottom surface side of the main body 701 and the base of the arm 703. As a result, the main body 701 (handle restricting member 700) is allowed only to move (slide) in the extending direction of the rod 702, and the movement of the handle base 530 in the circumferential direction is restricted.

  A flat contact surface portion 701 b is formed on the front surface of the main body portion 701. The contact surface portion 701b is a portion that is in contact with the back surface of the disc portion 541 of the handle ring 540 (see FIG. 24), and is perpendicular to the rotation axis of the handle ring 540 (that is, the main body portion 701 moves (slides)). (Parallel to the direction).

  The rod portion 702 is a rod-like body having a circular cross section that protrudes from the back surface of the main body portion 701, and is formed so as to be able to be inserted into the through hole 532 b in the bottom wall 532 of the handle base 530. A hemispherical pressed surface portion 702 a is formed at the projecting tip of the rod portion 702. Note that the protruding length of the rod portion 702 from the back surface of the main body portion 701 is larger than the thickness of the bottom wall 532, and when the handle restricting member 700 is mounted on the handle base 530, the rod portion 702 is pressed. The surface portion 702a protrudes from the back surface (the mating surface portion 532a) of the bottom wall 532 (see FIG. 23).

  Since the pressed surface portion 702a of the rod portion 702 is formed in a hemispherical shape, the handle base 530 is displaced with respect to the handle mounting base 520 around the shaft support portion (the shaft 563 and the bearing 523), and the handle mounting base 520 When the pressed surface portion 702a is pressed by the pressing surface portion 528a (see FIGS. 23 and 24), the handle regulating member 700 can be moved (slid) stably. That is, in this embodiment, the pressing surface portion 528a of the handle mounting base 520 moves around the shaft 563, while the handle restricting member 700 slides (linearly moves), and the relative positional relationship between the two is indefinite. At some point, the pressing surface portion 528a of the handle mounting base 520 is formed as a flat surface, and the pressed surface portion 702a of the handle restricting member 700 is formed as a spherical surface that bulges toward the pressing surface portion 528a. A force component for sliding the handle restricting member 700 in the direction toward the handle ring 540 can be generated continuously by moving the shaft support portion (the shaft 563 and the bearing 523) with displacement. As a result, clogging of the handle restricting member 700 (that is, the inner peripheral wall 534 of the handle base 530 bites into the slide guide groove 701a or the rod portion 702 bites into the through hole 532b) is suppressed and stabilized. Can be slid.

  The arm portion 703 is a rod-shaped body having a substantially rectangular cross section that protrudes from both side surfaces of the main body portion 701, and the bottom surface of the arm portion 703 has a curvature corresponding to the inner peripheral surface of the inner peripheral wall 534 of the handle base 530. Curved and formed. Thus, in a state where the handle restricting member 700 is attached to the handle base 530 (the inner peripheral wall 534 is fitted in the slide guide groove 701a of the main body 701), the bottom surface of the arm 703 is set to the inner periphery of the inner peripheral wall 534. It can be in a state of being curved along the surface, and the arm portion 703 can be prevented from falling off from the receiving projection 538. Further, since the arm portion 703 extends along the circumferential direction of the handle base 530, it is possible to make the arm portion 703 longer while suppressing the influence of the arrangement space of other components. In addition, a space necessary for elastic deformation of the arm portion 703 can be secured.

  Returning to FIG. 20 and FIG. On the inner peripheral wall 534 of the handle base 530, a pair of receiving projections 538 project from the inner peripheral surface inward in the radial direction. The receiving projection 538 is a part for elastically deforming the arm 702 of the handle restricting member 700 by restraining the arm 702 and restricting the movement thereof, and corresponds to the distal end portion of the arm 703 of the handle restricting member 700. Arranged in position.

  The notch 534b (the slide holding portion that holds the handle restricting member 700 slidably toward the handle ring 540) in the inner peripheral wall 534 of the handle base 530 is open at the front surface (the side facing the handle ring 540). It is formed. Therefore, since the handle restricting member 700 can be easily attached to the notch 534b using the open portion, the assembly cost relating to the operation of attaching the handle restricting member 700 can be reduced.

  In addition, since the open part of the notch part 534b is the side facing the handle ring 540 (see FIG. 23), the handle restricting member 700 is provided in the notch part by arranging the handle ring 540 on the handle base 530. It does not fall off from the open part of 534b.

  In addition, since a receiving projection 538 that receives the arm portion 703 of the handle restricting member 700 is provided on the inner peripheral wall 534 of the handle base 530, the handle restricting member 700 is formed from the open portion of the notch 534b of the handle base 530. The handle restricting member 700 falls off from the open portion of the notch 534b until the handle ring 540 is attached to the handle base 530 after being attached (that is, in the state shown in FIG. 20). Can be prevented. Therefore, the workability in the assembly process can be improved.

  On the other hand, the arm portion 703 of the handle restricting member 700 is made of a resin material and is formed to be elastically deformable. Therefore, the handle base 530 is centered on the shaft support portion (the shaft 563 and the bearing 523) with respect to the handle mounting base 520. When the handle restricting member 700 is displaced and pressed toward the front surface (handle ring 540), the tip portion is elastically deformed by the arm portion 702 restrained by the receiving protrusion 538, whereby the handle restricting member 700 is moved. It can be moved (slid). Thereby, the contact surface portion 701b of the handle regulating member 700 can be brought into contact with the back surface (contacted surface portion) of the handle ring 540 (see FIG. 24).

  Further, when the displacement of the handle base 530 with respect to the handle mount 520 around the shaft support portion (the shaft 563 and the bearing 523) is released, the handle restricting member is caused by the elastic recovery force of the elastically deformed arm portion 702. 700 can be moved away from the handle ring 540 and returned to the initial position (see FIG. 23). Thereby, a gap can be formed between the contact surface portion 701b of the handle regulating member 700 and the back surface (contacted surface portion) of the handle ring 540. As a result, it is possible to avoid obstructing the turning operation of the handle ring 540 due to the resistance caused by the contact between the two.

  Here, since the receiving protrusion 538 protrudes radially inward from the inner peripheral surface of the inner peripheral wall 534 of the handle base 530, visibility during assembly can be ensured. As a result, it is easy to confirm the positional relationship between the arm portion 703 and the receiving protrusion 738 (that is, whether or not the arm portion 703 is properly engaged with the receiving protrusion 738), thereby improving workability. be able to.

  In addition, the receiving projection 738 is inclined upward from the inner peripheral surface of the inner peripheral wall 534 of the handle base 530 toward the rear surface of the projecting projection 738 (that is, along the mounting direction of the handle restricting member 700). Since the inclined surface is formed, when the handle restricting member 700 is attached to the notch 534b from the open portion, the handle restricting member 700 is formed along the inclined surface formed on the projecting upper surface of the receiving protrusion 538. By moving the arm portion 703, the receiving projection 538 can be easily climbed over the arm portion 703. That is, it is only necessary to push the handle restricting member 700 from the open portion of the notch 738, and it is not necessary to separately perform the work of lifting the arm portion 703 and getting over the receiving projection 738, so that the workability of the assembling work is improved. Can be achieved.

  Next, the operation of the handle device 51 will be described with reference to FIGS. 23 and 24.

  FIG. 23 is a partial cross-sectional side view of the handle device 51 in a state before the displacement operation, and FIG. 24 is a partial cross-sectional side view of the handle device 51 in a state after the displacement operation. 23 and 24, the front surface of the lower plate unit 15 is schematically illustrated by a two-dot chain line, and the state where the second main body 520b of the handle mounting base 520 is removed is illustrated. Illustration of the wiring is omitted.

  As shown in FIG. 23, the handle base 530 is in a state before the handle base 530 is displaced about the shaft support portion (the shaft 563 and the bearing 523) with respect to the handle mounting base 520 (that is, the handle base 530 is directed downward by the player). In the state where the displacement operation is not performed), the handle base 530 is in a horizontal position, and the mating surfaces of the handle mounting base 520 and the handle base 530 are such that the upper mating surface portion 527 abuts the mating surface portion 532a and the lower mating surface portion 528. Is separated from the mating surface portion 532a.

  23, when the handle base 530 is displaced downward with respect to the handle mount 520 around the shaft support portion (the shaft 563 and the bearing 523), the pressed surface portion of the rod portion 702 of the handle regulating member 700 702a is pressed by the pressing surface portion 528a of the handle mounting base 520, and the handle restricting member 700 is slid toward the front surface (handle ring 540). When the handle base 530 is further displaced downward about the shaft support portion (the shaft 563 and the bearing 523), the lower mating surface portion 528 comes into contact with the mating surface portion 532a, and as shown in FIG. The contact surface portion 701 b in the main body portion 701 is in contact with the back surface of the disc portion 541 of the handle ring 540.

  As a result, the handle ring 540 is restricted from returning to the initial position regardless of the rotation operation amount (rotation position), and the rotation operation amount is fixed. Therefore, the launch intensity of the sphere can be fixed to the launch intensity of the sphere according to the current amount of rotation of the handle ring 540.

  In this case, there are the following as conventional techniques for fixing the amount of rotation of the handle ring 540. For example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2012-5759 discloses a hemispherical shape convex toward the front (player side) at the top (front side as viewed from the player) of the front cover base corresponding to the front cover 550 in the present embodiment. A technique for fixing the amount of rotation of the handle ring when the player pushes the button toward the back with the palm of the hand is disclosed.

  However, in such a conventional technique, it is necessary to perform a push-in operation of the button while performing a turning operation of the handle ring. Specifically, it is necessary to simultaneously perform an operation (rotating operation) for moving the handle ring grasped with a finger in the circumferential direction and an operation of pushing the palm toward the back side while turning the palm around the button surface. Therefore, in order to push in the button while maintaining the rotation amount (rotation position) of the handle ring, a high level technique is required of the player. In addition, since this state (the state in which the button is pushed in while maintaining the amount of rotation of the handle ring) is an unreasonable posture for the player, this state is continued (that is, the launch strength of the ball is desired). It is the player's burden to fix the firing strength. As a result, not only when the button is pushed in but also when the push is maintained, the rotation amount (rotation position) of the handle ring is easily shifted, and it becomes difficult to maintain the desired rotation operation amount.

  In addition, because of such an unreasonable posture, advanced technology is also required for an operation for releasing the push of the button while maintaining the rotation amount (rotation position) of the handle ring.

  On the other hand, according to this embodiment, the displacement operation centering on the shaft support portion (the shaft 563 and the bearing 523) of the handle base 530 is an operation of integrally displacing the handle base 530 and the handle ring 540. Therefore, the player can support the shaft support portion (the shaft 563 and the bearing 523) of the handle base 530 without releasing a part of the finger that holds the handle ring 540 no matter what the rotation position of the handle ring 540 is. ). Thereby, the operativity can be improved. Further, after the displacement operation centering on the shaft support portion (the shaft 563 and the bearing 523) of the handle base 530 is performed, the operation state (the rotation operation amount of the handle ring 540 is fixed to a desired rotation operation amount). It is also easy to maintain the state. Therefore, when the handle base 530 is operated and when the operation state is maintained, it is possible to suppress the positional deviation of the rotation position of the handle ring 540 and to accurately fix the launch strength of the sphere to a desired launch strength. Can do.

  Further, in this way, if the handle base 530 is displaced about the shaft support portion (the shaft 563 and the bearing 523), the player attaches a palm to the handle base 530 (front cover 550) and directly The handle base 530 can be displaced downward about the shaft support portion (the shaft 563 and the bearing 523) only by the operation of applying the above weight. That is, the player can fix the firing strength of the sphere to a desired firing strength only by performing a simple operation of applying a hand weight.

  In addition, since the handle base 530 and the handle ring 540 are integrally displaced, the player can use one finger that holds the handle ring 540 regardless of the rotation position of the handle ring 540. The displacement operation around the shaft support portion (the shaft 563 and the bearing 523) of the handle base 530 can be performed without separating the parts. Thereby, the operativity can be improved. Further, after the displacement operation centering on the shaft support portion (the shaft 563 and the bearing 523) of the handle base 530 is performed, the operation state (the rotation operation amount of the handle ring 540 is fixed to a desired rotation operation amount). It is also easy to maintain the state. Therefore, when the handle base 530 is operated and when the operation state is maintained, it is possible to suppress the positional deviation of the rotation position of the handle ring 540 and to accurately fix the launch strength of the sphere to a desired launch strength. Can do.

  Further, since the contact surface portion 701b of the main body portion 701 of the handle restricting member 700 and the back surface (contacted surface portion) of the disc portion 541 of the handle ring 540 are formed as smooth surfaces, the rotation of the handle ring 540 is performed. The position can be fixed at an arbitrary rotation position.

  For example, serrated irregularities are provided on the contact surface portion 701b of the main body portion 701 of the handle restricting member 700 and the back surface (contacted surface portion) of the disc portion 541 of the handle ring 540, and the serrated irregularities are provided to each other. In the structure in which the rotation position of the handle ring 540 is fixed by being engaged, the rotation position of the handle ring 540 can be firmly fixed, while the pitch (interval) of the serrated irregularities is adjusted. The minimum value of. Therefore, the rotation position that can be fixed becomes intermittent, and there is a possibility that it cannot be fixed at a desired rotation position.

  On the other hand, as in this embodiment, the contact surface portion 701b of the main body portion 701 of the handle restricting member 700 and the back surface (contacted surface portion) of the disk portion 541 of the handle ring 540 are smooth surfaces. Since the rotation position that can be fixed is continuous, it can be fixed at an arbitrary rotation position, and the adjustment width can be secured.

  Even if the contact surface portion 701b is in contact with the back surface (contacted surface portion) of the disc portion 541 and the amount of rotation of the handle ring 540 is fixed, the contact surface portion 701b and the target surface portion Since the abutting surface portions are smooth surfaces, the abutting surfaces can be slid relative to each other. Therefore, even after the rotation amount of the handle ring 540 is fixed, the handle ring 540 The amount of rotation operation can be finely adjusted.

  Here, since the front cover 550 is disposed on the front side of the handle ring 540 (right side in FIG. 23), the player attaches a palm to the outer surface of the front cover 550 when holding the handle ring 540 with fingers. The front cover 550 can be used as a portion (force point) to which a force is applied when the handle base 530 is displaced about the shaft support portion (the shaft 563 and the bearing 523) with respect to the handle mount 520. it can.

  In this case, as shown in FIG. 24, in this embodiment, the pressing surface portion 528a (the pressed surface portion 702a of the pressed surface portion 702a) is supported from the shaft 563 (fulcrum) of the boss member 560 that supports the handle base 530 so that the handle base 530 can be displaced. The distance A to the projecting tip (operation point) is at least smaller than the distance B from the shaft 563 of the boss member 560 to the back surface of the handle ring 540. Therefore, the distance from the shaft 563 (fulcrum) of the boss member 560 to the outer surface (force point) of the front cover 550 is made larger than the distance A.

  That is, since the distance from the fulcrum to the fulcrum can be made larger than the distance from the fulcrum to the action point, even if the force applied to the outer surface of the front cover 550 serving as the force point is small, the force is amplified, The handle regulating member 700 (the pressed surface portion 702a) can be pressed with a greater force by the pressing surface portion 528a serving as the action point. Thereby, the handle restricting member 700 can be firmly brought into contact with the handle ring 540, and the rotation operation amount (rotation position) of the handle ring 540 can be reliably fixed.

  Next, with reference to FIGS. 25 to 27, a switching structure for switching the switching device 600 to a rotatable state or an engaged and fixed state by a push operation of the button member 570 will be described. In the description of the switching structure, FIGS. 28 and 29 are referred to as appropriate.

  25 to 27 are partial cross-sectional side views of the handle device 51. FIG. 25 shows a state where the button member 570 is in the first position, FIG. 26 shows a state where the button member 570 is in the second position, and FIG. 27 shows a state where the button member 570 is in the third position. The

  FIGS. 28 and 29 are schematic front views of the handle device 51 schematically showing the handle ring 540 and the switching device 600. 28A shows a state in which the handle ring 540 is at the initial position θ0 and the switching device 600 is in a rotatable state, and FIG. 28B shows a state in which the handle ring 540 is rotated to the operation position θ1. In FIG. 28C, the handle ring 540 is rotated to the operation position θ1 and the switching device 600 is in the engaged and fixed state. FIG. 29A shows the changed state, and FIG. 29A shows the state where the handle ring 540 is in the range of the operation positions θ0 to θ1 and the switching device 600 is changed to the engaged and fixed state. b) illustrates a state in which the handle ring 540 is at the initial position θ0 and the switching device 600 is changed to the engaged and fixed state.

  As shown in FIGS. 25 to 27, the switching device 600 is inserted into the bearing portion 535 of the handle base 530 as described above, and the connection shaft 575 of the button member 570 is inserted into the connection hole 620 of the switching device 600. It is inserted so as to be relatively movable in the axial direction and not relatively rotatable in the circumferential direction.

  In this embodiment, since the handle shaft support body 574 of the button member 570 is rotatably connected to the shaft body 573, the switching device 600 (main body part 610) rotates relative to the bearing part 575. In this case, in conjunction with the switching device 600, only the member on the handle shaft support 574 side (the handle shaft support 574, the connecting shaft 575, and the pushing piece 576) is rotated, and the member on the shaft 573 side is rotated. The (shaft body 573, the back base 572, and the operation unit 571) can be prevented from rotating. Therefore, it can suppress that the operation part 571 rotates in the palm of a player, and gives a discomfort to a player.

  Further, in the present embodiment, since the connecting shaft 575 of the button member 570 is inserted into the connecting hole 620 of the switching device 600 so as not to be relatively rotatable in the circumferential direction, the switching device 600 rotates with respect to the bearing portion 535. Even in this case, the rotational position (phase) of the pushing piece 576 in the button member 570 with respect to the escape space 661 of the switching device 600 can always be matched.

  As a result, the pusher piece 576 of the button member 570 is bitten in accordance with the push operation of the button member 570 (operation unit 571) regardless of the rotation position (phase) of the switching device 600. It can be reliably moved into the recessed space 651. In other words, the switching device 600 can be engaged and fixed in any rotational position of the handle ring 540, so that the game ball has a desired firing strength. In this case, the operation end point can be changed (set) while maintaining the rotation position (operation amount) of the handle ring 540. As a result, the operation end point can be changed (set) quickly and at an accurate position.

  The handle ring 540 is rotatably supported by the handle shaft support 574 by inserting the handle shaft support 574 of the button member 570 into the center hole 544a. That is, even when the switching device 600 is switched to the engaged and fixed state in which the rotation relative to the bearing portion 535 is not possible, the handle ring 540 has the handle side projection 546 whose regulating projection of the switching device 600 is restricted. Rotation is possible in a rotation direction (direction to return to the initial position) opposite to the rotation direction regulated by contacting the portion 630.

  A button urging spring 590 formed as a coil spring is disposed between the handle ring 540 and the button member 570 in a state of being elastically compressed and deformed, and the urging force (elastic recovery force) causes the button member. 570 is biased away from the handle ring 540.

  As shown in FIG. 25, in the state where the button member 570 is in the first position (the state where the button member 570 is in the initial position where the pushing operation is not performed), the pushing piece 576 of the button member 570 is the escape space of the switching device 600. 661. Therefore, in the switching device 600, the biting spheres 670 a and 670 b are arranged in the escape space 661 by the urging force of the pushing-side urging spring 680, so that the rotation can rotate relative to the bearing portion 535. The movable state is set (see FIGS. 15A and 15C).

  Thus, in a state where the switching device 600 is set in a rotatable state (a state where the button member 570 is in the first position), the switching device 600 is rotatable with respect to the bearing portion 535. As shown in FIGS. 28A and 28B, when the handle ring 540 is rotated in the increasing direction from the initial position θ0 to the operation position θ1, the handle side protrusion 546 of the handle ring 540 is switched to the switching device 600. By pushing the restricting projection 630 in the increasing direction, the switching device 600 is rotated in the increasing direction in conjunction with the handle ring 540. The operation position θ1 is a rotation angle that does not reach the maximum position θmax of the rotation operation range of the handle ring 540. The same applies to the following.

  On the other hand, when the handle ring 540 is rotated in the decreasing direction, the switching device 600 is rotated in the decreasing direction following the handle ring 540 by the biasing force of the switching device biasing spring 539 (see FIG. 7). Is done. For example, as shown in FIGS. 28A and 28B, when the handle ring 540 is rotated in the decreasing direction from the operation position θ1 to the initial position θ0, the switching device 600 is also switched by the switching device biasing spring. The restricting protrusion 630 is rotated in the decreasing direction by the urging force of 539 and is disposed at the rotating position where the restricting protrusion 630 comes into contact with the handle-side protrusion 546.

  That is, as shown in FIG. 25, in a state where the switching device 600 is set in a rotatable state (a state in which the button member 570 is in the first position), the handle ring 540 moves in either the increasing direction or the decreasing direction. Even in the case of the rotation operation, the switching device 600 is rotated in conjunction with (synchronized), and the rotation position (phase) of the handle ring 540 and the switching device 600 are matched (FIG. 28A). And FIG. 28 (b)).

  As shown in FIG. 26, in the state where the button member 570 is in the second position (the state where the button member 570 in the first position is pushed in), the switching device 600 bites the biting spheres 670a and 670b. It is disposed in the space 651 (that is, the biting spheres 670a and 670b are pushed into the biting space 651 by the push-in piece 576 of the button member 570), and is set in the engagement fixed state.

  In a state where the switching device 600 is set to the engagement fixed state, the biting spheres 670 a and 670 b are opposed to the inner peripheral surface of the bearing portion 535 and the biting surface 650 by the biasing force of the biting side biasing spring 690. The switching device 600 (main body portion 610) is in any rotation direction (the arrow A direction and the arrow B direction shown in FIG. 15D). ), The circumferential end of the biting surface 650 acts so as to further bite the biting spheres 670a and 670b between the opposite ends of the biting surface 650 and the inner peripheral surface of the bearing portion 535 (FIG. 15 (b) and FIG. 15 (d)), the rotation of the switching device 600 (main body portion 610) relative to the bearing portion 535 is restricted (blocked).

  Therefore, as shown in FIG. 28B, in the state where the handle ring 540 is rotated to the operation position θ1, the button member 570 is pushed to change the position from the first position to the second position. As shown in FIG. 28C, the device 600 is set in the engagement fixed state, and the switching device 600 is moved to the rotation position corresponding to the operation position θ1 (that is, the button member 570 in the first position is in the second position). The rotation position at the time of change to (1) can be fixed.

  As described above, when the switching device 600 is set in the engagement fixed state and the rotation position thereof is fixed, the handle ring 540 is moved in the decreasing direction as shown in FIGS. Even if it is rotated, the switching device 600 is not interlocked (synchronized) with the rotation of the handle ring 540 and is held at the rotation position corresponding to the operation position θ1. That is, the handle ring 540 has a central hole 544a pivotally supported by the handle shaft support body 574 (see FIG. 26), so that the handle ring 540 is independent of the switching device 600 as shown in FIG. Thus, it can be rotated in the decreasing direction and the operating direction.

  In this case, for example, as shown in FIG. 29B, the handle ring 540 that has been returned to the initial position θ0 in a state where the switching device 600 is held (fixed) at the rotation position corresponding to the operation position θ1. When the rotation operation is performed in the increasing direction, the operation position θ1 is the operation end point. That is, as shown in FIG. 28 (c), when the rotation operation in the increasing direction reaches the operation position θ1, the handle ring 540 is brought into contact with the restricting protrusion 630, and beyond that, Rotation operation in the increasing direction is restricted.

  Here, the setting of the button member 570 in the second position to the first position is performed as follows. That is, after pushing the button member 570 in the second position shown in FIG. 26 to the pushable position (third position) as shown in FIG. 27, the pushing operation is released (decreasing the pushing force or Release the hand). Thereby, the button member 570 is returned from the third position to the first position shown in FIG. 25 by the urging force of the button urging spring 590.

  In this case, for example, as shown in FIG. 29B, in the state where the switching device 600 is held (fixed) at the rotation position corresponding to the operation position θ1, the above-described operation (from the second position to the third position is performed). When the switching device 600 is switched from the engaged and fixed state to the rotatable state and is rotatable with respect to the bearing portion 535, the switching device 600 is attached. In response to the urging force of the urging spring 539, as shown in FIG. 28 (a), the urging spring 539 is returned to the initial position (the rotation position where the restricting protrusion 630 abuts on the handle side protrusion 546).

  Here, the switching device 600 is always rotated (synchronized) with the handle shaft support body 574 and the pushing piece 576 via the coupling between the connection hole 620 and the connection shaft 575, so that the handle ring 540 is rotated. Even in a state where the rotation is being performed, the button member 570 is pressed to switch from the engagement fixed state to the rotatable state (that is, the switching device 600 is returned to the initial position, and the operation end point is set). (Cancellation of change).

  Thus, even when the handle ring 540 is being rotated, it is not necessary to temporarily return the handle ring 540 to the initial position in order to cancel the change (setting) of the operation end point. Therefore, for example, when it becomes necessary to reset the position of the operation end point to another position (for example, fine adjustment), the rotation operation of the handle ring 540 is maintained (that is, the game is continued). The resetting operation can be performed quickly. Alternatively, for example, when a right-handed need arises, the operation end point that restricts the rotation operation of the handle ring 540 in the increasing direction can be canceled while the rotation operation of the handle ring 540 is maintained. Thus, it is possible to quickly form a state in which the handle ring 540 can be rotated in the increasing direction. That is, it is possible to quickly switch to the turning operation of the handle ring 540 in the operation direction that maximizes the launch intensity of the game ball.

  In addition, an operation of switching the switching device 600 from the engagement fixed state to the rotatable state (release operation end point, that is, a return operation for returning the switching device 600 to the initial position), and from the rotatable state to the engaged fixed state. Both the switching operation (the changing operation for changing (setting) the operation end point) are achieved by pressing the button member 570. That is, it can be achieved by operating the same member in the same direction. As a result, the change operation and the return operation can be easily performed. In particular, since the state due to the change operation and the state due to the return operation are switched alternately, it becomes effective to improve operability that these two states can be switched by repeating the same operation. In addition, since the same member is operated in the same direction, the direction in which the button member 570 can be operated can be limited to only one direction. Therefore, the structure can be simplified and the product cost can be reduced. Reduction can be achieved.

  Here, in a state where the button member 570 is in the second position and the third position, as shown in FIGS. 26 and 27, a part of the operation portion 571 of the button member 570 (the top side protruding forward) is moved forward. The cover 550 projects forward (right side in FIGS. 26 and 27) from the edge of the opening 550a. Therefore, when the button member 570 (operation portion 571) in the first position (or second position) is pushed into the second position (or third position), the button member 570 is opened to the front cover 550. There is no need to push it to a position beyond the edge of 550a (that is, a position where the entire operation portion 571 of the button member 570 enters the front cover 550). Thereby, when pushing in the button member 570, it can suppress that the edge part of the opening 550a of the front cover 550 obstructs the movement of a player's hand, and can improve the operativity.

  However, in a state where the button member 570 is in the third position, the entire operation portion 571 of the button member 570 may be configured to be immersed in the front cover 550. In other words, in the third position, the top portion (portion that protrudes most forward) of the operation portion 571 of the button member 570 is positioned axially inward (leftward in FIG. 27) with respect to the edge portion of the opening 550a of the front cover 550. You may form as follows.

  In this case, the button member 570 is pushed from the second position to the third position so that the switching device 600 can be returned to the initial position (that is, the switching device 600 in the engaged and fixed state is changed to a rotatable state). In order to cancel the change (setting) of the operation end point), the button member 570 (operation portion 571) is moved to a position (inside the front cover 550) that exceeds the edge of the opening 550a of the front cover 550 in the axial direction. It is necessary to push in the operation portion 571 of the button member 570 to the position where the entire operation portion 571 enters. Therefore, when the button member 570 is pushed to the third position, the edge portion of the opening 550a of the front cover 550 is prevented from being pushed in (that is, the edge portion of the opening 550a is brought into contact with the player's hand). it can. Thereby, it can suppress that the button member 570 in a 2nd position is inadvertently pushed in to a 3rd position. As a result, it is possible to prevent the position of the operation end point from being changed to a desired rotation position (or the set state is released (or can be released)) by an inadvertent pressing operation of the button member 570.

  Next, referring to FIGS. 30 and 31, the switching device 600 is used to change (set) the operation end point of the handle ring 540 and to change the rotation position of the handle ring 540 with reference to the position of the operation end point. An adjustment method for adjusting (returning to the original rotation position) will be described.

  30 and 31 are schematic views schematically illustrating the state of the rotation operation of the handle device 51. In each figure, the left diagram is a schematic front view of the handle device 51, and the right diagram is the handle. It is a schematic diagram which shows typically the relationship between the rotation position of the ring 540, and the operation end point. 30 and 31, the black triangle (“▲”) indicates the rotational position of the handle ring 540, and the “[first position] or [second position]” is displayed on the button. It means the position of the member 570. The “initial position θ0” is the initial position of the handle ring 540, and the “maximum position θmax” is the maximum position at which the handle ring 540 can be rotated when the operation end point is not changed (set). The “operation end point” is the end point of the turning operation of the handle ring 540 formed by setting the switching device 600 to the engaged and fixed state.

  As shown in FIGS. 30 (a) and 30 (b), the switching device 600 is in a rotatable state when the button member 570 is in the first position (FIGS. 25, 15 (a) and FIG. 30). 15 (c)), the handle ring 540 can be rotated in the range from the initial position θ0 to the maximum position θmax.

  In the state shown in FIGS. 30A and 30B, as a result of adjusting the rotational position of the handle ring 540 according to the gaming state, the handle ring 540 is operated as shown in FIG. When it is determined that the launch intensity of the game ball can be adjusted to a desired launch intensity by setting the position θ1, the player maintains the state shown in FIG. As shown, the button member 570 is set to the second position by the pushing operation of the button member 570. As a result, when the switching device 600 is set in the engaged and fixed state (see FIGS. 26, 15B and 15D), the operation end point is at a position corresponding to the operation position θ1 of the handle ring 540. Changed (set).

  Thus, according to the handle device 51, the operation end point can be set. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 31A, for example, in order to take a break, the rotational position of the handle ring 540 is returned to the initial position θ0. Even if the game is interrupted, the original slide operation position (that is, the rotation position where the launch intensity of the game ball is adjusted to the desired launch intensity and the operation position θ1 before interrupting the gaming machine) It can be stored as “operation end point”.

  Therefore, when the rotation position of the handle ring 540 is adjusted to the original rotation position (that is, the operation position θ1 before the game is interrupted) (when the states of FIGS. 30B and 30C are reproduced). ), As shown in FIG. 31 (b), if the player rotates the handle ring 540 to the operation end point (that is, the rotation operation of the handle ring 540 is restricted by the operation end point, and beyond that, If the rotation operation is performed until the rotation operation becomes impossible, the rotation position of the handle ring 540 can be quickly and easily adjusted to the original rotation position (operation position θ1).

  For example, a method of providing a scale line along the movement locus of the handle ring 540 and rotating the handle ring 540 using the scale line as a target position is conceivable. It is not necessary to make fine adjustment while visually discriminating whether or not the rotational position of 540 coincides with the target position (scale line), and can be accurately adjusted to a desired rotational position. In addition, according to the present embodiment, the rotation operation may be performed up to a position where the rotation operation cannot be performed, and the operation speed of the handle ring 540 can be increased. Thus, it is possible to quickly adjust to a desired rotation position (return to the original rotation position quickly).

  When returning the position of the operation end point to the maximum position θmax, in the state shown in FIG. 31A or 31B, a push-in operation for pushing the button member 570 to a pushable position (third position). After performing the above, by releasing the pushing operation, the button member 570 is returned to the first position, and the position of the operation end point can be returned to the maximum position θmax as shown in FIG.

  Here, the player whose operation end point has been changed (set) ends the game, and as shown in FIG. 31A, the second player starts the game with the operation end point being changed. In some cases, such a second player may suffer disadvantages. That is, the fact that the operation end point has been changed means that the handle ring 540 cannot be rotated to the maximum position θmax as shown in FIG. 31B, and the operation end point has been changed. If the second player does not notice that the game machine ball cannot be fired at the maximum position θmax (maximum launch strength), the player is disadvantaged. Therefore, even in such a case, it is desirable that the second player can easily recognize that the position of the operation end point has been changed when starting the game.

  On the other hand, according to the handle device 51 of the present embodiment, as described above, it is determined whether or not the position of the operation end point has been changed (set) using the confirmation window 550b provided on the front cover 550. It is formed so that a person can easily confirm. Here, a confirmation structure using the confirmation window 550b will be described with reference to FIG.

  32 (a) and 32 (b) are partially enlarged cross-sectional views of the handle device 51. In FIG. 32 (a), the state in which the button member 570 is in the first position is shown in FIG. 32 (b). Each state where the button member 570 is in the second position is illustrated.

  As shown in FIGS. 32 (a) and 32 (b), according to the handle device 51, the position of the operation end point is not changed (that is, the position of the operation end point coincides with the maximum position). The state shown in FIG. 32A in which the button member 570 is in the first position) and the state in which the position of the operation end point is changed (that is, the state shown in FIG. 32B in which the button member 570 is in the second position). ) And the push-in position of the button member 570 are different. Therefore, the player can identify whether or not the position of the operation end point has been changed based on the difference in the pressing position of the button member 570. The player can be prevented from playing a game without noticing that the position of the operation end point has been changed, and the player can be less likely to suffer a disadvantage.

  However, in the handle device 51 according to the present embodiment, the front cover 550 and the button member 570 protruding from the opening 550a of the front cover 550 are integrally formed to form one hemisphere (FIG. 5). 6 and FIG. 6), even if the button member 570 is pushed into the second position, since one hemisphere is formed as a whole, the player cannot clearly recognize the difference in pushing amount of the button member 570. There is a fear.

  On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the confirmation windows 550b and 554b are changed depending on whether or not the position of the operation end point is changed (that is, whether the button member 570 is in the first position or the second position). Since the form of the object visually recognized through is made different, the judgment criterion can be binarized, and it is easy to clearly distinguish the two states. This allows the player to easily and reliably identify whether the position of the operation end point has been changed.

Specifically, as described above, in the button member 570, the outer peripheral surface of the inner fitting wall portion 577 is formed in black, while the outer peripheral surface of the operation portion 571 is formed in white. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 32 (a), in the state where the button member 570 is in the first position, a form in which the player visually recognizes the confirmation window 550b, 554b of the front cover 550 is provided. On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 32 (b), when the button member 570 is in the second position, the player can visually recognize the outer peripheral surface (black) through the confirmation window 550b of the front cover 550. The outer peripheral surface (white) of the part 571 can be used.
Accordingly, the player can determine whether the button member 570 is disposed at the first position or the second position based on the difference in color visually recognized through the confirmation windows 550b and 554b (that is, the handle). It is possible to easily identify whether or not the position of the operation end point of the ring 540 has been changed.

  In this case, an inner fitting wall portion 577 of the button member 570 is inserted into the cylindrical guide portion 554 of the front cover 550 on the inner peripheral side, and the button member 570 is in the first position as shown in FIG. In this state, since the outer peripheral surface of the inner fitting wall portion 577 faces the inner peripheral surface of the cylindrical guide portion 554, the confirmation window 554b can be shielded by the inner fitting wall portion 577. That is, it is difficult for light to be led out from the inside of the handle device 51 to the outside through the confirmation window 554b. Further, also in the route from the confirmation window 554b to the confirmation window 550b, such a route is disposed in a closed space formed by the outer wall surface of the front cover 550 and the handle ring 540, and thus the confirmation window 550b from the inside of the handle device 51. It is difficult for light to be led out to the outside. Therefore, in a state where the button member 570 is in the first position, the form (black on the outer peripheral surface of the inner fitting wall portion 577) that is visually recognized by the player via the confirmation windows 550b and 554b can be made darker.

  On the other hand, the operation portion 571 of the button member 570 is formed in a hemispherical shape. As shown in FIG. 32B, when the button member 570 is in the second position, the outer peripheral surface of the operation portion 571 is a cylindrical guide portion. Since it faces the inner peripheral surface of 554, a space opened outward (right side in FIG. 32B) can be formed below the confirmation window 554b (the outer peripheral surface side of the operation portion 571). That is, light can be introduced from the outside from the space below the confirmation window 554b into the space between the confirmation window 554b and the confirmation window 550b. In addition, the outer peripheral surface of the operation unit 571 can be in a state of being irradiated with light. Therefore, in a state where the button member 570 is in the second position, the form (white on the outer peripheral surface of the operation unit 571) that is visually recognized by the player via the confirmation windows 550b and 554b can be brightened.

  As a result, as shown in FIG. 32A, the button member 570 is in the second position, as shown in FIG. It is possible to further increase the difference in contrast with the form visually recognized by the player in a certain state. Thereby, since it is easy to distinguish two states more clearly, it is possible to easily and surely identify whether or not the position of the operation end point has been changed.

  Next, a second embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. In the first embodiment, the case where the change of the operation end point and the release thereof are performed by the pushing operation of the button member 570 has been described, but the change of the operation end point and the release thereof in the second embodiment are performed on the handle mounting base 520. This is done by displacing the handle base 530 (handle ring 540). In addition, the same code | symbol is attached | subjected about the part same as 1st Embodiment, and the description is abbreviate | omitted.

  FIG. 33A is a top view of the handle device 2051 in the second embodiment, and FIG. 33B is a front view of the handle device 2051. FIG. 34 is a side view of the handle device 2051 when viewed in the direction of arrow XXXII in FIG. 33A and 34, the front surface of the lower dish unit 15 is schematically illustrated by a two-dot chain line.

  As shown in FIGS. 33 and 34, the handle device 2051 includes a handle mounting base 2520, a handle base 530, a handle ring 2540, a front cover 2550, an operation / use display piece 2570, and a switching device 2600 (from FIG. 38). 40), and is projected in a horizontal posture from the front surface of the pachinko machine 10 (see FIG. 1).

  As in the first embodiment, the handle mounting base 2520 and the handle base 530 are fixed so that the back surface (left side in FIG. 33A) of the handle mounting base 2520 is fixed to the front surface of the lower plate unit 15, and one of the handle mounting base 2520 and the handle base 530 is pivoted on the other side. The handle base 530 is integrated with the handle ring 2540 and can be displaced in the vertical direction with respect to the handle mounting base 2520 around the pivotally supported portion (see FIG. 53). (See FIG. 55).

  The handle device 2051 of this embodiment displaces the handle base 530 in the vertical direction with respect to the handle mounting base 2520, thereby restricting the rotation of the handle ring 540 by the pressing of the handle restricting member 700 (restriction of returning to the initial position). ) Can be executed, and switching (ie, change (setting) and release of the operation end point) of the switching device 2600 (ie, the rotatable state or the engagement fixed state) can be executed.

  The handle mounting base 2520 is provided with an operation / display piece 2570. The operation / use display piece 2570 is a member for displaying whether or not the position of the operation end point has been changed (set), and is formed as a rod-like body bent in an L shape. To the upper surface.

  On the side of the handle mounting base 2520, a shaft 2802 of a linear motion conversion member 2800 that is rotated according to the state of the switching device 2600 (rotatable state or engageable state) is projected. Further, the base end of the operation / use display piece 2570 is fixed to the shaft 2802 (the connecting square portion 2802a). Therefore, when the state of the switching device 2600 is switched and the shaft 2802 is rotated, the extending tip of the operation / display piece 2570 is moved back and forth along the upper surface of the handle mounting base 2520 (FIG. 33 (a) left and right direction). And is held at the first position or the second position according to the state of the switching device 2600.

  On the upper surface of the handle mounting base 2520, a first scale portion S1 and a second scale portion S2 that are triangular when viewed from above are displayed. The first scale portion S1 is a display indicating that the switching device 2600 is in a rotatable state (that is, the change of the operation end point is released), and the switch member 2590 (see FIG. 42) is at the first position. This is coincident with the extended tip of the operation / display piece 2570 in the arranged state. The second scale portion S2 is a display indicating that the switching device 2600 is in the engaged and fixed state (that is, the position of the operation end point has been changed (set)), and the switch member 2590 is disposed at the second position. It is made to correspond to the extended tip of the operation / use display piece 2570 in the closed state.

  Therefore, the player determines whether or not the position of the operation end point has been changed based on the relationship between the extended tip of the operation-use display piece 2570 and the display (when the extended tip matches the first scale portion S1). The operation end point is released, and the position of the operation end point is changed when the extended tip coincides with the second scale portion S2.

  In this case, since the first scale portion S1 and the second scale portion S2 are arranged on the upper surface side of the handle mounting base 2520 in the assembled state of the handle device 2051, the player facing the pachinko machine 10 to play is For example, when starting a game, the player can easily recognize the positional relationship between the operation / use display piece 2570 and the first scale portion S1 and the second scale portion S2.

  Here, the operation / use display piece 2570 also serves as an operation unit operated by the player in order to switch the switching device 2600 to a rotatable state or an engaged / fixed state. That is, in the present embodiment, in addition to the handle base 530 being pushed downward with respect to the handle mount 2520, the operation / display piece 2570 is also rotated about the shaft 2802 (the connection square portion 2802a). The switching device 2600 can be switched between states (rotatable state or engaged fixed state).

  In this case, the operation / display piece 2570 extends from the left side (lower side in FIG. 33 (a)) to the upper surface (front side in FIG. 33 (a)) of the handle mounting base 2520 in the assembled state of the handle device 2051. Therefore, the player can easily operate the operation / display display piece 2570 with the opposite hand (that is, the left hand) even during the game (that is, even when the handle ring 2540 is rotated with the right hand). Can be rotated. Note that the state switching structure of the switching device 2600 will be described later.

  The front cover 2550 is formed in a hemispherical shape that protrudes forward (rightward in FIG. 33A and FIG. 34), and is attached to the front surface of the handle ring 540.

  Next, the handle base 530 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 35 is a front perspective view of the handle mounting base 2520 and the handle base 530, corresponding to the front perspective view of the handle device 2051 with the handle ring 2540 and the front cover 2550 (both see FIGS. 33 and 34) removed. To do.

  As shown in FIG. 35, the handle base 530 is formed the same as in the first embodiment. A switching device 2600 is rotatably inserted into the inner peripheral side of the bearing portion 535 (see FIG. 53). Similar to the switching device 600 in the first embodiment, the switching device 2600 is a member for changing (setting) the position of the operation end point of the handle ring 2540, and the switching device 2600 can be rotated relative to the bearing portion 535. It is possible to switch between two states: a state in which rotation is possible and an engagement fixed state in which relative rotation is impossible.

  The switching device 2600 differs from the switching device 600 according to the first embodiment in the formation positions of the biting surface 250 and the flank surface 260 (the biting space 251 and the clearance space 261) (in the first embodiment, on the front side). Other configurations are the same except that they are formed open (see FIG. 7), but are formed open on the back side in the second embodiment.

  Therefore, when the switching device 2600 is in a rotatable state, the switching projection 2630 is pushed in the increasing direction by the handle side projection 546, so that the switching device 2600 also increases in the bearing portion 535. It is rotated. On the other hand, when the state of the switching device 2600 is switched to the engaged and fixed state, the relative rotation with respect to the bearing portion 535 of the switching device 2600 becomes impossible (fixed to the bearing portion 535), thereby Movement of 546 in the increasing direction is restricted by the restriction protrusion 630. As a result, the turning operation of the handle ring 2540 in the increasing direction is restricted. That is, the position (rotation position) where the state of the switching device 2600 is switched from the rotatable state to the engaged and fixed state is the position of the operation end point of the handle ring 2540.

  Next, the handle ring 2540 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 36 is a rear perspective view of the handle ring 2540.

  As shown in FIG. 36, the handle ring 2540 is different from the handle ring of the first embodiment except that the inner diameter of the central hole 2544a is different (smaller than the inner diameter of the central hole 544a in the first embodiment). It is formed the same as 540.

  Thus, by making the inner diameter dimension of the central hole 2544a small, a flat surface is secured on the back surface of the main driving gear 544. In the second embodiment, by sliding on the flat surface on the back surface of the main driving gear 544, the movement of the switching device 600 is allowed and the movement in the axial direction is restricted on the flat surface on the back surface of the main driving gear 544. This restricts the switching device 600 from coming out from the bearing portion 535 to the front side (see FIG. 53).

  Note that the handle shaft support body 2551a (see FIG. 37) of the front cover 2550 is inserted into the center hole 2544a, whereby the handle ring 2540 is rotatably held by the handle base 530 via the front cover 2550. (Supported) (see FIG. 53).

  Next, the front cover 2550 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 37 is a rear perspective view of the front cover 550.

  As shown in FIG. 37, the front cover 2550 is formed in a hemispherical container shape whose inside is recessed toward the front side (that is, the back side is opened), and a cylindrical shaft is formed on the inner wall surface corresponding to the top portion thereof. A support base 2551 is erected toward the back side. A handle shaft support body 2551a for supporting the handle ring 2540 is erected on the rear end side of the shaft support base 2551.

  The handle shaft support body 2551a has an outer diameter dimension set to be slightly smaller than an inner diameter dimension of the center hole 2544a of the handle ring 2540, thereby pivotally supporting the handle ring 2540. Further, the handle shaft support body 2551a has an outer diameter dimension smaller than that of the shaft support base 2551, and a stepped surface is formed at a connection portion between the two. With this stepped surface, the handle ring 2540 (the main driving gear 544 and the disc portion 541) is sandwiched between the switching device 2600 and the movement of the handle ring 2540 is restricted while allowing the handle ring 2540 to rotate (see FIG. 53). ).

  Next, the switching device 2600 will be described with reference to FIGS. 38 (a) is a front view of the switching device 2600, FIG. 38 (b) is a side view of the switching device 2600 in the direction of arrow XXXVIIIb in FIG. 38 (a), and FIG. It is a rear view of the switching apparatus 2600 in the arrow XXXVIIIc direction view of FIG.38 (b). 39A is a cross-sectional view of the switching device 2600 along the line XXXIXa-XXXIXa in FIG. 38A, and FIG. 39B is a side view of the switching device 2600 in the direction of arrow XXXIXb in FIG. FIG. 38 and 39, the illustration of the biting spheres 670a and 670b, the pushing side biasing spring 680, and the biting side biasing spring 690 is omitted.

  As shown in FIGS. 38 and 39, the switching device 2600 is the same as that of the first embodiment except that the formation positions of the biting surface 650 and the relief surface 660 formed by recessing the outer peripheral surface of the main body 610 are different. It is formed in the same manner as the switching device 600.

  Specifically, in the first embodiment, the flank 660 is connected to the front surface of the main body 610, and the biting surface 650 is disposed on the back side of the flank 660 (the back side of the main body 610). Thus, the escape space 661 and the biting space 651 are formed as a space opened to the front side of the main body 610 (see FIGS. 13 and 14), but in the second embodiment, the escape surface 660 is the main body 610. A biting surface 650 is provided on the rear side (the front side (front side) side of the main body portion 610) of the relief surface 660 while being continuous with the back surface (lower side surface in FIG. 39 (a)). The recessed space 651 is formed as a space opened on the back side (lower side in FIG. 39A) of the main body 610. Therefore, the pushing piece 2583 for pushing in the biting spheres 670a and 670b is disposed on the back side of the main body 610 (see FIG. 53).

  Next, with reference to FIG. 40, a description will be given of a rotatable state and a restricted fixed state of the switching device 2600 and a switching structure between these states.

  40A and 40B are cross-sectional views of the switching device 2600 and correspond to a cross section taken along line XXXIXa-XXXVIXa in FIG. 40C is a rear view of the switching device 2600 as viewed in the direction of the arrow XLc in FIG. 40A, and FIG. 40D is a rear view of the switching device 2600 as viewed in the direction of the arrow XLd in FIG. FIG.

  40 shows a state in which the switching device 2600 is mounted (inserted) on the bearing portion 535 of the handle base 530. 40 (a) and 40 (c), the state where the biting spheres 670a and 670b are arranged in the escape space 661 is shown in FIGS. 40 (b) and 40 (d). The state in which 670b is disposed in the biting space 651 is illustrated.

  As shown in FIG. 40, the switching device 2600 operates in the same manner as the switching device 600 in the first embodiment. That is, as shown in FIGS. 40A and 40C, the biting spheres 670a and 670b are arranged in the escape space 661 (that is, the biting spheres 670a and 670b by the pressing piece 2583 of the pressing member 2580). Is not pushed into the biting space 651 (see FIG. 53), the gap between the inner peripheral surface of the bearing portion 535 and the biting surface 650 and the biting are similar to the case of the first embodiment. Since the engagement with the recessed spheres 670a and 670b is not formed, the switching device 2600 (main body portion 610) is set in a rotatable state and is bearing in either direction of arrows A and B shown in FIG. 40 (c). It can be rotated relative to the portion 535.

  On the other hand, as shown in FIGS. 40B and 40D, the biting spheres 670a and 670b are disposed in the biting space 651 (that is, the biting spheres 670a and 670a are pushed by the pressing pieces 2583 of the pressing member 2580). In a state where 670b is pushed into the biting space 651 (see FIG. 54), the inner peripheral surface of the bearing portion 535 is applied by the biasing force of the biting side biasing spring 690, as in the first embodiment. And the biting surface 650, the biting spheres 670a and 670b are bitten in gaps that gradually decrease in the circumferential direction, and the switching device 2600 (main body 610) is shown by an arrow A in FIG. When rotating in the direction (or B direction), the circumferential end of the biting surface 650 on the rear side (rotation direction delay side) of the main body 610 (lower side in FIG. 15D) side( )) Acts so as to further engage the engaging sphere 670b (or the engaging sphere 670a) between the bearing portion 535 and the inner peripheral surface of the bearing portion 535, thereby switching the device 2600 ( The relative rotation of the main body 610) in the arrow A direction (or B direction) is prevented.

  Next, the pushing member 2580 will be described with reference to FIG. 41 (a) is a front view of the pushing member 2580, FIG. 41 (b) is a side view of the pushing member 2580 in the arrow XLIb direction view of FIG. 41 (a), and FIG. It is sectional drawing of the pushing member 2580 in the XLIc-XLIc line | wire of Fig.41 (a).

  As shown in FIG. 41, the push-in member 2580 includes a disk-shaped base body 2581, a connecting shaft 2582 and a push-in piece 2583 disposed in front of the base body 2581, and a bearing portion of the handle base 530. It is inserted into 535 and disposed between the back side of the switching device 2600 and the front side of the switch member 2590 (see FIG. 53). The connecting shaft 2582 and the pushing piece 2583 are integrally formed with the base body 2581.

  The outer diameter of the base body 2581 is set to be slightly smaller than the inner diameter of the bearing portion 535 of the handle base 530, and is pushed into the switch member 2590 from the back side to the front side (switching device 600). The bearing portion 535 can be slid in the axial direction toward it (see FIGS. 53 to 55).

  The connection shaft 2582 is a part formed as a trapezoidal shaft body inserted into the connection hole 620 of the switching device 2600 (see FIGS. 53 to 55), and extends on the axis of the base body 2581 (see FIG. 53). That is, it is formed concentrically with the base body 2581). The connecting shaft 2582 is formed as a trapezoidal hole corresponding to the connecting hole 620 of the switching device 2600. Therefore, the connecting shaft 2582 is coupled to the connecting hole 620 of the switching device 2600 so as to be relatively movable in the axial direction and not relatively rotatable in the circumferential direction.

  Further, since the connecting shaft 2582 is formed as a trapezoidal shaft body, the connecting shaft 2582 and the connecting hole 620 can be coupled so as not to be rotatable relative to each other, and the rotational position (phase) of both of them can be positioned. (The phase that can be combined by both is restricted to only one location). That is, in the assembly process of the handle device 2051, it is necessary to connect the connecting shaft 2582 and the connecting hole 620 after matching the rotational direction position of the pushing piece 2583 with the escape space 661 of the switching device 2600. (See FIGS. 53 to 55) In the present embodiment, the rotational direction position (phase) of the connecting shaft 2582 and the connecting hole 620 is positioned at one place, so that the rotational direction position is wrong (the pushing piece 2583). Can be avoided in a state where the rotational direction position does not coincide with the clearance space 661 of the switching device 2600. As a result, it is possible to improve the efficiency of the assembly work and suppress the assembly failure.

  The pushing piece 2583 is a part for pushing the biting spheres 670 a and 670 b of the switching device 2600 into the biting space 651 (see FIGS. 53 to 55), and on the axis of the base body 2581 on the side of the connecting shaft 2582. And a plate shape having a cross-sectional shape corresponding to the biting space 651 of the switching device 2600 (that is, a shape that can be inserted into the biting space 651). Accordingly, when the base body 2581 is pushed from the back side toward the switching device 2600 side by the switch member 2590, the biting spheres 670a and 670b are pushed into the biting space 651 by the extended distal end surface of the pushing piece 2583.

  Note that, as described above, the push-in member 2580 has the connecting shaft 2582 coupled to the connecting hole 620 of the switching device 2600 so as not to be relatively rotatable. Therefore, since the pushing member 2580 and the switching device 2600 are integrally rotated through the coupling of the coupling shaft 2582 and the coupling hole 620, the phase of the pushing piece 2583 and the escape space 661 is always matched. Can be maintained. That is, even when the switching device 2600 is rotated to any rotation position (phase) with respect to the handle base 530 (bearing portion 535), when the switching device 2600 is pressed by the switch member 2590, the switching device 2600 is pushed. The biting spheres 670 a and 670 b of the switching device 2600 can be pushed into the biting space 651 by the piece 2583.

  Next, the switch member 2590 will be described with reference to FIGS. Fig.42 (a) is a front view of the switch member 2590, FIG.42 (b) is a side view of the switch member 2590 in the arrow XLIIb direction view of Fig.42 (a), FIG.42 (c) is shown. It is sectional drawing of the switch member 2590 in the XLIIc-XLIIc line | wire of Fig.42 (a).

  As shown in FIG. 42, the switch member 2590 includes a cylindrical base body 2591, a columnar transmission rod 2592 inserted through the inner periphery of the base body 2591, and between the transmission rod 2592 and the base body 2591. And a transmission rod biasing spring 2593 that is elastically compressed to impart an elastic recovery force in the extending direction to the transmission rod 2592. The transmission rod 2592 has a first position and a second position. It is formed so that it can be held at two positions (see FIG. 47).

  43 (a) is a front view of the base body 2591, and FIG. 43 (b) is a cross-sectional view of the base body 2591 along the XLIIIb-XLIIIb line in FIG. 43 (a).

  As shown in FIG. 43, the base member 2591 is a portion that is fitted and fixed to the bearing portion 535 of the handle base 530, and an insertion hole 2591a is formed through the center. A guide groove 2591b that is a groove for holding the transmission rod 2592 at the two positions of the first position or the second position is formed in the inner peripheral surface of the insertion hole 2591a. In addition, the holding structure of the transmission rod 2592 using the guide groove 2591b will be described later.

  44 (a) is a side view of the transmission rod 2592, and FIG. 44 (b) is a cross-sectional view of the transmission rod 2592 along the XLIVb-XLIVb line in FIG. 44 (a).

  As shown in FIG. 44, the transmission rod 2592 is a member that is inserted into the insertion hole 2591a (see FIG. 43) of the base body 2591, and is formed in a columnar shape with a circular cross section. Guide projections 2592a are projected from a plurality of locations (three locations in the present embodiment) on the outer peripheral surface of the cylindrical body. Each guide protrusion 2592a is a part for moving along the guide groove 2591b of the base body 2591. Each guide protrusion 2592a is formed in the same shape, and is arranged at equal intervals in the circumferential direction (120 degree intervals in this embodiment). .

  A flange-shaped flange portion 2591b is formed to project radially outward from the outer peripheral surface of the transmission rod 2592 on one axial side (the lower side in FIG. 44 (a)). The flange portion 2591b functions as a seating surface for receiving a biasing force of a transmission rod biasing spring 2593 (see FIG. 42) interposed between the base body 2591 and the transmission rod 2592. That is, the transmission rod 2592 is always urged in the direction in which the flange portion 2592b is separated from the base body 2591 (downward in FIG. 42B) by the elastic recovery force in the extension direction of the transmission rod urging spring 2593. ing.

  Both ends of the transmission rod 2592 in the axial direction (upper side and lower side in FIG. 44 (a)) are formed as hemispherical spherical surfaces. In particular, the end of the transmission rod 2592 on the side where the flange portion 2591b is formed (the lower side in FIG. 44A) is formed as a hemispherical spherical surface, so that the transmission rod 2592 can be stably moved (slid). be able to. That is, in the present embodiment, the transmission rod 2592 is moved (slid) in the linear direction along the insertion hole 2591a of the base body 2591, while the linear motion conversion member 2800 that presses the transmission rod 2592 has a shaft support portion. (The shaft 2802 and the bearing 2529) are displaced in the center, and the relative positional relationship between the two is indefinite, the pressing surface portion 2804 of the linear motion conversion member 2800 is formed as a flat surface, and the end of the transmission rod 2592 The portion is formed as a spherical surface that bulges toward the pressing surface portion 2804, so that the contact position between the two is moved along with the displacement about the shaft support portion (the shaft 563 and the bearing 523) of the linear motion conversion member 2800, A force component for moving (sliding) the transmission rod 2592 in a linear direction along the insertion hole 2591a of the base body 2591 can be continuously generated. . Thereby, clogging of the transmission rod 2592 in the insertion hole 2591a can be suppressed, and the transmission rod 2592 can be moved stably.

  Further, the end of the transmission rod 2592 opposite to the side on which the flange portion 2592b is formed (upper side in FIG. 44A) is formed as a hemispherical spherical surface, so that the handle ring 2540 is rotated. It is possible to improve the operational feeling and improve the durability of the switching device 2600. That is, the base body 2581 of the push-in member 2580 is a member that is rotated as the handle ring 2540 is rotated, and the end of the transmission rod 2592 is always in contact with the back surface of the base body 2581. Yes. Accordingly, by making the end portion of the transmission rod 2592 hemispherical, the rigidity of the transmission rod 2592 can be ensured and the contact area with the back surface of the base body 2581 can be reduced. The rotation resistance generated between the base body 2581 and the back surface of the base body 2581 can be reduced, and as a result, the operational feeling when the handle ring 540 is rotated can be improved. Further, since the reaction force acting on the transmission rod 2592 when the base body 2581 is rotated can be reduced, the transmission rod 2592 is rotated by the reaction force, and the guide protrusion 2592a or the guide groove 2591b (FIG. 44 and FIG. 44). 45) can be prevented from occurring.

  FIG. 45 is a developed plan view illustrating the inner peripheral surface of the insertion hole 2591a of the base body 2591 in a flat manner. Note that, in FIG. 45, in order to simplify the drawing and facilitate understanding, the reference numerals for the respective portions of the guide groove 2591b are omitted.

  As shown in FIG. 45, the guide groove 2591b of the base body 2591 is formed with periodicity along the circumferential direction (left-right direction in FIG. 45) of the insertion hole 2591a. Specifically, the guide groove 2591b has a shape in which the range XLVI corresponding to the range of the central angle of 120 degrees is repeated in the circumferential direction (a shape in which three shapes of the range XLVI are arranged in the circumferential direction). Therefore, the three guide protrusions 2592a of the transmission rod 2592 are guided by the guide grooves 2591b in different ranges XLVI.

  Next, referring to FIG. 46, the guide protrusion 2592a of the transmission rod 2592 is guided in the guide groove 2591b of the base body 2591, whereby the switch member 2590 (transmission rod 2592) is held in the first position or the second position. The structure will be described. In this description, FIGS. 47 and 53 to 55 are appropriately referred to.

  FIG. 46 is a partially enlarged development view of the guide groove 2591b illustrated by partially enlarging the range XLVI in FIG. FIG. 47A to FIG. 47C are side views of the switch member 2590. 47A corresponds to a state in which the switch member 2590 (transmission rod 2592) is disposed at the first position and the pushing member 2580 is not pushed (see FIG. 53), and FIG. Corresponds to a state in which the switch member 2590 (transmission rod 2592) is disposed at the second position and the pushing member 2580 is pushed. FIG. 47B shows a state in which the switch member 2590 (transmission rod 2592) is disposed at the third position through which the switch member 2590 (transmission rod 2592) passes when transitioning from the first position to the second position (or from the second position to the first position). Corresponding to

  As shown in FIG. 46, in a state where the guide protrusion 2592a is located at the position P1 of the guide groove 2591b, the switch rod 2590 is disposed at the first position in the switch member 2590 (see FIG. 47 (a)). In this state, the guide protrusion 2592a is pressed against the first wall portion Wa of the guide groove 2591b by the biasing force of the transmission rod urging spring 2593, and is held at the position P1, whereby the transmission rod 2592 is held at the first position. The

  In this state, the transmission rod 2592 is not projected from the front surface of the base body 2591, and the pushing member 2580 is not pushed into the switching device 2600 side (see FIG. 53). 670a and 670b are disposed in the escape space 661 and set in a rotatable state.

  From the state in which the guide protrusion 2592a is located at the position P1 of the guide groove 2591b (that is, the state in which the transmission rod 2592 is disposed at the first position (see FIGS. 47A and 53)), the handle ring 540 (handle base 530). ) Is displaced downward, and the transmission rod 2592 is pushed by the linear motion conversion member 2800 from the back side toward the pushing member 2580 (ie, in the direction of arrow G in FIG. 47A), the guide protrusion 2592a is guided to the guide groove 2591b. (Path L1), and hits the rising inclined wall portion Wb. When the handle ring 540 is further displaced downward, and the transmission rod 2592 is further pushed by the linear motion conversion member 2800 from the back side toward the pushing member 2580, the guide protrusion 2592a extends along the rising inclined wall portion Wb of the guide groove 2591b. Guided (path L2) and hits the guide regulating wall Wc at the position Pa. This state corresponds to the state where the transmission rod 2592 is disposed at the third position (see FIG. 47B and FIG. 55).

  After the guide protrusion 2592a hits the guide restriction wall Wc at the position Pa of the guide groove 2591b (see FIG. 47B and FIG. 55), the player loosens the operation force, thereby the handle ring 540 (handle base 530). ) Is released and the linear motion conversion member 2800 is retracted (see FIG. 55), the transmission rod 2592 is pulled back by the urging force of the transmission rod urging spring 2593 (FIG. 47 (b) arrow H direction). As a result, the guide protrusion 2592a is guided along the shape of the guide groove 2591b (path L3), hits the downwardly inclined wall part Wd, is guided along the downwardly inclined wall part Wd, and reaches the position P2 (path). L4).

  In a state where the guide protrusion 2592a is located at the position P2 of the guide groove 2591b, the transmission rod 2592 is disposed at the second position (see FIGS. 47 (c) and 55). In this state, the guide protrusion 2592a is pressed against the second wall portion We by the urging force of the transmission rod urging spring 2593, and is held at the position P2, whereby the transmission rod 2592 is held at the second position.

  In this state, since the transmission rod 2592 protrudes from the front surface of the base body 2591, the pushing member 2580 is pushed toward the switching device 2600 side (see FIG. 55). The ball spheres 670a and 670b are pushed into the biting space 651 and set to the engaged and fixed state.

  From the state where the guide protrusion 2592a is located at the position P2 of the guide groove 2591b (that is, the state where the transmission rod 2592 is disposed at the second position (see FIGS. 47 (c) and 55), the handle ring 540 (handle base 530) When the transmission rod 2592 is pushed downward from the back side by the linear motion conversion member 2800 toward the pushing member 2580 (that is, in the direction of arrow G in FIG. 47 (c)), the guide protrusion 2592a is inserted into the guide groove 2591b. Guided along the shape (path L5) and hits the rising inclined wall portion Wf, the handle ring 540 is further displaced downward, and the transmission rod 2592 is further pushed from the back side toward the pushing member 2580 by the linear motion conversion member 2800. As a result, the guide protrusion 2592a is guided along the rising inclined wall portion Wf (path L6) and guided at the position Pb. Abuts the Seikabe unit Wg. That is, the transmission rod 2592 is disposed in the third position (see FIG. 47 (b) and FIG. 54).

  After the guide protrusion 2592a hits the guide restriction wall Wg at the position Pb of the guide groove 2591b (see FIG. 47B and FIG. 54), the player loosens the operating force, so that the handle ring 540 (handle base 530) ) Is released and the linear motion conversion member 2800 is retracted (see FIG. 55), the transmission rod 2592 is pulled back by the urging force of the transmission rod urging spring 2593 (FIG. 47 (b) arrow H direction). As a result, the guide protrusion 2592a is guided along the shape of the guide groove 2591b (path L7), hits the descending inclined wall part Wh, is guided along the descending inclined wall part Wh, and reaches the position P1 (path). L8). That is, the transmission rod 2592 is disposed (returned) to the first position (see FIGS. 47A and 53).

  Next, the handle mounting base 2520 and the linear motion conversion member 2800 will be described with reference to FIGS. 48 to 52. 48 is a rear perspective view of the handle base 530, the handle mounting base 2520, and the linear motion converting member 2800 in an exploded state. FIG. 49 is an assembled state of the handle base 530, the handle mounting base 2520, and the linear motion converting member 2800. It is a rear perspective view.

  48 and 49 show a state in which the variable resistor, the firing stop switch operation unit 440, and the like are removed, and in FIG. 48, the positional relationship between the shaft 563 and the bearing 523 and the shaft 2802 and the bearing 2529. Are schematically illustrated using two-dot chain lines.

  As shown in FIGS. 48 and 49, a linear motion conversion member 2800 is disposed on the handle mounting base 2520 so as to face the back side of the handle base 530. The linear motion conversion member 2800 moves the transmission rod 2592 of the switch member 2590 to the rear side in accordance with the displacement of the handle base 530 relative to the handle mounting base 2520 (displacement downward about the shaft support portion (the shaft 563 and the bearing 523)). Is a member for pushing toward the pushing member 2580 (see FIGS. 53 to 55), and is disposed on the handle mounting base 2520 in a state in which the shaft support portion (the shaft 2802 and the bearing 2529) can be displaced. The Here, the handle mounting base 2520 will be described with reference to FIGS.

  FIG. 50 is a perspective view of the handle mounting base 2520 in an exploded state. FIG. 51A is a perspective view of the handle mounting base 2520 in the assembled state, and FIG. 51B is an inner side view of the first main body 2520a.

  As shown in FIGS. 50 and 51, the handle mounting base 2520 (first main body 2520a and second main body 2520b) is different from the handle mounting base 520 (first main body 520a and second main body 520b) in the first embodiment. Other configurations are the same except that a bearing portion 2529 is further provided (added).

  The bearing portion 2529 is a bearing portion (concave portion) for pivotally supporting the shaft 2802 of the linear motion conversion member 2800, and provided on the inner wall surfaces of the first main body 2520a and the second main body 2520b, A pair is arranged to face each other. When the shaft 2802 of the linear motion conversion member 2800 is pivotally supported by the bearing 2529, the linear motion conversion member 2800 is displaced (oscillated) with respect to the handle mounting base 2520 with the pivotally supported portion as a center (fulcrum). , Rotation) is possible (see FIGS. 53 to 55).

  Note that one of the pair of bearing portions 2529 (on the first main body 2520a side) has a locking claw portion 2529a protruding from the outer peripheral surface. The locking claw portion 2529a is engaged with an end portion of a linear motion conversion member urging spring 2890 for applying an urging force to the linear motion conversion member 2800 (see FIG. 48). Further, as shown in FIG. 51A, the other bearing portion 2529 (the second main body 2520b side) of the bearing portions 2529 of the pair of bearing portions 2529 has a shaft support hole whose handle mounting base 2520 (second It is formed through the wall surface of the main body 2520b). As a result, the end portion of the shaft portion 2802 of the linear motion conversion member 2800 protrudes outward from the wall surface of the handle mounting base 2520 (see FIG. 49).

  Returning to FIG. 48 and FIG. The linear motion conversion member 2800 is used to push the switch member 2590 toward the push-in member 2580 in accordance with the displacement about the shaft support portion (the shaft 563 and the bearing 523) of the handle base 530 with respect to the handle mounting base 2520. It is a member (see FIGS. 53 to 55), and is arranged in a posture in which the shafts 563 and 2802 are parallel to each other below the boss member 560 while facing the back side of the handle base 530.

  The boss member 560 is formed in a hollow shape in which the protruding portion 562 has an opening below, and the linear motion conversion member 2800 is disposed below the boss member 560 so that the protruding portion 562 of the boss member 560 is within the protruding portion 562. The formed space is used as a space for displacing the pressing surface portion 2804 (see FIG. 53). Thereby, even if it is in the limited space in the handle | steering-wheel mount 2520, the linear motion conversion member 2800 can be enlarged. Here, with reference to FIG. 52, the detailed structure of the linear motion conversion member 2800 will be described.

  FIG. 52A is a side view of the linear motion conversion member 2800 in the direction of the arrow LIIa in FIG. 48, and FIG. 52B is the side view of the linear motion conversion member 2800 in the direction of the arrow LIIb in FIG. FIG. 52 (c) is a front view, and FIG. 52 (c) is a side view of the linear motion conversion member 2800 in the direction of the arrow LIIc in FIG. 52 (b).

  As shown in FIG. 52, the linear motion conversion member 2800 is provided so as to protrude from a cylindrical main body 2801, a shaft 2802 extending concentrically from both ends of the main body 2801, and an outer peripheral surface of the main body 2802. The interlocking surface portion 2803, the pressing surface portion 2804, and the locking claw portion 2805 are integrally formed.

  The shaft 2802 is a portion that is pivotally supported by the bearing 2529 of the handle mounting base 2520 and is smaller in diameter than the main body 2801. Therefore, a stepped surface is formed at the connection portion between the main body 2801 and the shaft 2802, and the stepped surface is brought into contact with the end surface of the bearing 2529 of the handle mounting base 2520 (see FIG. 48). Is positioned left and right (in the axial direction of the main body 2801) with respect to the handle mounting base 2520.

  One of the pair of shafts 2802 (the second main body 2520b side and the left side in FIG. 52B) is the other shaft 2802 (the first main body 2520a side and the right side in FIG. 52B). With respect to 2802, the axial length is lengthened. In the assembled state of the handle device 2051, the end of one of the shafts 2802 protrudes outward from the wall surface of the second main body 2520b (see FIG. 49). A connecting square portion 2802a having a quadrangular cross section is formed at the end of the protruding one shaft 2802, and the base portion of the operation / display display piece 2570 is fixed to the connecting square portion 2802a so as not to be relatively rotatable. (See FIG. 34).

  The interlocking surface portion 2803 and the pressing surface portion 2804 are flat portions extending radially outward from the outer peripheral surface of the main body portion 2801, and the plate surfaces are parallel to the extending direction of the shaft 2802. As shown in FIG. 52 (a) and FIG. 52 (c), they are arranged with different phases from each other.

  The phases of both of these are set as follows. That is, when the switch member 2590 (transmission rod 2592) is in the first position in the assembled state of the handle device 2051, the end of the transmission rod 2592 of the switch member 2590 is the front (front, FIG. 52) of the pressing surface portion 2804. (B) the front surface of the paper surface) and the extended tip of the interlocking surface portion 2803 (the lower end of FIG. 52 (b)) is in contact with the back surface of the variable resistor (not shown). When the switch member 2590 (transmission rod 2592) is in the second position, the end of the transmission rod 2592 of the switch member 2590 is brought into contact with the front surface of the pressing surface portion 2804, and The extended tip of the interlocking surface portion 2803 protrudes from the lower mating surface portion 528 of the handle mounting portion 2520 toward the handle base 530 (see FIG. 55).

  Therefore, as will be described later, when the handle base 530 is pushed downward with respect to the handle mounting base 2520 around the shaft support portion (the shaft 563 and the bearing 523), the extending tip of the interlocking surface portion 2803 is changed to the variable resistance. It is pushed back (back side, for example, left direction in FIG. 53) by the back side of the container (not shown). Thus, in this embodiment, the back surface of the variable resistor is used as a part for pushing back the extended tip of the interlocking surface portion 2803. Accordingly, it is not necessary to further secure a flat surface for pushing back the extended tip of the interlocking surface portion 2803 on the back side of the handle base 530, so that the handle base 530 (handle device 2051) can be downsized.

  Further, the back surface of the variable resistor protrudes toward the back surface side of the handle base 530, and the extended tip of the interlocking surface portion 2803 can be pushed back at a position closer to the shaft 2802. Therefore, the amount of movement of the pressing surface portion 2804 can be reduced. Can be larger. In this case, in a structure in which a flat surface for pushing back the extended tip of the interlocking surface portion 2803 is further provided on the back surface side of the handle base 530, the flat surface is projected to a position equivalent to the back surface of the variable resistor (projected to the back surface side). At the position), only the portion where the flat surface is provided becomes thick, so that the thickness of the handle base 530 becomes partially uneven, resulting in a deterioration in yield during injection molding. On the other hand, if the structure using the back surface of the variable resistor is used, the thickness of the handle base 530 can be made uniform as a whole, so that the yield during injection molding can be improved.

  The locking claw portion 2805 is a portion for locking the end portion of the linear motion conversion member biasing spring 2890 (see FIG. 53), and is formed in a bent hook shape. The linear motion converting member urging spring 2890 is formed as a torsion spring, and applies a urging force in the clockwise (clockwise) direction to the linear motion converting member 2801 in a side view in FIG. Accordingly, the linear motion conversion member 2801 is maintained in a state where the front surface of the pressing surface portion 2804 is in contact with the end portion of the transmission rod 2592 of the switch member 2590.

  Next, referring to FIGS. 53 to 55, the switching device 2600 can be rotated or engaged and fixed by a downward displacement (push-down operation) around the shaft support portion of the handle base 530 with respect to the handle mounting base 2520. A switching structure for switching to a state will be described. Note that FIG. 56 is referred to as appropriate in the description of this switching structure.

  53 to 55 are partial cross-sectional side views of the handle device 2051, and FIGS. 53 and 55 illustrate a state before the handle base 530 is pushed down with respect to the handle mounting base 2520. 54 shows a state in which the handle base 530 is pushed downward with respect to the handle mount 2520.

  53, 54, and 55 correspond to the state where the transmission rod 2592 of the switch member 2590 is disposed at the first position, the third position, and the second position, respectively. 53 to 55 illustrate a state where the second main body 2520b of the handle mounting base 2520 is removed, and illustration of wiring of each component is omitted.

56 (a) and 57 (a) are partially enlarged side views of the handle device 2051, and FIGS. 56 (b) and 57 (b) are partially enlarged top views of the handle device 2051. FIG. 56A and 56B show a state in which the transmission rod 2592 of the switch member 2590 is disposed at the first position, which corresponds to the state shown in FIG. 53, and FIG. ) And FIG. 57 (b) show a state in which the transmission rod 2592 of the switch member 2590 is arranged at the second position, and corresponds to the state shown in FIG. In the state where the rod 2592) is in the first position, the tip of the transmission rod 2592 is not projected from the front surface (front surface, right side surface in FIG. 53) of the base body 2591 (see FIG. 47 (a)). In this case, the push-in piece 2583 of the push-in member 2580 is not pushed in by the transmission rod 2592 and is retracted to the back side (left side in FIG. 53). 1 is arranged. Therefore, in the switching device 2600, the biting spheres 670a and 670b are disposed in the escape space 661 by the urging force of the pushing-side urging spring 680, and thereby can rotate relative to the bearing portion 535. The state is set (see FIGS. 40A and 40C).

  Thus, in the state where the switching device 2600 is set in the rotatable state (the state in which the switch member 2590 (transmission rod 2592) is in the first position as shown in FIG. 53), the switching device 2600 is placed on the bearing portion 535. Since the rotation is enabled (that is, the operation end point is not changed (set)), the handle ring 2540 is increased from the initial position θ0 to the operation position θ1 in the increasing direction as in the first embodiment. When the turning operation is performed, the handle side projection 546 of the handle ring 2540 pushes the restricting projection 630 of the switching device 2600 in the increasing direction, thereby rotating the switching device 2600 in the increasing direction in conjunction with the handle ring 2540. (See FIG. 28A and FIG. 28B).

  On the other hand, when the handle ring 540 is rotated in the decreasing direction, the switching device 2600 is driven by the urging force of the switching device urging spring 539 (see FIG. 35) as in the case of the first embodiment. Is rotated in the decreasing direction. That is, when the handle ring 2540 is rotated in the decreasing direction from the operation position θ1 to the initial position θ0, the switching device 2600 is also rotated in the decreasing direction by the biasing force of the switching device biasing spring 539, and the restricting protrusion 630 is disposed at a rotational position where it abuts against the handle-side protrusion 546 (see FIGS. 28A and 28B).

  Therefore, as shown in FIG. 53, when the switching device 2600 is set in a rotatable state (the switch member 2590 (transmission rod 2592) is in the first position), the handle ring 2540 is in the increasing or decreasing direction. In any case, the switching device 2600 is rotated in conjunction with (synchronized with), and the rotation position (phase) of the handle ring 2540 and the switching device 2600 is matched ( FIG. 28 (a) and FIG. 28 (b)).

  As shown in FIG. 53, in the state where the transmission rod 2592 of the switch member 2590 is in the first position, the transmission rod 2592 protrudes to the back side (left side in FIG. 53), and accordingly, the linear motion conversion member 2800 Since the pressing surface portion 2804 is also retracted to the back side, the linear motion conversion member 2800 is rotated counterclockwise in FIG. 53 (counterclockwise) about the shaft 2802. Thereby, as shown in FIG. 56 (a), the operation / display piece 2570 is also rotated counterclockwise in FIG. 56 (a) around the base end (that is, the connecting square portion 2802a of the shaft 2802 of the linear motion conversion member 2800). As a result, as shown in FIG. 56 (b), the operation and display piece 2570 has extended tips at the first scale portion S1 and the second scale portion. It coincides with the first scale portion S1 of S2 (points to the first scale portion S1).

  Therefore, the player places the switch member 2590 in the first position based on the relationship between the operation-use display piece 2570 and both scale portions S1, S2 (that is, the position of the operation end point of the handle ring 2540 is changed). Is not easily identified).

  53, when the handle base 530 is pushed downward with respect to the handle mount 520 about the shaft support portion (the shaft 563 and the bearing 523), the extension of the interlocking surface portion 2803 of the linear motion conversion member 2800 is extended. The installation tip is slid along the back surface of the variable resistor (not shown) of the handle base 530, thereby being retracted toward the back surface (left side in FIG. 53), and the linear motion conversion member 2800 moves the shaft 2802. It is rotated clockwise (clockwise) in FIG. 53 as the center.

  Thereby, the pressing surface portion 2804 of the linear motion conversion member 2800 is advanced toward the front side (the right side in FIG. 53), and the transmission rod 2592 of the switch member 2590 is pushed toward the pushing member 2580 by the pressing surface portion 2804. As shown in FIG. 54, the transmission rod 2592 of the switch member 2590 is disposed at the third position.

  From the state shown in FIG. 54, the operation force of the player to push down the handle base 530 is loosened, and the downward displacement of the handle base 530 is released (that is, the handle base 530 is displaced upward, the horizontal 55), the transmission rod 2592 of the switch member 2590 is pulled back by the urging force of the transmission rod urging spring 2593 (see FIGS. 47 (b) and 47 (c)). The second position is disposed (see FIG. 55).

  As shown in FIG. 55, in a state where the transmission rod 2592 of the switch member 2590 is in the second position (a state where the transmission rod 2592 passes through the third position from the first position and is disposed in the second position), the tip of the transmission rod 2592 is A position protruding from the front surface (front surface, right side surface of FIG. 55) of the base body 2591 (see FIG. 47C), and the pushing member 2580 is advanced (pressed) to the front surface side (right side of FIG. 55) by the amount of the protrusion. Therefore, in the switching device 2600, the biting spheres 670a and 670b are arranged in the biting space 651 (that is, the biting spheres 670a and 670b are inserted into the biting space 651 by the pressing piece 2583 of the pressing member 2580. Thus, the engagement fixed state (see FIGS. 40 (b) and 40 (d)) that cannot rotate relative to the bearing portion 535 is set.

  In the state where the switching device 2600 is set to the engaged and fixed state, as described above, the biting spheres 670a and 670b gradually decrease in the circumferential direction between the inner peripheral surface of the bearing portion 535 and the biting surface 650. The rotation of the switching device 2600 (main body 610) relative to the bearing portion 535 is restricted (blocked) by being caught in the gap.

  Therefore, in a state where the handle ring 2540 is rotated to the operation position θ1 (see FIG. 28B), the handle base 530 is pushed downward with respect to the handle mounting base 2520, and the transmission rod 2592 of the switch member 2590 is operated. Is shifted from the first position to the second position, so that the switching device 2600 is set to the engaged and fixed state, and the switching device 2600 is turned to the rotation position corresponding to the operation position θ1 (that is, the handle base 530 is the handle mounting base). As a result of the push-down operation with respect to 2520, the transmission rod 2592 can be fixed to the rotation position at the time when the transmission rod 2592 is disposed at the second position (see FIG. 28C).

  As described above, when the switching device 2600 is set in the engagement fixed state and the rotation position is fixed, the switching device 2600 can rotate the handle ring 2540 even if the handle ring 2540 is rotated in the decreasing direction. It is not interlocked (synchronized) with the movement, and is held at the rotation position corresponding to the operation position θ1 (see FIGS. 29A and 21B). That is, the handle ring 2540 can be rotated in the decreasing direction and the operation direction independently of the switching device 2600 (see FIG. 29A).

  In this case, for example, when the switching device 2600 is held (fixed) at the rotation position corresponding to the operation position θ1 (see FIG. 29B), the handle ring 2540 returned to the initial position θ0 is increased in the increasing direction. When the rotation operation is performed, the operation position θ1 is the operation end point. In other words, when the handle ring 2540 rotates in the increasing direction reaches the operation position θ1, the handle side protrusion 546 is brought into contact with the restricting protrusion 630, and further rotation in the increasing direction is restricted. (See FIG. 28C).

  As shown in FIG. 55, in a state where the transmission rod 2592 of the switch member 2590 is in the second position, the transmission rod 2592 is pushed into the front side (right side in FIG. 55), and accordingly, the linear motion conversion member 2800 Since the pressing surface portion 2804 is also moved forward, the linear motion conversion member 2800 is rotated clockwise (clockwise) in FIG. 55 about the shaft 2802. As a result, as shown in FIG. 57 (a), the operation / display piece 2570 is also rotated clockwise in FIG. 57 (a) around the base end (that is, the connecting square portion 2802a of the shaft 2802 of the linear motion conversion member 2800). As a result, as shown in FIG. 57 (b), the operation / display piece 2570 has extended tips at the first scale portion S1 and the second scale portion S2. Are matched with the second scale portion S2 (points to the second scale portion S2).

  Therefore, the player places the switch member 2590 in the second position based on the relationship between the operation / use display piece 2570 and the scale parts S1 and S2 (that is, the position of the operation end point of the handle ring 2540 is changed). Can be easily identified.

  Here, from the state shown in FIG. 55 (the state where the transmission rod 2592 of the switch member 2590 is arranged at the second position), the state shown in FIG. 53 (the state where the transmission rod 2592 of the switch member 2590 is arranged at the first position). ) Is changed (returned) by pushing the handle base 530 downward with respect to the handle mounting base 2520 around the shaft support portion (the shaft 563 and the bearing 523), and as shown in FIG. After the transmission rod 2592 is disposed at the third position, the downward pressing operation of the handle base 530 is released (that is, the handle base 530 is displaced upward to return to the horizontal state). . That is, by this operation, as shown in FIG. 53, the transmission rod 2592 of the switch member 2590 is pulled back by the urging force of the transmission rod urging spring 2593 (see FIGS. 47A and 47B). It is arranged (returned) from the second position to the first position (see FIG. 46).

  In this case, for example, in the state where the switching device 2600 is held (fixed) at the rotation position corresponding to the operation position θ1 (see FIG. 29B), the above-described operation (transmission rod 2592 is moved from the second position to the second position. When the switching device 2600 is switched from the engaged and fixed state to the rotatable state and is rotatable with respect to the bearing portion 535, the operation of returning the first position to the first position is performed. In response to the urging force of the switching device urging spring 2539, the switching device urging spring 2539 is returned to the initial position (the rotation position where the restricting protrusion 630 contacts the handle-side protrusion 546) (see FIG. 28A).

  The switching device 2600 is always rotated in conjunction with (synchronized with) the pushing piece 2583 of the pushing member 2580 via the coupling between the connecting hole 620 and the connecting shaft 2582 of the pushing member 2580. Similarly to the case, even when the handle ring 2540 is being rotated, the handle base 530 is pushed down to the handle mounting base 2520 to switch from the engaged fixed state to the rotatable state (ie, The switching device 2600 can be returned to the initial position and the change of the operation end point can be canceled). Thus, even when the handle ring 2540 is being rotated, it is unnecessary to temporarily return the handle ring 2540 to the initial position in order to cancel the change (setting) of the operation end point. Therefore, for example, when it becomes necessary to reset the position of the operation end point to another position, the resetting operation is performed while maintaining the turning operation of the handle ring 2540 (that is, continuing the game). Can be done quickly.

  Further, an operation for switching the switching device 2600 from the engaged fixed state to the rotatable state (cancellation of the change of the operation end point, that is, a return operation for returning the switching device 2600 to the initial position), and the fixed state from the rotatable state to the engaged fixed state. Both the operation for switching to the state (the changing operation for changing (setting) the operation end point) are achieved by the downward pressing operation of the handle base 530 with respect to the handle mounting base 2520. That is, it can be achieved by operating the same member in the same direction. Thereby, similarly to the case of the first embodiment, the change operation and the return operation can be easily performed. In particular, since the state due to the change operation and the state due to the return operation are switched alternately, it becomes effective to improve operability that these two states can be switched by repeating the same operation. Further, since the same member is operated in the same direction, the direction in which the handle base 530 can be operated with respect to the handle mounting base 2520 can be limited to only one direction, and thus the structure is simplified accordingly. Thus, the product cost can be reduced.

  As described above, the operation / use display piece 2570 also serves as an operation unit operated by the player in order to switch the switching device 2600 to the rotatable state or the engaged / fixed state. That is, instead of pressing the handle base 530 downward with respect to the handle mounting base 2520, the switching device can be switched by rotating the operation / display piece 2570 about the shaft 2802 (the connecting square portion 2802a). Switching between the states 2600 (rotatable state or engagement fixed state) can be executed.

  For example, as shown in FIGS. 53 and 56, in the state where the switch member 2590 (transmission rod 2592) is in the first position, the operation / display piece 2570 is in a position where the extended tip indicates the first scale portion S1. Is arranged. When the operation / display piece 2570 is rotated from the state shown in FIGS. 53 and 56 around the shaft 2802 (connection square portion 2802a) toward the second scale portion S2, the linear motion conversion member 2800 is pivoted. 53 is rotated clockwise (clockwise) in FIG. 53 around 2802, and the pressing surface portion 2804 of the linear motion conversion member 2800 is advanced toward the front side (right side in FIG. 53). As a result, the transmission rod 2592 of the switch member 2590 is pushed toward the push-in member 2580 by the pressing surface portion 2804, and the transmission rod 2592 of the switch member 2590 is disposed at the third position (FIGS. 47A and 47 (B). b)). In this state, the operation / display piece 2570 is rotated to a position where the extended tip exceeds the second scale portion S2.

  When the player loosens the operating force for rotating the operation / use display piece 2570 from the state where the switch member 2590 (transmission rod 2592) is arranged in the third state, as shown in FIG. 55 and FIG. The transmission rod 2592 of the member 2590 is pulled back by the urging force of the transmission rod urging spring 2593 (see FIGS. 47 (b) and 47 (c)) and disposed at the second position (see FIG. 46). As the switch member 2590 (transmission rod 2592) is arranged at the second position, the extended tip of the operation / display piece 2570 points to the second scale portion S2.

  On the other hand, as shown in FIGS. 55 and 57, in the state where the switch member 2590 (transmission rod 2592) is in the second position, the operation / display display piece 2570 is in a position where the extended tip indicates the second scale portion S2. Has been placed. From the state shown in FIGS. 55 and 57, the operation / use display piece 2570 is directed to the opposite side to the first scale portion S1 (that is, in the right direction in FIGS. 55 and 57) with the shaft 2802 (connection square portion 2802a) as the center. When the rotation operation is performed, the linear motion conversion member 2800 is rotated clockwise (clockwise) in FIG. 55 about the shaft 2802, and the pressing surface portion 2804 of the linear motion conversion member 2800 is directed to the front side (right side in FIG. 53). To move forward. As a result, the transmission rod 2592 of the switch member 2590 is pushed toward the push-in member 2580 by the pressing surface portion 2804, and the transmission rod 2592 of the switch member 2590 is disposed at the third position (FIG. 47B and FIG. c)).

  That is, in this state, similarly to the case where the above-described switch member 2590 (transmission rod 2529) is disposed from the first position to the second position, the operation-and-use display piece 2570 has the extended tip of the second scale portion S2. It is rotated to a position beyond it (that is, a position closer to the handle ring 2540 than the second scale portion S2).

  When the player loosens the operating force for rotating the operation / use display piece 2570 from the state where the switch member 2590 (transmission rod 2592) is arranged in the third state, as shown in FIG. 53 and FIG. The transmission rod 2592 of the member 2590 is pulled back by the urging force of the transmission rod urging spring 2593 (see FIGS. 47 (a) and 47 (b)) and disposed at the first position (see FIG. 46). As the switch member 2590 (transmission rod 2592) is arranged at the first position, the extended tip of the operation / display piece 2570 points to the first scale portion S1.

  In this way, an identification member (operation / display display piece 2570) for displaying whether the position of the operation end point has been changed (set) or released and identifying the player is changed to the position of the operation end point (setting). ) And the operation member that is operated by the player to release it, the number of parts can be reduced accordingly, and the product cost can be reduced.

  In this case, a change operation for changing (setting) the position of the operation end point (that is, the switch member 2590 (transmission rod 2592) arranged at the first position shown in FIGS. 53 and 56 is shown in FIGS. 55 and 57. The operation of disposing the operation / use display piece 2570 means that the change (setting) of the position of the operation end point has been released (that is, the transmission rod 2592 is disposed at the first position). Indicates the second scale portion S2 which means that the position of the operation end point has been changed (ie, the transmission rod 2592 is disposed at the second position) from the position indicating the first scale portion S1 to be performed. Since it is achieved by the operation of arranging the position, it is possible to operate the player while intuitively recognizing that the operation is a change operation. As a result, inadvertent misoperation can be suppressed.

  Similarly, a release operation for releasing the change (setting) of the position of the operation end point (that is, the switch member 2590 (transmission rod 2592) arranged at the second position shown in FIGS. 55 and 57 is shown in FIGS. 53 and 56. The movement of the operation and display piece 2570 is changed (set) (that is, the transmission rod 2592 is arranged at the second position). The first scale portion S1 means that the change (setting) of the position of the operation end point has been released from the position indicating the second scale portion S2 to be performed (that is, the transmission rod 2592 is disposed at the first position). This is achieved by the operation of placing it at the position pointing to the player, so that the player can intuitively recognize that the operation is a release operation. As a result, inadvertent misoperation can be suppressed.

  In this case, the release operation for canceling the change (setting) of the position of the operation end point causes the operation / use display piece 2570 to be directly directed from the position indicating the second scale part S2 to the position indicating the first scale part S1. Instead, as described above, it is necessary to once move to the position indicating the first scale part S1 after operating toward the side opposite to the first scale part S1 (that is, the right direction in FIGS. 55 and 57). is there. That is, since it is necessary to separately perform one operation (operation) in the opposite direction, the position of the operation end point changed (set) by the player (that is, the launch intensity of the game ball can be launched at a desired launch intensity) It can be prevented in advance that the rotation position of the handle ring 540 is released by an inadvertent operation of the player.

  Note that the switching device 2600 is used to change (set) the operation end point of the handle ring 2540 and adjust the rotation position of the handle ring 2540 with reference to the position of the operation end point (return to the original rotation position). As for the adjustment method, the operation for switching the states of the switching devices 600 and 2600 is different (that is, the push operation of the button member 570 in the first embodiment, and the push-down operation of the handle base 530 in the second embodiment). Except for a certain point, since it is the same as that described with reference to FIGS. 30 and 31 in the first embodiment, the description thereof is omitted.

  As described above, according to the handle device 2051 in the second embodiment, the switching device 2600 is switched between the rotatable state and the engagement fixed state (that is, the operation end point position is changed (set) and released). Since the operation for moving the handle ring 2540 can be performed by displacing the handle base 530 with respect to the handle mounting base 2510, the operation for changing (setting) and releasing the position of the operation end point is performed. The operation amount can be maintained easily (that is, the operation amount of the turning operation is deviated and the launch intensity of the game ball is prevented from changing carelessly).

  Specifically, after the player adjusts the launch intensity of the game ball to a desired launch intensity by rotating the handle ring 2540, the player keeps the handle base 530 while maintaining the state. In order to change (set) and release the operation end point, an operation for changing the handle ring 2540 or a hand other than the hand for operating the handle ring 2540 can be used. There is no need to perform an operation to operate the operation means (operator). As a result, the operation end point position can be changed (set) and released quickly, and the operation end point position can be adjusted to the desired rotation operation position (ie, the launch intensity of the game ball can be adjusted to the desired launch intensity). It is possible to accurately change (set) to the rotation operation position of the handle ring 2540 that has been set.

  In particular, in the present embodiment, the handle base 530 is pushed down with respect to the handle mount 2520, so that the push-down operation can be performed using the weight of the fingers and arms holding the handle ring 2540. The operability can be improved. In this case, since the handle ring 2540 is disposed at a relatively low position of the pachinko machine 10 and the operation position is relatively low for the player, the structure for performing the downward push operation as in this embodiment is the player. Is easy to apply force. Therefore, the operability can be improved also from this point.

  Further, since the urging force for returning to the horizontal position (displacement upward) is applied to the handle base 530 by the base urging member SP, after the handle base 530 is pushed down, Can be returned to the horizontal position using the urging force of the base urging member SP by releasing the operating force downward or releasing the hand. As a result, it is possible to reduce the operation burden on the player.

  Next, a third embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. In the first embodiment, the case has been described in which the launch intensity of the game ball is adjusted by rotating the handle ring 540. However, the adjustment of the launch intensity of the game ball in the third embodiment is performed by sliding the operation element 3800. It is done by operating. In addition, the same code | symbol is attached | subjected about the part same as said each embodiment, and the description is abbreviate | omitted.

  FIG. 58 (a) is a top view of the handle device 3051 in the third embodiment, and FIG. 58 (b) is a side view of the handle device 3051 as viewed in the direction of the arrow LVIIIb in FIG. 58 (a). FIG. 59 is a cross-sectional view of the handle device 3051 taken along the line LIX-LIX in FIG.

  58 (a) and 58 (b), the front surface of the lower plate unit 15 (that is, the mounting surface of the handle device 3051) is schematically illustrated by a two-dot chain line, and the operating element 3800 is movable. For convenience, the state of being slid to the approximate center in FIG. In FIG. 59, only the handle mounting base 3500 is viewed in cross section, and the cross sections of other components are omitted.

  As shown in FIGS. 58 and 59, the handle device 3051 includes a handle mounting base 3500, a rotary shaft portion 3700 rotatably supported on the handle mounting base 3500, and an operation connected to the rotary shaft portion 3700. The main body 3810 of the operation element 3800 is disposed in a posture that protrudes horizontally on the front surface of the pachinko machine 10 (see FIG. 1).

  The handle mounting base 3500 includes a lower base 3510, an intermediate base 3520, and an upper base 3530. The intermediate base 3520 is overlapped with the lower base 3510 and the upper base 3530 interposed therebetween. The upper and lower ends (upper side and lower side in FIG. 58 (b)) are sealed, and the side surface (right side in FIG. 58 (b)) has an opening.

  A storage portion 3540 is disposed on the lower surface of the handle mounting base 3500 (lower base 3510). The storage unit 3540 stores a variable resistor (not shown) that detects the amount of rotation (rotational position) of the rotating shaft 3700 by a change in electrical resistance. The game ball is launched at a strength (launch strength) corresponding to the resistance value of the variable resistor. Further, a closing member 3550 is disposed between the lower base 3510 and the intermediate base 3520, and the opening on the side surface of the handle mounting base 3500 is closed by the closing member 3550.

  The rotating shaft portion 3700 is rotatably disposed inside the handle mounting base 3500 in a vertical posture in which the axial center direction is along the vertical direction (vertical direction in FIG. 59). A connecting piece 3780 protrudes from the lower end surface of the rotating shaft portion 3700, and the connecting piece 3780 is connected to a variable resistor housed in the housing portion 3540. Therefore, when the rotation shaft portion 3700 is rotated, the resistance value of the variable resistor is changed corresponding to the rotation amount (rotation position) of the rotation shaft portion 3700.

  The operating element 3800 is attached to the handle mounting base 3500 via the rotary shaft portion 3700 so as to be slidable. That is, the operating element 3800 is rotated in the virtual plane perpendicular to the axis of the rotary shaft 3700 as shown in FIG. 58 (a) by rotating the rotary shaft 3700 around the axis. In the section from the initial position θ0 to the maximum position θmax, sliding displacement is possible in the directions of arrows I and D. That is, the direction of arrow I corresponds to the increasing direction that increases the firing strength of the game ball, and the direction of arrow D corresponds to the decreasing direction that decreases the firing strength of the game ball.

  When the operator 3800 is slid and displaced (sliding operation) in the direction of the arrow I or the arrow D by the player, the rotating shaft portion 3700 is rotated around the axis, and the storage portion 3540 is rotated according to the rotation amount (rotating position). The resistance value of the variable resistor is changed. Thereby, the firing strength of the game ball is increased or decreased. When the slide operation by the player is released, the operation element 3800 is slid in the direction of arrow D by the biasing force of the slide direction biasing spring 3581 and returned to the initial position θ0.

  As described above, the rotary shaft 3700 is disposed along the vertical direction (gravity direction), so that the slide displacement of the operation element 3800 (main body portion 3810) is a horizontal plane (in the gravity direction). Along a vertical plane).

  The operation element 3800 can be displaced in the vertical direction (the vertical direction in FIG. 59) with respect to the handle mounting base 3500 around the portion (connection shaft 3990) pivotally supported by the rotary shaft portion 3700. That is, the operator 3800 is formed so that the held portion 3830 can be pushed downward (in the direction of arrow G in FIG. 58B) with the connecting shaft 3990 as the rotation center (see FIG. 64). In the present embodiment, the operation of pushing down the operator 3800 (held portion 3830) is performed downward in the direction of gravity. Therefore, the operation of pushing down the operation element 3800 (held part 3830) causes the weight of the player's hand to act on the held part 3830 of the operation element 3800, or returns the wrist holding the held part 3830 downward. Only can be done easily.

  A switching device 3600 is disposed above the rotating shaft 3700. The switching device 3600 is a member for changing (setting) the position of the operation end point of the operation element 3800, similarly to the switching devices 600 and 2600 in each of the above embodiments, and is inserted through the bearing portion 3535, and the bearing portion 3535. On the other hand, it is possible to switch between two states, a rotatable state in which relative rotation is possible and an engagement fixed state in which relative rotation is impossible.

  The switching device 3600 is switched to a rotatable state or an engagement-fixed state by pressing the operating element 3800 (held portion 3830), thereby changing (setting) or releasing the position of the operation end point. Is done. A structure for changing (setting) or canceling the position of the operation end point by depressing the operation element 3800 will be described later.

  Note that when the held portion 3830 is pushed down (in the direction of arrow G), the spring-up direction biasing spring 3880 of the operating element 3800 is elastically extended and deformed, and the operating force in the push-down direction by the player is relaxed. Then, due to the elastic recovery force of the spring-up direction biasing spring 3880, the operation element 3800 (held portion 3830) is displaced upward (in the direction opposite to the arrow G), and the initial position (main body portion 3810) shown in FIG. Is returned to a horizontal position).

  The operation element 3800 is provided with a firing stop switch 3891 and a right-handed switch 3892. Regardless of the slide position (operation amount) of the operation element 3800, the player can stop the firing of the game ball during the pressing by pressing the firing stop switch 3891, and can also stop the right-handed switch 3892. By pressing, the game ball can be launched at the maximum firing intensity during the depression.

  Next, the handle mounting base 3500 will be described with reference to FIGS. 60 (a) is a side view of the lower base 3510, and FIG. 60 (b) is a top view of the lower base 3510 as viewed in the direction of the arrow LXb in FIG. 60 (a). These are sectional drawings of the lower base 3510 in the LXc-LXc line of FIG.60 (b).

  As shown in FIG. 60, the lower base 3510 includes a barrel portion 3511 formed in a cylindrical shape, a bottom wall 3512 that closes a lower opening of the barrel portion 3511, and an outer surface from the outer peripheral surface of the barrel portion 3511. Fastening flange 3513 and fastening seat portion 3514 projecting to the top, a bearing portion 3515 erected upward from the upper surface of the bottom wall 3512, and a support shaft erected upward on the side of the bearing portion 3515 The guide wall portion 3517 is provided with a predetermined distance between the portion 3516 and the inner peripheral surface of the body portion 3511 so as to stand upward from the upper surface of the bottom wall 3512.

  An opening 3511a is formed on the front (front) side of the body portion 3511 by cutting out a part thereof. The opening 3511a is a notch portion for securing a displacement space in the sliding direction (arrows I and D directions) and the pressing direction (arrow G direction) of the operation element 3800 (see FIGS. 58 and 59). In the top view shown in (b), it is formed over a central angle range of approximately 170 degrees.

  The lower base 3510 is formed as an opening in which the opening 3511a is continuous (continuous) with the opening on the upper side (FIG. 60 (c)) of the trunk portion 3511, so that the entire opening area can be secured. As a result, it is possible to improve workability when the rotary shaft portion 3700, the operation element 3800, the rotary shaft portion connecting gear 3571, the sliding direction biasing spring 3581, and the like are mounted and assembled in the lower base 3510. .

  The fastening flange 3513 is a plate-like body projecting outward from the outer peripheral surface of the trunk portion 3511 at the upper end (upper side in FIG. 60 (a)) of the trunk portion 3511, and a pair is arranged with a phase difference of 180 degrees. In addition, an insertion hole 3513a is formed in each of the pair of fastening flanges 3513. Similar fastening flanges 3523 and 3533 are also arranged on the intermediate base 3520 and the upper base 3530, and these fastening flanges 3513, 3523, and 3533 are overlapped with each other and inserted into their insertion holes 3513a, 3523a, and 3533a. By fastening and fixing with the fastening bolt B, the bases 3510, 3520, and 3530 are connected and fixed to form the handle mounting base 3500 (see FIG. 58).

  The fastening seat portion 3514 is a portion projecting outward from the outer peripheral surface of the trunk portion 3511 at the lower end (lower side in FIG. 60 (a)) of the trunk portion 3511, and the rear side (opening 3511a) of the trunk portion 3511. The phase is 180 degrees different from the other). The outer surface of the fastening seat portion 3514 (the rear surface, the left surface in FIGS. 60A and 60B) is a flat surface (hereinafter referred to as “seat surface 3514a”) parallel to the axial center of the trunk portion 3511. The seat surface 3514a thus formed serves as an attachment surface (seat surface) when the handle device 3051 is fastened and fixed to the front surface of the lower plate unit 15 (see FIG. 58).

  An insertion hole 3512a having a circular shape in front view is formed in the center of the bottom wall 3512. Via the insertion hole 3512a, the connecting piece 3780 of the rotating shaft portion 3700 is connected to the variable resistor in the storage portion 3540 (see FIG. 59). The bearing portion 3515 is formed in a cylindrical shape concentric with the insertion hole 3512a of the bottom wall 3512, and the lower end side of the rotating shaft portion 3700 is rotatably supported by the inner peripheral surface of the bearing portion 3515 (see FIG. 6).

  The support shaft portion 3516 is a portion for rotatably supporting a rotation shaft portion connecting gear 3571 formed as a spur gear (see FIG. 59), and is formed in a shaft shape having a circular cross section. Specifically, the support shaft portion 3516 includes a small-diameter portion located on the distal end side and a large-diameter portion formed larger in diameter than the small-diameter portion, and the rotation shaft portion connecting gear 3571 is rotatable in the small-diameter portion. Is pivotally supported. The rotating shaft connecting gear 3571 has a stepped surface between the small diameter portion and the large diameter portion of the support shaft portion 3516, and a retaining ring (not shown) such as an E ring fitted at the tip of the small diameter portion of the support shaft portion 3516. By being arranged between these, movement in the axial direction is restricted (cannot be extracted).

  Note that a sliding direction biasing spring 3581 formed as a torsion spring is held on the support shaft portion 3516 in an elastically torsionally deformed state on the lower surface side of the rotating shaft portion connecting gear 3571 (see FIG. 59). . An urging force (elastic recovery force) is applied to the rotation shaft portion connecting gear 3571 from the sliding direction urging spring 3581, and the urging force is transmitted to the rotation shaft portion via the connection gear portion 3770 of the rotation shaft portion 3700. 3700 (that is, the operation element 3800) is acted in the direction of returning to the initial position θ0.

  Therefore, when the operating element 3800 is slid in the increasing direction (arrow I direction in FIG. 58), the urging force of the sliding direction urging spring 3581 provides a resistance to the sliding operation, while the sliding operation is performed. When released, the operating element 3800 is slid in the decreasing direction (direction of arrow D in FIG. 58) by the urging force of the sliding direction urging spring 3581, and returned to the initial position θ0.

  The guide wall portion 3517 is a member for guiding the sealing member 3550 (see FIG. 63) in the circumferential direction together with the guide wall portion 3527 (see FIG. 61) of the intermediate base 3520, and is formed in a circular cylindrical shape in a top view. And is erected from the upper surface of the bottom wall 3512 at a position concentric with the body portion 3511. Therefore, a gap of a certain size (an annular space when viewed from above) is formed between the outer peripheral surface of the guide wall portion 3517 and the inner peripheral surface of the trunk portion 3511, and the lower end of the sealing member 3550 is inserted into this gap. (See FIG. 59). When the operating element 3800 is slid, the closing member 3550 is guided in the gap between the guide wall portion 3517 and the trunk portion 3511 and moved in the circumferential direction.

  61 (a) is a side view of the intermediate base 3520, FIG. 61 (b) is a top view of the intermediate base 3520 as viewed in the direction of the arrow LXIb in FIG. 61 (a), and FIG. FIG. 62 is a cross-sectional view of the intermediate base 3520 along the line LXIc-LXIc in FIG. 61 (b).

  As shown in FIG. 61, the intermediate base 3520 includes a disk part 3521 formed in a disk shape, an outer wall part 3522 arranged along the outer edge of the lower surface of the disk part 3521, and a disk part 3521. The disc portion 3521 is spaced a predetermined distance from the fastening flange 3523 projecting outward from the outer peripheral surface, the insertion hole 3524 drilled in the center of the disc portion 3521, and the inner peripheral surface of the outer wall portion 3522. And a guide wall portion 3527 that is erected downward from the lower surface of the main body.

  The outer diameter of the disc portion 3521 is the same as the outer diameter of the barrel portion 3511 of the lower base 3510 and the barrel portion 3531 of the upper base 3530, and in the assembled state of the handle mounting base 3500, the disc portion 3521 of the intermediate base 3520. Is sandwiched between the axial end surfaces of the body 3511 of the lower base 3510 and the body 3531 of the upper base 3530 (see FIGS. 58 and 59).

  The outer wall part 3522 is a part for shielding the inner space of the lower base 3510 from the outside (see FIGS. 58B and 59), and the cylindrical body concentric with the disk part 3521 has a central angle of about 170 degrees. And is fitted into the opening 3511a in the trunk portion 3511 of the lower base 3510 (it is fitted into the opening 3511a). The rigidity of the handle mounting base 3500 as a whole can be enhanced by the internal fitting structure of the outer wall portion 3522 with respect to the opening 3511a.

  Further, by forming a portion corresponding to the outer wall portion 3522 not in the lower base 3510 but in the intermediate base 3520, as described above, while ensuring the rigidity of the handle mounting base 3500 as a whole, Since the opening area of the entire side base 3510 can be secured, the rotation shaft portion 3700, the operation element 3800, the rotation shaft portion connecting gear 3571, and the slide direction biasing spring 3581 are accordingly incorporated in the lower base 3510. The workability when mounting and assembling can be improved.

  The fastening flange 3523 is a plate-like body that protrudes outward from the outer peripheral surface of the disc portion 3521 and is set to the same plate thickness as the disc portion 3521, and a pair is disposed with a phase difference of 180 degrees. The pair of fastening flanges 3523 are respectively provided with insertion holes 3523a. As described above, the fastening flange 3523 is overlapped with the fastening flanges 3513 and 3533 of the lower base 3510 and the upper base 3530 and fastened and fixed by the fastening bolts B (see FIG. 58).

  The insertion hole 3524 rotatably supports the rotation shaft portion 3700 by its inner peripheral surface (see FIG. 59). A cylindrical bearing portion 3521a is disposed on the lower surface of the disc portion 3521 at a position concentric with the insertion hole 3524, and the rotating shaft portion 3700 is also rotatably supported by the inner peripheral surface of the bearing portion 3521a. Is done. That is, since the insertion hole 3524 is extended in the axial direction (vertical direction in FIG. 61 (c)) by the bearing portion 3521a, the bearing area can be secured correspondingly, so that the bearing strength and bearing accuracy of the rotating shaft portion 3700 are improved and durable. It is possible to improve the performance.

  The guide wall portion 3527 is a member for guiding the sealing member 3550 (see FIG. 63) in the circumferential direction together with the guide wall portion 3517 (see FIG. 60) of the lower base 3510, and has a circular cylindrical shape when viewed from above. It is erected from the lower surface of the disc portion 3521 at a position that is formed and concentric with the outer wall portion 3522. Therefore, a gap (annular space in a bottom view) is formed between the outer peripheral surface of the guide wall portion 3527 and the inner peripheral surface of the outer wall portion 3522, and the upper end of the sealing member 3550 is inserted into this gap. (See FIG. 59). When the operating element 3800 is slid, the closing member 3550 is guided in the gap between the guide wall portion 3527 and the outer wall portion 3522 and moved in the circumferential direction.

  62 (a) is a side view of the upper base 3530, FIG. 62 (b) is a bottom view of the upper base 3530 in the direction of the arrow LXIIb in FIG. 62 (a), and FIG. FIG. 63 is a cross-sectional view of the upper base 3530 along the line LXIIc-LXIIc in FIG. 62 (b).

  As shown in FIG. 62, the upper base 3530 has a barrel portion 3531 formed in a cylindrical shape, an upper wall 3532 that closes the upper opening of the barrel portion 3531, and an outer surface extending from the outer peripheral surface of the barrel portion 3531. The fastening flange 3533 and the fastening seat portion 3534 to be taken out, the bearing portion 3535 erected downward from the lower surface of the upper surface wall 3532, and the support shaft portion 3536 erected downward on the side of the bearing portion 3535. And formed with.

  The fastening flange 3533 is a plate-like body projecting outward from the outer peripheral surface of the trunk portion 3531 at the lower end (lower side in FIG. 62 (a)) of the trunk portion 3531. A pair of fastening flanges 3533 are different in phase by 180 degrees. The pair of fastening flanges 3533 are respectively provided with insertion holes 3533a. As described above, the fastening flange 3533 is superimposed on the fastening flanges 3513 and 3533 of the lower base 3510 and the upper base 3530 and fastened and fixed by the fastening bolt B (see FIG. 58).

  The fastening seat portion 3534 is a portion projecting outward from the outer peripheral surface of the trunk portion 3531 at the upper end (upper side in FIG. 62A) of the trunk portion 3531, and is disposed on the back side of the trunk portion 3531. . The outer side surface (the left side surface in FIGS. 62A and 62B) of the fastening seat portion 3534 is formed as a flat surface (hereinafter referred to as “seat surface 3534a”) parallel to the axis of the trunk portion 3531. Such a seating surface 3534a becomes an attachment surface (seat surface) when the handle device 3051 is fastened and fixed to the front surface of the lower plate unit 15 (see FIG. 5).

  The bearing portion 3535 is formed in a cylindrical shape concentric with the outer wall portion 3531, and a switching device 3600 is rotatably inserted into the inner peripheral side thereof (see FIG. 59). The support shaft portion 3536 is a portion for pivotally supporting a switching device connecting gear 3572 formed as a spur gear (see FIG. 59), and is formed in a shaft shape having a circular cross section.

  Specifically, the support shaft portion 3536 includes a small-diameter portion located on the distal end side and a large-diameter portion formed larger in diameter than the small-diameter portion, and the switching device connecting gear 3572 is rotatable in the small-diameter portion. It is pivotally supported. The switching device connecting gear 3572 includes a step surface between the small diameter portion and the large diameter portion of the support shaft portion 3536 and a retaining ring (not shown) such as an E-ring fitted to the tip of the small diameter portion of the support shaft portion 3536. By being arranged in between, the movement in the axial direction is restricted (keep undrawn).

  Note that a switching device biasing spring 3582 formed as a torsion spring is held on the support shaft portion 3536 on the upper surface side of the switching device coupling gear 3572 in an elastically torsionally deformed state (see FIG. 59). A biasing force (elastic recovery force) is applied to the switching device connecting gear 3572 from the switching device biasing spring 3582, and the biasing force causes the switching device 3600 to move to the initial position (the engaging projection 3630 has the rotation shaft portion 3700. (Position engaged with the step surface 3711c) (see FIG. 77 (a)).

  63 (a) is a front view of the closing member 3550, and FIG. 63 (b) is a bottom view of the closing member 3550 as viewed in the direction of arrow LXIIIb in FIG. 63 (a). These are sectional drawings of the sealing member 3550 in the LXIIIc-LXIIIc line | wire of Fig.63 (a).

  As shown in FIG. 63, the closing member 3550 shields the opening 3511a formed on the front (front) side of the lower base 3510, thereby preventing the inside of the handle mounting base 3500 from being visually recognized from the outside. Member (see FIG. 58B), and is formed in a cylindrical shape.

  The outer diameter of the sealing member 3550 is slightly smaller than the inner diameter of the body 3511 of the lower base 3510 and the outer wall 3522 of the intermediate base 3520, and the inner diameter is the guide wall 3517 of the lower base 3510. In addition, the outer diameter of the guide wall portion 3527 of the intermediate base 3520 is made slightly larger. Therefore, the lower end and the upper end (the lower side and the upper side in FIG. 63 (a)) of the sealing member 3550 can be inserted into the above-described gap formed on the outer peripheral side of the guide wall portions 3517 and 3527. It is possible to move along the gap described above (that is, in the circumferential direction).

  The sealing member 3550 is formed with a notch 3551 in a part of the circumferential direction. The notch 3551 is a notch for inserting the main body 3810 of the operation element 3800 and securing a displacement space in the push-down direction (see FIGS. 58 and 59), and a lower end of the closing member 3550 (see FIG. 63 (a) is formed as a rectangular cutout extending from the lower side.

  The width dimension of cutout portion 3551 (FIG. 63 (a) left-right dimension) is set to be slightly larger than the width dimension of main body 3810 of operator 3800 (FIG. 58 (a) vertical dimension). Therefore, the operation element 3800 is slid in the increasing direction or the decreasing direction (FIG. 58 (a), the arrow I direction or the arrow D direction) while allowing the operation element 3800 to be pushed down (the direction of arrow G in FIG. 58 (b)). When closing, the closing member 3550 is moved in the circumferential direction in conjunction with the sliding operation.

  Next, with reference to FIGS. 64 to 68, the rotating shaft portion 3700 and the operation element 3800 will be described. FIGS. 64A and 64B are partial cross-sectional side views of the rotating shaft portion 3700 and the operation element 3800, and FIG. 64A shows a state in which the operation element 3800 is at the initial position in the push-down direction. FIG. 64B corresponds to the state in which the operation element 3800 is pushed down.

  As shown in FIGS. 64A and 64B, the operation element 3800 and the rotating shaft portion 3700 are connected via a connecting shaft 3990. Thereby, the operation element 3800 can be displaced (operated) in two directions. That is, first, by rotating the operation element 3800 around the connecting shaft 3990, the held portion 3830 is displaced downward (in the direction of arrow G, see FIG. 58 (b)) (the push-down operation is performed). To do). Secondly, by rotating the operating element 3800 integrally with the rotation shaft portion 3700 around the axis of the rotation shaft portion 3700, the held portion 3830 is moved in the sliding direction (arrow I and arrow D directions, It is possible to displace (perform a slide operation) as shown in FIG.

  FIG. 65A is a side view of the rotating shaft portion 3700, and FIG. 65B is a rear view of the rotating shaft portion 3700 when viewed in the direction of the arrow LXVb in FIG. FIG. 10 is a partial cross-sectional rear view of the push-up member 3410. 66A is a top view of the rotating shaft portion 3700 when viewed in the direction of the arrow LXVIa in FIG. 65A, and FIG. 66B is a rotating shaft portion 3700 along the line LXVIb-LXVIb in FIG. FIG. 65 (b) and 65 (c) show a state where the push-up member 3410 is removed for easy understanding.

  As shown in FIGS. 65 and 66, the rotation shaft portion 3700 is formed with a rod-shaped shaft main body portion 3710, an insertion hole 3720 formed in the shaft main body portion 3710, and an opening on the back side of the shaft main body portion 3710. Opening 3730, hook portion 3740 disposed on the outer peripheral surface of shaft main body portion 3710, operating element restricting portion 3750, guide shaft 3760, connecting gear portion 3770, and connection projecting from the lower end surface of shaft main body portion 3710. A piece 3780.

  The shaft main body portion 3710 is formed as a solid rod-like body having a circular cross section connected coaxially to a cylindrical portion 3711 formed in a cylindrical shape and a lower end of the cylindrical portion 3711 (lower side in FIG. 66B). And a real part 3712, which are integrally formed from a resin material.

  On the upper end surface (upper side surface in FIG. 66 (b)) of the cylindrical portion 3711, the height position in the axial direction (vertical direction in FIG. 66 (b)) of the shaft main body 3710 is higher than the reference surface 3711a. A raised surface 3711b raised upward is formed, whereby a pair of stepped surfaces 3711c connecting the reference surface 3711a and the raised surface 3711b are formed on the upper end side of the cylindrical member 3711.

  As will be described later, the rotation shaft portion 3700 is formed so that the stepped surface 3711c can be engaged with the restricting projection portion 3630 of the switching device 3600. In a state in which the switching device 3600 is set in a rotatable state, the step surface 3711c is engaged with the restricting protrusion 3630, whereby the rotation shaft portion 3700 is rotated (sliding operation in the increasing direction of the operation element 3800). When the switching device 3600 is rotated in conjunction with the switching device 3600 and the switching device 3600 is set to the engaged and fixed state, the stepped surface 3711c is engaged with the restricting protrusion 3630, whereby the rotation shaft 3700 is rotated (operated). The sliding operation in the increasing direction of the child 3800) is restricted (see FIG. 77 (c)). As a result, an operation end point is formed.

  The reference surface 3711a and the raised surface 3711b are flat surfaces perpendicular to the axial direction of the shaft main body portion 3710, and the pair of step surfaces 3711c are parallel to each other and parallel to the axial direction of the shaft main body portion 3710. A flat surface. In addition, the pair of stepped surfaces 3711c are arranged with a phase difference of 180 degrees. However, in this embodiment, one step surface 3711c of the pair of step surfaces 3711c is engaged with the regulation protrusion 3630 of the switching device 3600.

  A guide groove 3715 is recessed in the inner peripheral surface of the cylindrical portion 3711. The guide groove 3715 is a groove for holding the transmission rod 3420 (see FIG. 73) at the first position or the second position. The detailed configuration of the guide groove 3715 will be described later.

  The insertion holes 3720 are holes having a circular cross section through which the connecting shaft 3990 is inserted, and a pair of holes are formed in a straight line in the cylindrical portion 3711 of the shaft main body portion 3710. The connecting shaft 3990 is formed from a true casting material into a shaft shape having a circular cross section. The opening 3730 is an opening for securing an arrangement space for the push-up member 3410. As shown in FIG. 65B, the opening 3730 is formed as a rectangular opening in the cylindrical portion 3711 of the shaft main body 3710. Protrusions 3731 for pivotally supporting the push-up member 3410 so as to be rotatable are respectively provided on the pair of opposed inner side surfaces of the opening 3730.

  Here, as shown in FIG. 65 (c), the push-up member 3410 is formed in a rectangular shape in the rear view, and as shown in FIG. 66 (b), a plate-like body having an L-shaped cross section with the lower end side bent. The recesses 3411 are respectively provided on the upper ends of the opposed pair of outer surfaces. By fitting the protrusion 3731 of the opening 3730 into the recess 3411, the push-up member 3410 is pivotally supported in the opening 3730 with the protrusion 3731 and the recess 3411 as the rotation center (see FIG. 64). The push-up member 3410 is disposed in a posture in which the bent portion on the lower end side is directed toward the axial center side of the cylindrical portion 3711 of the shaft main body portion 3710.

  The hook portion 3740 is a portion for engaging and holding one end of a spring-up direction biasing spring 3880 formed as a coil spring (see FIG. 64), and a portion having an L-shaped cross section bent upward is provided. A pair is arranged at a predetermined interval. The manipulator restricting portion 3750 is a rod-shaped portion for restricting the displacement of the manipulator 3800 with the connecting shaft 3990 as the rotation center, and is disposed on the back side of the shaft main body portion 3710 and below the opening 3730. .

  That is, the spring-up direction biasing spring 3880 is stretched between the hook portion 3740 of the rotating shaft portion 3700 and the hook portion 3840 of the operation element 3800 in an elastically stretched state, and is operated by the player. After 3800 is pushed down (in the direction of arrow G, see FIG. 58 (b)) (see FIG. 64 (b)), when the push-down operation is released, the operating element 3800 is moved in the spring-up direction biasing spring 3880. Is pushed upward (in the direction opposite to the arrow G, see FIG. 58 (b)). In this case, the operation element restricting portion 3750 receives the lower surface of the main body portion 3810 of the operation element 3800, thereby restricting the displacement of the operation element 3800 in the flip-up direction. Thereby, the operation element 3800 is held at the initial position in the push-down operation (see FIG. 64A).

  As described above, the manipulator restricting portion 3750 is a portion that receives the manipulator 3800 (the lower surface of the main body portion 3810) that is flipped up by the biasing force of the spring-up direction biasing spring 3880, and thus a large load is applied. In other words, in this embodiment, the operation element restricting portion 3750 is disposed not in the thin cylindrical portion 3711 but in the solid solid portion 3712. Thereby, the rigidity can be secured and the operator 3800 (the lower surface of the main body portion 3810) that is flipped up can be firmly received. As a result, durability can be improved.

  The guide shaft 3760 is a part for guiding the displacement direction when the operation element 3800 is displaced in the push-down direction or the opposite direction so that the held portion 3830 is smoothly displaced. The portion 3750 is disposed on the front side of the solid portion 3712 opposite to the solid portion 3712. When the operation element 3800 is pushed down, the guide shaft 3760 moves in the guide groove 3870 of the operation element 3800 (see FIG. 64B), so that the displacement of the operation element 3800 is moved along the guide groove 3870. I can guide you. As a result, rattling of the operation element 3800 can be suppressed, and the operation when the operation element 3800 is pushed down can be stabilized. Accordingly, the burden on the connecting shaft 3990 can be reduced and damage to the connecting shaft 3990 can be suppressed.

  The connection gear part 3770 is a part formed as a spur gear, and meshes with the rotation shaft part connection gear 3571 (see FIG. 59). As described above, the urging force from the sliding direction urging spring 3581 is transmitted from the rotating shaft connecting gear 3571 to the connecting gear 3770, whereby the rotating shaft 3700 is rotated and the operation element 3800 is moved to the initial position θ0. It returns to (see FIG. 58 (a)).

  The connecting piece 3780 is a shaft-like body fixed to the lower end surface of the shaft main body portion 3710 and is connected to a variable resistor (not shown) via the insertion hole 3512a of the lower base 3510 as described above. Is done. Thereby, the operation amount of the slide operation of the operation element 3800 is converted into the rotation amount of the rotating shaft portion 3700 and transmitted to the variable resistor.

  67 (a) is a side view of the operation element 3800, and FIG. 67 (b) is a top view of the operation element 3800 in the direction of the arrow LXVIIb in FIG. 67 (a). 68 (a) is a partial enlarged cross-sectional view of the operation element 3800 along the line LXVIIIa-LXVIIIa in FIG. 67 (b), and FIG. 68 (b) is an operation element 3800 along the line LXVIIIb-LXVIIIb in FIG. 67 (b). FIG.

  As shown in FIGS. 67 and 68, the operation element 3800 includes a main body portion 3810 including a base portion 3811 and a leg portion 3812, an insertion hole 3820 formed in the leg portion 3812 of the main body portion 3810, and the main body portion 3810. A held member 3830 erected from the base portion 3811, a hook portion 3840 and a support wall 3850 disposed on the outer surface of the base portion 3811 of the main body portion 3810, and a cam member installed between the leg portions 3812 of the main body portion 3810. 3860 and a guide groove 3870 disposed on the inner surface of the leg portion 3812 of the main body portion 3810.

  The main body 3810 includes a long box-shaped base 3811 and a pair of legs 3812 extending along the longitudinal direction from the base side of the base 3811 (left side of FIGS. 67 (a) and 67 (b)). Is provided. A held portion 3830 is erected substantially vertically on the distal end side (the right side of FIGS. 67A and 67B) of the base 3811. The pair of leg portions 3812 are disposed to face each other substantially parallel to each other with a predetermined interval therebetween, and a rotating shaft portion 3700 is disposed between the facing portions of the pair of leg portions 3812 (see FIG. 64).

  The pair of leg portions 3812 are respectively provided with insertion holes 3820 along the opposing direction (the vertical direction in FIG. 67 (b)). The rotation shaft portion 3700 is disposed between the pair of leg portions 3812 facing each other, and the connecting shaft 3990 inserted from one insertion hole 3820 of the pair of leg portions 3812 is passed through the insertion hole 3720 of the rotation shaft portion 3700. At the same time, the operating element 3800 is connected to the rotating shaft portion 3700 via the connecting shaft 3990 by being inserted through the other insertion hole 3820 of the pair of leg portions 3812, and below the held portion 3830 (arrow G). Direction, see FIG. 58 (b)), and can be pushed down (see FIG. 64).

  The extended distal end side (left side in FIG. 67 (a)) of the pair of leg portions 3812 is formed to be curved in an arc shape in the side view shown in FIG. 67 (a), and the outer peripheral surface of the curved portion in the arc shape. The elastic film member 3893 is adhered to each other. The elastic film member 3893 is a member formed in a film shape from an elastic material such as a rubber material. When the held portion 3830 of the operation element 3800 is pushed down and the leg portion 3812 is pushed upward, the elastic film member 3893 is brought into close contact with the lower surface of the disc portion 3521 of the intermediate base 3520 (see FIG. 76).

  Thus, the displacement of the operation element 3800 in the slide operation direction can be regulated using the adhesion force (friction force) of the elastic film member 3893. Therefore, as will be described later, when the position of the operation end point is changed (set), it is possible to prevent the operation amount of the slide operation of the operation element 3800 from changing carelessly. That is, it is possible to prevent the operation position of the slide operation from being shifted and the launch intensity of the game ball from changing carelessly. Thereby, the position of the operation end point can be accurately changed (set) to a desired position (that is, the slide operation position of the operation element 3800 when the game ball launch intensity is adjusted to the desired launch intensity). .

  The held portion 3830 is a portion that is gripped by a player's finger or palm when the operating element 3800 is slid or pushed down, and is formed as a rod-like body having a substantially rectangular cross-section with a corner chamfered in an arc shape. Is done. As described above, since the held portion 3830 is formed as a rod-like body, the held portion 3830 can be easily held (gripped), and as a result, when the operating element 3800 is operated to slide and push down. The operability can be improved.

  Further, since the held portion 3830 is erected along the vertical direction from the main body portion 3810, the held portion 3830 can be held (gripped) by the player in a natural posture. In particular, since the held portion 3830 is erected upward from the main body portion 3810, when gripping the held portion 3830, the outer edge portion of the palm is placed on the upper surface of the main body portion 3810 (on the upper side of FIG. 67 (a)). Surface). Thus, the player's fatigue can be reduced, and when the operator 3800 is pushed down, for example, even if the held portion 3830 is not gripped, a hand can be placed on the upper surface of the main body portion 3810. As a result, the push-down operation can be easily performed.

  The above-described firing stop switch 3891 and right-handed switch 3892 are respectively disposed on the standing tip of the held portion 3830 and the back side of the held portion 3830 (the side facing the coupling shaft 3990 (see FIG. 64)). Thus, the player can easily operate the firing stop switch 3891 with the thumb or index finger and the right-handed switch 3892 with the index finger or middle finger while the gripper 820 is naturally gripped.

  The hook part 3840 is a part for engaging and holding the other end of the spring-up direction biasing spring 3880 having one end engaged and held by the hook part 3740 (see FIG. 65) of the rotating shaft part 3700 (see FIG. 64). ), And is formed in an L-shaped cross section that is bent downward.

  The support wall 3850 is a wall portion for supporting the spring-up direction biasing spring 3880 from below, and is formed to be curved in a convex arc shape upward in a side view shown in FIG. As described above, the support wall 3850 is curved in an arc shape, so that the distance of the spring-up direction biasing spring 3880 is measured (the distance measured along the spring-up direction biasing spring 3880 between the hooks 3740 and 3840). Can be made longer (see FIG. 64A). Therefore, in the limited space, the spring-up direction biasing spring 3880 having a longer overall length can be used. As a result, the biasing force can be increased and the durability of the spring-up direction biasing spring 3880 can be improved. Can be achieved.

  The cam member 3860 is a member for pushing up the push-up member 3410 disposed on the rotary shaft portion 3700 so as to be displaceable (see FIG. 64), and is a rod-like member installed between the pair of leg portions 3812. From the center in the longitudinal direction (FIG. 67 (b) vertical direction) of the installation portion 3861 to the base 3811 side (that is, the side where the rotating shaft 3700 is disposed, the right side of FIG. 67 (b)). And a push-up cam 3862 that is extended, and these are integrally formed. The cam member 3860 is formed separately from the main body portion 3810, and both ends of the installation portion 3861 are fastened and fixed to the leg portions 3812 of the main body portion 3810 by fastening bolts (not shown).

  The push-up cam 3862 is formed in a triangular shape in cross section, and is arranged in a posture with the top of the triangular shape facing upward as shown in FIG. In a state where the rotary shaft 3700 is connected to the main body 3810 (between a pair of leg portions 3812) via the connecting shaft 3990, the push-up cam 3862 has a triangular top at the rotation shaft (protrusion) of the push-up member 3410. 3731 and the concave portion 3411, which are arranged at positions below the vertical direction in FIGS. 65 (b) and 65 (c)), and the slope on one side of the triangle (right side in FIG. 68 (a)) is the push-up member. It arrange | positions in the position which supports the lower end of 3410 (refer Fig.64 (a)).

  The cam member 3860 has a slope on one side (right side in FIG. 68 (a)) of the triangular shape of the push-up cam 3862 when the operation element 3800 is pushed down (in the direction of arrow G, see FIG. 58 (b)). Using the top (upper side in FIG. 68 (a)), the push-up member 3410 disposed on the rotating shaft 3700 is pushed upward (see FIGS. 64 (a) and 64 (b)).

  As described above, the push-up cam 3862 is formed in a triangular shape in cross-section, and the push-up member 3410 is pushed upward by using the slope and the top thereof, so that the operation element 3800 is not pushed down in a normal state. (Refer to FIG. 64 (a)), the push-up member 3410 can be arranged further downward, and the overall height dimension (axial dimension, vertical dimension of FIG. 64 (a)) is reduced, and the operation element When the 3800 is pushed down (see FIG. 64 (b)), the push-up member 3410 can be pushed upward, so that the stroke required for the push-down operation of the operator 3800 can be reduced and the operability can be reduced. In addition, it is possible to increase the lifting / lowering stroke of the transmission rod 3420 (see FIG. 73) and to reliably switch the state of the switching device 3600. Kill (see FIG. 76 from FIG. 74).

  The guide groove 3870 is a concave groove for guiding the guide shaft 3760 (see FIG. 65) of the rotary shaft portion 3700, and is provided as a groove having a rectangular cross section on the opposing surfaces of the pair of leg portions 3812. It is curved and extended in a circular arc shape centering on. Therefore, when the operation element 3800 is pushed down (see the arrow G direction, see FIG. 58 (b)) (see FIGS. 64 (a) and 64 (b)), the guide shaft 3760 of the rotating shaft portion 3700 is operated. However, by being guided along the guide groove 3870, rattling of the operation element 3800 can be suppressed and the operation of pushing down the operation element 3800 can be performed smoothly. Accordingly, the burden on the connecting shaft 3990 can be reduced and damage to the connecting shaft 3990 can be suppressed.

  Note that the main body portion 3810 and the held portion 3830 have a two-part structure in which the center in the width direction (the vertical direction in FIG. 67 (b)) is a split surface (matching surface). That is, the main body portion 3810 and the held portion 3830 are formed symmetrically with respect to the first component forming one side of the main body portion 3810 and the held portion 3830 and the first component with the dividing plane as a symmetry plane. 3810 and a second part forming one side of the held portion 3830. By joining the first part and the second part with each other between the divided surfaces, a launch stop switch 3891 and the like are provided therein. It is formed in a hollow shape having a space for wiring electrical connection lines.

  Next, the switching member 3600, the pushing member 3430, and the transmission rod 3420 will be described with reference to FIGS. FIG. 69 is a partial enlarged cross-sectional view of the handle device 3051.

  As shown in FIG. 69, on the handle mounting base 3500, a switching device 3600, a pushing member 3430, and a transmission rod 3420 are arranged in series on the same axis in order from the top. The switching device 3600 is inserted into the bearing portion 3535 of the upper base 3530, and the pushing member 3430 and the transmission rod 3420 are inserted into the cylindrical portion 3711 of the rotating shaft portion 3700 (the shaft main body 3710).

  First, the switching device 3600 and the pushing member 3420 will be described with reference to FIGS.

  70 (a) is a top view of the switching device 3600, FIG. 70 (b) is a side view of the switching device 3600 as viewed in the direction of the arrow LXXb in FIG. 70 (a), and FIG. It is a bottom view of the switching apparatus 3600 in the arrow LXXc direction view of FIG.70 (b). 71A is a cross-sectional view of the switching device 3600 along the line LXXIa-LXXIa of FIG. 70A, and FIG. 71B is a side view of the switching device 3600 when viewed in the direction of the arrow LXXIb of FIG. FIG.

  72 (a) is a front view of the pushing member 3430, and FIG. 72 (b) is a side view of the pushing member 3430 as viewed in the direction of the arrow LXXIIb in FIG. 72 (a). These are sectional drawings of the pushing-in member 3430 in the LXXIIc-LXXIIc line | wire of Fig.72 (a).

  70 and 71, the illustration of the biting spheres 670a and 670b, the push-side biasing spring 680, and the biting-side biasing spring 690 is omitted.

  Here, the switching device 3600 is connected in place of the shape of the restriction protrusion 3630 from the shape of the restriction protrusion 630 in the first and second embodiments, instead of the spring receiver 640 in the first and second embodiments. Except for the point that the gear portion 3640 is provided, the switching devices 600 and 2600 in the first embodiment and the second embodiment are formed substantially the same technically. Further, the pushing member 3430 is technically substantially the same as the pushing member 2580 in the second embodiment. Therefore, substantially the same parts are denoted by the same reference numerals, and description thereof is omitted.

  As shown in FIGS. 70 and 71, the switching device 3600 is protruded radially outward from the main body 610, the connection hole 620 formed through the main body 610, and the outer peripheral surface of the main body 610. The control protrusion 3630 and the connecting gear 3640, and the biting surface 650 and the flank 660 formed by recessing the outer peripheral surface of the main body 610 are provided.

  The outer diameter of the main body 610 is set to be slightly smaller than the inner diameter of the bearing 3535 (see FIG. 69) of the upper base 3530. Therefore, the main body 610 is inserted into the bearing portion 3535 of the upper base 3530 and is rotatably held in the bearing portion 3535 (see FIG. 74).

  The restricting protrusion 3630 is a portion that comes into contact with the step surface 3711c (see FIGS. 77 and 78) in the cylindrical portion 3711 of the rotating shaft 3700 (shaft main body 3710), and is formed as a rod-shaped body having a circular cross section. It is disposed radially outward from the outer peripheral surface of the main body 610 and protrudes downward from the lower surface of the main body 610 (the lower surface in FIG. 71 (b)).

  The connection gear portion 3640 is a plate-like body formed by projecting radially outward from the outer peripheral surface of the main body portion 610, and a switching device connection gear 3572 (see FIG. 69) is formed on the outer peripheral surface of the plate-like body. Engageable spur gears are engraved. Note that the lower surface of the connection gear portion 3640 (FIG. 70C, the surface on the front side in FIG. 70) is flush with the lower surface of the main body portion 610 (the surface on the front side in FIG. 70C). It is formed as a flat surface whose position in the axial direction coincides and is perpendicular to the axis.

  As shown in FIG. 72, the pushing member 3430 includes a base body 2581, a connecting shaft 2582 and a pushing piece 2583 that are disposed on the upper surface of the base body 2581. The outer diameter of the base body 2581 is set to be slightly smaller than the inner diameter of the cylindrical portion 3711 of the rotating shaft portion 3700 (shaft body portion 3710), and the switching device 3600 is rotated in the bearing portion 3535. In this case, the inside of the cylindrical portion 3711 of the rotating shaft portion 3700 can be rotated, and when the upper portion is pushed upward by the transmission rod 3420 from the lower surface side, the inside of the cylindrical portion 3711 of the rotating shaft portion 3700 is switched. It can be slid toward the device 3600 (see FIGS. 74 to 76).

  The switching device 3600 is engaged and fixed by the engagement spheres 670 a and 670 b being pushed into the engagement space 651 by the pushing pieces 2583 of the pushing member 3430, so that the switching device 3600 is engaged with the bearing portion 3535 of the upper base 3530. While the relative rotation is disabled, the pressing piece 2583 of the pressing member 3430 is retracted, and the biting spheres 670 a and 670 b are disposed in the escape space 661, so that the rotation can be switched to the upper base 3530. Relative rotation with respect to the bearing portion 3535 is possible. Since the switching structure of the switching device 3600 is the same as in the first and second embodiments (see FIGS. 15 and 40), description thereof is omitted.

  Next, the transmission rod 3420 will be described with reference to FIG. 73 (a) is a side view of the transmission rod 3420, and FIG. 73 (b) is a top view of the transmission rod 3420 as viewed in the direction of the arrow LXXIIIb in FIG. 73 (a).

As shown in FIG. 73, the transmission rod 3420 is a member disposed on the inner peripheral side of the cylindrical portion 3711 in the shaft main body portion 3710 of the rotating shaft portion 3700 (see FIG. 69), and is formed in a columnar shape with a circular cross section. Is done. On the outer peripheral surface of the cylindrical body, guide protrusions 3421 are projected from a plurality of locations (three locations in the present embodiment). Each guide protrusion 421 is a part for moving along a guide groove 3715 (see FIG. 66B) formed on the inner peripheral surface of the cylindrical portion 3711 in the rotating shaft portion 3700, and is formed in the same shape. In addition, they are arranged at equal intervals in the circumferential direction (in this embodiment, at intervals of 120 degrees).

The lower end (the lower part of FIG. 73 (a)) of the transmission rod 3420 is formed in a conical shape coaxial with the columnar part. Thereby, since the transmission rod 3420 can be brought closer to the push-up member 3410 on the inner peripheral side of the cylindrical portion 3711 of the rotating shaft portion 3700 (see FIG. 69), the limited space on the inner peripheral side of the cylindrical portion 3711 Can be used effectively, and the overall size can be reduced.

  The transmission rod 3420 is held at the first position or the second position by the guide protrusion 3421 being guided along the guide groove 3715 formed on the inner peripheral surface of the cylindrical portion 3711. Specifically, every time the push-up member 3410 is pushed upward, the position is changed from the first position to the second position or from the second position to the first position (see FIGS. 74 to 76). The structure in which the guide protrusion 3421 is guided in the guide groove 3715 and the transmission rod 3420 is held in the first position or the second position is the same as the structure in the second embodiment (see FIGS. 41 to 47). ), The description is omitted. That is, the transmission rod 3420 and the guide groove 3715 are technically identical to the transmission rod 2592 and the guide groove 2591b in the second embodiment.

  Next, with reference to FIGS. 74 to 76, a switching structure for switching the switching device 3600 to a rotatable state or an engaged and fixed state by a pressing operation of the operation element 3800 will be described. In the description of this switching structure, FIGS. 77 and 78 are referred to as appropriate.

  74 and 75 are partial cross-sectional side views of the handle device 3051. FIG. 74 shows a state where the transmission rod 3420 is in the first position, and FIG. 75 shows a state where the transmission rod 3420 is in the second position. Is done. FIG. 76 is a partial cross-sectional side view of the handle device 3051, in which the operating element 3800 is pushed downward and the transmission rod 3420 is disposed at the intermediate position.

  77 and 78 are partially enlarged perspective views of the rotation shaft portion 3700 and the switching device 3600. FIG. 77A shows a state where the rotary shaft 3700 (operator 3800) is at the initial position θ0 and the switching device 3600 is in a rotatable state, and FIG. 77B shows the rotary shaft portion. FIG. 77 (c) shows a state where 3700 (operation element 3800) is rotated (sliding operation) to the operation position θ1 and the switching device 3600 is in a rotatable state, and FIG. 77 (c) shows the rotation shaft 3700 (operation element 3800). Is rotated to the operating position θ1 (sliding operation) and the switching device 3600 is changed to the engaged and fixed state, FIG. 78A shows the rotating shaft portion 3700 (operator 3800) as the operating position. FIG. 78B shows a state in which the switching device 3600 is changed to the engaged and fixed state within the range of θ0 to θ1, and in FIG. 78B, the rotation shaft portion 3700 (operator 3800) is at the initial position θ0. And cut The state example apparatus 3600 is changed to the engagement fixing state, are shown respectively.

  As shown in FIGS. 74 to 76, the switching device 3600 is inserted into the bearing portion 3535 of the upper base 3530 as described above, and the connecting shaft 2582 of the push-in member 3430 is inserted into the connecting hole 620 of the switching device 3600. It is inserted so as to be relatively movable in the axial direction and not relatively rotatable in the circumferential direction.

  In the present embodiment, the connection shaft 2582 of the push-in member 3430 is inserted into the communication hole 620 of the switching device 3600 regardless of whether the transmission rod 3420 is disposed at the first position or the second position. The state (that is, the state where the communication hole 620 and the connecting shaft 2582 are coupled so as not to rotate relative to each other) is maintained. Therefore, even if the switching device 3600 is rotated with respect to the bearing portion 3535, the rotational position (phase) of the pushing piece 2583 of the pushing member 3430 with respect to the escape space 661 of the switching device 3600 can be always matched.

  As a result, regardless of the rotation position (phase) of the switching device 3600, the transmission rod 3420 is moved upward (ie, pushed by the transmission rod 3420) when the operation element 3800 is pushed down. By pushing the member 3430 upward), the pushing piece 2583 of the pushing member 3430 can be reliably moved into the biting space 651 of the switching device 3600.

  That is, regardless of the sliding position of the operating element 3800, the switching device 3600 can be brought into the engaged and fixed state by depressing the operating element 3800. Therefore, when the launch intensity of the game ball reaches a desired launch intensity by the slide operation of the operation element 3800, the operation end point is changed (set) while the operation position (operation amount) of the slide operation is maintained. Can be done. As a result, the operation end point can be changed (set) quickly and at an accurate position.

  As shown in FIG. 74, in a state where the transmission rod 3420 is in the first position, the pushing piece 2583 of the pushing member 3430 is disposed in the escape space 661 of the switching device 3600. Therefore, in the switching device 3600, the biting spheres 670a and 670b are arranged in the escape space 661 by the urging force of the pushing-side urging spring 680, and thereby the rotation that can rotate relative to the bearing portion 3535. The movable state is set (see FIGS. 15A and 15C or FIGS. 40A and 40C).

  Thus, in the state where the switching device 3600 is set in a rotatable state (a state where the transmission rod 3420 is in the first position), the switching device 3600 is rotatable with respect to the bearing portion 3535. 77 (a) and 77 (b), when the operator 3800 (rotary shaft 3700) is rotated in the increasing direction from the initial position θ0 to the operating position θ1, the step surface of the rotating shaft 3700 3711c is rotated while pushing the restricting projection 3630 of the switching device 3600 in the increasing direction (the arrow direction in FIG. 77B), so that the switching device 3600 is rotated in the increasing direction in conjunction with the rotating shaft 3700. Let It is assumed that the operation position θ1 is an operation position that does not reach the maximum position θmax of the slide operation range of the operation element 3800. The same applies to the following.

  On the other hand, when the operating element 3800 (rotating shaft 3700) is rotated in the decreasing direction, the switching device 3600 follows the rotating shaft 3700 by the biasing force of the switching device biasing spring 3582 (see FIG. 69). Then, it is rotated in the decreasing direction. For example, as shown in FIGS. 78 (a) and 78 (b), the operation element 3800 (rotating shaft 3700) decreases from the operation position θ1 to the initial position θ0 (the direction opposite to the arrow in FIG. 78 (b)). When the slide device is slid (rotated), the switching device 3600 is also rotated in the decreasing direction by the urging force of the switching device urging spring 3582, and the restricting projection 3630 comes into contact with the step surface 3711c of the rotating shaft portion 3700. It is arranged at the rotation position.

  That is, as shown in FIG. 74, in a state where the switching device 3600 is set in a rotatable state (a state where the transmission rod 3420 is in the first position), the operation element 3800 moves in either the increasing direction or the decreasing direction. Even in the case of a slide operation, the switching device 3600 is rotated in conjunction with (synchronized), and the rotation position (phase) of the operating element 3800 (rotating shaft portion 3700) and the switching device 3600 are matched ( 77 (a) and 77 (b)).

  As shown in FIG. 75, in the state where the transmission rod 3420 is in the second position, the switching device 3600 has its biting spheres 670a and 670b disposed in the biting space 651 (that is, by the pushing piece 2583 of the transmission rod 3420). The biting spheres 670a and 670b are pushed into the biting space 651) and set to the engaged and fixed state (see FIGS. 15 (b) and 15 (d) or FIGS. 40 (b) and 40 (d)). The

  In a state where the switching device 3600 is set to the engagement fixed state, the biting spheres 670 a and 670 b are opposed to the inner peripheral surface of the bearing portion 3535 and the biting surface 650 by the biasing force of the biting side biasing spring 690. Since the switching device 3600 (main body 610) is in any rotation direction (for example, the arrow A direction and the arrow shown in FIG. 15D). (B direction), the circumferential end of the biting surface 650 acts so that the biting spheres 670a and 670b are further bitten between the opposite ends of the biting surface 650 and the inner peripheral surface of the bearing portion 3535. (See FIGS. 15 (b) and 15 (d) or FIGS. 40 (b) and 40 (d)), the rotation of the switching device 3600 (main body 610) with respect to the bearing 3535 is restricted (blocked).

  Therefore, as shown in FIG. 77 (b), when the operating element 3800 (rotating shaft portion 3700) is rotated to the operating position θ1, the position of the transmission rod 3420 is set to the first position by the pressing operation of the operating element 3800. By changing from the position to the second position, the switching device 3600 is set to the engaged and fixed state, and as shown in FIG. 77 (c), the switching device 3600 is moved to the rotation position corresponding to the operation position θ1 (that is, The transmission rod 3420 in the first position can be fixed to the rotation position at the time when it is changed to the second position.

  As described above, when the switching device 3600 is set in the engagement fixed state and the rotation position thereof is fixed, as shown in FIGS. 78 (a) and 78 (b), the operator 3800 (rotary shaft portion) 3700) is operated to slide (rotate) in the decreasing direction, the switching device 3600 is not interlocked (synchronized) with the rotation of the rotation shaft 3700, and is held at the rotation position corresponding to the operation position θ1. That is, the position of the operation end point is changed (set) to the operation position θ1.

  Therefore, in this case, for example, as shown in FIG. 78 (b), in the state where the switching device 3600 is held (fixed) at the rotation position corresponding to the operation position θ1, the operation element returned to the initial position θ0. When the 3800 (rotating shaft portion 3700) is slid in the increasing direction (rotated), the rotation position of the rotating shaft portion 3700 is the operation end point θ1. That is, as shown in FIG. 77 (c), when the sliding operation in the increasing direction reaches the operation position θ 1, the step surface 3711 c of the rotating shaft portion 3700 is brought into contact with the restricting projection portion 3630 of the operation shaft 3800. Further sliding operation in the increasing direction (rotation of the rotating shaft portion 3700 in the arrow direction in FIG. 77C) is restricted.

  Here, the change (setting) of the transmission rod 3420 in the first position to the second position is performed as follows. That is, as shown in FIG. 74, when the operating element 3800 is pushed downward (in the direction of arrow G in FIG. 58B) from the state where the transmission rod 3420 is in the first position, as shown in FIG. The transmission rod 3420 is pushed upward by the push-up member 3410. In the transmission rod 3420, the guide protrusion 3421 is guided along the shape of the guide groove 3715, and abuts against a predetermined wall portion (guide restriction wall portion Wc, see FIG. 46) of the guide groove 3715. As a result, the downward pressing operation of the operating element 3800 becomes impossible, so that when the player loosens the operating force and the downward pressing operation of the operating element 3800 is released, the transmission rod 3420 is pushed on the pushing side. It is pushed back downward by the biasing force (elastic recovery force) of the spring 680. As a result, the guide protrusion 3421 is guided along the shape of the guide groove 3715 and reaches a predetermined position (position P2, see FIG. 46) of the guide groove 3715. That is, as shown in FIG. 75, the transmission member 3420 is disposed at the second position.

  Similarly, the change (setting) of the transmission rod 3420 in the second position to the first position is performed as follows. That is, as shown in FIG. 75, when the operating element 3800 is pushed downward (in the direction of arrow G in FIG. 58B) from the state where the transmission rod 3420 is in the second position, as shown in FIG. The transmission rod 3420 is pushed upward by the push-up member 3410. In the transmission rod 3420, the guide protrusion 3421 is guided along the shape of the guide groove 3715, and abuts against a predetermined wall portion (guide restriction wall portion Wg, see FIG. 46) of the guide groove 3715. As a result, the downward pressing operation of the operating element 3800 becomes impossible, so that when the player loosens the operating force and the downward pressing operation of the operating element 3800 is released, the transmission rod 3420 is pushed on the pushing side. It is pushed back downward by the biasing force (elastic recovery force) of the spring 680. As a result, the guide protrusion 3421 is guided along the shape of the guide groove 3715 and reaches a predetermined position (position P1, see FIG. 46) of the guide groove 3715. That is, as shown in FIG. 74, the transmission member 3420 is disposed at the first position.

  In this case, for example, as shown in FIG. 78 (b), in the state where the switching device 3600 is held (fixed) at the rotation position corresponding to the operation position θ1, the transmission rod 3420 is moved from the second position to the first position. When the operation of arranging the position is performed, the switching device 3600 is switched from the engaged and fixed state to the rotatable state, and is rotatable with respect to the bearing portion 3535. Therefore, the biasing force of the switching device biasing spring 3582 In response to this, as shown in FIG. 77 (a), it is returned to the initial position (the rotational position where the restricting projection 3630 contacts the stepped surface 3711c of the rotating shaft portion 3700).

  Alternatively, for example, as shown in FIG. 78 (a), the switching device 3600 is held (fixed) at the rotation position corresponding to the operation position θ1, and the operation element 3800 (rotary shaft portion 3700) is operated. When the above-described operation of placing the transmission rod 3420 from the second position to the first position is performed in a state where the slide operation (rotation) is performed up to the position θ1, the switching device 3600 can rotate from the engagement fixed state. And the rotation of the bearing portion 3535 is enabled to receive the urging force of the switching device urging spring 3582, and as shown in FIG. In response to the slide operation of the operating element 3800, the rotating shaft 3700 is returned to the rotating position at which the rotating shaft 3700 is rotating.

  Therefore, when the operating element 3800 (rotating shaft portion 3700) is slid (rotated) in the increasing direction or decreasing direction from this state, the switching device 3600 is also rotated (synchronized) with the rotation. Is done.

  As described above, according to the handle device 3051, the operation end point can be canceled even during the slide operation of the operation element 3800 (during a game in which a game ball is launched). For example, in order to cancel the operation end point There is no need to return the operation element 3800 to the initial position. Therefore, when it becomes necessary to reset the position of the operation end point once set to another position (for example, fine adjustment), the slide operation of the operation element 3800 is maintained (that is, the game is continued). The resetting operation can be performed quickly. Alternatively, for example, when the right-handed operation is required, the operation end point that restricts the slide operation in the increasing direction of the operation element 3800 can be canceled while maintaining the slide operation of the operation element 3800. A state in which the sliding operation in the increasing direction of the child 3800 is possible can be quickly formed. That is, it is possible to quickly switch to the slide operation operation of the operation element 3800 in the operation direction that maximizes the launch intensity of the game ball.

  Further, the switching device 3600 is switched from the engaged fixed state to the rotatable state (the operation end point is released, that is, the return operation for returning the switching device 3600 to the initial position), and the rotatable state is changed to the engaged fixed state. Both the switching operation (the changing operation for changing (setting) the operation end point) are achieved by the pressing operation of the operation element 3800. That is, it can be achieved by operating the same member in the same direction. As a result, the change operation and the return operation can be easily performed. In particular, since the state due to the change operation and the state due to the return operation are switched alternately, it becomes effective to improve operability that these two states can be switched by repeating the same operation. Further, since the same member is operated in the same direction, the operation direction of the operation element 3800 required for the change operation and the return operation can be limited to only one direction. The structure can be simplified and the product cost can be reduced.

  Next, referring to FIGS. 79 and 80, the position of the operation end point is changed (set) using the switching device 3600, and the position of the slide operation of the operation element 3800 is adjusted based on the position of the operation end point. A method of adjusting (returning to the original slide operation position) will be described.

  79 and 80 are schematic diagrams schematically showing the state of the slide operation of the handle device 3051. In each figure, the left diagram is a schematic front view of the handle device 3051, and the right diagram is the operator. It is a schematic diagram which shows typically the relationship between the position of 3800 slide operation, and the operation end point. 79 and 80, “[first position] or [second position]” indicates the position of the transmission rod 3420. “Initial position θ0” is an initial position in the direction of the slide operation of the operator 3800, and “Maximum position θmax” is a maximum position at which the operator 3800 can perform a slide operation when the operation end point is not changed (set). It is. The “operation end point” is an end point of the slide operation of the operation element 3800 formed by setting the switching device 3600 to the engagement fixed state.

  As shown in FIGS. 79 (a) and 79 (b), in the state where the transmission rod 3420 is in the first position, the switching device 3600 is in a rotatable state (FIG. 74, FIG. 15 (a) and FIG. 15 (c)), the operation element 3800 can be slid in the range from the initial position θ0 to the maximum position θmax.

  In the state shown in FIGS. 79A and 79B, the position of the slide operation of the operation element 3800 is adjusted according to the gaming state. As a result, as shown in FIG. If it is determined that the firing intensity of the game ball can be adjusted to a desired firing intensity by setting the operation position θ1, the player can maintain the state shown in FIG. 79 (b) while maintaining the state shown in FIG. 79 (c). As shown, the transmission rod 3420 is set to the second position by the downward pressing operation of the operating element 3800. As a result, when the switching device 3600 is set in the engaged and fixed state (see FIGS. 75, 15B, and 15D), the operation end point is at a position corresponding to the operation position θ1 of the operation element 3800. Changed (set).

  As described above, according to the handle device 3051, the operation end point can be set. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 80A, for example, in order to take a break, the slide operation position of the operation element 3800 is returned to the initial position θ0. Even if the game is interrupted, the original rotation position (that is, the rotation position where the launch intensity of the game ball is adjusted to the desired launch intensity and the operation position θ1 before interrupting the gaming machine) It can be stored as “operation end point”.

  Therefore, when the position of the slide operation of the operator 3800 is adjusted to the original slide operation position (that is, the operation position θ1 before the game is interrupted) (the states of FIGS. 79B and 79C are reproduced). 80 (b), the player slides the operation element 3800 to the operation end point (that is, the slide operation of the operation element 3800 is restricted by the operation end point, as shown in FIG. 80B). If the slide operation is performed until the first slide operation cannot be performed), the slide operation position of the operation element 3800 can be quickly and easily adjusted to the original slide operation position (operation position θ1).

  For example, a method is conceivable in which a scale line is provided on the handle mounting base 3500 along the movement locus of the operation element 3800, and the operation element 3800 is slid by using the scale line as a target position. Thus, it is not necessary to finely adjust whether the position of the slide operation of the operator 3800 coincides with the target position (scale line) or not, and the position can be accurately adjusted to the desired slide operation position. it can. Further, according to the present embodiment, the slide operation may be performed up to a position where the slide operation cannot be performed, and the target position is not passed, so that the operation speed of the operation element 3800 can be increased. It is possible to quickly adjust to the position of the slide operation (return to the original slide operation position quickly).

  When returning the position of the operation end point to the maximum position θmax, as described above, in the state shown in FIG. 80A or 80B, the operation element 3800 is pushed down to a position where it can be pushed down. By releasing the push-down operation after the push-down operation is performed, the transmission rod 3420 is returned to the first position, and the position of the operation end point can be returned to the maximum position θmax as shown in FIG. it can.

  Although the present invention has been described based on the above embodiment, the present invention is not limited to the above embodiment, and various modifications can be easily made without departing from the spirit of the present invention. It can be guessed.

  The pachinko machine 10 may be configured by combining or replacing part or all of the configuration in one of the above embodiments with part or all of the configuration of the other embodiments.

  In each of the above-described embodiments, the connecting hole 620 of the switching devices 600 to 3600 and the connecting shafts 575 and 2582 inserted through the connecting hole 620 are trapezoidal in cross section, thereby enabling positioning in the rotational direction. However, the present invention is not necessarily limited thereto, and the cross-sectional shapes of the connection hole 620 and the connection shafts 575, 2582 may be other shapes. Other shapes include, for example, unequal polygons, shapes in which keys and key grooves are formed, and the like.

  You may implement this invention in the pachinko machine etc. of a different type from said each embodiment. For example, once a big hit, a pachinko machine that raises the expected value of the big hit until a big hit state occurs (for example, two times or three times) including that (for example, a two-time right item, a three-time right item) May also be implemented. Further, after the jackpot symbol is displayed, it may be implemented as a pachinko machine that generates a special game that gives a player a predetermined game value on the condition that a ball is won in a predetermined area. Further, the present invention may be implemented in a pachinko machine that has a special area such as a V zone and has a special gaming state as a necessary condition that a special ball is awarded to the special area. Further, in addition to the pachinko machine, the game machine may be implemented as various game machines such as an alepatchi, a sparrow ball, a slot machine, a game machine in which a so-called pachinko machine and a slot machine are integrated.

  In the slot machine, for example, a symbol is changed by operating a control lever in a state where a symbol effective line is determined by inserting coins, and a symbol is stopped and confirmed by operating a stop button. Is. Accordingly, the basic concept of the slot machine is that it is provided with a display device for confirming and displaying the identification information after variably displaying the identification information string composed of a plurality of identification information, and resulting from the operation of the starting operation means (for example, the operation lever). The variation display of the identification information is started, and the variation display of the identification information is stopped and fixedly displayed due to the operation of the operation means for stop (for example, the stop button) or when a predetermined time elapses. It is a slot machine that generates a special game that gives a player a predetermined game value on the condition that the combination of identification information at the time is a specific condition. In this case, the game medium is typically a coin, medal, etc. Take as an example.

  In addition, as a specific example of a gaming machine in which a pachinko machine and a slot machine are fused, a display device is provided that displays a symbol after a symbol string composed of a plurality of symbols is variably displayed, and has a handle for launching a ball. What is not. In this case, after throwing a predetermined amount of spheres based on a predetermined operation (button operation), for example, the change of the symbol is started due to the operation of the operation lever, for example, due to the operation of the stop button, or With the passage of time, the variation of the symbol is stopped, and a special game that gives a predetermined game value to the player is generated on the condition that the determined symbol at the time of stoppage is a so-called jackpot symbol. In this case, a large amount of balls are paid out to the lower tray. If such a gaming machine is used in place of a slot machine, only a ball can be handled as a gaming value in the gaming hall. Therefore, the gaming value seen in the current gaming hall where pachinko machines and slot machines are mixed Problems such as the burden on equipment due to the separate handling of medals and balls and restrictions on the location of the gaming machine can be solved.

  The concept of various inventions included in the above-described embodiment in addition to the gaming machine of the present invention is shown below.

  In a gaming machine that includes an operation element operated by a player and whose launch intensity is adjusted according to the operation amount of the operation element, the operation element can be operated in a section from an initial position to an operation end point. The game machine A1 is characterized in that the position of the operation end point can be changed.

  According to the gaming machine A1, the operation amount of the operator can be adjusted accurately and quickly to a desired operation amount.

  Here, as a method of adjusting the operation amount of the operation element to a desired operation amount, for example, a method of providing a scale line along the movement locus of the operation element, or a reference at an arbitrary position along the movement locus of the operation element A method of fixing the piece is conceivable. According to these methods, the operation amount of the manipulator can be reduced by operating the manipulator using the scale line or the reference piece as the target position (that is, the operation position of the manipulator coincides with the scale line or the reference piece). It can be easily adjusted to a desired operation amount.

  However, in the method described above, the accuracy of adjusting the operating element depends on the skill of the player. That is, since it is necessary to finely adjust the operation position of the operator with respect to the target position while visually determining whether or not the operation position of the operation element matches the target position (scale line or reference piece) Adjustment is difficult. Further, for example, if the operating speed of the operating element is increased, the operating position may pass, so that the operating speed of the operating element needs to be reduced in the vicinity of the target position, and quick adjustment is difficult.

  On the other hand, according to the gaming machine A1, the operation element can be operated in the section from the initial position to the operation end point, and the position of the operation end point can be changed. ) By changing (setting) the position of the operation end point to a position corresponding to (), if the player operates the operation element to the operation end point (that is, the operation is restricted by the operation end point and further operations are performed). If the operation element is operated to a position where it becomes impossible to perform the operation), the operation amount of the operation element can be easily adjusted to a desired operation amount.

  Thereby, for example, it is not necessary to make fine adjustment while visually determining whether or not the operation position of the operation element matches the target position, and it is possible to accurately adjust to a desired operation amount. Moreover, since the target position is not passed, the operation speed of the operator can be increased, and the desired operation amount can be quickly adjusted.

  More specifically, as a result of adjusting the operation amount of the operation element, when the launch intensity of the game ball becomes a desired launch intensity, the position corresponding to the state (the operation element having the desired launch intensity is obtained). The position of the operation end point is changed (set) to the position corresponding to the operation amount. Thus, for example, even after the game is interrupted for a break and the operating element is returned to the initial position, the player can operate the operating element only by operating the operating element to the operation end point as described above. The operation amount of the child can be returned (adjusted) to the original operation amount (that is, the operation amount before the game is interrupted), and the return operation can be performed accurately and quickly.

  In the gaming machine A1, an operating end point changing means for changing the position of the operating end point to a position corresponding to the operation amount of the operating element when the operating element is being operated is provided.

  According to the gaming machine A2, in addition to the effect achieved by the gaming machine A1, in the state where the operating element is being operated, the operation end point is changed (set) to the position corresponding to the operating amount of the operating element. Since the means is provided, the position of the operation end point can be changed (set) while the operation amount of the operation element is maintained when the launch intensity of the game ball reaches a desired launch intensity. Thereby, the change (setting) of the position of the operation end point can be performed quickly and at an accurate position.

  In the gaming machine A2, the operation element is formed to be displaceable in a second direction different from an operation direction for adjusting the firing strength of the game ball, and the operation end point changing means is configured such that the operation element is When operated in the direction of 2, the position of the operation end point is changed to a position corresponding to the operation amount of the operation element.

  According to the gaming machine A3, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine A2, the operating element is displaced in a second direction different from the operating direction for adjusting the launch intensity of the gaming ball, so that the operation end point changing means Since the change (setting) of the position of the operation end point is performed, such a change operation can be easily performed. That is, after the player has operated the operating element to adjust the firing intensity of the game ball to a desired firing intensity, the player may then operate the operating element in the second direction from that state. Therefore, for example, it is not necessary to perform an operation of changing the operation element or an operation of operating another operation means with a hand opposite to the operation of the operation element. As a result, an operation (change operation) for changing the position of the operation end point by the operation end point changing unit can be easily performed.

  The gaming machine A3 includes a mounting member disposed in the gaming machine main body and a base member disposed so as to be displaceable with respect to the mounting member, and the operating element can be rotated with respect to the base member. The launch strength of the game ball is adjusted according to the amount of rotation of the operation element, and the base member is displaced with respect to the mounting member, thereby being displaced in the second direction. A gaming machine A4 characterized by being enabled.

  According to the gaming machine A4, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine A3, the operating element is disposed on the base member that is displaceable with respect to the mounting member so as to be rotatable, and the operating element is moved in the second direction. The displacement (that is, the operation for changing (setting) the position of the operation end point to the position corresponding to the operation amount of the operation element) is performed by the base member being displaced with respect to the mounting member. The operation for changing (setting) the position (displacement in the second direction) is performed while maintaining the operation amount of the rotation operation of the operation element (that is, the operation amount of the rotation operation is shifted, This can be easily performed while suppressing inadvertent changes in the firing intensity).

  That is, after the player adjusts the launch intensity of the game ball to a desired launch intensity by rotating the operator, the player may then perform an operation of displacing the operator in the second direction from that state. In order to change (set) the operation end point, there is no need to carry out an operation of changing the operation element or an operation of operating another operation means with a hand opposite to the operation of the operation element. As a result, it is possible to quickly change (set) the position of the operation end point and to perform an accurate position.

  In the gaming machine A4, the base member is pivotally supported by the mounting member, and is displaceable between a first position and a second position above the first position with the pivotally supported portion as a center. And the biasing force applied from the biasing means is biased in a direction to return to the second position, and the displacement of the operating element in the second direction causes the base member to move to the mounting member. On the other hand, the gaming machine A5 has a direction from the second position toward the first position against the urging force of the urging means.

  According to the gaming machine A5, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine A4, the displacement from the second position toward the first position is performed around the portion where the base member is pivotally supported by the mounting member. The second direction (the operation direction different from the operation direction for adjusting the launching intensity of the game ball) can be easily performed by, for example, an operation of bending the wrist. As a result, an operation (displacement in the second direction) for changing (setting) the position of the operation end point is performed while maintaining the operation amount of the rotation operation of the operation element (that is, the operation amount of the rotation operation is This can be performed more easily while suppressing the inadvertent change in the launch intensity of the game ball. As a result, it is possible to quickly change (set) the position of the operation end point and to perform an accurate position.

  In particular, since the biasing force for returning the displacement position to the second position is applied to the base member from the biasing means, the operating element is displaced in the second direction (that is, the base member is used as the mounting member). After being displaced (pressed down) in the direction toward the first position with the pivotally supported portion as the center, the second position can be obtained using the biasing force of the biasing means by removing the downward pressing force. Can be returned to. As a result, it is possible to reduce the operation burden on the player.

  On the other hand, the operation of displacing the operation element in the second direction (displacement (pressing down) the base member against the urging force of the urging means) is performed using the weight of the finger or arm that holds the operation element. Therefore, the operability can be improved. Further, since the operation element is disposed at a relatively low position of the gaming machine main body and the operation position is relatively low for the player, an operation to be displaced downward is more likely to exert a force. Therefore, the operability can be improved also from this point.

  The gaming machine A3 includes an attachment member disposed in the gaming machine main body, the operation element is disposed so as to be slidable with respect to the attachment member, and a game according to an operation amount of the slide operation of the operation element A gaming machine A6 characterized in that the launch intensity of the ball is adjusted.

  According to the gaming machine A6, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine A3, the operating element is disposed on the mounting member so as to be slidable. Therefore, when adjusting the operability of the operating element, that is, the launching intensity of the gaming ball. The operability can be improved. The operation element is not limited to a shape that the player can hold with fingers, but may have another shape. Examples of the other shape include a dish-like shape on which the player can place the palm and back of the hand.

  In this case, as described above, the position of the operation end point is changed (set) by the operation element being displaced in the second direction different from the operation direction of the slide operation for adjusting the firing strength of the game ball. Therefore, the setting operation can be easily performed. That is, the player operates the operating element in the operating direction of the slide operation to adjust the firing intensity of the game ball to a desired firing intensity, and then displaces the operating element in the second direction from that state. In order to change (set) the position of the operation end point, it is necessary to move the operation element or operate another operation means with the hand opposite to the operation of the operation element. Absent. Therefore, an operation for changing (setting) the position of the operation end point (displacement in the second direction) is performed while maintaining the operation amount of the slide operation of the operator (that is, the operation amount of the slide operation is shifted, This can be easily performed while suppressing inadvertent changes in the firing intensity). As a result, it is possible to quickly change (set) the position of the operation end point and to perform an accurate position.

  In the gaming machine A6, the operating element is pivotally supported by the mounting member, and is displaceable between a first position and a second position above the first position with the pivotally supported portion as a center. And is biased in a direction to return to the second position by the biasing force applied from the biasing means, and the displacement of the manipulator in the second direction causes the manipulator to move to the mounting member. On the other hand, the gaming machine A7 has a direction from the second position toward the first position against the urging force of the urging means.

  According to the gaming machine A7, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine A6, the displacement from the second position toward the first position is performed around the portion where the operating element is pivotally supported by the mounting member. The second direction (the operation direction different from the operation direction for adjusting the launching intensity of the game ball) can be easily performed by, for example, an operation of bending the wrist. As a result, the operation for changing (setting) the position of the operation end point (displacement in the second direction) is performed while maintaining the operation amount of the slide operation of the operator (that is, the operation amount of the slide operation is shifted). , While suppressing the inadvertent change in the launch intensity of the game ball). As a result, it is possible to quickly change (set) the position of the operation end point and to perform an accurate position.

  In particular, since the urging force for returning the displacement position to the second position is applied to the operation element from the urging means, the operation element is displaced in the second direction (that is, the operation element is used as the attachment member). After being displaced (pressed down) in the direction toward the first position with the pivotally supported portion as the center, the second position can be obtained using the biasing force of the biasing means by removing the downward pressing force. Can be returned to. As a result, it is possible to reduce the operation burden on the player.

  On the other hand, the operation of displacing the operation element in the second direction (displacement (pressing down) the operation element against the urging force of the urging means) is performed using the weight of the finger or arm holding the operation element. Therefore, the operability can be improved. Further, since the operation element is disposed at a relatively low position of the gaming machine main body and the operation position is relatively low for the player, an operation to be displaced downward is more likely to exert a force. Therefore, the operability can be improved also from this point.

  In any one of the gaming machines A2 to A7, a button member that is pushed in by a player is provided, and the operation end point changing means is a position corresponding to an operation amount of the operation element when the button member is pushed down. The gaming machine A8 is characterized in that the position of the operation end point is changed.

  According to the gaming machine A8, in addition to the effect of any of the gaming machines A2 to A7, a change operation for changing the position of the operation end point to a position corresponding to the operation amount of the operator by pressing the button member Since this is performed by the operation end point changing means, such a change operation can be performed separately from the operation of the operator. That is, such a changing operation can be performed while maintaining the operation amount of the operation element (that is, suppressing the accidental change in the launch intensity of the game ball due to the operation amount of the operation element being shifted). . The button member may be disposed on any of the operation member, the base member on which the operation member is disposed, or the mounting member on which the base member is disposed. In the case of being arranged on the operation element, the operation of the operation element and the operation of the button member can be performed more easily with only one hand. When arranged on the base member or the attachment member, the influence on the operation amount of the operation element due to the operation of the button member can be suppressed.

  The gaming machine A8 includes a hemispherical front cover, the operation element is formed so as to be rotatable, the front cover is disposed on a front side of the operation element, and a button member is provided on a top portion of the front cover. A gaming machine A9, wherein:

  According to the gaming machine A9, in addition to the effects achieved by the gaming machine A8, a hemispherical front cover is disposed on the front side of the operation element, and a button member is disposed on the top of the front cover. The button member can be easily pushed in with the palm of the hand using the operation of returning the wrist while maintaining the state of being gripped with fingers. Therefore, when the operation amount of the turning operation of the operating element is adjusted to the operation amount at which the launching intensity of the game ball becomes a desired firing intensity, the operation amount of the turning operation of the operating element is maintained (that is, The button member can be pushed in while suppressing the operation amount of the turning operation from deviating and the game ball launch intensity from being changed inadvertently. As a result, it is possible to quickly change (set) the position of the operation end point and to perform an accurate position.

  In the gaming machine A9, the front cover includes an opening formed at a top portion for exposing the button member, and the button member is pushed by a player so as to correspond to an operation amount of the operation element. In the state in which the position of the operation end point is changed, at least a part of the button member protrudes from the edge of the opening of the front cover.

  According to the gaming machine A10, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine A9, when the button member is pushed to change the position of the operation end point to the position corresponding to the operation amount of the operation element, the button member is There is no need to push it to a position beyond the edge of the opening of the front cover (a position where the entire button member enters the front cover). That is, when the button member is pushed in, it is possible to suppress the edge of the opening of the front cover from being obstructed and to improve the operability.

  In the gaming machine A9 or A10, the front cover includes an opening formed at a top portion for exposing the button member, and the button member is positioned at a position corresponding to an operation amount of the operation element. The second push-in position for changing the position is formed so that it can be pushed further into the third push-in position, and at least the position of the operation end point can be returned to the maximum position by pushing the button member to the third push-in position. In addition, at the third push-in position, the button member is immersed in the front cover rather than the edge of the opening of the front cover. According to the gaming machine A11, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine 8 or 9, the button member is pushed from the second pushing position to the third pushing position so that the position of the operation end point can be returned to the maximum position. In this case, it is necessary to push the button member to a position where the button member is immersed beyond the edge of the opening of the front cover (a position where the entire button member enters the front cover). Therefore, when the button member is pushed to the third pushing position, the edge of the opening of the front cover can be prevented, so that the button member at the second pushing position is inadvertently brought to the third pushing position. The pushing operation can be suppressed. As a result, the end point position that has been changed (set) to the position corresponding to the operation amount of the operator is inadvertently returned to the initial position (or in a state where it can be restored) due to an inadvertent pressing operation of the button member. Can be suppressed.

  In the gaming machines A2 to A11, the game is characterized by comprising operation end point return means for returning the position of the operation end point changed to the position corresponding to the operation amount of the operator by the operation end point changing means to the maximum position. Machine A12.

  According to the gaming machine A12, in addition to the effect of any of the gaming machines A2 to A11, an operation for returning the position of the operation end point changed to the position corresponding to the operation amount of the operator by the operation end point changing means to the maximum position. Since the end point return means is provided, the position of the operation end point can be returned to the maximum position by using the operation end point return means. That is, the operation element can be operated up to an operation position at which a game ball can be launched with a predetermined maximum firing intensity.

  In the gaming machine A12, the operation end point return means is capable of returning the position of the operation end point to the maximum position in a state where the operation element is operated.

  According to the gaming machine A13, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine A12, the operation end point return means can return the position of the operation end point to the maximum position when the operation element is operated. In order to return the position of the end point to the maximum position, there is no need to temporarily return the operation element operated to a predetermined operation amount to the initial position. Therefore, for example, when it becomes necessary to reset the position of the operation end point to another position, the resetting operation can be quickly performed. Or, for example, when a right-handed stroke is required, the operation end point is released (that is, returned to the maximum position), and the operation element is operated in the operation direction that maximizes the launch intensity of the game ball. Can be done quickly.

  In the gaming machine A13, the operation element is formed to be displaceable in a third direction different from an operation direction for adjusting the firing strength of the game ball, and the operation end point return means is configured such that the operation element is The gaming machine A14 is configured to return the position of the operation end point to the maximum position by being operated in the direction of 3.

  According to the gaming machine A14, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine A13, the operating element is displaced in a second direction different from the operating direction for adjusting the launch intensity of the gaming ball, so that the operation end point return means Since the operation end point is returned to the maximum position, the return operation can be easily performed while the game is continued (that is, the game ball is fired at a desired launch intensity). That is, the player can operate the operation element in the third direction in the state where the operation intensity of the game ball is adjusted to the desired emission intensity by operating the operation element. In order to perform the return to the maximum position, for example, it is not necessary to perform an operation of changing the operating element or an operation of operating another operating means with a hand opposite to the hand operating the operating element. As a result, the operation (return operation) for returning the position of the operation end point to the maximum position by the operation end point return means can be easily performed while continuing the game.

  In the gaming machine A14, the operation element is formed to be displaceable in a second direction different from an operation direction for adjusting the firing strength of the game ball, and the operation end point changing means is configured such that the operation element is By operating in the direction of 2, the position of the operation end point is changed to a position corresponding to the operation amount of the operation element, and the second direction and the third direction are the same direction. A gaming machine A15 characterized by this.

  According to the gaming machine A15, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine A14, the second direction and the third direction are the same direction, and the position of the operation end point is changed to a position corresponding to the operation amount of the operator. Since the change operation and the return operation for returning the position of the operation end point changed by the change operation to the maximum position can be performed by the same operation, the change operation and the return operation can be easily performed. That is, since the state due to the change operation and the state due to the return operation are alternately switched, it is effective in improving the operability that these two states can be switched by repeating the same operation. In addition, since the second direction and the third direction are the same direction, it is possible to reduce the operable direction of the operation element, thereby simplifying the structure and reducing the product cost. Can be achieved.

  The gaming machine A12 or A13 includes a button member that is pushed in by a player, and the operation end point return means returns the position of the operation end point to the maximum position when the button member is pushed down. Characteristic gaming machine A16.

  According to the gaming machine A16, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine A12 or A13, a return operation for returning the position of the operation end point to the maximum position is performed by the operation end point return means by pressing the button member. Such a return operation can be performed separately from the operation of the operator. That is, such a return operation can be performed while maintaining the operation amount of the operation element (that is, suppressing the inadvertent change in the launch intensity of the game ball due to the operation amount of the operation element being shifted). .

  In the gaming machine A16, the change of the position of the operation end point by the operation end point changing means and the return of the position of the operation end point to the maximum position by the operation end point returning means are alternately performed by pushing the button member. A gaming machine A17 characterized by being executable.

  According to the gaming machine A17, in addition to the effects achieved by the gaming machine A16, the change of the position of the operation end point by the operation end point changing means and the return of the position of the operation end point to the maximum position by the operation end point returning means Since the operations can be executed alternately by the push-in operation, it is possible to easily perform the change operation and the return operation. That is, since the state due to the change operation and the state due to the return operation are alternately switched, it is effective for improving the operability that these two states can be switched by repeatedly operating the button member having one. Become. In addition, since one button member can be used in this manner, the number of parts can be reduced and the structure can be simplified, and the product cost can be reduced accordingly.

  In any one of the gaming machines A1 to A17, a gaming machine A18 is formed so that the player can identify whether the position of the operation end point has been changed from the maximum position.

  According to the gaming machine A18, in addition to the effect of any of the gaming machines A1 to A17, it is formed so that the player can identify whether the position of the operation end point has been changed from the maximum position. It is possible to suppress a situation in which a game is played without knowing that the adjustment range is restricted, and it is difficult for a player to suffer a disadvantage.

  That is, when the operation element can be operated in the section from the initial position to the operation end point, in the configuration in which the position of the operation end point can be changed, the player determines that the position of the operation end point has been changed. If a game is played without being noticed, the game is played in a state where the adjustment range of the launch intensity of the game ball is restricted, that is, in a state where the launch of the game ball at a predetermined maximum launch intensity is not possible. As a result, the player may suffer a disadvantage.

  On the other hand, according to the gaming machine A18, since the player can identify whether the position of the operation end point has been changed from the maximum position, the position of the operation end point has been changed from the maximum position (that is, It is possible to prevent the player from suffering a disadvantage by preventing the player from playing the game without noticing that the adjustment range of the launch intensity of the game ball is regulated.

  The gaming machine A18 includes a button member that is pushed in by a player, and the button member is pushed in so that the position of the operation end point can be changed from the maximum position, and the position of the operation end point is maximum. In the state changed from the position, the push-in position of the button member is different from the state in which the position of the operation end point is at the maximum position.

  According to the gaming machine A19, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine A18, the operation end point position can be changed from the maximum position by pushing the button member, and the operation end point position is changed from the maximum position. Compared with the state where the operation end point is at the maximum position, the push position of the button member is different, so based on the difference in the push position of the button member, whether the operation end point position has been changed from the maximum position Can be identified. Accordingly, it is possible to suppress the player from playing the game without noticing that the position of the operation end point has been changed from the maximum position, and to make it difficult for the player to suffer a disadvantage.

  In this case, according to the gaming machine A19, an operation member (button member) operated to change the position of the operation end point from the maximum position is identified for identifying whether the position of the operation end point is changed from the maximum position. Since it is also used as an identification member, the number of parts can be reduced accordingly, and the product cost can be reduced.

  The gaming machine A19 includes a wall portion disposed on the outer peripheral surface side of the button member, and an opening formed in the wall portion so that at least a part of the outer peripheral surface of the button member is visible, In a state where the position of the operation end point is changed from the maximum position, the form of the object visually recognized through the opening is different from the state where the position of the operation end point is at the maximum position. A20.

  According to the gaming machine A20, in addition to the effect achieved by the gaming machine A19, when the position of the operation end point is changed from the maximum position, it is visually recognized through the opening as compared with the state where the position of the operation end point is at the maximum position. Since the form of the target to be played is different, the player can easily and reliably identify whether the position of the operation end point has been changed from the maximum position based on the difference in the form of the visually recognized target.

  That is, in the configuration in which whether the position of the operation end point has been changed from the maximum position is identified based on the difference in the push-in position of the button member, the determination criterion is the difference in the push-in amount, so the two states are clear. It is difficult to distinguish between

  On the other hand, according to the gaming machine A20, since the form of the object visually recognized through the opening is different, the determination criterion can be binarized, and the two states can be easily distinguished clearly. This allows the player to easily and reliably identify whether the position of the operation end point has been changed from the maximum position. As a result, the game can be performed without noticing that the position of the operation end point has been changed from the maximum position. It is possible to prevent the player from playing a game and to make it difficult for the player to suffer a disadvantage.

  Note that the form of the object visually recognized through the opening is different, for example, in the two states of the state where the position of the operation end point is at the maximum position and the state where the position of the operation end point is changed from the maximum position, In the state, only the outer peripheral surface of the button member is visually recognized through the opening, and in the other state, only the members other than the outer peripheral surface of the button member are visually recognized through the opening (that is, the button member is The binarization is performed based on whether or not the outer peripheral surface is visually recognized, and the configuration is distinguished based on these binary values).

  Second, in one state and the other state, the outer peripheral surface of the button member is visually recognized, but the color of the outer peripheral surface of the visually recognized button member is different between one state and the other state (that is, The color of the button member visually recognized through the opening (for example, a configuration that is binarized by white and black and distinguishes based on the binary) is exemplified.

  Third, in one state and the other state, the outer peripheral surface of the button member is visually recognized, but the area (percentage occupied in the opening) of the outer peripheral surface of the button member that is visually recognized is Different configurations depending on the state (that is, a configuration that is binarized by the area of the button member visually recognized through the opening (the area that the outer peripheral surface of the button member occupies in the opening) is distinguished based on these two values) Is done.

  Fourthly, in one state and the other state, the outer peripheral surface of the button member is visually recognized, but the shape drawn in the opening by the outer peripheral surface of the visually recognized button member is in one state and the other state. A different configuration (that is, a configuration in which the outer peripheral surface of the button member is binarized by a shape drawn in the opening and distinguished based on the binary values) is exemplified.

  Fifth, in one state and the other state, the outer peripheral surface of the button member is visually recognized, and the area of the outer peripheral surface of the button member visually recognized and the shape drawn by the outer peripheral surface of the button member are the same. The position of the outer peripheral surface of the button member in the visually recognizable opening is different between one state and the other state (that is, binarized by the position of the outer peripheral surface of the button member in the opening, and is distinguished based on these two values. Configuration) is exemplified.

  In the gaming machine A18, when the position of the operation end point is at the maximum position, the game machine A18 is disposed at the first position, and when the position of the operation end point is changed from the maximum position, the interlock is disposed at the second position. A gaming machine A21 comprising a member.

  According to the gaming machine A21, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine A18, the interlocking member is disposed at the first position when the operation end point is at the maximum position, and the operation end point is changed from the maximum position. Since it is arranged at the second position in this state, the player can easily and reliably identify whether the position of the operation end point has been changed from the maximum position based on the difference in the arrangement of the interlocking members. . As a result, it is possible to suppress the player from playing the game without noticing that the position of the operation end point has been changed from the maximum position, and to prevent the player from suffering a disadvantage.

  In the gaming machine A21, the interlocking member is formed so as to be operable by a player, and the interlocking member disposed at the second position is operated and disposed at the first position, so that the position of the operation end point is reached. Is returned to the maximum position.

  In the gaming machine A21 or A22, the interlocking member is formed so as to be operable by a player, and the interlocking member disposed at the first position is operated and disposed at the second position, whereby the operation element The gaming machine A23 is characterized in that the position of the operation end point is changed to a position corresponding to the operation amount.

  According to the gaming machine A22, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine A21, the interlocking member is formed to be operable, and the interlocking member disposed at the second position is operated and disposed at the first position. The position of the end point can be returned to the maximum position. That is, the operation element can be operated up to an operation position at which a game ball can be launched with a predetermined maximum firing intensity. Further, according to the gaming machine A23, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine A21 or A22, the interlocking member is formed to be operable, and the interlocking member disposed at the first position is operated and disposed at the second position. Thus, the position of the operation end point can be changed to a position corresponding to the operation amount of the operation element.

  In this case, according to the gaming machine A22 or the gaming machine A23, the identification member (interlocking member) for identifying whether the position of the operation end point is changed from the maximum position is returned to the maximum position. Since it is also used as an operation member operated to change the position of the operation end point, the number of parts can be reduced correspondingly, and the product cost can be reduced.

  As described above, according to the gaming machine A22, the return operation for returning the position of the operation end point to the maximum value is linked to the second position indicating the state where the position of the operation end point is changed from the maximum position. Since the operation is performed by placing the member at the first position indicating the state where the operation end point is at the maximum position, the player is operated while intuitively recognizing the return operation. As a result, inadvertent misoperation can be suppressed.

  Similarly, according to the gaming machine A23, the changing operation for changing the position of the operation end point to the position corresponding to the operation amount of the operation element is arranged at the first position indicating the state where the position of the operation end point is at the maximum position. This is achieved by performing an operation to place the interlocking member at the second position indicating the state where the position of the operation end point has been changed from the maximum position. And inadvertent misoperation can be suppressed as a result.

  In the gaming machine A6 or A7, when the operation element is displaced in the second direction, the position of the operation end point is changed by the operation end point changing means, and the slide operation of the operation element can be regulated. A gaming machine A24 that is formed.

  According to the gaming machine A24, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine A6 or A7, the operating element is displaced in the second direction, so that the change by the operation end point changing means is performed and the sliding operation of the operating element is restricted. Since it is formed in such a manner, when the operation end point position is changed (set) by the operation end point changing means, it is also possible to regulate that the position of the slide operation of the operator changes (displaces). it can. Therefore, the position of the operation end point can be accurately changed (set) to the intended position while suppressing the position of the slide operation from changing from the intended position (displacement).

  In the gaming machine A6 or A7, the operating element is formed in a rod shape that can be gripped by a player.

  According to the gaming machine A25, in addition to the effects played by the gaming machine A6 or A7, since the operating element is formed in a rod shape that can be gripped by the player, the operating element can be easily held. It is possible to improve the operability when operating the operating element in a predetermined direction (for example, a sliding operation direction or a second direction).

  In the gaming machine A25, the operating element includes a main body part that is slidably supported on one side by the mounting member, and a held part that is erected upward from the other side of the main body part and is held by the player And a gaming machine A26.

  According to the gaming machine A26, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine A25, the operating element is erected upward from the other side of the main body portion so that the held portion held by the player is raised. Can be held (gripped) by the player in a natural posture, and the slide operation and the operation in the second direction can be easily performed. In particular, since the held portion is erected from the other side of the main body, when gripping the held portion, the outer edge portion of the palm can be placed on the main body, thereby reducing fatigue. In addition, when performing the operation in the second direction (operation to push down), the weight of the hand can be applied to the main body, and the operation can be facilitated.

  In the gaming machine A6 or A7, the operating element includes a placement surface formed in a shape that allows a player to place a part of a hand.

  According to the gaming machine A27, in addition to the effects played by the gaming machine A6 or A7, the operation element has a mounting surface formed in a shape on which a player can place a part of the hand. Even a player who cannot hold the player can slide the operator using the placement surface of the operator. That is, in the conventional gaming machine that adjusts the launch strength of the game ball by rotating the rotary handle, it is difficult for a player who cannot grasp the operation portion to play the game, and the operator is slid as in the present invention. It is formed so that it can be operated, and the structure that adjusts the launch intensity of the game ball according to the operation amount of the slide operation of the operation element, and the operation part cannot be grasped by forming a mounting surface on the operation element This is the first time that a player can play a game.

  In the gaming machine A6 or A7, the operating element is slid in a downwardly inclined direction from the initial position toward the operation end point.

  According to the gaming machine A28, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine A6 or A7, the operation element is slid in the downwardly inclined direction from the initial position toward the operation end point, so that the operation amount of the sliding operation is increased. The operation in the direction to be performed (that is, the operation to increase the launch intensity of the game ball) can be easily performed using the weight of the hand. In addition, when the operating element is slid to the end point of the operation and the firing strength of the game ball is kept constant, the weight of the hand is used to counter the urging force that attempts to return the operating element to the initial position. This can reduce the player's fatigue. This configuration is particularly effective when the player performs a slide operation using the placement surface of the operation element (that is, when the player cannot hold the held portion) like the gaming machine A27. .

  In the gaming machine A6 or A7, the operating element is slid in a direction inclined upward from the initial position toward the operation end point.

  According to the gaming machine A29, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine A6 or A7, the operation element is slid in the direction of rising and tilting from the initial position toward the operation end point. It is possible to eliminate the act of hanging to keep the launching strength of the game ball constant.

  That is, in the structure in which the operation element is formed so as to be slidable and the launching intensity of the game ball is adjusted according to the operation amount of the slid operation of the operation element, if the direction of the slide operation is horizontal or inclined downward, For example, by hanging a shopping bag on the child, it is possible to maintain the operation element at the operation end point by using the weight of the shopping bag even if the player releases his hand from the operation element. Be disturbed.

  On the other hand, according to the gaming machine A29, the direction of the slide operation of the operation element is inclined upward, so that, for example, when a shopping bag is hung on the operation element, the player holds the operation element by hand. Unless otherwise, the operator can be returned to the initial position by the weight of the shopping bag. As a result, it is possible to prevent the operation element from being maintained at the operation end point with the player releasing his hand, and to ensure a fair game.

  A gaming machine B1 according to any one of the gaming machines A1 to A29, wherein the gaming machine is a slot machine. Above all, the basic configuration of the slot machine is “equipped with variable display means for confirming and displaying the identification information after dynamically displaying an identification information string composed of a plurality of identification information, and for operating the starting operation means (for example, an operation lever). As a result, the dynamic display of the identification information is started, and the dynamic display of the identification information is stopped due to the operation of the stop operation means (stop button) or after a predetermined time has elapsed. The game machine is provided with special game state generating means for generating a special game state advantageous to the player on the condition that the confirmed identification information is specific identification information. In this case, examples of the game media include coins and medals.

  A gaming machine B2 according to any one of the gaming machines A1 to A29, wherein the gaming machine is a pachinko gaming machine. Above all, the basic configuration of a pachinko gaming machine is provided with an operation handle, and a ball is launched into a predetermined game area according to the operation of the operation handle, and the ball is placed in an operation port disposed at a predetermined position in the game area. As a necessary condition for winning (or passing through the operating port), the identification information dynamically displayed on the display means is determined and stopped after a predetermined time. In addition, when a special gaming state occurs, a variable winning device (specific winning opening) disposed at a predetermined position in the gaming area is opened in a predetermined manner so that a ball can be won, and a value corresponding to the number of winnings is obtained. Examples include those to which values (including data written on magnetic cards as well as premium balls) are given.

  Any one of the gaming machines A1 to A29, wherein the gaming machine is a fusion of a pachinko gaming machine and a slot machine. Among them, the basic configuration of the merged gaming machine includes “a variable display means for confirming and displaying the identification information after dynamically displaying an identification information string composed of a plurality of identification information, and a starting operation means (for example, an operation lever). Due to the operation of the identification information, the change of the identification information is started, and the dynamic display of the identification information is stopped due to the operation of the operation means for stop (for example, the stop button) or when a predetermined time elapses. Special game state generating means for generating a special game state advantageous to the player on the condition that the fixed identification information at the time of stoppage is specific identification information, and using a ball as a game medium, and the identification information The game machine is configured such that a predetermined number of balls are required at the start of the dynamic display, and a large number of balls are paid out when the special gaming state occurs.

10 Pachinko machines (game machines)
51,2051,3051 Handle device (operating device)
520, 2520 Handle mounting base (mounting member)
530 Handle base (base member)
540, 2051 Handle ring (operator)
550 Front cover 550a Opening 550b, 554b Opening 570 Button member 577 Internal fitting wall (wall)
600, 2600, 3600 switching device (part of operation end point changing means)
3800 Operating element 3880 Bounce-up direction biasing spring (biasing means)
3810 Main body portion 3830 Held portion SP Base biasing spring (biasing means)
θ0 Initial position

  The present invention relates to a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine.

  In a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, there is a machine in which a handle rotation part is rotatably attached to a handle base, and the launch strength of a sphere is adjusted according to the amount of rotation of the handle rotation part. In addition, when the desired launch intensity is obtained by the turning operation of the handle turning part, the turning of the handle turning part is fixed in order to maintain the launch intensity and reduce the player's fatigue. There is a thing of the structure to do.

JP 2012-005759 A

  The operating element (handle rotating portion) is applied with an urging force by an urging spring, and when the player releases the hand, the operating position of the operating element is returned to the initial position. Therefore, for example, when the game is interrupted, it is difficult to adjust the operation position of the operator to the original operation position before the game is interrupted.

  The present invention has been made to solve the above-described problems, and an object thereof is to provide a gaming machine that can easily adjust the operation position of the operator to the original operation position.

Gaming machine of claim 1, wherein in order to achieve the object, provided with the the operator operated by a player, which radiation strength of game balls is adjusted in accordance with the operation amount of the operating element, the game A button member pushed in by a user, a wall portion disposed on the outer peripheral surface side of the button member, and an opening formed in the wall portion so that at least a part of the outer peripheral surface of the button member is visible When provided with, together with the operator is operable in a section from the initial position to the operation end point, the button member that is pushed, the position of the operation end point is changeable, the operation In the state where the position of the end point is changed from the maximum position, the color of the outer peripheral surface of the button member visually recognized through the opening is different compared to the state where the position of the operation end point is at the maximum position .

  According to the gaming machine of the first aspect, it is possible to easily adjust the operation amount of the operator to the original operation amount.

It is a front view of the pachinko machine in a 1st embodiment. It is a front view of the game board of a pachinko machine. It is a rear view of a pachinko machine. It is a block diagram which shows the electric constitution of a pachinko machine. (A) is a top view of the handle device, (b) is a front view of the handle device. FIG. 6 is a side view of the handle device in the direction of arrow VI in FIG. It is a front perspective view of a handle mounting base and a handle base. It is a back perspective view of a handle ring. (A) is a rear perspective view of the front cover, and (b) is a front view of the guide groove. (A) is a top view of the front cover in the direction of arrow Xa in FIG. 9 (a), and (b) is a partially enlarged cross-sectional view of the front cover along the line Xa-Xa in FIG. 10 (a). It is a back perspective view of a tongue member. It is a disassembled perspective view of the button member which illustrates the connection structure of a handle shaft support body and a shaft body. (A) is a front view of a switching apparatus, (b) is a side view of the switching apparatus in the arrow XIIIb direction view of Fig.13 (a). (A) is sectional drawing of the switching apparatus in the XIVb-XIVb line | wire of Fig.13 (a), (b) is a side view of the switching apparatus in the arrow XIVb direction view of Fig.13 (a). (A) And (b) is sectional drawing of a switching apparatus, (c) is a front view of the switching apparatus in the arrow XVc direction view of Fig.15 (a), (d) is FIG.15 (b). It is a front view of the switching apparatus in the arrow XVd direction view of). It is a back perspective view of a handle base. It is a perspective view in the disassembled state of a handle mounting base. (A) is a perspective view in the assembly state of a handle mounting base, (b) is an inner side view of a 1st main body. It is a rear perspective view of a handle mounting base and a handle base. It is a front perspective view of a handle base in the state where a handle restricting member was attached. It is a front perspective view of a handle base in the state where a handle control member was removed. (A) And (b) is a perspective view of a handle control member. It is a partial cross section side view of a handle device in the state before being displaced. It is a partial section side view of a handle device in the state after being operated for displacement. It is a partial cross section side view of a handle apparatus. It is a partial cross section side view of a handle apparatus. It is a partial cross section side view of a handle apparatus. It is a front schematic diagram of the handle device schematically showing the handle ring and the switching device. It is a front schematic diagram of the handle device schematically showing the handle ring and the switching device. It is a schematic diagram which illustrates typically the state of rotation operation of a handle apparatus. It is a schematic diagram which illustrates typically the state of rotation operation of a handle apparatus. (A) And (b) is the elements on larger scale of a handle apparatus. (A) is a top view of the handle apparatus in 2nd Embodiment, (b) is a front view of a handle apparatus. FIG. 34 is a side view of the handle device as viewed in the direction of arrow XXXII in FIG. It is a front perspective view of a handle mounting base and a handle base. It is a back perspective view of a handle ring. It is a back perspective view of a front cover. (A) is a front view of the switching device, (b) is a side view of the switching device in the direction of arrow XXXVIb in FIG. 38 (a), and (c) is an arrow XXXVIc in FIG. 38 (a). It is a rear view of the switching device in the direction view. (A) is sectional drawing of the switching apparatus in the XXXVIIa-XXXVIIa line | wire of Fig.38 (a), (b) is a side view of the switching apparatus in the arrow XXXVIIb direction view of Fig.38 (a). (A) And (b) is sectional drawing of a switching apparatus, (c) is a rear view of the switching apparatus in the arrow XXXVIIIc direction view of Fig.40 (a), (d) is FIG.40 (b). It is a rear view of the switching apparatus in the arrow XXXVIIId direction view of). (A) is a front view of a pushing member, (b) is a side view of the pushing member in the arrow XLIb direction view of FIG. 41 (a), (c) is XLIc- of FIG. 41 (a). It is sectional drawing of the pushing member in a XLIc line. (A) is a front view of a switch member, (b) is a side view of the switch member as viewed in the direction of the arrow XLIIb in FIG. 42 (a), and (c) is XLIIc− in FIG. 42 (a). It is sectional drawing of the switch member in a XLIIc line. (A) is a front view of a base body, (b) is sectional drawing of the base body in the XLIIIb-XLIIIb line | wire of Fig.43 (a). (A) is a side view of the transmission rod, and (b) is a cross-sectional view of the transmission rod along the XLIVb-XLIVb line in FIG. 44 (a). It is the plane development view which expanded and illustrated the inner peripheral surface of the penetration hole of a base object on a plane. FIG. 46 is a partially enlarged development view of a guide groove in which a range XLVI in FIG. 45 is partially enlarged. (A) to (c) is a side view of the switch member. It is a rear perspective view in the disassembled state of a handle base, a handle mounting base, and a linear motion conversion member. FIG. 11 is a rear perspective view of the handle base 530, the handle mounting base 2520, and the linear motion conversion member 2800 in an assembled state. It is a back perspective view in the assembly state of a handle base, a handle mounting base, and a linear motion conversion member. It is a perspective view in the disassembled state of a handle mounting base. (A) is a perspective view in the assembly state of a handle mounting base, (b) is an inner side view of a 1st main body. (A) is a side view of the linear motion conversion member as viewed in the direction of the arrow LIIa in FIG. 48, and (b) is a front view of the linear motion conversion member as viewed in the direction of the arrow LIIb in FIG. 52 (c) is a side view of the linear motion conversion member as viewed in the direction of the arrow LIIc in FIG. 52 (b). It is a partial cross section side view of a handle apparatus. It is a partial cross section side view of a handle apparatus. It is a partial cross section side view of a handle apparatus. (A) is a partial enlarged side view of the handle device, and (b) is a partially enlarged top view of the handle device. (A) is a partial enlarged side view of the handle device, and (b) is a partially enlarged top view of the handle device. (A) is a top view of the handle apparatus in 3rd Embodiment, (b) is a side view of the handle apparatus in the arrow LVIIIb direction view of Fig.58 (a). It is sectional drawing of the handle apparatus in the LVIX-LVIX line | wire of Fig.58 (a). (A) is a side view of the lower base, (b) is a top view of the lower base as viewed in the direction of the arrow LXb in FIG. 60 (a), and (c) is a diagram of FIG. 60 (b). It is sectional drawing of the lower base in the LXc-LXc line. (A) is a side view of the intermediate base, (b) is a top view of the intermediate base as viewed in the direction of arrow LXIb in FIG. 61 (a), and (c) is LXIc− in FIG. 61 (b). It is sectional drawing of the intermediate | middle base in a LXIc line. (A) is a side view of the upper base, (b) is a bottom view of the upper base as viewed in the direction of arrow LXIIb in FIG. 62 (a), and (c) is LXIIc− in FIG. 62 (b). It is sectional drawing of the upper side base in a LXIIc line. (A) is a front view of a closing member, (b) is a bottom view of the closing member as seen in the direction of arrow LXIIIb in FIG. 63 (a), and (c) is a view in FIG. 63 (a). It is sectional drawing of the sealing member in a LXIIIc-LXIIIc line. (A) And (b) is a partial cross section side view of a rotating shaft part and an operation element. (A) is a side view of a rotating shaft part, (b) is a rear view of the rotating shaft part in the arrow LXVb direction view of FIG. 65 (a), and (c) is a partial cross-sectional rear surface of the push-up member. FIG. (A) is a top view of the rotating shaft part in the arrow LXVIa direction view of Fig.65 (a), (b) is sectional drawing of the rotating shaft part in the LXIVb-LXVIb line | wire of Fig.66 (a). (A) is a side view of the operation element, and (b) is a top view of the operation element as viewed in the direction of the arrow LXVIb in FIG. 67 (a). (A) is a partial enlarged cross-sectional view of the operation element taken along line LXVIIIa-LXVIIIa in FIG. 67 (b), and (b) is a partial enlarged cross-sectional view of the operation element taken along line LXVIIIb-LXVIIIb in FIG. 67 (b). is there. It is a partial expanded sectional view of a handle device. (A) is a top view of the switching device, (b) is a side view of the switching device as viewed in the direction of arrow LXXb in FIG. 70 (a), and (c) is an arrow LXXc in FIG. 70 (b). It is a bottom view of the switching device in the direction view. (A) is sectional drawing of the switching apparatus in the LXXIAa-LXXIa line | wire of Fig.70 (a), (b) is a side view of the switching apparatus in the arrow LXXIb direction view of FIG.70 (b). (A) is a front view of a pushing member, (b) is a side view of the pushing member as viewed in the direction of arrow LXXIIb in FIG. 72 (a), and (c) is LXXIIc− in FIG. 72 (a). It is sectional drawing of the pushing member in a LXXIIc line. (A) is a side view of a transmission rod, (b) is a top view of the transmission rod in the direction of arrow LXXIIIb in FIG. 73 (a). It is a partial cross section side view of a handle apparatus. It is a partial cross section side view of a handle apparatus. It is a partial cross section side view of a handle apparatus. It is a partial expansion perspective view of a rotating shaft part and a switching device. It is a partial expansion perspective view of a rotating shaft part and a switching device. It is a schematic diagram which illustrates typically the state of the slide operation of a handle apparatus. It is a schematic diagram which illustrates typically the state of the slide operation of a handle apparatus.

  Embodiments of the present invention will be described below with reference to the accompanying drawings. First, referring to FIG. 1 to FIG. 1, an embodiment in which the present invention is applied to a pachinko gaming machine (hereinafter simply referred to as “pachinko machine”) 10 will be described as a first embodiment. 1 is a front view of a pachinko machine 10 according to the first embodiment, FIG. 2 is a front view of a game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10, and FIG. 3 is a rear view of the pachinko machine 10.

  As shown in FIG. 1, the pachinko machine 10 includes an outer frame 11 in which an outer shell is formed by a wooden frame combined in a substantially rectangular shape, and an outer shape that is substantially the same as the outer frame 11. And an inner frame 12 supported to be openable and closable. In order to support the inner frame 12, metal hinges 18 are attached to the outer frame 11 at two upper and lower portions on the left side when viewed from the front (see FIG. 1). The frame 12 is supported so as to be openable and closable to the front front side.

  A game board 13 (see FIG. 2) having a large number of nails, winning holes 63, 64 and the like is detachably mounted on the inner frame 12 from the back side. A ball ball game is played when a ball (game ball) flows down the front of the game board 13. The inner frame 12 has a ball launch unit 112a (see FIG. 4) that launches a ball to the front area of the game board 13 and a launch that guides the ball launched from the ball launch unit 112a to the front area of the game board 13. A rail (not shown) or the like is attached.

  On the front side of the inner frame 12, a front frame 14 that covers the upper side of the front surface and a lower dish unit 15 that covers the lower side of the front frame 14 are provided. In order to support the front frame 14 and the lower dish unit 15, metal hinges 19 are attached to two upper and lower portions on the left side when viewed from the front (see FIG. 1), and the side on which the hinges 19 are provided is used as an opening / closing axis. 14 and the lower pan unit 15 are supported so as to be openable and closable toward the front front side. The locking of the inner frame 12 and the locking of the front frame 14 are respectively released by inserting a dedicated key into the key hole 21 of the cylinder lock 20 and performing a predetermined operation.

  The front frame 14 is assembled with decorative resin parts, electrical parts, and the like, and a window part 14c that is formed in an approximately elliptical shape is provided at a substantially central part thereof. A glass unit 16 having two plate glasses is disposed on the back side of the front frame 14, and the front surface of the game board 13 can be seen on the front side of the pachinko machine 10 through the glass unit 16.

  On the front frame 14, an upper plate 17 that stores balls is formed in a substantially box shape that protrudes forward and the upper surface is opened, and prize balls and rental balls are discharged to the upper plate 17. The bottom surface of the upper plate 17 is formed to be inclined downward to the right when viewed from the front (see FIG. 1), and the sphere thrown into the upper plate 17 is guided to the ball launch unit 112a by the inclination. A frame button 22 is provided on the upper surface of the upper plate 17. The frame button 22 is operated by the player when, for example, changing the stage of the effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 (see FIG. 2) or changing the contents of the effect of super reach. The

  The front frame 14 is provided with light emitting means such as various lamps around it (for example, a corner portion). These light-emitting means play a role of enhancing the effect of the game during the game by changing or controlling the light-emitting mode by turning on or flashing according to the change in the gaming state at the time of big hit or predetermined reach. On the peripheral edge of the window portion 14c, there are provided electric decoration portions 29 to 33 incorporating light emitting means such as LEDs. In the pachinko machine 10, these lighting parts 29 to 33 function as effect lamps such as jackpot lamps, and the lighting parts 29 to 33 are turned on by lighting or blinking of the built-in LEDs at the time of jackpot or reach effects. Alternatively, it flashes to notify that the jackpot is being hit or that the reach is one step before the jackpot. Further, in the upper left part of the front frame 14 as viewed from the front (see FIG. 1), there is provided a display lamp 34 which has built-in light emitting means such as LEDs and can display the payout of a prize ball and when an error occurs.

  In addition, a small window 35 is formed by attaching a transparent resin from the back side so that the back side of the front frame 14 can be visually recognized, on the lower side of the right illumination part 32, and a sticking space K1 on the front side of the game board 13 (FIG. 2) is visible from the front surface of the pachinko machine 10. In addition, in the pachinko machine 10, a plated member 36 made of ABS resin that is chrome-plated is attached to an area around the electric decoration parts 29 to 33 in order to bring out more gorgeousness.

  A ball rental operation unit 40 is disposed below the window 14c. The ball lending operation unit 40 is provided with a frequency display unit 41, a ball lending button 42 and a return button 43. When the ball lending operation unit 40 is operated in a state where a bill or a card is inserted into a card unit (ball lending unit) (not shown) arranged on the side of the pachinko machine 10, Loans are made. Specifically, the frequency display unit 41 is an area in which the remaining amount information such as a card is displayed, and the built-in LED is lit to display the remaining amount as the remaining amount information. The ball lending button 42 is operated to obtain a lending ball based on information recorded on a card or the like (recording medium), and the lending ball is supplied to the upper plate 17 as long as there is a remaining amount on the card or the like. Is done. The return button 43 is operated when requesting the return of a card or the like inserted into the card unit. In addition, in a pachinko machine in which a ball is lent directly to the upper plate 17 from a ball lending device or the like without using a card unit, a so-called cash machine does not require the ball lending operation unit 40. In this case, the ball lending operation unit 40 It is also possible to add a decorative seal or the like to the installation portion of the parts so that the component configuration is common. A pachinko machine using a card unit and a cash machine can be shared.

  In the lower plate unit 15 located on the lower side of the upper plate 17, a lower plate 50 for storing a ball that could not be stored in the upper plate 17 is formed in a substantially box shape having an open upper surface. Yes. On the right side of the lower plate 50, an operation handle 51 that is operated by a player to drive a ball into the front surface of the game board 13 is disposed.

  Inside the operation handle 51, a touch sensor 51a for permitting driving of the ball launch unit 112a, a launch stop switch 51b for stopping the launch of the ball during the pressing operation, and a rotation of the operation handle 51. A variable resistor (not shown) that detects the amount of movement (rotation position) based on a change in electrical resistance is incorporated. When the operation handle 51 is rotated clockwise by the player, the touch sensor 51a is turned on and the resistance value of the variable resistor changes in accordance with the amount of rotation operation. The resistance value of the variable resistor A ball is fired with a strength corresponding to (shooting strength), and the ball is driven into the front surface of the game board 13 with a jump amount corresponding to the player's operation. Further, when the operation handle 51 is not operated by the player, the touch sensor 51a and the firing stop switch 51b are turned off.

  In the lower part of the front of the lower plate 50, a ball removal lever 52 is provided for operating when the balls stored in the lower plate 50 are discharged downward. The ball removal lever 52 is always urged in the right direction. By sliding the ball release lever 52 in the left direction against the urge, the bottom opening formed in the bottom surface of the lower plate 50 is opened. A ball naturally falls from the bottom opening and is discharged. The operation of the ball removal lever 52 is normally performed in a state where a box (generally referred to as “a thousand box”) for receiving the balls discharged from the lower plate 50 is placed below the lower plate 50. As described above, the operation handle 51 is disposed on the right side of the lower plate 50, and the ashtray 53 is attached on the left side of the lower plate 50.

  As shown in FIG. 2, the game board 13 has a wooden base plate 60 cut into a substantially square shape when viewed from the front, a number of nails (not shown) for ball guidance, a windmill, rails 61, 62, General winning port 63, first winning port 64, second winning port 640, first variable winning device 65, second variable winning device 650, first through gate 67, second through gate 670, variable display unit 80 Etc., and its peripheral edge is attached to the back side of the inner frame 12 (see FIG. 1). The general winning port 63, the first winning port 64, the second winning port 640, the first variable winning device 65, the second variable winning device 650, and the variable display device unit 80 are formed on the base plate 60 by router processing. It is disposed in the through hole and is fixed from the front side of the game board 13 with wood screws or the like.

  The front center portion of the game board 13 can be viewed from the front side of the inner frame 12 through the window portion 14c (see FIG. 1) of the front frame 14. The configuration of the game board 13 will be described below mainly with reference to FIG.

  An outer rail 62 formed by bending a strip-shaped metal plate into a substantially arc shape is planted on the front surface of the game board 13, and the strip-shaped metal plate is located on the inner side of the outer rail 62 in the same manner as the outer rail 62. The arc-shaped inner rail 61 formed by the above is planted. The inner rail 61 and the outer rail 62 surround the outer periphery of the front surface of the game board 13, and the game board 13 and the glass unit 16 (see FIG. 1) surround the front and rear. A game area in which a game is played is formed by the behavior of. The game area is a front surface of the game board 13 and is a substantially circular area formed by dividing the two rails 61 and 62 and the arc member 70 (a winning hole or the like is provided, Area).

  The two rails 61 and 62 are provided to guide the ball fired from the ball launch unit 112a (see FIG. 4) to the upper part of the game board 13. A return ball preventing member 68 is attached to the front end portion of the inner rail 61 (upper left portion in FIG. 2) to prevent the ball once guided to the upper portion of the game board 13 from returning to the ball guide path again. Is done. A return rubber 69 is attached to the tip of the outer rail 62 (upper right part in FIG. 2) at a position corresponding to the maximum flying portion of the sphere, and the ball launched at a predetermined momentum or more hits the return rubber 69 and gains momentum. Is bounced back to the center while being attenuated. A resin arc member 70 formed by providing an arc connecting the rails on the inner surface side between the lower right end of the inner rail 61 and the upper right end of the outer rail 62 is a base. The plate 60 is driven and fixed.

  Two first symbol display devices 37A and 37B are disposed in the upper right portion of the game area when viewed from the front (upper right portion of FIG. 2). The first symbol display device 37A is provided with a plurality of LEDs 37Aa which are light emitting means and a 7-segment display 37Ab. Similarly, the other first symbol display device 37B is provided with a plurality of LEDs 37Ba and a 7-segment display 37Bb which are light emitting means.

  The first symbol display devices 37 </ b> A and 37 </ b> B display according to each control performed by the main control device 110, and mainly display the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10. In the present embodiment, these first symbol display devices 37 </ b> A and 37 </ b> B are configured to be selectively used depending on whether the ball has won the first entrance 64 or the second entrance 640. ing. Specifically, when the ball wins the first entrance 64, the first symbol display device 37A operates, while when the ball wins the second entrance 640, The first symbol display device 37B is configured to operate.

  Each of the plurality of LEDs 37Aa and 37Ba indicates whether the pachinko machine 10 is in a certain change, in a short time, or in a normal state by a lighting state, indicates whether or not it is fluctuating by a lighting state, and a stop pattern is definitely changed. Whether the symbol corresponds to the jackpot, the symbol corresponding to the normal jackpot or the off symbol is indicated by a lighting state, or the number of reserved balls is indicated by a lighting state. Each of the 7-segment display devices 37Ab and 37Bb displays the number of rounds that are a big hit and an error display. The LEDs 37Aa and 37Ba are configured so that the emission colors (for example, red, green, and blue) of the respective LEDs are different, and the combination of the emission colors may suggest various gaming states of the pachinko machine 10 with a small number of LEDs. it can.

  In the pachinko machine 10, lottery is performed when the first entrance 64 and the second entrance 640 are entered. In the lottery, the pachinko machine 10 determines whether or not it is a big hit (big hit lottery), and also determines the type of the big hit if it is determined to be a big hit. As the jackpot type determined here, 15R probability variation jackpot, 4R probability variation jackpot, and 15R normal jackpot are prepared. The LEDs 37Aa and 37Ba not only indicate whether or not the lottery result is a jackpot as a stop symbol after the end of the change, but if the jackpot is a jackpot, a symbol corresponding to the jackpot type is displayed.

  Here, the “15R probability variation jackpot” is a probability variation jackpot in which the maximum number of rounds shifts to a high probability state after a jackpot of 15 rounds, and “4R probability variation jackpot” is a jackpot with a maximum number of rounds of four. It is a probabilistic jackpot that shifts to a high probability state after. In addition, “15R normal jackpot” is a jackpot that shifts to a low probability state after the maximum number of rounds of 15 rounds and hits a short time during a predetermined number of fluctuations (for example, 100 fluctuations). is there.

  In addition, the “high probability state” means a state in which the jackpot probability thereafter increases as an added value after the jackpot ends, that is, when the probability change is in progress (probability change), in other words, a game that easily shifts to the special game state. It is a state of. The high probability state (during probability change) in the present embodiment includes a game state in which the hit probability of the second symbol, which will be described later, is increased and a ball is likely to enter the second entrance 640. The “low probability state” refers to a time when the probability of jackpot change is not occurring, and a state where the jackpot probability is normal, that is, a state where the jackpot probability is lower than that at the time of probability change. The short time state (short time) of the “low probability state” means that the jackpot probability is a normal state, and the jackpot probability remains as it is and only the hit probability of the second symbol is increased. It means a game state in which a ball can easily enter 640. On the other hand, when the pachinko machine 10 is in a normal state is a game state (a state where neither the big hit probability nor the second symbol hit probability is increased) which is neither probabilistic nor short in time.

  During probability change and time reduction, not only the probability of hitting the second symbol is increased, but also the time when the electric accessory 640a attached to the second entrance 640 is opened is changed, which is longer than normal Is set. When the electric accessory 640a is in an opened state (open state), a ball enters the second entrance 640 as compared with a case where the electric accessory 640a is in a closed state (closed state). It becomes easy to sphere. Thus, during the probability change or during the short time, it becomes easy for the ball to enter the second entrance 640, and the number of jackpot lotteries can be increased.

  In addition, during the probability change or in the short time, the opening time of the electric accessory 640a associated with the second entrance 640a is not changed, or in addition to changing the opening time, It is good also as what changes the frequency | count that the electrically-driven accessory 640a opens rather than usual. In addition, the probability of winning the second symbol is not changed during the probability change or in the short time, and the electric accessory 640a is opened at the time when the electric accessory 640a associated with the second entrance 640 is opened and once. It is good also as what changes at least one of the frequency | count to do. In addition, during the probability change or in the short time, the time for opening the electric accessory 640a associated with the second entrance 640 or the number of times of opening the electric accessory 640a per time is not shown. Only the hit probability may be changed so as to be higher than normal.

  The game area is provided with a plurality of general winning ports 63 through which 5 to 15 balls are paid out as winning balls when the balls win. In addition, a variable display device unit 80 is disposed in the central portion of the game area. The variable display device unit 80 has a first entry port 64 and a second entry port 640 as a trigger (start winning prize) as a trigger while synchronizing with the variable display on the first symbol display units 37A and 37B. The third symbol display device 81 composed of a liquid crystal display (hereinafter simply referred to as “display device”) that displays three symbols in a variable manner, and the first through gate 67 and the second through gate 670 passing through the sphere as a trigger. There is provided a second symbol display device 83 composed of LEDs that variably display two symbols. The variable display device unit 80 is provided with a center frame 86 so as to surround the outer periphery of the third symbol display device 81.

  The third symbol display device 81 is constituted by a large liquid crystal display of 8 inch size, and the display content is controlled by the display control device 114 (see FIG. 4). One symbol row is displayed. Each symbol row is composed of a plurality of symbols (third symbol). These third symbols are horizontally scrolled for each symbol column, and the third symbol is variably displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81. It is like that. In the third symbol display device 81 of the present embodiment, the display of the gaming state accompanying the control of the main controller 110 (see FIG. 4) is performed on the first symbol display device 37, whereas the first symbol display thereof is performed. A decorative display corresponding to the display of the device 37 is performed. Instead of the display device, the third symbol display device 81 may be configured using, for example, a reel.

  Each time the sphere passes through the first through gate 67 and the second through gate 670, the second symbol display device 83 displays the symbol “◯” and the symbol “X” as the display symbol (second symbol) for a predetermined time. The variable display is alternately turned on. In the pachinko machine 10, when it is detected that the ball has passed the first through gate 67 or the second through gate 670, a winning lottery is performed. As a result of the winning lottery, if it is a win, the second symbol display device 83 stops and displays the symbol “◯” after the second symbol variation is displayed. If the winning lottery results, the symbol of “x” is stopped and displayed on the second symbol display device 83 after the variation of the third symbol is displayed.

  When the variation display on the second symbol display device 83 stops at a predetermined symbol (in this embodiment, a symbol “◯”), the pachinko machine 10 has the electric accessory 640a attached to the second entrance 640. It is configured to be activated (opened) for a predetermined time.

  The time required for the variable display of the second symbol is set to be shorter during the probability change or during the shorter time than when the game state is normal. As a result, during the probability change and during the time reduction, since the variation display of the second symbol is performed in a short time, the winning lottery can be performed more than during normal. Therefore, since the chance of winning in the winning lottery increases, it is possible to give the player many opportunities for the electric accessory 640a of the second entrance 640 to be opened. Therefore, it is possible to make it easier for the ball to enter the second entrance 640 during the probability change and during the time reduction.

  It should be noted that the second entrance 640 may be changed during the probability change or in a short time by other methods such as increasing the probability of hitting during the probability change or in the time reduction, or increasing the opening time or the number of times of opening of the electric accessory 640a per hit. When the ball is in a state where it is easy to enter the ball, the time required for the variable display of the second symbol may be constant regardless of the gaming state. On the other hand, when the time required for displaying the variation of the second symbol is set shorter than normal during probability change or short time, the winning probability may be constant regardless of the gaming state, The opening time and the number of opening times of the electric accessory 640a may be constant regardless of the gaming state.

  The first through gate 67 is assembled to the game board on the left side of the variable display device unit 80, and is configured so that a part of the ball flowing down to the left of the game board can pass through the balls launched to the game board. ing. In addition, the second through gate 670 is assembled to the game board on the right side of the variable display device unit 80, and among the balls launched to the game board, a part of the ball flowing down to the right of the game board can pass. It is configured. When the ball passes through the first through gate 67 or the second through gate 670, a lottery for the second symbol is performed. After the winning lottery, the second symbol display device 83 displays the variation. If the winning lottery results, the symbol “○” is displayed as the variation display stop symbol, and the winning lottery result is out. If there is, the symbol “x” is displayed as the symbol for stopping the variable display.

  The total number of passages of the first through gate 67 and the second through gate 670 of the sphere is reserved up to a total of four times, and the number of retained balls is displayed by the above-described first symbol display device 37 and the second symbol hold lamp. 84 is also lit up. Four second symbol holding lamps 84 are provided corresponding to the maximum number of holdings, and are arranged symmetrically below the third symbol display device 81.

  Note that the variable display of the second symbol is performed by switching on and off of a plurality of lamps in the second symbol display device 83 as in this embodiment, as well as the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol. Alternatively, a part of the display device 81 may be used. Similarly, the second symbol holding lamp 84 may be turned on by a part of the third symbol display device 81. Further, the maximum number of balls held for passing the first through gate 67 and the second through gate 670 is not limited to four times, and is three times or less, or five times or more (for example, eight times). It may be set to. Further, since the number of reserved balls is indicated by the first symbol display device 37, the second symbol reservation lamp 84 may not perform the lighting display.

  Below the variable display device unit 80, a first entrance 64 into which a sphere can enter is disposed. When a ball enters the first entrance 64, a first entrance switch (not shown) provided on the back side of the game board 13 is turned on, and the first entrance switch is turned on. The main control device 110 (see FIG. 4) draws a jackpot, and a display corresponding to the lottery result is indicated by the LED 37Aa of the first symbol display device 37A.

  On the other hand, a second entrance 640 through which a sphere can enter is arranged on the right side of the variable display device unit 80 in front view. When a ball enters the second entrance 640, a second entrance switch (not shown) provided on the back side of the game board 13 is turned on, and the second entrance switch is turned on. The main control device 110 (see FIG. 4) performs a lottery lottery, and the display corresponding to the lottery result is indicated by the LED 37Ba of the first symbol display device 37B.

  Each of the first entrance 64 and the second entrance 640 is also one of the entrances for paying out 5 balls as prize balls when a ball enters. In the present embodiment, the number of prize balls paid out when a ball enters the first entrance 64 and the number of prize balls paid out when a ball enters the second entrance 640 are the same. However, the number of prize balls to be paid out when a ball enters the first entrance 64 is different from the number of prize balls to be paid out when a ball enters the second entrance 640, for example, The number of prize balls to be paid out when a ball enters the first entrance 64 is three, and the number of prize balls to be paid out when a ball enters the second entrance 640 is five. May be.

  The second entrance 640 is accompanied by an electric accessory 640a. The electric combination 640a is configured to be openable and closable. Normally, the electric combination 640a is in a closed state (reduced state), and it is difficult for the ball to enter the second entrance 640. On the other hand, as a result of the variation display of the second symbol that is triggered by the passage of the sphere to the first through gate 67 and the second through gate 670, the symbol “◯” is displayed on the second symbol display device 83, The electric accessory 640a is in an open state (enlarged state), and the ball is likely to enter the second entrance 640.

  As described above, the probability of hitting the second symbol is higher than that during normal change during the probability change and the short time, and the time required for the variation display of the second symbol is short. "Is easily displayed, and the number of times that the electric accessory 640a is opened (enlarged) is increased. Further, during the probability change and the time reduction, the time for opening the electric accessory 640a also becomes longer than during the normal time. Therefore, it is possible to create a state in which the ball is likely to enter the second entrance 640 during the probability change and during the short time compared to the normal time.

  Here, the probability of a big hit between when the ball enters the first entrance 64 and when the ball enters the second entrance 640 is low or high. Are the same. However, the probability of a 15R probability variable jackpot as the jackpot type selected when the jackpot is won is that the ball enters the first slot 64 when the ball enters the second slot 640. It is set higher than the case. On the other hand, the first entrance 64 does not have an electric accessory as in the second entrance 640 and is in a state in which a ball can always enter.

  Therefore, during normal times, the electric accessory associated with the second entrance 640 is often in a closed state, and it is difficult to enter the second entrance 640, so the first entrance without the electric accessory The ball is fired toward the mouth 64 so that the ball passes through the left side of the variable display device unit 80 (so-called “left-handed”). It is advantageous for the player to aim for a big hit.

  On the other hand, during the probability change or during the short time, the electric accessory attached to the second entrance 640 is likely to be in an open state and is easy to enter the second entrance 640. Toward the right side of the variable display device 80 so as to pass the ball (so-called “right-handed”), and aiming at 15R probability variation big hit by entering the second entrance 640 However, it is advantageous for the player.

  As described above, the pachinko machine 10 according to the present embodiment launches a ball to the player in accordance with the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 (whether it is probable, short, or normal). Can be changed between “left-handed” and “right-handed”. Thus, the player can be changed in the way the ball is hit, so that the game can be enjoyed.

  A first variable winning device 65 is disposed below the first winning hole 64, and a horizontally-long rectangular specific winning opening (large opening) 65a is provided at a substantially central portion thereof. In the pachinko machine 10, when the jackpot lottery performed due to the entrance to the first entrance 64 becomes a jackpot, after a predetermined time (fluctuation time) has elapsed, a first jackpot stop pattern is set. The LED 37Aa of the symbol display device 37A is turned on and a stop symbol corresponding to the jackpot is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 to indicate the occurrence of the jackpot. Thereafter, the gaming state transitions to a special gaming state (big hit) where the ball is easy to win. In this special gaming state, the special winning opening 65a that is normally closed is opened for a predetermined time (for example, until 30 seconds have elapsed or ten balls have been won).

  Further, a second variable winning device 650 is disposed below the second winning hole 640, and a horizontally-long rectangular specific winning opening (large opening) 650a is provided at a substantially central portion thereof. In the pachinko machine 10, when the big win lottery performed due to the entrance to the second entrance 640 becomes a big win, after a predetermined time (fluctuation time) has passed, the first big win will be stopped. The LED 37Ba of the symbol display device 37B is turned on and a stop symbol corresponding to the jackpot is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 to indicate the occurrence of the jackpot. Thereafter, the gaming state transitions to a special gaming state (big hit) where the ball is easy to win. As this special gaming state, the special winning opening 650a that is normally closed is opened for a predetermined time (for example, until 30 seconds elapses or 10 balls are won).

  The specific winning ports 65a and 650a are closed when a predetermined time has elapsed, and after the closing, the specific winning ports 65a and 650a are opened again for a predetermined time. The opening / closing operation of the specific winning ports 65a and 650a can be repeated up to 15 times (15 rounds), for example. The state in which the opening / closing operation is performed is one form of a special gaming state that is advantageous to the player. Is done.

  Specifically, the first variable prize-winning device 65 and the second variable prize-winning device 650 have a horizontally long rectangular opening / closing plate that covers the specific winning opening 65a or the specific winning opening 650a, and a front side about the lower side of the opening / closing plate. A large opening solenoid (not shown) for opening and closing is provided. The special winning openings 65a and 650a are normally closed so that the ball cannot win or is difficult to win. In the case of a big hit, the large opening opening solenoid is driven to tilt the opening / closing plate to the lower front side to temporarily form an open state in which the ball is likely to win the specific winning opening 65a. It operates to repeat the state and the state alternately.

  Note that the special gaming state is not limited to the above-described form. When the game area is provided with a large opening that can be opened and closed separately from the specific winning openings 65a and 650a, and the LED 37Aa and LED 37Ba corresponding to the big win in the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B are turned on, the specific winning openings 65a and 650a are A predetermined opening is provided for a predetermined time, and a large opening provided separately from the specific winning openings 65a and 650a is triggered by the ball winning in the specific winning openings 65a and 650a while the specific winning openings 65a and 650a are opened. A gaming state that is released a predetermined number of times may be formed as a special gaming state.

  Adhesive spaces K1 and K2 for adhering certificate stamps, identification labels, and the like are provided at the left and right corners on the lower side of the game board 13. It can be visually recognized through the small window 35 (see FIG. 1).

  Further, the game board 13 is provided with an out port 66. A ball that has not entered any of the winning openings 63, 64, 65a, 640, 650a is guided to a ball discharge path (not shown) through the out opening 66. A number of nails are planted on the game board 13 in order to appropriately disperse and adjust the falling direction of the ball, and various members (instruments) such as a windmill are arranged.

  As shown in FIG. 3, control board units 90 and 91 and a back pack unit 94 are mainly provided on the back side of the pachinko machine 10. The control board unit 90 is unitized by mounting a main board (main control apparatus 110), an audio lamp control board (audio lamp control apparatus 113), and a display control board (display control apparatus 114). The control board unit 91 is unitized by mounting a payout control board (payout control apparatus 111), a firing control board (launching control apparatus 112), a power supply board (power supply apparatus 115), and a card unit connection board 116.

  The back pack unit 94 includes a back pack 92 and a dispensing unit 93 that form a protective cover. In addition, each control board is used for MPU as a one-chip microcomputer that controls each control, a port for communicating with various devices, a random number generator used for various lotteries, time counting and synchronization. A clock pulse generation circuit or the like is mounted as necessary.

  The main control device 110, the sound lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114, the payout control device 111 and the firing control device 112, the power supply device 115, and the card unit connection board 116 are housed in the board boxes 100 to 104, respectively. . The board boxes 100 to 104 include a box base and a box cover that covers the opening of the box base. The box base and the box cover are connected to each other, and each control device and each board are accommodated.

  Further, the substrate box 100 (main control device 110) and the substrate box 102 (dispensing control device 111 and launch control device 112) connect the box base and the box cover so that they cannot be opened by a sealing unit (not shown) (caulking structure). Consolidated). In addition, a seal (not shown) is attached to the connecting portion between the box base and the box cover so as to cover the box base and the box cover. This seal seal is made of a brittle material. If the seal is to be peeled off in order to open the substrate boxes 100, 102, or if the substrate boxes 100, 102 are forcibly opened, the box base side and the box cover are removed. Cut to the side. Therefore, it is possible to know whether or not the substrate boxes 100 and 102 have been opened by checking the sealing unit or the sealing seal.

  The payout unit 93 includes a tank 130 that is located at the top of the back pack unit 94 and opens upward, a tank rail 131 that is connected to the lower side of the tank 130 and is gently inclined toward the downstream side, and downstream of the tank rail 131. A case rail 132 that is vertically connected to the side, and a payout device 133 that is provided at the most downstream portion of the case rail 132 and that pays out a ball by a predetermined electrical configuration of the payout motor 216 (see FIG. 4). ing. Balls supplied from the island facilities of the game hall are sequentially replenished to the tank 130, and a required number of balls are paid out by the payout device 133 as appropriate. A vibrator 134 for applying vibration to the tank rail 131 is attached to the tank rail 131.

  The payout control device 111 is provided with a state return switch 120, the firing control device 112 is provided with a variable resistor operation knob 121, and the power supply device 115 is provided with a RAM erase switch 122. The state return switch 120 is operated, for example, to eliminate ball clogging (return to a normal state) when a payout error occurs, such as ball clogging in the payout motor 216 (see FIG. 4). The operation knob 121 is operated to adjust the firing force of the firing solenoid. The RAM erase switch 122 is operated when the power is turned on to return the pachinko machine 10 to the initial state.

  Next, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 4 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10.

  The main controller 110 is equipped with an MPU 201 as a one-chip microcomputer that is an arithmetic unit. The MPU 201 includes a ROM 202 that stores various control programs executed by the MPU 201 and fixed value data, and a memory that temporarily stores various data when the control program stored in the ROM 202 is executed. A certain RAM 203 and various other circuits such as an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, and a data transmission / reception circuit are incorporated. In the main control device 110, the MPU 201 performs main processing of the pachinko machine 10 such as jackpot lottery, display setting in the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81, and lottery of display results in the second symbol display device 83. Run.

  Various commands are transmitted from the main control device 110 to the sub control device by the data transmission / reception circuit in order to instruct the sub control device such as the payout control device 111 and the sound lamp control device 113 to operate. Such a command is transmitted from the main controller 110 to the sub controller only in one direction.

  The RAM 203 stores various areas, counters, flags, a stack area for storing the contents of the internal registers of the MPU 201 and a return address of a control program executed by the MPU 201, various flags, counters, I / O, and the like. And a work area (work area) in which values are stored. Note that the RAM 203 is configured so that the backup voltage is supplied from the power supply device 115 and the data can be retained (backed up) even after the power of the pachinko machine 10 is shut off, and all data stored in the RAM 203 is backed up. .

  When the power is shut down due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like, the stack pointer and the value of each register when the power is shut off (including when the power failure occurs, the same applies hereinafter) are stored in the RAM 203. On the other hand, at the time of power-on (including power-on due to power failure cancellation, the same applies hereinafter), the state of the pachinko machine 10 is restored to the state before power-off based on information stored in the RAM 203. Writing to the RAM 203 is executed when the power is shut off by a main process (not shown), and restoration of each value written to the RAM 203 is executed in a start-up process (not shown) when the power is turned on. Note that the power failure signal SG1 from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 is input to the NMI terminal (non-maskable interrupt terminal) of the MPU 201 when the power is interrupted due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. Is input immediately, an NMI interrupt process (not shown) as a power failure process is immediately executed.

  An input / output port 205 is connected to the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 via a bus line 204 constituted by an address bus and a data bus. The input / output port 205 includes a payout control device 111, a sound lamp control device 113, a first symbol display device 37, a second symbol display device 83, a second symbol hold lamp 84, and lower sides of the opening / closing plates of the specific winning openings 65a and 650a. A solenoid 209 made up of a large opening solenoid for opening and closing forward with respect to the axis and a solenoid for driving an electric accessory is connected, and the MPU 201 receives various commands and commands via the input / output port 205. Send a control signal.

  The input / output port 205 is connected to various switches 208 including a switch group and a sensor group (not shown) and a RAM erasure switch circuit 253 described later provided in the power supply device 115, and the MPU 201 is output from the various switches 208. And various processes are executed based on the RAM erase signal SG2 output from the RAM erase switch circuit 253.

  The payout control device 111 drives the payout motor 216 to perform payout control of prize balls and rental balls. The MPU 211, which is an arithmetic unit, includes a ROM 212 that stores a control program executed by the MPU 211, fixed value data, and the like, and a RAM 213 that is used as a work memory or the like.

  The RAM 213 of the payout control device 111, like the RAM 203 of the main control device 110, has a stack area for storing the contents of the internal registers of the MPU 211, the return address of the control program executed by the MPU 211, and various flags and counters. And a work area (work area) in which values such as I / O are stored. The RAM 213 is configured to be able to retain (backup) data by being supplied with a backup voltage from the power supply device 115 even after the power of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off, and all data stored in the RAM 213 is backed up. As with the MPU 201 of the main controller 110, the power failure signal SG1 is also input to the NMI terminal of the MPU 211 from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 when the power is interrupted due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. When input to the MPU 211, an NMI interrupt process (not shown) as a power failure process is immediately executed.

  An input / output port 215 is connected to the MPU 211 of the payout control device 111 via a bus line 214 composed of an address bus and a data bus. The main control device 110, the payout motor 216, the firing control device 112, and the like are connected to the input / output port 215, respectively. Although not shown, the payout control device 111 is connected to a prize ball detection switch for detecting a prize ball that has been paid out. The prize ball detection switch is connected to the payout control device 111 but is not connected to the main control device 110.

  The launch control device 112 controls the ball launch unit 112a so that the launch strength of the ball according to the rotation operation amount of the operation handle 51 is obtained when the main control device 110 gives an instruction to launch a ball. . The ball launching unit 112a includes a launching solenoid and an electromagnet (not shown), and the firing solenoid and the electromagnet are permitted to be driven when predetermined conditions are met. Specifically, the touch sensor 51a detects that the player is touching the operation handle 51, and the operation is performed on the condition that the launch stop switch 51b for stopping the launch of the ball is off (not operated). The firing solenoid is excited corresponding to the amount of rotation (rotation position) of the handle 51, and a ball is launched with a strength corresponding to the amount of operation of the operation handle 51.

  The sound lamp control device 113 outputs sound in a sound output device (such as a speaker (not shown)) 226, outputs lighting and extinguishing in a lamp display device (lighting units 29 to 33, display lamp 34, and the like) 227, and variable effects (variation Display) and setting of the display mode of the third symbol display device 81 performed by the display control device 114 such as a notice effect. The MPU 221 that is an arithmetic unit includes a ROM 222 that stores a control program executed by the MPU 221, fixed value data, and the like, and a RAM 223 that is used as a work memory or the like.

  An input / output port 225 is connected to the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 via a bus line 224 including an address bus and a data bus. Main controller 110, display controller 114, audio output device 226, lamp display device 227, frame button 22 and the like are connected to input / output port 225, respectively.

  The sound lamp control device 113 determines the display mode of the third symbol display device 81 based on various commands (variation pattern command, stop type command, etc.) received from the main control device 110, and uses the determined display mode as a command. The display control device 114 is notified by (display variation pattern command, display stop type command, etc.). The sound lamp control device 113 monitors the input from the frame button 22, and when the player operates the frame button 22, the stage displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is changed, or the super reach is performed. The display control device 114 is instructed to change the production contents at the time. When the stage is changed, a rear image change command including information about the changed stage is transmitted to the display control device 114 so that the rear image corresponding to the changed stage is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. . Here, the back image is an image displayed on the back side of the third symbol, which is a main image displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The display control device 114 displays various images on the third symbol display device 81 according to the command transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113.

  Further, the sound lamp control device 113 receives a command (display command) representing the display content of the third symbol display device 81 from the display control device 114. The voice lamp control device 113 outputs the voice corresponding to the display content from the voice output device 226 in accordance with the display content of the third symbol display device 81 based on the display command received from the display control device 114, The lighting and extinguishing of the lamp display device 227 are controlled in accordance with the display contents.

  The display control device 114 is connected to the sound lamp control device 113 and the third symbol display device 81, and based on a command received from the sound lamp control device 113, the third symbol display device 81 can produce a variation effect of the third symbol. The display is controlled. Further, the display control device 114 appropriately transmits a display command for notifying the display content of the third symbol display device 81 to the sound lamp control device 113. The voice lamp control device 113 outputs the voice from the voice output device 226 in accordance with the display content indicated by the display command, thereby matching the display of the third symbol display device 81 with the voice output from the voice output device 226. be able to.

  The power supply device 115 includes a power supply unit 251 for supplying power to each unit of the pachinko machine 10, a power failure monitoring circuit 252 for monitoring power interruption due to a power failure, and a RAM deletion switch 122 (see FIG. 3). And an erasing switch circuit 253. The power supply unit 251 is a device that supplies a necessary operating voltage to each of the control devices 110 to 114 through a power supply path (not shown). As its outline, the power supply unit 251 takes in the voltage of AC 24 volts supplied from the outside, and drives various switches such as various switches 208, solenoids such as the solenoid 209, motors, etc. A 5 volt voltage for logic, a backup voltage for RAM backup, and the like are generated, and the 12 volt voltage, the 5 volt voltage, and the backup voltage are supplied to the control devices 110 to 114 as necessary voltages.

  The power failure monitoring circuit 252 is a circuit for outputting a power failure signal SG1 to each NMI terminal of the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 and the MPU 211 of the payout control device 111 when the power is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. The power failure monitoring circuit 252 monitors the DC stable voltage of 24 volts, which is the maximum voltage output from the power supply unit 251, and determines that a power failure (power interruption, power interruption) occurs when this voltage falls below 22 volts. Then, the power failure signal SG1 is output to the main controller 110 and the payout controller 111. By the output of the power failure signal SG1, the main controller 110 and the payout controller 111 recognize the occurrence of the power failure and execute the NMI interrupt process. Note that the power supply unit 251 outputs a voltage of 5 volts, which is a drive voltage of the control system, for a time sufficient to execute the NMI interrupt processing even after the DC stable voltage of 24 volts becomes less than 22 volts. Is maintained at a normal value. Therefore, main controller 110 and payout controller 111 can normally execute and complete the NMI interrupt process (not shown).

  The RAM erase switch circuit 253 is a circuit for outputting a RAM erase signal SG2 for clearing backup data to the main controller 110 when the RAM erase switch 122 (see FIG. 3) is pressed. When the RAM erase signal SG2 is input when the pachinko machine 10 is powered on, the main control device 110 clears the backup data, and the payout control device 111 issues a payout initialization command for clearing the backup data. Transmit to device 111.

  Next, the detailed configuration of the handle device 51 will be described with reference to FIGS.

  FIG. 5A is a top view of the handle device 51, and FIG. 5B is a front view of the handle device 51. FIG. 6 is a side view of the handle device 51 as viewed in the direction of the arrow VI in FIG. 5A and 6, the front surface of the lower dish unit 15 is schematically illustrated by a two-dot chain line.

  As shown in FIGS. 5 and 6, the handle device 51 mainly includes a handle mounting base 520, a handle base 530, a handle ring 540, a front cover 550, and a button member 570, and the pachinko machine 10 ( It protrudes in a horizontal posture from the front of FIG.

  The handle mounting base 520 has a back surface (left side in FIG. 5A) fixed to the front surface of the lower plate unit 15, and a handle base 530 is disposed on the front surface (right side in FIG. 5A). The These two members 520 and 530 are connected in a state where one is pivotally supported on the other, and the handle base 530 is integrated with the handle ring 540 with respect to the handle mounting base 520 around the pivotally supported portion. It can be displaced in the vertical direction (see FIGS. 23 and 24 (21)).

  The handle base 530 is provided with a firing stop switch operation unit 440. The firing stop switch operation unit 440 is a lever for switching on / off of the firing stop switch 51b (see FIG. 7) provided inside the handle base 530, and is a left side surface of the handle base 530 (FIG. 5B). Arranged in a state protruding from the left side. While the player presses the firing stop switch operation unit 440, the player can stop the firing of the game ball regardless of the amount of rotation operation (rotation position) of the handle ring 540.

  The handle ring 540 is rotatably attached to the front surface (right side of FIG. 5A) of the handle base 530, and on the outer peripheral side of the handle ring 540, three finger hooks 540a and 540b for a player to put a finger on. , 540c are formed to protrude.

  The player turns the handle ring 540 clockwise (clockwise) in the front view of the handle device 51 (see FIG. 5B) (that is, the direction from the initial position toward the operation end point (maximum position)). By dynamically operating, it is possible to increase the launch intensity of the game ball. That is, the handle ring 540 can be rotated in a section from the initial position to the operation end point, and the launch intensity of the game ball is adjusted according to the operation amount (rotation position) of the rotation operation.

  In this case, the handle device 51 is formed so that the position of the operation end point of the handle ring 540 can be changed. Specifically, in this embodiment, the central angle from the initial position to the maximum position (the rotation operation angle of the handle ring 540) is 120 degrees, and the position of the operation end point is changed within the range of the central angle of 120 degrees. (Setting) is possible.

  For example, when the position of the operation end point is changed (set) to a position where the central angle with respect to the initial position is 90 degrees (that is, a position where the central angle with respect to the maximum position is 30 degrees). When the handle ring 540 is rotated in the direction from the initial position toward the operation end point, the rotation operation can be performed as usual in the section from the initial position to the central angle of 90 degrees, while between the initial position and the initial position. When the center angle reaches 90 ° (that is, the operation end point), the rotation of the handle ring 540 is restricted (that is, the handle ring 540 cannot be further rotated).

  As described above, the launch intensity of the game ball is set according to the resistance value of the variable resistor (that is, the amount of rotation of the handle ring 540). That is, the launch intensity of the game ball is determined based on the operation amount (operation position) in which the handle ring 540 is rotated from the initial position regardless of whether the position of the operation end point has been changed (set). Therefore, when the position of the operation end point is not changed and the handle ring 540 can be rotated to a position where the central angle with respect to the initial position is 120 degrees (that is, the maximum position), the handle ring When the 540 is rotated from the initial position to a position with a central angle of 90 degrees, the launch intensity of the game ball is 90 degrees with the central angle between the operation end point and the initial position as described above. When the position is changed (set) to the position, the firing intensity is the same as the launching intensity of the game ball when the handle ring 540 is rotated from the initial position to the center angle of 90 degrees (that is, the operation end point). .

  When the turning operation of the player is released, the handle ring 540 is returned to its initial position by the urging force of the handle urging spring 537 (see FIG. 7). In this case, according to the handle ring 540, the handle base 530 is displaced with respect to the handle mounting base 520 around the pivotally supported portion (see FIG. 23), so that the rotation position of the handle ring 540 can be arbitrarily set. It is configured to be able to be fixed at the rotational position. That is, the launch intensity of the sphere can be fixed at an arbitrary intensity. The fixing structure of the handle ring 540 will be described later.

  The front cover 550 is formed in a hemispherical shape that protrudes forward (rightward in FIG. 5A and FIG. 6), and is attached to the front surface of the handle ring 540. A front opening 550a having a circular shape when viewed from the front is formed at the top of the front cover 550, and the button member 570 is projected (exposed) from the opening 550a.

  In addition, a confirmation window 550b is formed in the front cover 550. The confirmation window 550b is an opening for the player to confirm whether or not the position of the operation end point of the handle ring 540 has been changed (see FIG. 32), and the upper surface side of the handle device 51 (see FIG. 5A). A plurality (three in the present embodiment) of the front cover 550 that is the front side are arranged along the circumferential direction with a predetermined interval therebetween.

  Whether or not the player has changed the position of the operation end point of the handle ring 540 based on a state of being visually recognized through the confirmation window 550b (a difference in color visually recognized as will be described later in this embodiment). (In this embodiment, as described later, the position of the operation end point is not changed when black is visually recognized, and the position of the operation end point is changed when white is visually recognized). Can do. The identification structure using the confirmation window 550b will be described later.

  The button member 570 is formed in a hemispherical shape concentric with the front cover 550. In the initial position shown in FIGS. 5 and 6 (the state before being pushed in), the button member 570 is integrated with the front cover 550 to form one hemispherical body. On the other hand, when it is pushed in, it is immersed toward the inside of the front cover 550 (see FIG. 26). Here, the button member 570 is an operation member for changing (setting) and releasing the position of the operation end point.

  Specifically, when the button member 570 is pushed from the initial position, the position of the operation end point is changed (set) to the operation position of the handle ring 540 when the button member 570 is pushed. . For example, in a state where the handle ring 540 can be rotated in a section having a central angle of 120 degrees from the initial position to the maximum position (that is, the position of the operation end point is not changed), the handle ring 540 rotates. When the button member 570 is pushed in from the initial position when the operation amount reaches the position at which the central angle is 90 degrees from the initial position, the central angle between the initial position and the initial position is changed. The position of the operation end point is changed (set) to a position of 90 degrees.

  Therefore, the player can move to a rotation position where the launch intensity of the game ball becomes a desired launch intensity (for example, a left-turn rotation position suitable for entering the game ball into the first entrance 64). When the rotation position of the handle ring 540 can be adjusted, the push operation of the button member 570 is performed, and the position of the operation end point is changed (set) to a position corresponding to the rotation position of the handle ring 540. For example, to take a break, even if the game ring is interrupted by returning the rotation position of the handle ring 540 to the initial position, the rotation position of the handle ring 540 is changed to the original rotation position (that is, the game is interrupted). If the handle ring 540 is rotated to the operation end point (ie, the rotation operation is performed by the operation end point). Regulated, no more times If the handle ring 540 is rotated to a position where it cannot be operated), the operation amount (rotation position) of the rotation of the handle ring 540 is accurately and quickly adjusted to the original operation amount (rotation position). (The original rotation position can be reproduced accurately and quickly).

  For example, whether or not the operation position of the handle ring 540 coincides with the target position (predetermined scale line) as in the case of the structure in which the scale line is provided along the direction of the rotation operation of the handle ring 540 is visually confirmed. Since it is not necessary to make fine adjustment while making a determination, the original operation position can be adjusted accurately and quickly (the original operation position can be reproduced). Further, since the further turning operation is restricted by the operation end point, the handle ring 540 is not turned after passing through the target position, so that the operation speed of the handle ring 540 can be increased. Also from this point, it is possible to quickly adjust the original operation position (reproduce the original operation position).

  According to the handle device 51, the hemispherical front cover 550 is disposed on the front surface side of the handle ring 540 as described above, and the button member 570 protrudes from the opening 550a on the top side of the front cover. Thus, since one hemisphere is formed, it is possible to easily push the button member 570 with the palm of the hand using the operation of returning the wrist while maintaining the state in which the handle ring 540 is gripped with fingers. it can. Therefore, when the rotation position (operation amount) of the handle ring 540 can be adjusted so that the launch intensity of the game ball becomes a desired launch intensity, the rotation position (operation amount) of the handle ring 540 is maintained. The button member 570 can be pushed in while suppressing the rotation position of the handle ring 540 from being shifted and the launching intensity of the game ball from being inadvertently changed. As a result, the operation end point can be changed (set) quickly and at an accurate position.

  The change (setting) of the operation end point can be canceled by returning the pushed button member 570 to the initial position as shown in FIGS. 5 and 6, whereby the handle ring 540 is moved to the maximum position. It can be turned. The structure for returning the button member 570 to the initial position and the structure for releasing the operation end point will be described later.

  Next, the handle base 530 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 7 is a front perspective view of the handle mounting base 520 and the handle base 530, and corresponds to the front perspective view of the handle device 51 with the handle ring 540 and the front cover 550 (see FIGS. 5 and 6) removed. To do.

  As shown in FIG. 7, the handle base 530 has an outer peripheral wall 531 formed in a cylindrical shape when viewed from the front, and a bottom wall 532 that blocks an opening of one of the outer peripheral walls 531 (the rear surface, the left rear side in FIG. 7). These two members 531 and 532 form a container shape in which the inside is recessed toward the back side (that is, the front side is opened). On the bottom wall 532, guide columns 533a, 533b, and 533c, an inner peripheral wall 534, and a bearing portion 535 are erected from the front surface of the bottom wall 532 toward the front (front cover 550 side).

  The guide struts 533a to 533c are portions where the front cover 550 (see FIGS. 5 and 6) is fastened and fixed to the standing tip, and the fastening screws can be inserted (that is, the bottom wall 532 side and the standing tip It is formed in a hollow cylindrical shape (through holes having openings at both ends). The fastening screws inserted from the bottom wall 532 side into the through holes of the guide columns 533a to 533c are fastened to the screw bases 552a to 552c (see FIG. 9A) of the front cover 550, respectively. A front cover 550 is fixed to the front surface.

  The inner peripheral wall 534 is formed in a circular cylindrical shape when viewed from the front, and is arranged concentrically on the inner peripheral side of the outer peripheral wall 531 while being spaced apart from the outer peripheral wall 531. The inner peripheral wall 534 is divided at two places in the circumferential direction, and at the two divided parts (notches 534a and 534b), a firing stop switch operating part 440 is provided on one side and a handle restricting member on the other side. 700 are respectively disposed.

  The bearing portion 535 is formed in a cylindrical shape having an opening on the front side (the side opposite to the bottom wall 532), and the switching device 600 is rotatably inserted on the inner peripheral side thereof (see FIG. 25). The switching device 600 is a member for changing (setting) the position of the operation end point of the handle ring 540. The switching device 600 can be rotated relative to the bearing portion 535, and cannot be rotated. It is possible to switch between two states: a fixed engagement fixed state. The end surface on the opening side of the bearing portion 535 is formed as a flat surface perpendicular to the axial direction.

  The switching device 600 is formed with a regulation protrusion 630. The restricting protrusion 630 is a rod-like body protruding outward in the radial direction, and is located on the movement locus of the handle-side protrusion 546 (see FIG. 8) when the handle ring 540 is rotated. Therefore, when the handle ring 540 is rotated in a rotation direction (clockwise in front view (clockwise), hereinafter referred to as “increase direction”) that increases the firing strength of the game ball, the handle protrusion 546 is moved. It abuts on the restricting protrusion 630.

  In this case, when the switching device 600 is in a rotatable state, the switching projection 600 is pushed in the increasing direction by the handle side projection 546, so that the switching device 600 is also increased in the bearing portion 535. Is rotated. On the other hand, when the state of the switching device 600 is switched to the engaged and fixed state, the relative rotation with respect to the bearing portion 535 of the switching device 600 is disabled (fixed to the bearing portion 535), so Movement of 546 in the increasing direction is restricted by the restriction protrusion 630. As a result, the turning operation of the handle ring 540 in the increasing direction is restricted. That is, the position (rotation position) where the state of the switching device 600 is switched from the rotatable state to the engaged and fixed state is the position of the operation end point of the handle ring 540.

  Note that the rotation direction of the handle ring 540 that reduces the firing strength of the game ball is hereinafter referred to as a “decreasing direction”.

  The switching device 600 is provided with a biasing force in a counterclockwise direction (counterclockwise) when viewed from the front from a switching device biasing spring 539 formed as a torsion spring, and the biasing force causes the initial position (the restricting protrusion 630 to be formed). The handle ring 540 at the initial position is brought into contact with the handle-side protrusion 546 and returned to the position where the rotation of the switching device 600 is restricted.

  The detailed configuration of the switching device 600 and the engagement and fixing structure with respect to the bearing portion 535 will be described later. In addition, switching of the switching device 600 between the rotatable state and the restricted fixed state is performed by pressing the button member 570 as described later.

  A driven gear 536 is disposed on the side of the bearing portion 535. The driven gear 536 is a gear with which the main driving gear 544 (see FIG. 8) of the handle ring 540 is engaged, and is fixed to the resistance shaft VRa of the variable resistor (not shown). Therefore, when the driven gear 536 is rotated, the resistance value of the variable resistor VR is changed according to the rotation amount (rotation position).

  The driven gear 536 is given a biasing force in a clockwise (clockwise) direction when viewed from the front from a handle biasing spring 537 formed as a torsion spring, and the biasing force causes the initial position (the stopper portion 536a to be the bearing portion 535). To the outer peripheral projection 535b to return to a position where rotation is restricted. The variable resistor is fixed to the bottom wall 532.

  On the side of the bearing portion 535 and on the opposite side of the driven gear 536, a firing stop switch 51b is fixed. A swingable swing piece 51b1 protrudes to the side of the firing stop switch 51b, and the firing stop switch 51b is turned on / off when the swinging piece 51b1 is pressed by the firing stop switch operation unit 440. Is done.

  Next, the handle ring 540 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 8 is a rear perspective view of the handle ring 540.

  As shown in FIG. 8, the handle ring 540 includes a disk portion 541 formed in a circular shape in front view covering the front surface of the handle base 530, and the outer peripheral edge of the disk portion 541 toward the back side. An outer peripheral wall 542 that is standing and is formed in a cylindrical shape in a front view, a main drive gear 544 that is fixed to the center of the disk portion 541 so as to project toward the back, the main drive gear 544 and the circle A central hole 544a formed through the central portion of the plate portion 541 in the plate thickness direction, and a guide hole 545a formed through the disc portion 541 in the plate thickness direction along the periphery of the central hole 544a, 545b and a handle-side protrusion 546 that is erected from the disc portion 542 toward the back side.

  The handle ring 540 is rotatably held with respect to the handle base 530 by inserting the handle shaft support 574 (see FIG. 11A) of the button member 570 into the center hole 544a of the handle ring 540 (see FIG. 11A). In this case, the main driving gear 544 is meshed with the driven gear 536 (see FIG. 7) of the handle base 530. Therefore, when the handle ring 540 is rotated, the driven gear 536 is rotated via the main driving gear 544, and the rotation of the resistance shaft VRa due to the rotation of the driven gear 536 changes the resistance of the variable resistor. Therefore, the launch intensity of the sphere can be adjusted according to the resistance value of the variable resistor (that is, the amount of rotation of the handle ring 540).

  In the present embodiment, the axial direction of the bearing portion 535 and the resistance shaft VRa are parallel to each other, and the teeth (tooth grooves) of the driven gear 536 extend in parallel to the axial direction (see FIG. 7). ). Further, teeth (tooth grooves) of the main driving gear 544 extend in parallel to the axial direction of the central hole 544a of the handle ring 540.

  The guide holes 545a and 545b are holes that are opened to allow the guide columns 533a to 533c (see FIG. 7) to be inserted, and each has an elongated hole shape that curves along the outer edge of the handle ring 540 (that is, the central hole 544a). An annular shape centering on the axis is divided into two portions whose phases are different from each other by 180 °. A guide column 533a is inserted into the guide hole 545a, and guide columns 533b and 533c are inserted into the guide hole 545b.

  Therefore, the guide column 533a and the guide columns 533b and 533c are guided in the guide hole 545a and the guide hole 545b, respectively, as the handle ring 540 rotates. Therefore, the rotatable range of the handle ring 540 is limited to a range in which the guide columns 533a to 533c are relatively movable in the guide holes 545a and 545b. Specifically, the rotation range of the handle ring 540 is defined by the guide hole 545b through which the two columns (guide columns 533b and 533c) are inserted. In this embodiment, the rotation range is approximately 90 degrees (1). / 4 laps).

  The handle side protrusion 546 is a part for transmitting the rotation of the handle ring 540 to the switching device 600, and is formed as a rod-shaped body having a rectangular cross section. When the handle ring 540 is rotated, the side surface of the handle side projection 546 is brought into contact with the side surface of the regulation projection 630 of the switching device 600, and the handle ring 540 is interposed via both the projections 546 and 630. Is transmitted to the switching device 600.

  Next, the front cover 550 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 9A is a rear perspective view of the front cover 550.

  As shown in FIG. 9 (a), the front cover 550 is formed in a hemispherical container shape whose interior is recessed toward the front side (that is, the back side is opened), and the top portion is formed with a circular hole in front view. A certain opening 550a is formed, and screw bases 552a to 552c are erected on the inner wall surface toward the back surface. Guide struts 533a to 533c (see FIG. 7) are fastened and fixed to the screw bases 552a to 552c, respectively. In addition, on the inner wall surface of the front cover 550, a cylindrical guide portion 554 having the same inner diameter as the opening 550a is extended along the rotation axis direction. The cylindrical guide portion 554 guides the inner fitting wall portion 577 of the button member 570 along the rotation axis direction by the inner peripheral surface thereof.

  Confirmation windows 550b and 554b are formed in the front cover 550 and the cylindrical guide portion 554, respectively. Here, the confirmation windows 550b and 554b will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 10A is a top view of the front cover 550 as viewed in the direction of arrow Xa in FIG. 9A, and FIG. 10B is a portion of the front cover 550 along the line Xa-Xa in FIG. It is an expanded sectional view.

  As shown in FIGS. 10A and 10B, the confirmation window 550b formed in the front cover 550 is composed of a plurality of (three in this embodiment) openings that are rectangular in front view, and each of these openings. Are arranged in a straight line along the longitudinal direction in the circumferential direction of the front cover 550 (the vertical direction in FIG. 10A). The confirmation window 554b disposed in the cylindrical guide portion 554 is an opening formed in the same shape as the confirmation window 550b formed in the front cover 550, and as shown in FIG. It arrange | positions in the position which faces. Therefore, the player can visually recognize the outer wall surface of the button member 570 through the confirmation window 554b of the cylindrical guide portion 554 by visually recognizing the inside from the confirmation window 550b of the front cover 550 (see FIG. 32). ).

  Note that the confirmation windows 550b and 554b are openings for confirming whether or not the position of the operation end point of the handle ring 540 has been changed based on the state visually recognized through the confirmation window 550b, as described above. is there. In this case, the confirmation windows 550b and 554b are disposed on the upper surface side of the front cover 550 in the assembled state of the handle device 51 (see FIG. 5A), so that the player facing the pachinko machine 10 to be played can be used. When starting the game, the confirmation windows 550b and 554b can be easily viewed by the player. In addition, since a plurality of confirmation windows 550b and 554b are arranged along the circumferential direction, even if the player is at a position shifted to the left or right from the front of the handle device 51, the confirmation windows 550b and 554b are used as the player. It is possible to make it visible.

  Returning to FIG. A handle biasing spring (not shown) formed as a torsion spring is disposed between the front cover 550 and the handle ring 540. This handle biasing spring biases the handle ring 540 counterclockwise (counterclockwise) when viewed from the front. This biasing direction coincides with the biasing direction in which the handle biasing spring 537 that biases the driven gear 536 described above (see FIG. 7) biases the handle ring 540 via the driven gear 536 and the main driving gear 544. To do. Therefore, when the player releases his hand from the handle ring 540, the handle ring 540 has a handle biasing spring (not shown) disposed between the front cover 550 and the handle ring 540 and a handle for biasing the driven gear 536. The two springs and the biasing spring 536 return to the initial position.

  A base portion 551 is disposed on the inner wall surface of the front cover 550, and a guide groove 553 is recessed in the flat surface of the base portion 551. The guide groove 553 is a groove in a known “heart cam system” for causing the button member 570 to function as a push button switch that can be held at the first position or the second position. The guide groove 553 will be described later (see FIG. 9B).

  Next, the button member 570 will be described. FIG. 11 is a rear perspective view of the button member 570, and FIG. 12 is an exploded perspective view of the button member 570 illustrating the connection structure between the handle shaft support body 574 and the shaft body 573.

  As shown in FIGS. 11 and 12, the button member 570 includes an operation portion 571 that forms the front surface of the button member 570, a back surface base 572 that protrudes from the center of the back surface of the operation portion 571, and a back surface base 572. An extended shaft body 573, a handle shaft support body 574 that is pivotally attached to the extended end of the shaft body 573 and formed in a columnar shape, and an end face of the handle shaft support body 574 A connecting shaft 575 and a pushing piece 576 provided, a cylindrical inner fitting wall portion 577 protruding from the back surface of the operation portion 571, and a guide pin piece 578 disposed on the outer surface of the back surface base 572, The operation unit 571, the back surface base 572, the shaft body 573, the handle shaft support body 574, the connecting shaft 575, and the inner fitting wall portion 577 are disposed concentrically.

  The operation portion 571 is formed in a shape obtained by cutting a part of a sphere, and is protruded from an opening 550a (see FIG. 9A) of the front cover 550, so that it can be pushed in by a player. (See FIGS. 25 to 27).

  The back base 572 is a part that forms a seating surface of the button urging spring 590 (see FIGS. 25 to 27). That is, the button urging spring 590 is formed as a coil spring, and the shaft 573 and the handle shaft support 574 are inserted into the inner peripheral side of the button urging spring 590 and between the front side of the handle ring 540 and the back side of the back base 572. Are arranged in a state of being elastically compressed in the axial direction. As a result, the button member 570 is always urged in the direction away from the handle ring 540 by the elastic recovery force of the button urging spring 590.

  The shaft body 573 includes a shaft-shaped shaft portion 573a having a circular cross section, and a spherical portion 573b disposed at the tip of the shaft-shaped portion 573a and having a larger diameter than the shaft-shaped portion 573a. . The operation portion 571 is integrally formed of a base portion 572, a shaft body 573, an inner fitting wall portion 577, and a resin material.

  The handle shaft support 574 is a cylindrical portion for pivotally supporting the handle ring 540, and is inserted through the central hole 544a of the handle ring 540 (see FIGS. 25 to 27). That is, the outer diameter of the handle shaft support 574 is set to be slightly smaller than the inner diameter of the center hole 544a of the handle ring 540, and the handle shaft support 574 is inserted into the center hole 544a. A handle ring 540 is pivotally supported on the handle shaft support 574 so as to be rotatable.

  The handle shaft support 574 is formed by bonding two members formed by dividing a cylindrical shape into two on a plane including the shaft. These two members include a ball receiving portion 574b that becomes a space for receiving the spherical portion 573b of the shaft body 573, and a bearing insertion portion 574a that receives the shaft-like portion 573a of the shaft body 573 and cannot pass the spherical portion 573b. And are formed. As a result, the handle shaft support body 574 is attached to the shaft body 573 so as to be rotatable around the axis and not movable in the axial direction.

  Thus, as will be described later, when the switching device 600 is rotated in accordance with the rotation operation of the handle ring 540, only the handle shaft support body 574 can be rotated independently from the shaft body 573. It is possible to suppress rotation of the operation portion 571 serving as the operated portion. That is, when the player rotates the handle ring 540, it is possible to suppress the operation unit 571 from rotating in the palm of the player and giving the player an uncomfortable feeling.

  The connection shaft 575 is a part formed as a trapezoidal shaft body inserted into the connection hole 620 of the switching device 600 (see FIGS. 25 to 27), and extends on the shaft of the handle shaft support 574. (Ie, formed concentrically with the handle shaft support 574). The connecting hole 620 of the switching device 600 is formed as a trapezoidal hole corresponding to the outer shape of the connecting shaft 575, so that the connecting shaft 575 is relative to the connecting hole 620 of the switching device 600 in the axial direction. It is coupled so that it can move and cannot rotate relative to the circumferential direction.

  Further, since the connecting shaft 575 is formed as a trapezoidal shaft body, the connecting shaft 575 and the connecting hole 620 can be coupled so as not to be rotatable relative to each other, and the positions (phases) of both of the rotating directions can be positioned. (The phase that can be combined by both is restricted to only one location). That is, in the assembly process of the handle device 51, it is necessary to connect the connecting shaft 575 and the connecting hole 620 after making the rotational direction position of the pushing piece 576 coincide with the escape space 661 of the switching device 600. (Refer to FIGS. 25 to 27) In the present embodiment, the rotational direction positions (phases) of the connecting shaft 575 and the connecting hole 620 are positioned at one place, so that the rotational direction position is wrong (the pushing piece 576). Can be prevented from being coupled (with the rotational direction position of) not matching the clearance space 661 of the switching device 600. As a result, it is possible to improve the efficiency of the assembly work and suppress the assembly failure.

  The pushing piece 576 is a portion for pushing the biting spheres 670a and 670b of the switching device 600 into the biting space 651 (see FIGS. 15 and 26), and the handle shaft support body 574 is located on the side of the connecting shaft 575. It extends along the axis and is formed in a plate shape having a cross-sectional shape corresponding to the biting space 651 of the switching device 600 (that is, a shape that can be inserted into the biting space 651). Accordingly, when the button member 570 is pushed in, the biting spheres 670 a and 670 b are pushed into the biting space 651 by the extended distal end surface of the pressing piece 576.

  The connecting shaft 575 and the pushing piece 576 are formed integrally with the handle shaft support body 574. As described above, the button member 570 has the connecting shaft 575 coupled to the connecting hole 620 of the switching device 600 so as not to be relatively rotatable. Therefore, the handle shaft support 574 and the switching device 600 are integrally rotated through the coupling of the coupling shaft 575 and the coupling hole 620, so that the phases of the pushing piece 576 and the escape space 661 are always matched. Can be maintained. That is, even if the switching device 600 is rotated to any rotation position (phase) with respect to the handle base 530 (bearing portion 535), when the button member 570 is pressed, the switching device 600 is pressed. The biting spheres 670 a and 670 b of the switching device 600 can be pushed into the biting space 651 by the piece 576.

  The internal fitting wall portion 577 is a cylindrical portion for holding the button member 570 so as to be movable relative to the front cover 550 in the axial direction, and is inserted through the cylindrical guide portion 554 of the front cover 550 (see FIG. 25 to FIG. 27). That is, the outer diameter of the inner fitting wall portion 577 is set to be slightly smaller than the inner diameter of the cylindrical guide portion 554 of the front cover 550, and the inner fitting wall portion 577 is inserted into the cylindrical guide portion 554. Thus, the button member 570 is held (axially supported) by the front cover 550 so as to be rotatable and movable in the axial direction.

  Therefore, as described above, the button member 570 has the connecting shaft 575 held by the bearing portion 535 of the handle base 530 via the switching device 600 (that is, the connection of the connecting shaft 575 and the connecting hole 620). The inner fitting wall portion 577 is held by the cylindrical guide portion 554 of the front cover 550. That is, since the button member 570 is held at two positions spaced apart from each other in the axial direction with respect to the handle base 530 and the front cover 550 as a fixing system, the button member 570 can be held in a stable state without rattling. As a result, a smooth pushing operation can be achieved.

  Here, the outer peripheral surface of the inner fitting wall portion 577 is formed in a color different from the outer peripheral surface of the operation portion 571. Specifically, in the present embodiment, the outer peripheral surface of the inner fitting wall portion 577 is formed in black, while the outer peripheral surface of the operation portion 571 is formed in white. Therefore, when the button member 570 is in the first position (initial position), the player can visually recognize the outer peripheral surface (black) of the inner fitting wall portion 577 through the confirmation window 550b of the front cover 550 (FIG. 32 ( a)), in the state where the button member 570 is in the second position (the position where the push-in operation has been performed), the player can visually recognize the outer peripheral surface (white color) of the operation unit 571 through the confirmation window 550b of the front cover 550. (See FIG. 32B). Thereby, the player determines whether the button member 570 is arranged at the first position or the second position based on the difference in color visually recognized through the confirmation window 550b (that is, the handle ring 540). It is possible to easily identify whether or not the position of the operation end point is changed.

  The guide pin piece 578 is a member that is guided in a guide groove 553 (see FIGS. 9A and 9B) formed in the base portion 551 of the front cover 550, and has a circular cross-section made of a metal material. Formed by bending the body. The guide pin piece 578 includes a base end portion rotatably embedded in the back base 572, a main body portion extending from the base end portion in the axial direction of the button member 570 (that is, the direction of pushing operation), The front end portion of the main body portion is formed by bending the button member 570 radially outwardly by 90 degrees, and the front end portion contacts the guide groove 553 at an angle of 90 degrees.

  When the button member 570 is pushed, as described above, the guide pin piece 578 moves in the guide groove 553 (see FIGS. 9A and 9B), so that the push position of the button member 570 is changed. It is switched to the first position or the second position. Here, returning to FIG. 9B, a structure in which the button member 570 is held at the first position or the second position by the guide pin piece 578 being guided by the guide groove 553 will be described.

  FIG. 9B is a front view of the guide groove 553. 9B, the right side of FIG. 9B corresponds to the operation portion 571 side of the button member 570, and the left side of FIG. 9B corresponds to the handle ring 540 side.

  As shown in FIG. 9B, the guide groove 553 is a concave groove for guiding the guide pin piece 578 (see FIG. 11) of the button member 570, and is formed as a circular path having a heart shape in front view. At the same time, a plurality of steps are formed in the path with directivity.

  As the guide pin piece 578 moves (guides) along the guide groove 553, the button member 570 is held in either the first position or the second position (see FIGS. 25 and 26). Further, in the process of returning from the second position to the first position, the button member 570 is held at the third position only while being kept pushed by the player (see FIG. 27).

  Specifically, in a state where the guide pin piece 578 is located at the position P1, the button member 570 is located at the first position. In this state, the guide pin piece 578 has a biasing force of the button biasing spring 590 (see FIGS. 25 to 27) (as described above, the direction in which the button member 570 is separated from the handle ring 540 (right of FIG. 9B)). The force urging in the direction) is pressed against the wall portion 553a of the guide groove 553 and is maintained at the position P1.

  When the button member 570 at the first position is pushed in, the guide pin piece 578 is guided along the shape of the guide groove 553 (path L1), and after climbing over the end 553b of the first step, the wall portion 553c. I hit it. Thereby, pushing operation of the button member 570 becomes impossible. Therefore, the player releases his / her hand from the button member 570, and the operation force in the pushing direction is released.

  As a result, the guide pin piece 578 is guided along the shape of the guide groove 553 by the urging force of the button urging spring 590 (path L2), and after climbing over the end 553d of the second step, the wall 553e By hitting, it is located at position P2. In this case, the guide pin piece 578 is maintained at the position P <b> 2 by being pressed against the wall portion 553 e of the guide groove 553 by the biasing force of the button biasing spring 590. As a result, the button member 570 is set (held) at the second position.

  When the button member 570 in the second position is pushed in, the guide pin piece 578 is guided along the shape of the guide groove 553 (path L3), and after climbing over the end 553f of the third step, the wall portion 553g (Position P3). Thereby, pushing operation of the button member 570 becomes impossible. Therefore, the player releases his / her hand from the button member 570, and the operation force in the pushing direction is released.

  As a result, the guide pin piece 578 is guided along the shape of the guide groove 553 by the urging force of the button urging spring 590 (path L4), and after climbing over the end 553h of the fourth step, the wall 553a By hitting, it is positioned at the position P1. In this case, the guide pin piece 578 is maintained at the position P <b> 1 by being pressed against the wall portion 553 a of the guide groove 553 by the biasing force of the button biasing spring 590. As a result, the button member 570 is set (held) at the first position. That is, the button member 570 is returned to the first position when the guide pin piece 578 makes one round of the guide groove 553 (circular path of heart shape).

  The button member 570 at the second position is pushed in, the guide pin piece 578 is abutted against the wall portion 553g, and the state at the position P3 is the third position of the button member 570. That is, the third position is the time when the button member 570 in the second position is pushed by the player to the pushable position (position P3) against the urging force of the button urging spring 590 (ie, the position P3). The guide pin piece 578 is formed only while the state where the guide pin piece 578 is abutted against the wall portion 553g is maintained.

  In this case, the pushing piece 576 of the button member 570 is in the second position and the third position at the first position at a position where the biting spheres 670a and 670b of the switching device 600 are retracted from the biting space 651 to the clearance surface space 761. Then, the biting spheres 670a and 670b of the switching device 600 are respectively arranged at positions where the biting spaces 651 are pushed into the biting space 651 (see FIGS. 25 to 27).

  Next, the switching device 600 will be described with reference to FIGS. First, the basic configuration of the switching device 600 will be described with reference to FIGS. 13 and 14.

  13A is a front view of the switching device 600, and FIG. 13B is a side view of the switching device 600 as viewed in the direction of arrow XIIIb in FIG. 13A. 14A is a cross-sectional view of the switching device 600 taken along line XIVa-XIVa in FIG. 13A, and FIG. 14B is a side view of the switching device 600 viewed in the direction of arrow XIVb in FIG. FIG. 13 and 14, the illustration of the biting spheres 670a and 670b, the push-side biasing spring 680, and the biting-side biasing spring 690 is omitted.

  As shown in FIG. 13 and FIG. 14, the switching device 600 protrudes radially outward from the main body 610, the connection hole 620 formed through the main body 610, and the outer peripheral surface of the main body 610. A regulating projection 630 and a spring receiving portion 640, and a biting surface 650 and a relief surface 660 formed by recessing the outer peripheral surface of the main body 610.

  The main body 610 is a part forming the skeleton of the switching device 600 and is formed in a columnar shape. The outer diameter of the main body 610 is set to be slightly smaller than the inner diameter of the bearing 535 (see FIG. 7) of the handle base 530. Therefore, the main body 610 is rotatably inserted into the bearing 535 by being inserted into the bearing 535 of the handle base 530 (see FIG. 25).

  The connection hole 620 is a through hole to which the connection shaft 575 (see FIG. 11) of the button member 570 is coupled, and is formed through the shaft of the main body 610 (that is, as a hole concentric with the main body 610). The cross-sectional shape of the connection hole 620 is formed in a shape (trapezoidal shape) corresponding to the connection shaft 575 of the button member 570, so that the connection shaft 575 is relatively movable in the axial direction and circumferentially as described above. They are coupled so that they cannot rotate relative to each other.

  Further, as described above, the cross-sectional shape of the connecting hole 620 and the connecting shaft 575 is trapezoidal, thereby positioning the rotational direction position (phase) of both (the phase where both can be coupled is set at one place). Can only be regulated). That is, in the assembly process of the handle device 51, it is necessary to connect the connecting shaft 575 and the connecting hole 620 after making the rotational direction position of the pushing piece 576 coincide with the escape space 661 of the switching device 600 ( In this embodiment, the rotational direction positions (phases) of the connection shaft 575 and the connection hole 620 are positioned at one place, so that the rotational direction positions are incorrect (the button member 570 It can be avoided that the pushing piece 576 is coupled in a state where the rotational direction position of the pushing piece 576 does not coincide with the escape space 661. As a result, it is possible to improve the efficiency of the assembly work and suppress the assembly failure.

  The restricting protrusion 630 is a part that comes into contact with the handle-side protrusion 546 of the handle ring 540 and is formed as a rod-shaped body having a rectangular cross section. The spring receiving portion 640 is a portion serving as a seating surface for receiving a biasing force acting from the switching device biasing spring 539 (see FIG. 7).

  These restricting projections 630 and spring receivers 640 are located on the front side (front side, upper side in FIG. 13 (b)) in the axial direction (FIG. 13 (b) vertical direction) of the main body 610, and these restricting projections The back surfaces (the lower surface in FIG. 13B) of the portion 630 and the spring receiving portion 640 are formed as flat surfaces that are flush with each other (that is, the position of the main body portion 610 in the axial direction is the same). As a result, in a state where the switching device 600 is inserted through the bearing portion 535 of the handle base 530, the switching projection device 630 and the back surface of the spring receiving portion 640 come into contact with the end surface on the opening side of the bearing portion 535, thereby (Main body 610) can be positioned in the axial direction (see FIG. 15). In addition, since the restricting protrusion 630 and the spring receiving portion 640 are arranged at intervals in the circumferential direction, two switching devices 600 (main body portions 610) are provided on the end surface on the opening side of the bearing portion 535. The switching device 600 can be stably rotated in the bearing portion 535 accordingly.

  The biting surface 650 engages the ball spheres 670 a and 670 b with the inner peripheral surface of the bearing portion 530 of the handle base 530 so that the switching device 600 (the main body portion 610) is relative to the bearing portion 535. This is a part for making it impossible to rotate (engaged and fixed state) (see FIG. 15B and FIG. 15D), and the flank 660 is an inner peripheral surface of the bearing portion 530 in the handle base 530. It is a part for making the switching device 600 (main body part 610) relatively rotatable with respect to the bearing part 535 (rotatable state) by making the engaging spheres 670a and 670b incapable of being in between ( FIG. 15 (a) and FIG. 15 (c)).

  As shown in FIG. 13A, the biting surface 650 and the flank 660 are a part of a recess (bottom surface of the recess) formed by recessing the outer peripheral surface of the main body 610 in a U-shape when viewed from the front. The biting surface 650 is formed as a flat surface parallel to the axis of the main body 610 (FIG. 14A), and the clearance surface 660 is the upper end of the biting surface 650 (FIG. a) It is formed as a flat surface that is connected to the upper side) and is inclined in a direction closer to the axis of the main body 610 as it is separated from the connected portion.

  Therefore, the biting space 651 formed corresponding to the biting surface 650 (that is, the space formed between the biting surface 650 and the inner peripheral surface of the bearing portion 535 in the handle base 530) is the main body portion. It is formed as a space having the same cross-sectional shape along the axial direction of 610. In this case, in the biting space 651, a gap that gradually decreases in the circumferential direction is formed at both ends between the inner peripheral surface of the bearing portion 535 and the biting surface 650 when viewed from the front shown in FIG. (See FIG. 15C or FIG. 15D).

Further, a clearance space 661 formed corresponding to the clearance surface 660 (that is, a space formed between the clearance surface 660 and the inner peripheral surface of the bearing portion 535 in the handle base 530) is from the biting space 651. It is formed as a space whose cross-sectional area increases as the distance increases. That is, the distance between the inner peripheral surface of the bearing portion 535 and the biting surface 650 increases as the distance from the biting space 651 increases. (See FIG. 15 (c) or FIG. 15 (d))
Next, with reference to FIG. 15, a description will be given of a pivotable state and a regulation fixed state of the switching device 600 and a switching structure between these two states.

  FIGS. 15A and 15B are cross-sectional views of the switching device 600 and correspond to a cross section taken along line XIVa-XIVa in FIG. 15C is a front view of the switching device 600 as viewed in the direction of the arrow XVc in FIG. 15A, and FIG. 15D is a front view of the switching device 600 as viewed in the direction of the arrow XVd in FIG. FIG.

  FIG. 15 illustrates a state in which the switching device 600 is mounted (inserted) on the bearing portion 535 of the handle base 530. 15 (a) and 15 (c), the state where the biting spheres 670a and 670b are arranged in the escape space 661 is shown in FIGS. 15 (b) and 15 (d). The state in which 670b is disposed in the biting space 651 is illustrated.

  As shown in FIG. 15, the switching device 600 includes biting spheres 670a and 670b, a push-side biasing spring 680, and a biting-side biasing spring 690, which are disposed in the biting space 651 or the escape space 661. The The biting spheres 670a and 670b are members formed in a spherical shape, and when the spheres are arranged in the biting space 651, the diameters of the spheres are the inner peripheral surface of the bearing portion 535, the biting surface 650, and the like. The diameter dimension is set so as to be able to bite into the gaps at both ends that gradually decrease in the circumferential direction. In addition, when the sphere moves to the gap between the inner peripheral surface of the bearing portion 535 and the biting surface 650 and on the center side in the circumferential direction, the biting state is not formed between the gaps. The diameter is set to a rollable diameter.

  The pushing-side biasing spring 680 is interposed between the terminal end of the biting space 651 (the wall portion on the side opposite to the escape space 661) and the biting spheres 670a and 670b in an elastically compressed state, and its elastic recovery. The biting spheres 670 a and 670 b are pushed up in the axial direction of the main body 610 by the force. Thus, when the biting spheres 670a and 670b are not pushed by the pushing piece 576 of the button member 570 (see FIG. 25), as shown in FIGS. 15A and 15C, the escape space 661 is obtained. On the other hand, when the button member 570 is pushed in by the pushing piece 576 (see FIG. 26), it is arranged in the biting space 651 as shown in FIGS. 15B and 15D. .

  The biting side biasing spring 690 is interposed between the biting spheres 670a and 670b in an elastically compressed state, and the elastic recovery force causes the biting spheres 670a and 670b to be separated from each other. Energize. Thus, when the biting spheres 670a and 670b are arranged in the biting space 651 as shown in FIGS. 15B and 15D, the inner peripheral surface and the biting surface of the bearing portion 535 are arranged. It is bitten in a gap gradually decreasing in the circumferential direction between 650 and 650.

  The operation of the switching device 600 configured as described above will be described. As shown in FIGS. 15A and 15C, the biting spheres 670a and 670b are arranged in the escape space 661 (that is, the biting spheres 670a and 670b are bitten by the pushing piece 576 of the button member 570). In a state where it is not pushed into the insertion space 651 (see FIG. 25), the gap between the inner peripheral surface of the bearing portion 535 and the engagement surface 650 and the engagement spheres 670a and 670b are not formed. Therefore, the switching device 600 (main body portion 610) is set in a rotatable state, and can be rotated relative to the bearing portion 535 in both directions of arrows A and B shown in FIG. Is done.

  On the other hand, as shown in FIGS. 15B and 15D, the biting spheres 670a and 670b are disposed in the biting space 651 (that is, the biting spheres 670a and 670a are pushed by the pressing pieces 576 of the button member 570). In a state where 670b is pushed into the biting space 651 (see FIG. 26), the biasing force of the biting side biasing spring 690 causes a gap between the inner peripheral surface of the bearing portion 535 and the biting surface 650. Since the engaging spheres 670a and 670b are engaged with the clearance gradually decreasing in the circumferential direction, the switching device 600 is set to the engaged and fixed state, and the switching device 600 (main body portion 610) rotates relative to the bearing portion 535. Is blocked (fixed) as follows.

  That is, when the switching device 600 (main body portion 610) is about to rotate in the direction of arrow A shown in FIG. 15D, the biting that is the rear side of the main body portion 610 in the rotation direction (the rotation direction delay side). The circumferential end (the lower side in FIG. 15 (d)) of the insertion surface 650 acts so as to further engage the engagement sphere 670b between the facing portion 535 and the inner peripheral surface of the bearing portion 535, whereby the bearing portion The relative rotation of the switching device 600 (main body 610) in the direction of arrow A with respect to 535 is prevented.

  Similarly, when the switching device 600 (main body portion 610) is to rotate in the direction of arrow B shown in FIG. 15D, the main body portion 610 is on the rear side in the rotation direction (rotation direction delay side). The circumferential end of the biting surface 650 (upper side in FIG. 15 (d)) acts to further bite the biting sphere 670a while facing the inner peripheral surface of the bearing portion 535, whereby the bearing portion The relative rotation of the switching device 600 (main body portion 610) with respect to 535 in the arrow B direction is prevented.

  Next, the boss member 560 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 16 is a rear perspective view of the handle base 530. FIG. 16 illustrates a state in which the variable resistor, the firing stop switch operation unit 440, and the like are removed, and the positional relationship between the shaft 563 and the bearing 523 is schematically illustrated using a two-dot chain line. .

  As shown in FIG. 16, the boss member 560 is a member for connecting the handle base 530 to the handle mounting base 520 so that the handle base 530 can be displaced about the pivotally supported portion. Projected. That is, as will be described later, a bearing 523 is formed on the handle mounting base 520, a shaft 563 is formed on the boss member 560, and the shaft 563 is pivotally supported on the bearing 523. The handle base 530 can be displaced with respect to the handle mounting base 520 with the pivotally supported portion as the center (fulcrum). Note that the displacement of the handle base 530 with respect to the handle mount 520 around the pivotally supported portion as a center (fulcrum) may be expressed as “swing” or “turn”.

  The boss member 560 includes a flat plate-like base portion 561 that is fastened and fixed to the back surface (bottom wall 532) of the handle base 530, a protrusion portion 562 that protrudes from the base portion 561 toward the back surface and is formed in a rod-like cross section. A pair of shafts 563 projecting from the outer surface of the projecting portion 562 to the left and right, and a harness guide 564 disposed on the lower surface of the projecting tip of the projecting portion 562 are mainly provided.

  On the upper surface of the protruding portion 562, an inclined surface 562a is formed that is inclined downward as it is separated from the base portion 561 (the shaft 563) (that is, toward the harness guide 564 side). Here, the protruding portion 562 of the boss member 560 is protruded more than the protruding end side of the shaft 563 (harness guide 564) due to the displacement of the handle base 530 with respect to the handle mounting base 520 around the shaft support portion (the shaft 563 and the bearing 523). Since the side portion is a portion displaced upward (see FIGS. 23 and 24), other members located on the upper side (that is, switches, IC devices, and the like disposed in the handle mounting base 520) It is necessary to avoid interference with a harness or a reinforcing rib 526 formed integrally with the handle mounting base 520.

  In this case, if the arrangement position of the other member is moved upward, the handle mounting base 520 is increased in size, and the handle mounting base is formed by forming the inclined surface 562a on the upper surface of the protruding portion 562. Interference between other members and the protrusion 562 can be avoided while reducing the size of the 520. In particular, since the inclined surface 562a is formed as an inclined surface that is inclined downward as it is separated from the shaft 563 as described above, the escape amount increases toward the protruding tip side with a larger amount of displacement, and interference with other members occurs. While avoiding effectively, on the shaft 563 side where the amount of displacement is small, it is possible to secure the rigidity of the protruding portion 562 by minimizing the amount of cutting of the protruding portion 562.

  A pair of guide walls 562b for holding the base urging spring SP (see FIG. 19) is provided upright at the protruding tip of the protruding portion 562. In this way, by adopting a structure that holds the base biasing spring SP between the pair of guide walls 562a, the structure can be simplified, the cost of parts can be reduced, and the base biasing spring SP is assembled. It is possible to improve the ease of assembly. Note that the upper surface of the protruding portion 562 located between the opposing guide walls 562b is curved in an arc shape when viewed from the rear, and the base biasing spring SP can be smoothly elastically deformed.

  The harness guide 564 is a member for guiding electrical wiring, and is formed in a frame shape in a rear view. Wiring that enters the handle mounting base 520 from the handle base 530 through the opening of the bottom wall 532 (such as wiring of the firing stop switch 51b) and wiring that exists in the handle mounting base 520 (such as wiring of the variable resistor) By accommodating in the frame of the harness guide 564 (passing through the frame), when the handle base 530 is displaced around the shaft support portion (the shaft 563 and the bearing 523), the upper surface of the protruding portion 562, or It is possible to avoid breaking the wiring by pinching the wiring between the lower surface of the harness guide 564 and another member or the inner wall surface of the handle mounting base 520.

  Note that the protrusion of the guide wall 562b from the upper surface of the protrusion 562 increases the possibility that the wiring is sandwiched between other members and the handle mounting base 520. In the present embodiment, the harness guide 564 is provided, and by passing through the frame of the harness guide 564, it is possible to suppress pinching (disconnection) of the wiring. As a result, the guide wall 562b can be protruded from the upper surface of the protruding portion 562, and the structure for holding the base biasing spring SP can be simplified and its assemblability can be improved.

  A mating surface portion 532 a is formed on the back surface (bottom wall 532) of the handle base 530. The mating surface portion 532a is a part with which the upper mating surface portion 527 (and the lower mating surface portion 528) of the handle mounting base 520 comes into contact, and is entirely in a vertically long annular region surrounding the base portion 561 of the boss member 560. It is formed as a flat surface.

  Next, the handle mounting base 520 will be described with reference to FIGS. 17 and 18. FIG. 17 is a perspective view of the handle mounting base 520 in an exploded state. 18A is a perspective view of the handle mounting base 520 in an assembled state, and FIG. 18B is an inner side view of the first main body 520a.

  As shown in FIGS. 17 and 18, the handle mounting base 520 is formed as a vertically long cylindrical body, and is vertically divided into a first main body 520a and a second main body 520b. On the mating surfaces of the first main body 520a and the second main body 520b, a positioning projection 521a is projected from one side, and a positioning hole 521b for receiving and positioning the positioning projection 521a is positioned at the other corresponding position. It is recessed. Similarly, an insertion hole 522a for inserting a fastening screw is formed through one side, and the first main body 520a and the second main body 520b are fastened and fixed by fastening the fastening screw inserted through the insertion hole 522a. The fastening hole 522b for doing so is recessed at the other corresponding position.

  A bearing 523, a locking claw portion 524, an accommodation recess 525, and a reinforcing rib 526 are formed on the inner wall surfaces of the first main body 520a and the second main body 520b, respectively. The bearing 523 is a bearing part (concave part) for pivotally supporting the shaft 563 of the boss member 560 so that a pair of the bearings 523 are opposed to each other. The locking claw portion 524 is a portion for locking the end portion of the base urging spring SP (see FIG. 12), and is formed in a hook shape that is bent downward while projecting toward the back surface.

  The storage recess 525 and the reinforcing rib 526 are portions disposed at one and the other opposing positions of the first main body 520a and the second main body 520b. That is, the storage recess 525 is a recess for storing and holding a component such as an IC device, and is formed in a shape corresponding to the outer shape of the component to be stored, and the reinforcing rib 526 extends from the inner wall surface to the storage recess 525. The rigidity of the handle mounting base 520 as a whole is increased by pressing the components housed in the housing recess 525 by the projecting tip.

  On the front surface (the right side surface in FIG. 18A) of the first main body 520a and the second main body 520b, there are an upper mating surface portion 527 and a lower mating surface portion 528 that are in contact with the mating surface portion 532a (see FIG. 16) of the handle base 530. It is formed. The upper mating surface portion 527 and the lower mating surface portion 528 are formed on the front end surface of the handle mounting base 520 (a vertically long annular surface in a front view), and each is formed as a flat surface. Note that the lower mating surface portion 528 is inclined toward the back surface as the distance from the upper mating surface portion 527 increases. As a result, the handle base 530 can be displaced with respect to the handle mount 520 around the shaft support portion (the shaft 563 and the bearing 523) (see FIGS. 23 and 24).

  Part of the lower surface portion 528 of the first main body 520a is enlarged (that is, a plate-like body projects radially inward from the inner wall surface of the first main body 520a), and the enlarged portion (projected portion). Is a pressing surface portion 528a for pressing the pressed surface portion 702a of the handle regulating member 700. A reinforcing portion 528b is continuously provided on the back side of the pressing surface portion 528a. The reinforcing portion 528b is formed in a plate shape, and only the upper end side of the pressing surface portion 528a is connected to the inner wall surface of the first main body 520a and the step surface 520a1. As a result, the space between the inner wall surface of the first main body 520a and the reinforcing portion 528b can be reduced, and the rigidity of the pressing surface portion 528a is effectively increased while suppressing the resin material and reducing the component cost. Durability can be improved.

  Next, the base urging spring SP will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 19 is a rear perspective view of the handle mounting base 520 and the handle base 530. In FIG. 19, the state where the variable resistor or the like is removed is shown, and the wiring of other components is not shown.

  As shown in FIG. 19, the base urging spring SP is formed as a coil spring, and the annular portions at both ends are locked to the locking claws 524 in a state of being elastically deformed (extended). At the same time, a substantially intermediate portion of the coil spring is stretched over the protruding tip (between the pair of guide walls 562b) of the protruding portion 562 of the boss member 560.

  Thereby, the boss member 560 is urged in the direction (downward) in which the protruding tip of the protruding portion 562 approaches the locking claw portion 524 around the shaft 563 by the elastic recovery force of the base urging member SP. As a result, the handle base 530 is displaced upward with respect to the handle mount 520 (see FIG. 23).

  Since the handle mounting base 520 is formed with the back surface open, the internal space of the handle mounting base 520 can be exposed from the open portion of the back surface. Thereby, the both ends of the base urging spring SP are locked to the locking claw portion 524, and the operation of laying the intermediate portion between the pair of guide walls 562b is performed from the open portion on the back surface of the handle mounting base 520. Since it can be performed, the workability of the mounting work can be improved.

  When the handle base 530 is displaced upward (bounced up), the upper fitting surface portion 527 of the handle mounting base 520 is in contact with the matching surface portion 532a of the handle base 530. That is, the opposing surfaces (mating surfaces) of the handle mounting base 520 and the handle base 530 are formed with flat mating surface portions (upper mating surface portion 527 and mating surface portion 532a), and these mating surface portions are formed on the handle base. In a state where the displacement position of 530 is disposed at the initial position (first position), the base urging spring SP is brought into close contact with the urging force. By this close contact, the handle base 530 can be maintained in a stable state in the initial position without causing the handle base 530 to rattle. As a result, for example, operability when the handle ring 540 is rotated can be improved.

  When the displacement position of the handle base 530 is disposed at the initial position, the mating surfaces (upper mating surface portion 527 and mating surface portion 532a) that are in close contact with each other are located above (upper surface) the handle mounting base 520 and the handle base 530. Therefore, when the mating surface is opened (see FIG. 20), it is possible to prevent foreign matters such as foreign matter, dust, and dust that have been dropped carelessly by the player from entering the handle mounting base 520. In particular, the handle base 530 is returned to the initial position (first position) by the urging force of the base urging spring SP, and since the period of time at the initial position is long, the mating surfaces (the upper mating surface portion 527 and the mating surface portion 532a) are moved. The configuration disposed above is effective.

  Next, the handle regulating member 700 will be described with reference to FIGS. 20 is a front perspective view of the handle base 530 in a state where the handle restricting member 700 is attached, and FIG. 21 is a front perspective view of the handle base 530 in a state where the handle restricting member 700 is removed. 20 and 21 illustrate a state in which the variable resistor, the firing stop switch operation unit 440, the switching device 600, and the like are removed.

  As shown in FIGS. 20 and 21, the handle restricting member 700 is mounted on the handle base 530 in the notch 534 b formed in the inner peripheral wall 534. The bottom wall 532 of the handle base 530 is formed with a circular through-hole 532b that penetrates from the front surface to the back surface (specifically, the mating surface portion 532a). The through hole 532b and the notch 534b are parallel to the rotation axis of the handle ring 540.

  The handle restricting member 700 is a member made of a resin material for restricting the return of the handle ring 540 to the initial position (that is, fixing the rotation operation amount (rotation position) of the handle ring 540). When the handle base 530 is displaced about the shaft support portion (the shaft 563 and the bearing 523) with respect to the mounting base 520, the handle base 530 is pushed toward the front by the handle mounting base 520 (pressing surface portion 528a), and the handle ring 540 has a circle. By pressing the plate portion 541, the rotation of the handle ring 540 is restricted (see FIG. 24). Here, the handle regulating member 700 will be described with reference to FIG.

  22A and 22B are perspective views of the handle restricting member 700. FIG. The handle restricting member 700 mainly includes a main body portion 701, a rod portion 702 protruding from the back surface of the main body portion 701, and a pair of arm portions 703 protruding from both sides of the main body portion 701.

  The main body 701 is a part formed in a plate shape, and at least the upper surface (the upper side surface in FIG. 22B) is formed in a concave shape. As a result, when mounted on the handle base 530, the internal space of the handle base 530 can be secured to increase the degree of freedom of attachment of other components, and the workability during the attachment operation can be improved. be able to.

  Slide guide grooves 701 a are recessed in the left and right side surfaces of the main body 701. The slide guide groove 701a is a linear concave groove having a U-shaped cross section, and extends in parallel with the protruding direction of the rod portion 702. The inner peripheral wall 534 of the handle base 530 (both sides of the notch 534b) is fitted into the slide guide groove 701a in a state where the handle restricting member 700 is mounted on the handle base 530. That is, the inner peripheral wall 534 of the handle base 530 is sandwiched between the portion protruding from the bottom surface side of the main body 701 and the base of the arm 703. As a result, the main body 701 (handle restricting member 700) is allowed only to move (slide) in the extending direction of the rod 702, and the movement of the handle base 530 in the circumferential direction is restricted.

  A flat contact surface portion 701 b is formed on the front surface of the main body portion 701. The contact surface portion 701b is a portion that is in contact with the back surface of the disc portion 541 of the handle ring 540 (see FIG. 24), and is perpendicular to the rotation axis of the handle ring 540 (that is, the main body portion 701 moves (slides)). (Parallel to the direction).

  The rod portion 702 is a rod-like body having a circular cross section that protrudes from the back surface of the main body portion 701, and is formed so as to be able to be inserted into the through hole 532 b in the bottom wall 532 of the handle base 530. A hemispherical pressed surface portion 702 a is formed at the projecting tip of the rod portion 702. Note that the protruding length of the rod portion 702 from the back surface of the main body portion 701 is larger than the thickness of the bottom wall 532, and when the handle restricting member 700 is mounted on the handle base 530, the rod portion 702 is pressed. The surface portion 702a protrudes from the back surface (the mating surface portion 532a) of the bottom wall 532 (see FIG. 23).

  Since the pressed surface portion 702a of the rod portion 702 is formed in a hemispherical shape, the handle base 530 is displaced with respect to the handle mounting base 520 around the shaft support portion (the shaft 563 and the bearing 523), and the handle mounting base 520 When the pressed surface portion 702a is pressed by the pressing surface portion 528a (see FIGS. 23 and 24), the handle regulating member 700 can be moved (slid) stably. That is, in this embodiment, the pressing surface portion 528a of the handle mounting base 520 moves around the shaft 563, while the handle restricting member 700 slides (linearly moves), and the relative positional relationship between the two is indefinite. At some point, the pressing surface portion 528a of the handle mounting base 520 is formed as a flat surface, and the pressed surface portion 702a of the handle restricting member 700 is formed as a spherical surface that bulges toward the pressing surface portion 528a. A force component for sliding the handle restricting member 700 in the direction toward the handle ring 540 can be generated continuously by moving the shaft support portion (the shaft 563 and the bearing 523) with displacement. As a result, clogging of the handle restricting member 700 (that is, the inner peripheral wall 534 of the handle base 530 bites into the slide guide groove 701a or the rod portion 702 bites into the through hole 532b) is suppressed and stabilized. Can be slid.

  The arm portion 703 is a rod-shaped body having a substantially rectangular cross section that protrudes from both side surfaces of the main body portion 701, and the bottom surface of the arm portion 703 has a curvature corresponding to the inner peripheral surface of the inner peripheral wall 534 of the handle base 530. Curved and formed. Thus, in a state where the handle restricting member 700 is attached to the handle base 530 (the inner peripheral wall 534 is fitted in the slide guide groove 701a of the main body 701), the bottom surface of the arm 703 is set to the inner periphery of the inner peripheral wall 534. It can be in a state of being curved along the surface, and the arm portion 703 can be prevented from falling off from the receiving projection 538. Further, since the arm portion 703 extends along the circumferential direction of the handle base 530, it is possible to make the arm portion 703 longer while suppressing the influence of the arrangement space of other components. In addition, a space necessary for elastic deformation of the arm portion 703 can be secured.

  Returning to FIG. 20 and FIG. On the inner peripheral wall 534 of the handle base 530, a pair of receiving projections 538 project from the inner peripheral surface inward in the radial direction. The receiving projection 538 is a part for elastically deforming the arm 702 of the handle restricting member 700 by restraining the arm 702 and restricting the movement thereof, and corresponds to the distal end portion of the arm 703 of the handle restricting member 700. Arranged in position.

  The notch 534b (the slide holding portion that holds the handle restricting member 700 slidably toward the handle ring 540) in the inner peripheral wall 534 of the handle base 530 is open at the front surface (the side facing the handle ring 540). It is formed. Therefore, since the handle restricting member 700 can be easily attached to the notch 534b using the open portion, the assembly cost relating to the operation of attaching the handle restricting member 700 can be reduced.

  In addition, since the open part of the notch part 534b is the side facing the handle ring 540 (see FIG. 23), the handle restricting member 700 is provided in the notch part by arranging the handle ring 540 on the handle base 530. It does not fall off from the open part of 534b.

  In addition, since a receiving projection 538 that receives the arm portion 703 of the handle restricting member 700 is provided on the inner peripheral wall 534 of the handle base 530, the handle restricting member 700 is formed from the open portion of the notch 534b of the handle base 530. The handle restricting member 700 falls off from the open portion of the notch 534b until the handle ring 540 is attached to the handle base 530 after being attached (that is, in the state shown in FIG. 20). Can be prevented. Therefore, the workability in the assembly process can be improved.

  On the other hand, the arm portion 703 of the handle restricting member 700 is made of a resin material and is formed to be elastically deformable. Therefore, the handle base 530 is centered on the shaft support portion (the shaft 563 and the bearing 523) with respect to the handle mounting base 520. When the handle restricting member 700 is displaced and pressed toward the front surface (handle ring 540), the tip portion is elastically deformed by the arm portion 702 restrained by the receiving protrusion 538, whereby the handle restricting member 700 is moved. It can be moved (slid). Thereby, the contact surface portion 701b of the handle regulating member 700 can be brought into contact with the back surface (contacted surface portion) of the handle ring 540 (see FIG. 24).

  Further, when the displacement of the handle base 530 with respect to the handle mount 520 around the shaft support portion (the shaft 563 and the bearing 523) is released, the handle restricting member is caused by the elastic recovery force of the elastically deformed arm portion 702. 700 can be moved away from the handle ring 540 and returned to the initial position (see FIG. 23). Thereby, a gap can be formed between the contact surface portion 701b of the handle regulating member 700 and the back surface (contacted surface portion) of the handle ring 540. As a result, it is possible to avoid obstructing the turning operation of the handle ring 540 due to the resistance caused by the contact between the two.

  Here, since the receiving protrusion 538 protrudes radially inward from the inner peripheral surface of the inner peripheral wall 534 of the handle base 530, visibility during assembly can be ensured. As a result, it is easy to confirm the positional relationship between the arm portion 703 and the receiving protrusion 738 (that is, whether or not the arm portion 703 is properly engaged with the receiving protrusion 738), thereby improving workability. be able to.

  In addition, the receiving projection 738 is inclined upward from the inner peripheral surface of the inner peripheral wall 534 of the handle base 530 toward the rear surface of the projecting projection 738 (that is, along the mounting direction of the handle restricting member 700). Since the inclined surface is formed, when the handle restricting member 700 is attached to the notch 534b from the open portion, the handle restricting member 700 is formed along the inclined surface formed on the projecting upper surface of the receiving protrusion 538. By moving the arm portion 703, the receiving projection 538 can be easily climbed over the arm portion 703. That is, it is only necessary to push the handle restricting member 700 from the open portion of the notch 738, and it is not necessary to separately perform the work of lifting the arm portion 703 and getting over the receiving projection 738, so that the workability of the assembling work is improved. Can be achieved.

  Next, the operation of the handle device 51 will be described with reference to FIGS. 23 and 24.

  FIG. 23 is a partial cross-sectional side view of the handle device 51 in a state before the displacement operation, and FIG. 24 is a partial cross-sectional side view of the handle device 51 in a state after the displacement operation. 23 and 24, the front surface of the lower plate unit 15 is schematically illustrated by a two-dot chain line, and the state where the second main body 520b of the handle mounting base 520 is removed is illustrated. Illustration of the wiring is omitted.

  As shown in FIG. 23, the handle base 530 is in a state before the handle base 530 is displaced about the shaft support portion (the shaft 563 and the bearing 523) with respect to the handle mounting base 520 (that is, the handle base 530 is directed downward by the player). In the state where the displacement operation is not performed), the handle base 530 is in a horizontal position, and the mating surfaces of the handle mounting base 520 and the handle base 530 are such that the upper mating surface portion 527 abuts the mating surface portion 532a and the lower mating surface portion 528. Is separated from the mating surface portion 532a.

  23, when the handle base 530 is displaced downward with respect to the handle mount 520 around the shaft support portion (the shaft 563 and the bearing 523), the pressed surface portion of the rod portion 702 of the handle regulating member 700 702a is pressed by the pressing surface portion 528a of the handle mounting base 520, and the handle restricting member 700 is slid toward the front surface (handle ring 540). When the handle base 530 is further displaced downward about the shaft support portion (the shaft 563 and the bearing 523), the lower mating surface portion 528 comes into contact with the mating surface portion 532a, and as shown in FIG. The contact surface portion 701 b in the main body portion 701 is in contact with the back surface of the disc portion 541 of the handle ring 540.

  As a result, the handle ring 540 is restricted from returning to the initial position regardless of the rotation operation amount (rotation position), and the rotation operation amount is fixed. Therefore, the launch intensity of the sphere can be fixed to the launch intensity of the sphere according to the current amount of rotation of the handle ring 540.

  In this case, there are the following as conventional techniques for fixing the amount of rotation of the handle ring 540. For example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2012-5759 discloses a hemispherical shape convex toward the front (player side) at the top (front side as viewed from the player) of the front cover base corresponding to the front cover 550 in the present embodiment. A technique for fixing the amount of rotation of the handle ring when the player pushes the button toward the back with the palm of the hand is disclosed.

  However, in such a conventional technique, it is necessary to perform a push-in operation of the button while performing a turning operation of the handle ring. Specifically, it is necessary to simultaneously perform an operation (rotating operation) for moving the handle ring grasped with a finger in the circumferential direction and an operation of pushing the palm toward the back side while turning the palm around the button surface. Therefore, in order to push in the button while maintaining the rotation amount (rotation position) of the handle ring, a high level technique is required of the player. In addition, since this state (the state in which the button is pushed in while maintaining the amount of rotation of the handle ring) is an unreasonable posture for the player, this state is continued (that is, the launch strength of the ball is desired). It is the player's burden to fix the firing strength. As a result, not only when the button is pushed in but also when the push is maintained, the rotation amount (rotation position) of the handle ring is easily shifted, and it becomes difficult to maintain the desired rotation operation amount.

  In addition, because of such an unreasonable posture, advanced technology is also required for an operation for releasing the push of the button while maintaining the rotation amount (rotation position) of the handle ring.

  On the other hand, according to this embodiment, the displacement operation centering on the shaft support portion (the shaft 563 and the bearing 523) of the handle base 530 is an operation of integrally displacing the handle base 530 and the handle ring 540. Therefore, the player can support the shaft support portion (the shaft 563 and the bearing 523) of the handle base 530 without releasing a part of the finger that holds the handle ring 540 no matter what the rotation position of the handle ring 540 is. ). Thereby, the operativity can be improved. Further, after the displacement operation centering on the shaft support portion (the shaft 563 and the bearing 523) of the handle base 530 is performed, the operation state (the rotation operation amount of the handle ring 540 is fixed to a desired rotation operation amount). It is also easy to maintain the state. Therefore, when the handle base 530 is operated and when the operation state is maintained, it is possible to suppress the positional deviation of the rotation position of the handle ring 540 and to accurately fix the launch strength of the sphere to a desired launch strength. Can do.

  Further, in this way, if the handle base 530 is displaced about the shaft support portion (the shaft 563 and the bearing 523), the player attaches a palm to the handle base 530 (front cover 550) and directly The handle base 530 can be displaced downward about the shaft support portion (the shaft 563 and the bearing 523) only by the operation of applying the above weight. That is, the player can fix the firing strength of the sphere to a desired firing strength only by performing a simple operation of applying a hand weight.

  In addition, since the handle base 530 and the handle ring 540 are integrally displaced, the player can use one finger that holds the handle ring 540 regardless of the rotation position of the handle ring 540. The displacement operation around the shaft support portion (the shaft 563 and the bearing 523) of the handle base 530 can be performed without separating the parts. Thereby, the operativity can be improved. Further, after the displacement operation centering on the shaft support portion (the shaft 563 and the bearing 523) of the handle base 530 is performed, the operation state (the rotation operation amount of the handle ring 540 is fixed to a desired rotation operation amount). It is also easy to maintain the state. Therefore, when the handle base 530 is operated and when the operation state is maintained, it is possible to suppress the positional deviation of the rotation position of the handle ring 540 and to accurately fix the launch strength of the sphere to a desired launch strength. Can do.

  Further, since the contact surface portion 701b of the main body portion 701 of the handle restricting member 700 and the back surface (contacted surface portion) of the disc portion 541 of the handle ring 540 are formed as smooth surfaces, the rotation of the handle ring 540 is performed. The position can be fixed at an arbitrary rotation position.

  For example, serrated irregularities are provided on the contact surface portion 701b of the main body portion 701 of the handle restricting member 700 and the back surface (contacted surface portion) of the disc portion 541 of the handle ring 540, and the serrated irregularities are provided to each other. In the structure in which the rotation position of the handle ring 540 is fixed by being engaged, the rotation position of the handle ring 540 can be firmly fixed, while the pitch (interval) of the serrated irregularities is adjusted. The minimum value of. Therefore, the rotation position that can be fixed becomes intermittent, and there is a possibility that it cannot be fixed at a desired rotation position.

  On the other hand, as in this embodiment, the contact surface portion 701b of the main body portion 701 of the handle restricting member 700 and the back surface (contacted surface portion) of the disk portion 541 of the handle ring 540 are smooth surfaces. Since the rotation position that can be fixed is continuous, it can be fixed at an arbitrary rotation position, and the adjustment width can be secured.

  Even if the contact surface portion 701b is in contact with the back surface (contacted surface portion) of the disc portion 541 and the amount of rotation of the handle ring 540 is fixed, the contact surface portion 701b and the target surface portion Since the abutting surface portions are smooth surfaces, the abutting surfaces can be slid relative to each other. Therefore, even after the rotation amount of the handle ring 540 is fixed, the handle ring 540 The amount of rotation operation can be finely adjusted.

  Here, since the front cover 550 is disposed on the front side of the handle ring 540 (right side in FIG. 23), the player attaches a palm to the outer surface of the front cover 550 when holding the handle ring 540 with fingers. The front cover 550 can be used as a portion (force point) to which a force is applied when the handle base 530 is displaced about the shaft support portion (the shaft 563 and the bearing 523) with respect to the handle mount 520. it can.

  In this case, as shown in FIG. 24, in this embodiment, the pressing surface portion 528a (the pressed surface portion 702a of the pressed surface portion 702a) is supported from the shaft 563 (fulcrum) of the boss member 560 that supports the handle base 530 so that the handle base 530 can be displaced. The distance A to the projecting tip (operation point) is at least smaller than the distance B from the shaft 563 of the boss member 560 to the back surface of the handle ring 540. Therefore, the distance from the shaft 563 (fulcrum) of the boss member 560 to the outer surface (force point) of the front cover 550 is made larger than the distance A.

  That is, since the distance from the fulcrum to the fulcrum can be made larger than the distance from the fulcrum to the action point, even if the force applied to the outer surface of the front cover 550 serving as the force point is small, the force is amplified, The handle regulating member 700 (the pressed surface portion 702a) can be pressed with a greater force by the pressing surface portion 528a serving as the action point. Thereby, the handle restricting member 700 can be firmly brought into contact with the handle ring 540, and the rotation operation amount (rotation position) of the handle ring 540 can be reliably fixed.

  Next, with reference to FIGS. 25 to 27, a switching structure for switching the switching device 600 to a rotatable state or an engaged and fixed state by a push operation of the button member 570 will be described. In the description of the switching structure, FIGS. 28 and 29 are referred to as appropriate.

  25 to 27 are partial cross-sectional side views of the handle device 51. FIG. 25 shows a state where the button member 570 is in the first position, FIG. 26 shows a state where the button member 570 is in the second position, and FIG. 27 shows a state where the button member 570 is in the third position. The

  FIGS. 28 and 29 are schematic front views of the handle device 51 schematically showing the handle ring 540 and the switching device 600. 28A shows a state in which the handle ring 540 is at the initial position θ0 and the switching device 600 is in a rotatable state, and FIG. 28B shows a state in which the handle ring 540 is rotated to the operation position θ1. In FIG. 28C, the handle ring 540 is rotated to the operation position θ1 and the switching device 600 is in the engaged and fixed state. FIG. 29A shows the changed state, and FIG. 29A shows the state where the handle ring 540 is in the range of the operation positions θ0 to θ1 and the switching device 600 is changed to the engaged and fixed state. b) illustrates a state in which the handle ring 540 is at the initial position θ0 and the switching device 600 is changed to the engaged and fixed state.

  As shown in FIGS. 25 to 27, the switching device 600 is inserted into the bearing portion 535 of the handle base 530 as described above, and the connection shaft 575 of the button member 570 is inserted into the connection hole 620 of the switching device 600. It is inserted so as to be relatively movable in the axial direction and not relatively rotatable in the circumferential direction.

  In this embodiment, since the handle shaft support body 574 of the button member 570 is rotatably connected to the shaft body 573, the switching device 600 (main body part 610) rotates relative to the bearing part 575. In this case, in conjunction with the switching device 600, only the member on the handle shaft support 574 side (the handle shaft support 574, the connecting shaft 575, and the pushing piece 576) is rotated, and the member on the shaft 573 side is rotated. The (shaft body 573, the back base 572, and the operation unit 571) can be prevented from rotating. Therefore, it can suppress that the operation part 571 rotates in the palm of a player, and gives a discomfort to a player.

  Further, in the present embodiment, since the connecting shaft 575 of the button member 570 is inserted into the connecting hole 620 of the switching device 600 so as not to be relatively rotatable in the circumferential direction, the switching device 600 rotates with respect to the bearing portion 535. Even in this case, the rotational position (phase) of the pushing piece 576 in the button member 570 with respect to the escape space 661 of the switching device 600 can always be matched.

  As a result, the pusher piece 576 of the button member 570 is bitten in accordance with the push operation of the button member 570 (operation unit 571) regardless of the rotation position (phase) of the switching device 600. It can be reliably moved into the recessed space 651. In other words, the switching device 600 can be engaged and fixed in any rotational position of the handle ring 540, so that the game ball has a desired firing strength. In this case, the operation end point can be changed (set) while maintaining the rotation position (operation amount) of the handle ring 540. As a result, the operation end point can be changed (set) quickly and at an accurate position.

  The handle ring 540 is rotatably supported by the handle shaft support 574 by inserting the handle shaft support 574 of the button member 570 into the center hole 544a. That is, even when the switching device 600 is switched to the engaged and fixed state in which the rotation relative to the bearing portion 535 is not possible, the handle ring 540 has the handle side projection 546 whose regulating projection of the switching device 600 is restricted. Rotation is possible in a rotation direction (direction to return to the initial position) opposite to the rotation direction regulated by contacting the portion 630.

  A button urging spring 590 formed as a coil spring is disposed between the handle ring 540 and the button member 570 in a state of being elastically compressed and deformed, and the urging force (elastic recovery force) causes the button member. 570 is biased away from the handle ring 540.

  As shown in FIG. 25, in the state where the button member 570 is in the first position (the state where the button member 570 is in the initial position where the pushing operation is not performed), the pushing piece 576 of the button member 570 is the escape space of the switching device 600. 661. Therefore, in the switching device 600, the biting spheres 670 a and 670 b are arranged in the escape space 661 by the urging force of the pushing-side urging spring 680, so that the rotation can rotate relative to the bearing portion 535. The movable state is set (see FIGS. 15A and 15C).

  Thus, in a state where the switching device 600 is set in a rotatable state (a state where the button member 570 is in the first position), the switching device 600 is rotatable with respect to the bearing portion 535. As shown in FIGS. 28A and 28B, when the handle ring 540 is rotated in the increasing direction from the initial position θ0 to the operation position θ1, the handle side protrusion 546 of the handle ring 540 is switched to the switching device 600. By pushing the restricting projection 630 in the increasing direction, the switching device 600 is rotated in the increasing direction in conjunction with the handle ring 540. The operation position θ1 is a rotation angle that does not reach the maximum position θmax of the rotation operation range of the handle ring 540. The same applies to the following.

  On the other hand, when the handle ring 540 is rotated in the decreasing direction, the switching device 600 is rotated in the decreasing direction following the handle ring 540 by the biasing force of the switching device biasing spring 539 (see FIG. 7). Is done. For example, as shown in FIGS. 28A and 28B, when the handle ring 540 is rotated in the decreasing direction from the operation position θ1 to the initial position θ0, the switching device 600 is also switched by the switching device biasing spring. The restricting protrusion 630 is rotated in the decreasing direction by the urging force of 539 and is disposed at the rotating position where the restricting protrusion 630 comes into contact with the handle-side protrusion 546.

  That is, as shown in FIG. 25, in a state where the switching device 600 is set in a rotatable state (a state in which the button member 570 is in the first position), the handle ring 540 moves in either the increasing direction or the decreasing direction. Even in the case of the rotation operation, the switching device 600 is rotated in conjunction with (synchronized), and the rotation position (phase) of the handle ring 540 and the switching device 600 are matched (FIG. 28A). And FIG. 28 (b)).

  As shown in FIG. 26, in the state where the button member 570 is in the second position (the state where the button member 570 in the first position is pushed in), the switching device 600 bites the biting spheres 670a and 670b. It is disposed in the space 651 (that is, the biting spheres 670a and 670b are pushed into the biting space 651 by the push-in piece 576 of the button member 570), and is set in the engagement fixed state.

  In a state where the switching device 600 is set to the engagement fixed state, the biting spheres 670 a and 670 b are opposed to the inner peripheral surface of the bearing portion 535 and the biting surface 650 by the biasing force of the biting side biasing spring 690. The switching device 600 (main body portion 610) is in any rotation direction (the arrow A direction and the arrow B direction shown in FIG. 15D). ), The circumferential end of the biting surface 650 acts so as to further bite the biting spheres 670a and 670b between the opposite ends of the biting surface 650 and the inner peripheral surface of the bearing portion 535 (FIG. 15 (b) and FIG. 15 (d)), the rotation of the switching device 600 (main body portion 610) relative to the bearing portion 535 is restricted (blocked).

  Therefore, as shown in FIG. 28B, in the state where the handle ring 540 is rotated to the operation position θ1, the button member 570 is pushed to change the position from the first position to the second position. As shown in FIG. 28C, the device 600 is set in the engagement fixed state, and the switching device 600 is moved to the rotation position corresponding to the operation position θ1 (that is, the button member 570 in the first position is in the second position). The rotation position at the time of change to (1) can be fixed.

  As described above, when the switching device 600 is set in the engagement fixed state and the rotation position thereof is fixed, the handle ring 540 is moved in the decreasing direction as shown in FIGS. Even if it is rotated, the switching device 600 is not interlocked (synchronized) with the rotation of the handle ring 540 and is held at the rotation position corresponding to the operation position θ1. That is, the handle ring 540 has a central hole 544a pivotally supported by the handle shaft support body 574 (see FIG. 26), so that the handle ring 540 is independent of the switching device 600 as shown in FIG. Thus, it can be rotated in the decreasing direction and the operating direction.

  In this case, for example, as shown in FIG. 29B, the handle ring 540 that has been returned to the initial position θ0 in a state where the switching device 600 is held (fixed) at the rotation position corresponding to the operation position θ1. When the rotation operation is performed in the increasing direction, the operation position θ1 is the operation end point. That is, as shown in FIG. 28 (c), when the rotation operation in the increasing direction reaches the operation position θ1, the handle ring 540 is brought into contact with the restricting protrusion 630, and beyond that, Rotation operation in the increasing direction is restricted.

  Here, the setting of the button member 570 in the second position to the first position is performed as follows. That is, after pushing the button member 570 in the second position shown in FIG. 26 to the pushable position (third position) as shown in FIG. 27, the pushing operation is released (decreasing the pushing force or Release the hand). Thereby, the button member 570 is returned from the third position to the first position shown in FIG. 25 by the urging force of the button urging spring 590.

  In this case, for example, as shown in FIG. 29B, in the state where the switching device 600 is held (fixed) at the rotation position corresponding to the operation position θ1, the above-described operation (from the second position to the third position is performed). When the switching device 600 is switched from the engaged and fixed state to the rotatable state and is rotatable with respect to the bearing portion 535, the switching device 600 is attached. In response to the urging force of the urging spring 539, as shown in FIG. 28 (a), the urging spring 539 is returned to the initial position (the rotation position where the restricting protrusion 630 abuts on the handle side protrusion 546).

  Here, the switching device 600 is always rotated (synchronized) with the handle shaft support body 574 and the pushing piece 576 via the coupling between the connection hole 620 and the connection shaft 575, so that the handle ring 540 is rotated. Even in a state where the rotation is being performed, the button member 570 is pressed to switch from the engagement fixed state to the rotatable state (that is, the switching device 600 is returned to the initial position, and the operation end point is set). (Cancellation of change).

  Thus, even when the handle ring 540 is being rotated, it is not necessary to temporarily return the handle ring 540 to the initial position in order to cancel the change (setting) of the operation end point. Therefore, for example, when it becomes necessary to reset the position of the operation end point to another position (for example, fine adjustment), the rotation operation of the handle ring 540 is maintained (that is, the game is continued). The resetting operation can be performed quickly. Alternatively, for example, when a right-handed need arises, the operation end point that restricts the rotation operation of the handle ring 540 in the increasing direction can be canceled while the rotation operation of the handle ring 540 is maintained. Thus, it is possible to quickly form a state in which the handle ring 540 can be rotated in the increasing direction. That is, it is possible to quickly switch to the turning operation of the handle ring 540 in the operation direction that maximizes the launch intensity of the game ball.

  In addition, an operation of switching the switching device 600 from the engagement fixed state to the rotatable state (release operation end point, that is, a return operation for returning the switching device 600 to the initial position), and from the rotatable state to the engaged fixed state. Both the switching operation (the changing operation for changing (setting) the operation end point) are achieved by pressing the button member 570. That is, it can be achieved by operating the same member in the same direction. As a result, the change operation and the return operation can be easily performed. In particular, since the state due to the change operation and the state due to the return operation are switched alternately, it becomes effective to improve operability that these two states can be switched by repeating the same operation. In addition, since the same member is operated in the same direction, the direction in which the button member 570 can be operated can be limited to only one direction. Therefore, the structure can be simplified and the product cost can be reduced. Reduction can be achieved.

  Here, in a state where the button member 570 is in the second position and the third position, as shown in FIGS. 26 and 27, a part of the operation portion 571 of the button member 570 (the top side protruding forward) is moved forward. The cover 550 projects forward (right side in FIGS. 26 and 27) from the edge of the opening 550a. Therefore, when the button member 570 (operation portion 571) in the first position (or second position) is pushed into the second position (or third position), the button member 570 is opened to the front cover 550. There is no need to push it to a position beyond the edge of 550a (that is, a position where the entire operation portion 571 of the button member 570 enters the front cover 550). Thereby, when pushing in the button member 570, it can suppress that the edge part of the opening 550a of the front cover 550 obstructs the movement of a player's hand, and can improve the operativity.

  However, in a state where the button member 570 is in the third position, the entire operation portion 571 of the button member 570 may be configured to be immersed in the front cover 550. In other words, in the third position, the top portion (portion that protrudes most forward) of the operation portion 571 of the button member 570 is positioned axially inward (leftward in FIG. 27) with respect to the edge portion of the opening 550a of the front cover 550. You may form as follows.

  In this case, the button member 570 is pushed from the second position to the third position so that the switching device 600 can be returned to the initial position (that is, the switching device 600 in the engaged and fixed state is changed to a rotatable state). In order to cancel the change (setting) of the operation end point), the button member 570 (operation portion 571) is moved to a position (inside the front cover 550) that exceeds the edge of the opening 550a of the front cover 550 in the axial direction. It is necessary to push in the operation portion 571 of the button member 570 to the position where the entire operation portion 571 enters. Therefore, when the button member 570 is pushed to the third position, the edge portion of the opening 550a of the front cover 550 is prevented from being pushed in (that is, the edge portion of the opening 550a is brought into contact with the player's hand). it can. Thereby, it can suppress that the button member 570 in a 2nd position is inadvertently pushed in to a 3rd position. As a result, it is possible to prevent the position of the operation end point from being changed to a desired rotation position (or the set state is released (or can be released)) by an inadvertent pressing operation of the button member 570.

  Next, referring to FIGS. 30 and 31, the switching device 600 is used to change (set) the operation end point of the handle ring 540 and to change the rotation position of the handle ring 540 with reference to the position of the operation end point. An adjustment method for adjusting (returning to the original rotation position) will be described.

  30 and 31 are schematic views schematically illustrating the state of the rotation operation of the handle device 51. In each figure, the left diagram is a schematic front view of the handle device 51, and the right diagram is the handle. It is a schematic diagram which shows typically the relationship between the rotation position of the ring 540, and the operation end point. 30 and 31, the black triangle (“▲”) indicates the rotational position of the handle ring 540, and the “[first position] or [second position]” is displayed on the button. It means the position of the member 570. The “initial position θ0” is the initial position of the handle ring 540, and the “maximum position θmax” is the maximum position at which the handle ring 540 can be rotated when the operation end point is not changed (set). The “operation end point” is the end point of the turning operation of the handle ring 540 formed by setting the switching device 600 to the engaged and fixed state.

  As shown in FIGS. 30 (a) and 30 (b), the switching device 600 is in a rotatable state when the button member 570 is in the first position (FIGS. 25, 15 (a) and FIG. 30). 15 (c)), the handle ring 540 can be rotated in the range from the initial position θ0 to the maximum position θmax.

  In the state shown in FIGS. 30A and 30B, as a result of adjusting the rotational position of the handle ring 540 according to the gaming state, the handle ring 540 is operated as shown in FIG. When it is determined that the launch intensity of the game ball can be adjusted to a desired launch intensity by setting the position θ1, the player maintains the state shown in FIG. As shown, the button member 570 is set to the second position by the pushing operation of the button member 570. As a result, when the switching device 600 is set in the engaged and fixed state (see FIGS. 26, 15B and 15D), the operation end point is at a position corresponding to the operation position θ1 of the handle ring 540. Changed (set).

  Thus, according to the handle device 51, the operation end point can be set. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 31A, for example, in order to take a break, the rotational position of the handle ring 540 is returned to the initial position θ0. Even if the game is interrupted, the original slide operation position (that is, the rotation position where the launch intensity of the game ball is adjusted to the desired launch intensity and the operation position θ1 before interrupting the gaming machine) It can be stored as “operation end point”.

  Therefore, when the rotation position of the handle ring 540 is adjusted to the original rotation position (that is, the operation position θ1 before the game is interrupted) (when the states of FIGS. 30B and 30C are reproduced). ), As shown in FIG. 31 (b), if the player rotates the handle ring 540 to the operation end point (that is, the rotation operation of the handle ring 540 is restricted by the operation end point, and beyond that, If the rotation operation is performed until the rotation operation becomes impossible, the rotation position of the handle ring 540 can be quickly and easily adjusted to the original rotation position (operation position θ1).

  For example, a method of providing a scale line along the movement locus of the handle ring 540 and rotating the handle ring 540 using the scale line as a target position is conceivable. It is not necessary to make fine adjustment while visually discriminating whether or not the rotational position of 540 coincides with the target position (scale line), and can be accurately adjusted to a desired rotational position. In addition, according to the present embodiment, the rotation operation may be performed up to a position where the rotation operation cannot be performed, and the operation speed of the handle ring 540 can be increased. Thus, it is possible to quickly adjust to a desired rotation position (return to the original rotation position quickly).

  When returning the position of the operation end point to the maximum position θmax, in the state shown in FIG. 31A or 31B, a push-in operation for pushing the button member 570 to a pushable position (third position). After performing the above, by releasing the pushing operation, the button member 570 is returned to the first position, and the position of the operation end point can be returned to the maximum position θmax as shown in FIG.

  Here, the player whose operation end point has been changed (set) ends the game, and as shown in FIG. 31A, the second player starts the game with the operation end point being changed. In some cases, such a second player may suffer disadvantages. That is, the fact that the operation end point has been changed means that the handle ring 540 cannot be rotated to the maximum position θmax as shown in FIG. 31B, and the operation end point has been changed. If the second player does not notice that the game machine ball cannot be fired at the maximum position θmax (maximum launch strength), the player is disadvantaged. Therefore, even in such a case, it is desirable that the second player can easily recognize that the position of the operation end point has been changed when starting the game.

  On the other hand, according to the handle device 51 of the present embodiment, as described above, it is determined whether or not the position of the operation end point has been changed (set) using the confirmation window 550b provided on the front cover 550. It is formed so that a person can easily confirm. Here, a confirmation structure using the confirmation window 550b will be described with reference to FIG.

  32 (a) and 32 (b) are partially enlarged cross-sectional views of the handle device 51. In FIG. 32 (a), the state in which the button member 570 is in the first position is shown in FIG. 32 (b). Each state where the button member 570 is in the second position is illustrated.

  As shown in FIGS. 32 (a) and 32 (b), according to the handle device 51, the position of the operation end point is not changed (that is, the position of the operation end point coincides with the maximum position). The state shown in FIG. 32A in which the button member 570 is in the first position) and the state in which the position of the operation end point is changed (that is, the state shown in FIG. 32B in which the button member 570 is in the second position). ) And the push-in position of the button member 570 are different. Therefore, the player can identify whether or not the position of the operation end point has been changed based on the difference in the pressing position of the button member 570. The player can be prevented from playing a game without noticing that the position of the operation end point has been changed, and the player can be less likely to suffer a disadvantage.

  However, in the handle device 51 according to the present embodiment, the front cover 550 and the button member 570 protruding from the opening 550a of the front cover 550 are integrally formed to form one hemisphere (FIG. 5). 6 and FIG. 6), even if the button member 570 is pushed into the second position, since one hemisphere is formed as a whole, the player cannot clearly recognize the difference in pushing amount of the button member 570. There is a fear.

  On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the confirmation windows 550b and 554b are changed depending on whether or not the position of the operation end point is changed (that is, whether the button member 570 is in the first position or the second position). Since the form of the object visually recognized through is made different, the judgment criterion can be binarized, and it is easy to clearly distinguish the two states. This allows the player to easily and reliably identify whether the position of the operation end point has been changed.

Specifically, as described above, in the button member 570, the outer peripheral surface of the inner fitting wall portion 577 is formed in black, while the outer peripheral surface of the operation portion 571 is formed in white. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 32 (a), in the state where the button member 570 is in the first position, a form in which the player visually recognizes the confirmation window 550b, 554b of the front cover 550 is provided. On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 32 (b), when the button member 570 is in the second position, the player can visually recognize the outer peripheral surface (black) through the confirmation window 550b of the front cover 550. The outer peripheral surface (white) of the part 571 can be used.
Accordingly, the player can determine whether the button member 570 is disposed at the first position or the second position based on the difference in color visually recognized through the confirmation windows 550b and 554b (that is, the handle). It is possible to easily identify whether or not the position of the operation end point of the ring 540 has been changed.

  In this case, an inner fitting wall portion 577 of the button member 570 is inserted into the cylindrical guide portion 554 of the front cover 550 on the inner peripheral side, and the button member 570 is in the first position as shown in FIG. In this state, since the outer peripheral surface of the inner fitting wall portion 577 faces the inner peripheral surface of the cylindrical guide portion 554, the confirmation window 554b can be shielded by the inner fitting wall portion 577. That is, it is difficult for light to be led out from the inside of the handle device 51 to the outside through the confirmation window 554b. Further, also in the route from the confirmation window 554b to the confirmation window 550b, such a route is disposed in a closed space formed by the outer wall surface of the front cover 550 and the handle ring 540, and thus the confirmation window 550b from the inside of the handle device 51. It is difficult for light to be led out to the outside. Therefore, in a state where the button member 570 is in the first position, the form (black on the outer peripheral surface of the inner fitting wall portion 577) that is visually recognized by the player via the confirmation windows 550b and 554b can be made darker.

  On the other hand, the operation portion 571 of the button member 570 is formed in a hemispherical shape. As shown in FIG. 32B, when the button member 570 is in the second position, the outer peripheral surface of the operation portion 571 is a cylindrical guide portion. Since it faces the inner peripheral surface of 554, a space opened outward (right side in FIG. 32B) can be formed below the confirmation window 554b (the outer peripheral surface side of the operation portion 571). That is, light can be introduced from the outside from the space below the confirmation window 554b into the space between the confirmation window 554b and the confirmation window 550b. In addition, the outer peripheral surface of the operation unit 571 can be in a state of being irradiated with light. Therefore, in a state where the button member 570 is in the second position, the form (white on the outer peripheral surface of the operation unit 571) that is visually recognized by the player via the confirmation windows 550b and 554b can be brightened.

  As a result, as shown in FIG. 32A, the button member 570 is in the second position, as shown in FIG. It is possible to further increase the difference in contrast with the form visually recognized by the player in a certain state. Thereby, since it is easy to distinguish two states more clearly, it is possible to easily and surely identify whether or not the position of the operation end point has been changed.

  Next, a second embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. In the first embodiment, the case where the change of the operation end point and the release thereof are performed by the pushing operation of the button member 570 has been described, but the change of the operation end point and the release thereof in the second embodiment are performed on the handle mounting base 520. This is done by displacing the handle base 530 (handle ring 540). In addition, the same code | symbol is attached | subjected about the part same as 1st Embodiment, and the description is abbreviate | omitted.

  FIG. 33A is a top view of the handle device 2051 in the second embodiment, and FIG. 33B is a front view of the handle device 2051. FIG. 34 is a side view of the handle device 2051 when viewed in the direction of arrow XXXII in FIG. 33A and 34, the front surface of the lower dish unit 15 is schematically illustrated by a two-dot chain line.

  As shown in FIGS. 33 and 34, the handle device 2051 includes a handle mounting base 2520, a handle base 530, a handle ring 2540, a front cover 2550, an operation / use display piece 2570, and a switching device 2600 (from FIG. 38). 40), and is projected in a horizontal posture from the front surface of the pachinko machine 10 (see FIG. 1).

  As in the first embodiment, the handle mounting base 2520 and the handle base 530 are fixed so that the back surface (left side in FIG. 33A) of the handle mounting base 2520 is fixed to the front surface of the lower plate unit 15, and one of the handle mounting base 2520 and the handle base 530 is pivoted on the other side. The handle base 530 is integrated with the handle ring 2540 and can be displaced in the vertical direction with respect to the handle mounting base 2520 around the pivotally supported portion (see FIG. 53). (See FIG. 55).

  The handle device 2051 of this embodiment displaces the handle base 530 in the vertical direction with respect to the handle mounting base 2520, thereby restricting the rotation of the handle ring 540 by the pressing of the handle restricting member 700 (restriction of returning to the initial position). ) Can be executed, and switching (ie, change (setting) and release of the operation end point) of the switching device 2600 (ie, the rotatable state or the engagement fixed state) can be executed.

  The handle mounting base 2520 is provided with an operation / display piece 2570. The operation / use display piece 2570 is a member for displaying whether or not the position of the operation end point has been changed (set), and is formed as a rod-like body bent in an L shape. To the upper surface.

  On the side of the handle mounting base 2520, a shaft 2802 of a linear motion conversion member 2800 that is rotated according to the state of the switching device 2600 (rotatable state or engageable state) is projected. Further, the base end of the operation / use display piece 2570 is fixed to the shaft 2802 (the connecting square portion 2802a). Therefore, when the state of the switching device 2600 is switched and the shaft 2802 is rotated, the extending tip of the operation / display piece 2570 is moved back and forth along the upper surface of the handle mounting base 2520 (FIG. 33 (a) left and right direction). And is held at the first position or the second position according to the state of the switching device 2600.

  On the upper surface of the handle mounting base 2520, a first scale portion S1 and a second scale portion S2 that are triangular when viewed from above are displayed. The first scale portion S1 is a display indicating that the switching device 2600 is in a rotatable state (that is, the change of the operation end point is released), and the switch member 2590 (see FIG. 42) is at the first position. This is coincident with the extended tip of the operation / display piece 2570 in the arranged state. The second scale portion S2 is a display indicating that the switching device 2600 is in the engaged and fixed state (that is, the position of the operation end point has been changed (set)), and the switch member 2590 is disposed at the second position. It is made to correspond to the extended tip of the operation / use display piece 2570 in the closed state.

  Therefore, the player determines whether or not the position of the operation end point has been changed based on the relationship between the extended tip of the operation-use display piece 2570 and the display (when the extended tip matches the first scale portion S1). The operation end point is released, and the position of the operation end point is changed when the extended tip coincides with the second scale portion S2.

  In this case, since the first scale portion S1 and the second scale portion S2 are arranged on the upper surface side of the handle mounting base 2520 in the assembled state of the handle device 2051, the player facing the pachinko machine 10 to play is For example, when starting a game, the player can easily recognize the positional relationship between the operation / use display piece 2570 and the first scale portion S1 and the second scale portion S2.

  Here, the operation / use display piece 2570 also serves as an operation unit operated by the player in order to switch the switching device 2600 to a rotatable state or an engaged / fixed state. That is, in the present embodiment, in addition to the handle base 530 being pushed downward with respect to the handle mount 2520, the operation / display piece 2570 is also rotated about the shaft 2802 (the connection square portion 2802a). The switching device 2600 can be switched between states (rotatable state or engaged fixed state).

  In this case, the operation / display piece 2570 extends from the left side (lower side in FIG. 33 (a)) to the upper surface (front side in FIG. 33 (a)) of the handle mounting base 2520 in the assembled state of the handle device 2051. Therefore, the player can easily operate the operation / display display piece 2570 with the opposite hand (that is, the left hand) even during the game (that is, even when the handle ring 2540 is rotated with the right hand). Can be rotated. Note that the state switching structure of the switching device 2600 will be described later.

  The front cover 2550 is formed in a hemispherical shape that protrudes forward (rightward in FIG. 33A and FIG. 34), and is attached to the front surface of the handle ring 540.

  Next, the handle base 530 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 35 is a front perspective view of the handle mounting base 2520 and the handle base 530, corresponding to the front perspective view of the handle device 2051 with the handle ring 2540 and the front cover 2550 (both see FIGS. 33 and 34) removed. To do.

  As shown in FIG. 35, the handle base 530 is formed the same as in the first embodiment. A switching device 2600 is rotatably inserted into the inner peripheral side of the bearing portion 535 (see FIG. 53). Similar to the switching device 600 in the first embodiment, the switching device 2600 is a member for changing (setting) the position of the operation end point of the handle ring 2540, and the switching device 2600 can be rotated relative to the bearing portion 535. It is possible to switch between two states: a state in which rotation is possible and an engagement fixed state in which relative rotation is impossible.

  The switching device 2600 differs from the switching device 600 according to the first embodiment in the formation positions of the biting surface 250 and the flank surface 260 (the biting space 251 and the clearance space 261) (in the first embodiment, on the front side). Other configurations are the same except that they are formed open (see FIG. 7), but are formed open on the back side in the second embodiment.

  Therefore, when the switching device 2600 is in a rotatable state, the switching projection 2630 is pushed in the increasing direction by the handle side projection 546, so that the switching device 2600 also increases in the bearing portion 535. It is rotated. On the other hand, when the state of the switching device 2600 is switched to the engaged and fixed state, the relative rotation with respect to the bearing portion 535 of the switching device 2600 becomes impossible (fixed to the bearing portion 535), thereby Movement of 546 in the increasing direction is restricted by the restriction protrusion 630. As a result, the turning operation of the handle ring 2540 in the increasing direction is restricted. That is, the position (rotation position) where the state of the switching device 2600 is switched from the rotatable state to the engaged and fixed state is the position of the operation end point of the handle ring 2540.

  Next, the handle ring 2540 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 36 is a rear perspective view of the handle ring 2540.

  As shown in FIG. 36, the handle ring 2540 is different from the handle ring of the first embodiment except that the inner diameter of the central hole 2544a is different (smaller than the inner diameter of the central hole 544a in the first embodiment). It is formed the same as 540.

  Thus, by making the inner diameter dimension of the central hole 2544a small, a flat surface is secured on the back surface of the main driving gear 544. In the second embodiment, by sliding on the flat surface on the back surface of the main driving gear 544, the movement of the switching device 600 is allowed and the movement in the axial direction is restricted on the flat surface on the back surface of the main driving gear 544. This restricts the switching device 600 from coming out from the bearing portion 535 to the front side (see FIG. 53).

  Note that the handle shaft support body 2551a (see FIG. 37) of the front cover 2550 is inserted into the center hole 2544a, whereby the handle ring 2540 is rotatably held by the handle base 530 via the front cover 2550. (Supported) (see FIG. 53).

  Next, the front cover 2550 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 37 is a rear perspective view of the front cover 550.

  As shown in FIG. 37, the front cover 2550 is formed in a hemispherical container shape whose inside is recessed toward the front side (that is, the back side is opened), and a cylindrical shaft is formed on the inner wall surface corresponding to the top portion thereof. A support base 2551 is erected toward the back side. A handle shaft support body 2551a for supporting the handle ring 2540 is erected on the rear end side of the shaft support base 2551.

  The handle shaft support body 2551a has an outer diameter dimension set to be slightly smaller than an inner diameter dimension of the center hole 2544a of the handle ring 2540, thereby pivotally supporting the handle ring 2540. Further, the handle shaft support body 2551a has an outer diameter dimension smaller than that of the shaft support base 2551, and a stepped surface is formed at a connection portion between the two. With this stepped surface, the handle ring 2540 (the main driving gear 544 and the disc portion 541) is sandwiched between the switching device 2600 and the movement of the handle ring 2540 is restricted while allowing the handle ring 2540 to rotate (see FIG. 53). ).

  Next, the switching device 2600 will be described with reference to FIGS. 38 (a) is a front view of the switching device 2600, FIG. 38 (b) is a side view of the switching device 2600 in the direction of arrow XXXVIIIb in FIG. 38 (a), and FIG. It is a rear view of the switching apparatus 2600 in the arrow XXXVIIIc direction view of FIG.38 (b). 39A is a cross-sectional view of the switching device 2600 along the line XXXIXa-XXXIXa in FIG. 38A, and FIG. 39B is a side view of the switching device 2600 in the direction of arrow XXXIXb in FIG. FIG. 38 and 39, the illustration of the biting spheres 670a and 670b, the pushing side biasing spring 680, and the biting side biasing spring 690 is omitted.

  As shown in FIGS. 38 and 39, the switching device 2600 is the same as that of the first embodiment except that the formation positions of the biting surface 650 and the relief surface 660 formed by recessing the outer peripheral surface of the main body 610 are different. It is formed in the same manner as the switching device 600.

  Specifically, in the first embodiment, the flank 660 is connected to the front surface of the main body 610, and the biting surface 650 is disposed on the back side of the flank 660 (the back side of the main body 610). Thus, the escape space 661 and the biting space 651 are formed as a space opened to the front side of the main body 610 (see FIGS. 13 and 14), but in the second embodiment, the escape surface 660 is the main body 610. A biting surface 650 is provided on the rear side (the front side (front side) side of the main body portion 610) of the relief surface 660 while being continuous with the back surface (lower side surface in FIG. 39 (a)). The recessed space 651 is formed as a space opened on the back side (lower side in FIG. 39A) of the main body 610. Therefore, the pushing piece 2583 for pushing in the biting spheres 670a and 670b is disposed on the back side of the main body 610 (see FIG. 53).

  Next, with reference to FIG. 40, a description will be given of a rotatable state and a restricted fixed state of the switching device 2600 and a switching structure between these states.

  40A and 40B are cross-sectional views of the switching device 2600 and correspond to a cross section taken along line XXXIXa-XXXVIXa in FIG. 40C is a rear view of the switching device 2600 as viewed in the direction of the arrow XLc in FIG. 40A, and FIG. 40D is a rear view of the switching device 2600 as viewed in the direction of the arrow XLd in FIG. FIG.

  40 shows a state in which the switching device 2600 is mounted (inserted) on the bearing portion 535 of the handle base 530. 40 (a) and 40 (c), the state where the biting spheres 670a and 670b are arranged in the escape space 661 is shown in FIGS. 40 (b) and 40 (d). The state in which 670b is disposed in the biting space 651 is illustrated.

  As shown in FIG. 40, the switching device 2600 operates in the same manner as the switching device 600 in the first embodiment. That is, as shown in FIGS. 40A and 40C, the biting spheres 670a and 670b are arranged in the escape space 661 (that is, the biting spheres 670a and 670b by the pressing piece 2583 of the pressing member 2580). Is not pushed into the biting space 651 (see FIG. 53), the gap between the inner peripheral surface of the bearing portion 535 and the biting surface 650 and the biting are similar to the case of the first embodiment. Since the engagement with the recessed spheres 670a and 670b is not formed, the switching device 2600 (main body portion 610) is set in a rotatable state and is bearing in either direction of arrows A and B shown in FIG. 40 (c). It can be rotated relative to the portion 535.

  On the other hand, as shown in FIGS. 40B and 40D, the biting spheres 670a and 670b are disposed in the biting space 651 (that is, the biting spheres 670a and 670a are pushed by the pressing pieces 2583 of the pressing member 2580). In a state where 670b is pushed into the biting space 651 (see FIG. 54), the inner peripheral surface of the bearing portion 535 is applied by the biasing force of the biting side biasing spring 690, as in the first embodiment. And the biting surface 650, the biting spheres 670a and 670b are bitten in gaps that gradually decrease in the circumferential direction, and the switching device 2600 (main body 610) is shown by an arrow A in FIG. When rotating in the direction (or B direction), the circumferential end of the biting surface 650 on the rear side (rotation direction delay side) of the main body 610 (lower side in FIG. 15D) side( )) Acts so as to further engage the engaging sphere 670b (or the engaging sphere 670a) between the bearing portion 535 and the inner peripheral surface of the bearing portion 535, thereby switching the device 2600 ( The relative rotation of the main body 610) in the arrow A direction (or B direction) is prevented.

  Next, the pushing member 2580 will be described with reference to FIG. 41 (a) is a front view of the pushing member 2580, FIG. 41 (b) is a side view of the pushing member 2580 in the arrow XLIb direction view of FIG. 41 (a), and FIG. It is sectional drawing of the pushing member 2580 in the XLIc-XLIc line | wire of Fig.41 (a).

  As shown in FIG. 41, the push-in member 2580 includes a disk-shaped base body 2581, a connecting shaft 2582 and a push-in piece 2583 disposed in front of the base body 2581, and a bearing portion of the handle base 530. It is inserted into 535 and disposed between the back side of the switching device 2600 and the front side of the switch member 2590 (see FIG. 53). The connecting shaft 2582 and the pushing piece 2583 are integrally formed with the base body 2581.

  The outer diameter of the base body 2581 is set to be slightly smaller than the inner diameter of the bearing portion 535 of the handle base 530, and is pushed into the switch member 2590 from the back side to the front side (switching device 600). The bearing portion 535 can be slid in the axial direction toward it (see FIGS. 53 to 55).

  The connection shaft 2582 is a part formed as a trapezoidal shaft body inserted into the connection hole 620 of the switching device 2600 (see FIGS. 53 to 55), and extends on the axis of the base body 2581 (see FIG. 53). That is, it is formed concentrically with the base body 2581). The connecting shaft 2582 is formed as a trapezoidal hole corresponding to the connecting hole 620 of the switching device 2600. Therefore, the connecting shaft 2582 is coupled to the connecting hole 620 of the switching device 2600 so as to be relatively movable in the axial direction and not relatively rotatable in the circumferential direction.

  Further, since the connecting shaft 2582 is formed as a trapezoidal shaft body, the connecting shaft 2582 and the connecting hole 620 can be coupled so as not to be rotatable relative to each other, and the rotational position (phase) of both of them can be positioned. (The phase that can be combined by both is restricted to only one location). That is, in the assembly process of the handle device 2051, it is necessary to connect the connecting shaft 2582 and the connecting hole 620 after matching the rotational direction position of the pushing piece 2583 with the escape space 661 of the switching device 2600. (See FIGS. 53 to 55) In the present embodiment, the rotational direction position (phase) of the connecting shaft 2582 and the connecting hole 620 is positioned at one place, so that the rotational direction position is wrong (the pushing piece 2583). Can be avoided in a state where the rotational direction position does not coincide with the clearance space 661 of the switching device 2600. As a result, it is possible to improve the efficiency of the assembly work and suppress the assembly failure.

  The pushing piece 2583 is a part for pushing the biting spheres 670 a and 670 b of the switching device 2600 into the biting space 651 (see FIGS. 53 to 55), and on the axis of the base body 2581 on the side of the connecting shaft 2582. And a plate shape having a cross-sectional shape corresponding to the biting space 651 of the switching device 2600 (that is, a shape that can be inserted into the biting space 651). Accordingly, when the base body 2581 is pushed from the back side toward the switching device 2600 side by the switch member 2590, the biting spheres 670a and 670b are pushed into the biting space 651 by the extended distal end surface of the pushing piece 2583.

  Note that, as described above, the push-in member 2580 has the connecting shaft 2582 coupled to the connecting hole 620 of the switching device 2600 so as not to be relatively rotatable. Therefore, since the pushing member 2580 and the switching device 2600 are integrally rotated through the coupling of the coupling shaft 2582 and the coupling hole 620, the phase of the pushing piece 2583 and the escape space 661 is always matched. Can be maintained. That is, even when the switching device 2600 is rotated to any rotation position (phase) with respect to the handle base 530 (bearing portion 535), when the switching device 2600 is pressed by the switch member 2590, the switching device 2600 is pushed. The biting spheres 670 a and 670 b of the switching device 2600 can be pushed into the biting space 651 by the piece 2583.

  Next, the switch member 2590 will be described with reference to FIGS. Fig.42 (a) is a front view of the switch member 2590, FIG.42 (b) is a side view of the switch member 2590 in the arrow XLIIb direction view of Fig.42 (a), FIG.42 (c) is shown. It is sectional drawing of the switch member 2590 in the XLIIc-XLIIc line | wire of Fig.42 (a).

  As shown in FIG. 42, the switch member 2590 includes a cylindrical base body 2591, a columnar transmission rod 2592 inserted through the inner periphery of the base body 2591, and between the transmission rod 2592 and the base body 2591. And a transmission rod biasing spring 2593 that is elastically compressed to impart an elastic recovery force in the extending direction to the transmission rod 2592. The transmission rod 2592 has a first position and a second position. It is formed so that it can be held at two positions (see FIG. 47).

  43 (a) is a front view of the base body 2591, and FIG. 43 (b) is a cross-sectional view of the base body 2591 along the XLIIIb-XLIIIb line in FIG. 43 (a).

  As shown in FIG. 43, the base member 2591 is a portion that is fitted and fixed to the bearing portion 535 of the handle base 530, and an insertion hole 2591a is formed through the center. A guide groove 2591b that is a groove for holding the transmission rod 2592 at the two positions of the first position or the second position is formed in the inner peripheral surface of the insertion hole 2591a. In addition, the holding structure of the transmission rod 2592 using the guide groove 2591b will be described later.

  44 (a) is a side view of the transmission rod 2592, and FIG. 44 (b) is a cross-sectional view of the transmission rod 2592 along the XLIVb-XLIVb line in FIG. 44 (a).

  As shown in FIG. 44, the transmission rod 2592 is a member that is inserted into the insertion hole 2591a (see FIG. 43) of the base body 2591, and is formed in a columnar shape with a circular cross section. Guide projections 2592a are projected from a plurality of locations (three locations in the present embodiment) on the outer peripheral surface of the cylindrical body. Each guide protrusion 2592a is a part for moving along the guide groove 2591b of the base body 2591. Each guide protrusion 2592a is formed in the same shape, and is arranged at equal intervals in the circumferential direction (120 degree intervals in this embodiment). .

  A flange-shaped flange portion 2591b is formed to project radially outward from the outer peripheral surface of the transmission rod 2592 on one axial side (the lower side in FIG. 44 (a)). The flange portion 2591b functions as a seating surface for receiving a biasing force of a transmission rod biasing spring 2593 (see FIG. 42) interposed between the base body 2591 and the transmission rod 2592. That is, the transmission rod 2592 is always urged in the direction in which the flange portion 2592b is separated from the base body 2591 (downward in FIG. 42B) by the elastic recovery force in the extension direction of the transmission rod urging spring 2593. ing.

  Both ends of the transmission rod 2592 in the axial direction (upper side and lower side in FIG. 44 (a)) are formed as hemispherical spherical surfaces. In particular, the end of the transmission rod 2592 on the side where the flange portion 2591b is formed (the lower side in FIG. 44A) is formed as a hemispherical spherical surface, so that the transmission rod 2592 can be stably moved (slid). be able to. That is, in the present embodiment, the transmission rod 2592 is moved (slid) in the linear direction along the insertion hole 2591a of the base body 2591, while the linear motion conversion member 2800 that presses the transmission rod 2592 has a shaft support portion. (The shaft 2802 and the bearing 2529) are displaced in the center, and the relative positional relationship between the two is indefinite, the pressing surface portion 2804 of the linear motion conversion member 2800 is formed as a flat surface, and the end of the transmission rod 2592 The portion is formed as a spherical surface that bulges toward the pressing surface portion 2804, so that the contact position between the two is moved along with the displacement about the shaft support portion (the shaft 563 and the bearing 523) of the linear motion conversion member 2800, A force component for moving (sliding) the transmission rod 2592 in a linear direction along the insertion hole 2591a of the base body 2591 can be continuously generated. . Thereby, clogging of the transmission rod 2592 in the insertion hole 2591a can be suppressed, and the transmission rod 2592 can be moved stably.

  Further, the end of the transmission rod 2592 opposite to the side on which the flange portion 2592b is formed (upper side in FIG. 44A) is formed as a hemispherical spherical surface, so that the handle ring 2540 is rotated. It is possible to improve the operational feeling and improve the durability of the switching device 2600. That is, the base body 2581 of the push-in member 2580 is a member that is rotated as the handle ring 2540 is rotated, and the end of the transmission rod 2592 is always in contact with the back surface of the base body 2581. Yes. Accordingly, by making the end portion of the transmission rod 2592 hemispherical, the rigidity of the transmission rod 2592 can be ensured and the contact area with the back surface of the base body 2581 can be reduced. The rotation resistance generated between the base body 2581 and the back surface of the base body 2581 can be reduced, and as a result, the operational feeling when the handle ring 540 is rotated can be improved. Further, since the reaction force acting on the transmission rod 2592 when the base body 2581 is rotated can be reduced, the transmission rod 2592 is rotated by the reaction force, and the guide protrusion 2592a or the guide groove 2591b (FIG. 44 and FIG. 44). 45) can be prevented from occurring.

  FIG. 45 is a developed plan view illustrating the inner peripheral surface of the insertion hole 2591a of the base body 2591 in a flat manner. Note that, in FIG. 45, in order to simplify the drawing and facilitate understanding, the reference numerals for the respective portions of the guide groove 2591b are omitted.

  As shown in FIG. 45, the guide groove 2591b of the base body 2591 is formed with periodicity along the circumferential direction (left-right direction in FIG. 45) of the insertion hole 2591a. Specifically, the guide groove 2591b has a shape in which the range XLVI corresponding to the range of the central angle of 120 degrees is repeated in the circumferential direction (a shape in which three shapes of the range XLVI are arranged in the circumferential direction). Therefore, the three guide protrusions 2592a of the transmission rod 2592 are guided by the guide grooves 2591b in different ranges XLVI.

  Next, referring to FIG. 46, the guide protrusion 2592a of the transmission rod 2592 is guided in the guide groove 2591b of the base body 2591, whereby the switch member 2590 (transmission rod 2592) is held in the first position or the second position. The structure will be described. In this description, FIGS. 47 and 53 to 55 are appropriately referred to.

  FIG. 46 is a partially enlarged development view of the guide groove 2591b illustrated by partially enlarging the range XLVI in FIG. FIG. 47A to FIG. 47C are side views of the switch member 2590. 47A corresponds to a state in which the switch member 2590 (transmission rod 2592) is disposed at the first position and the pushing member 2580 is not pushed (see FIG. 53), and FIG. Corresponds to a state in which the switch member 2590 (transmission rod 2592) is disposed at the second position and the pushing member 2580 is pushed. FIG. 47B shows a state in which the switch member 2590 (transmission rod 2592) is disposed at the third position through which the switch member 2590 (transmission rod 2592) passes when transitioning from the first position to the second position (or from the second position to the first position). Corresponding to

  As shown in FIG. 46, in a state where the guide protrusion 2592a is located at the position P1 of the guide groove 2591b, the switch rod 2590 is disposed at the first position in the switch member 2590 (see FIG. 47 (a)). In this state, the guide protrusion 2592a is pressed against the first wall portion Wa of the guide groove 2591b by the biasing force of the transmission rod urging spring 2593, and is held at the position P1, whereby the transmission rod 2592 is held at the first position. The

  In this state, the transmission rod 2592 is not projected from the front surface of the base body 2591, and the pushing member 2580 is not pushed into the switching device 2600 side (see FIG. 53). 670a and 670b are disposed in the escape space 661 and set in a rotatable state.

  From the state in which the guide protrusion 2592a is located at the position P1 of the guide groove 2591b (that is, the state in which the transmission rod 2592 is disposed at the first position (see FIGS. 47A and 53)), the handle ring 540 (handle base 530). ) Is displaced downward, and the transmission rod 2592 is pushed by the linear motion conversion member 2800 from the back side toward the pushing member 2580 (ie, in the direction of arrow G in FIG. 47A), the guide protrusion 2592a is guided to the guide groove 2591b. (Path L1), and hits the rising inclined wall portion Wb. When the handle ring 540 is further displaced downward, and the transmission rod 2592 is further pushed by the linear motion conversion member 2800 from the back side toward the pushing member 2580, the guide protrusion 2592a extends along the rising inclined wall portion Wb of the guide groove 2591b. Guided (path L2) and hits the guide regulating wall Wc at the position Pa. This state corresponds to the state where the transmission rod 2592 is disposed at the third position (see FIG. 47B and FIG. 55).

  After the guide protrusion 2592a hits the guide restriction wall Wc at the position Pa of the guide groove 2591b (see FIG. 47B and FIG. 55), the player loosens the operation force, thereby the handle ring 540 (handle base 530). ) Is released and the linear motion conversion member 2800 is retracted (see FIG. 55), the transmission rod 2592 is pulled back by the urging force of the transmission rod urging spring 2593 (FIG. 47 (b) arrow H direction). As a result, the guide protrusion 2592a is guided along the shape of the guide groove 2591b (path L3), hits the downwardly inclined wall part Wd, is guided along the downwardly inclined wall part Wd, and reaches the position P2 (path). L4).

  In a state where the guide protrusion 2592a is located at the position P2 of the guide groove 2591b, the transmission rod 2592 is disposed at the second position (see FIGS. 47 (c) and 55). In this state, the guide protrusion 2592a is pressed against the second wall portion We by the urging force of the transmission rod urging spring 2593, and is held at the position P2, whereby the transmission rod 2592 is held at the second position.

  In this state, since the transmission rod 2592 protrudes from the front surface of the base body 2591, the pushing member 2580 is pushed toward the switching device 2600 side (see FIG. 55). The ball spheres 670a and 670b are pushed into the biting space 651 and set to the engaged and fixed state.

  From the state where the guide protrusion 2592a is located at the position P2 of the guide groove 2591b (that is, the state where the transmission rod 2592 is disposed at the second position (see FIGS. 47 (c) and 55), the handle ring 540 (handle base 530) When the transmission rod 2592 is pushed downward from the back side by the linear motion conversion member 2800 toward the pushing member 2580 (that is, in the direction of arrow G in FIG. 47 (c)), the guide protrusion 2592a is inserted into the guide groove 2591b. Guided along the shape (path L5) and hits the rising inclined wall portion Wf, the handle ring 540 is further displaced downward, and the transmission rod 2592 is further pushed from the back side toward the pushing member 2580 by the linear motion conversion member 2800. As a result, the guide protrusion 2592a is guided along the rising inclined wall portion Wf (path L6) and guided at the position Pb. Abuts the Seikabe unit Wg. That is, the transmission rod 2592 is disposed in the third position (see FIG. 47 (b) and FIG. 54).

  After the guide protrusion 2592a hits the guide restriction wall Wg at the position Pb of the guide groove 2591b (see FIG. 47B and FIG. 54), the player loosens the operating force, so that the handle ring 540 (handle base 530) ) Is released and the linear motion conversion member 2800 is retracted (see FIG. 55), the transmission rod 2592 is pulled back by the urging force of the transmission rod urging spring 2593 (FIG. 47 (b) arrow H direction). As a result, the guide protrusion 2592a is guided along the shape of the guide groove 2591b (path L7), hits the descending inclined wall part Wh, is guided along the descending inclined wall part Wh, and reaches the position P1 (path). L8). That is, the transmission rod 2592 is disposed (returned) to the first position (see FIGS. 47A and 53).

  Next, the handle mounting base 2520 and the linear motion conversion member 2800 will be described with reference to FIGS. 48 to 52. 48 is a rear perspective view of the handle base 530, the handle mounting base 2520, and the linear motion converting member 2800 in an exploded state. FIG. 49 is an assembled state of the handle base 530, the handle mounting base 2520, and the linear motion converting member 2800. It is a rear perspective view.

  48 and 49 show a state in which the variable resistor, the firing stop switch operation unit 440, and the like are removed, and in FIG. 48, the positional relationship between the shaft 563 and the bearing 523 and the shaft 2802 and the bearing 2529. Are schematically illustrated using two-dot chain lines.

  As shown in FIGS. 48 and 49, a linear motion conversion member 2800 is disposed on the handle mounting base 2520 so as to face the back side of the handle base 530. The linear motion conversion member 2800 moves the transmission rod 2592 of the switch member 2590 to the rear side in accordance with the displacement of the handle base 530 relative to the handle mounting base 2520 (displacement downward about the shaft support portion (the shaft 563 and the bearing 523)). Is a member for pushing toward the pushing member 2580 (see FIGS. 53 to 55), and is disposed on the handle mounting base 2520 in a state in which the shaft support portion (the shaft 2802 and the bearing 2529) can be displaced. The Here, the handle mounting base 2520 will be described with reference to FIGS.

  FIG. 50 is a perspective view of the handle mounting base 2520 in an exploded state. FIG. 51A is a perspective view of the handle mounting base 2520 in the assembled state, and FIG. 51B is an inner side view of the first main body 2520a.

  As shown in FIGS. 50 and 51, the handle mounting base 2520 (first main body 2520a and second main body 2520b) is different from the handle mounting base 520 (first main body 520a and second main body 520b) in the first embodiment. Other configurations are the same except that a bearing portion 2529 is further provided (added).

  The bearing portion 2529 is a bearing portion (concave portion) for pivotally supporting the shaft 2802 of the linear motion conversion member 2800, and provided on the inner wall surfaces of the first main body 2520a and the second main body 2520b, A pair is arranged to face each other. When the shaft 2802 of the linear motion conversion member 2800 is pivotally supported by the bearing 2529, the linear motion conversion member 2800 is displaced (oscillated) with respect to the handle mounting base 2520 with the pivotally supported portion as a center (fulcrum). , Rotation) is possible (see FIGS. 53 to 55).

  Note that one of the pair of bearing portions 2529 (on the first main body 2520a side) has a locking claw portion 2529a protruding from the outer peripheral surface. The locking claw portion 2529a is engaged with an end portion of a linear motion conversion member urging spring 2890 for applying an urging force to the linear motion conversion member 2800 (see FIG. 48). Further, as shown in FIG. 51A, the other bearing portion 2529 (the second main body 2520b side) of the bearing portions 2529 of the pair of bearing portions 2529 has a shaft support hole whose handle mounting base 2520 (second It is formed through the wall surface of the main body 2520b). As a result, the end portion of the shaft portion 2802 of the linear motion conversion member 2800 protrudes outward from the wall surface of the handle mounting base 2520 (see FIG. 49).

  Returning to FIG. 48 and FIG. The linear motion conversion member 2800 is used to push the switch member 2590 toward the push-in member 2580 in accordance with the displacement about the shaft support portion (the shaft 563 and the bearing 523) of the handle base 530 with respect to the handle mounting base 2520. It is a member (see FIGS. 53 to 55), and is arranged in a posture in which the shafts 563 and 2802 are parallel to each other below the boss member 560 while facing the back side of the handle base 530.

  The boss member 560 is formed in a hollow shape in which the protruding portion 562 has an opening below, and the linear motion conversion member 2800 is disposed below the boss member 560 so that the protruding portion 562 of the boss member 560 is within the protruding portion 562. The formed space is used as a space for displacing the pressing surface portion 2804 (see FIG. 53). Thereby, even if it is in the limited space in the handle | steering-wheel mount 2520, the linear motion conversion member 2800 can be enlarged. Here, with reference to FIG. 52, the detailed structure of the linear motion conversion member 2800 will be described.

  FIG. 52A is a side view of the linear motion conversion member 2800 in the direction of the arrow LIIa in FIG. 48, and FIG. 52B is the side view of the linear motion conversion member 2800 in the direction of the arrow LIIb in FIG. FIG. 52 (c) is a front view, and FIG. 52 (c) is a side view of the linear motion conversion member 2800 in the direction of the arrow LIIc in FIG. 52 (b).

  As shown in FIG. 52, the linear motion conversion member 2800 is provided so as to protrude from a cylindrical main body 2801, a shaft 2802 extending concentrically from both ends of the main body 2801, and an outer peripheral surface of the main body 2802. The interlocking surface portion 2803, the pressing surface portion 2804, and the locking claw portion 2805 are integrally formed.

  The shaft 2802 is a portion that is pivotally supported by the bearing 2529 of the handle mounting base 2520 and is smaller in diameter than the main body 2801. Therefore, a stepped surface is formed at the connection portion between the main body 2801 and the shaft 2802, and the stepped surface is brought into contact with the end surface of the bearing 2529 of the handle mounting base 2520 (see FIG. 48). Is positioned left and right (in the axial direction of the main body 2801) with respect to the handle mounting base 2520.

  One of the pair of shafts 2802 (the second main body 2520b side and the left side in FIG. 52B) is the other shaft 2802 (the first main body 2520a side and the right side in FIG. 52B). With respect to 2802, the axial length is lengthened. In the assembled state of the handle device 2051, the end of one of the shafts 2802 protrudes outward from the wall surface of the second main body 2520b (see FIG. 49). A connecting square portion 2802a having a quadrangular cross section is formed at the end of the protruding one shaft 2802, and the base portion of the operation / display display piece 2570 is fixed to the connecting square portion 2802a so as not to be relatively rotatable. (See FIG. 34).

  The interlocking surface portion 2803 and the pressing surface portion 2804 are flat portions extending radially outward from the outer peripheral surface of the main body portion 2801, and the plate surfaces are parallel to the extending direction of the shaft 2802. As shown in FIG. 52 (a) and FIG. 52 (c), they are arranged with different phases from each other.

  The phases of both of these are set as follows. That is, when the switch member 2590 (transmission rod 2592) is in the first position in the assembled state of the handle device 2051, the end of the transmission rod 2592 of the switch member 2590 is the front (front, FIG. 52) of the pressing surface portion 2804. (B) the front surface of the paper surface) and the extended tip of the interlocking surface portion 2803 (the lower end of FIG. 52 (b)) is in contact with the back surface of the variable resistor (not shown). When the switch member 2590 (transmission rod 2592) is in the second position, the end of the transmission rod 2592 of the switch member 2590 is brought into contact with the front surface of the pressing surface portion 2804, and The extended tip of the interlocking surface portion 2803 protrudes from the lower mating surface portion 528 of the handle mounting portion 2520 toward the handle base 530 (see FIG. 55).

  Therefore, as will be described later, when the handle base 530 is pushed downward with respect to the handle mounting base 2520 around the shaft support portion (the shaft 563 and the bearing 523), the extending tip of the interlocking surface portion 2803 is changed to the variable resistance. It is pushed back (back side, for example, left direction in FIG. 53) by the back side of the container (not shown). Thus, in this embodiment, the back surface of the variable resistor is used as a part for pushing back the extended tip of the interlocking surface portion 2803. Accordingly, it is not necessary to further secure a flat surface for pushing back the extended tip of the interlocking surface portion 2803 on the back side of the handle base 530, so that the handle base 530 (handle device 2051) can be downsized.

  Further, the back surface of the variable resistor protrudes toward the back surface side of the handle base 530, and the extended tip of the interlocking surface portion 2803 can be pushed back at a position closer to the shaft 2802. Therefore, the amount of movement of the pressing surface portion 2804 can be reduced. Can be larger. In this case, in a structure in which a flat surface for pushing back the extended tip of the interlocking surface portion 2803 is further provided on the back surface side of the handle base 530, the flat surface is projected to a position equivalent to the back surface of the variable resistor (projected to the back surface side). At the position), only the portion where the flat surface is provided becomes thick, so that the thickness of the handle base 530 becomes partially uneven, resulting in a deterioration in yield during injection molding. On the other hand, if the structure using the back surface of the variable resistor is used, the thickness of the handle base 530 can be made uniform as a whole, so that the yield during injection molding can be improved.

  The locking claw portion 2805 is a portion for locking the end portion of the linear motion conversion member biasing spring 2890 (see FIG. 53), and is formed in a bent hook shape. The linear motion converting member urging spring 2890 is formed as a torsion spring, and applies a urging force in the clockwise (clockwise) direction to the linear motion converting member 2801 in a side view in FIG. Accordingly, the linear motion conversion member 2801 is maintained in a state where the front surface of the pressing surface portion 2804 is in contact with the end portion of the transmission rod 2592 of the switch member 2590.

  Next, referring to FIGS. 53 to 55, the switching device 2600 can be rotated or engaged and fixed by a downward displacement (push-down operation) around the shaft support portion of the handle base 530 with respect to the handle mounting base 2520. A switching structure for switching to a state will be described. Note that FIG. 56 is referred to as appropriate in the description of this switching structure.

  53 to 55 are partial cross-sectional side views of the handle device 2051, and FIGS. 53 and 55 illustrate a state before the handle base 530 is pushed down with respect to the handle mounting base 2520. 54 shows a state in which the handle base 530 is pushed downward with respect to the handle mount 2520.

  53, 54, and 55 correspond to the state where the transmission rod 2592 of the switch member 2590 is disposed at the first position, the third position, and the second position, respectively. 53 to 55 illustrate a state where the second main body 2520b of the handle mounting base 2520 is removed, and illustration of wiring of each component is omitted.

56 (a) and 57 (a) are partially enlarged side views of the handle device 2051, and FIGS. 56 (b) and 57 (b) are partially enlarged top views of the handle device 2051. FIG. 56A and 56B show a state in which the transmission rod 2592 of the switch member 2590 is disposed at the first position, which corresponds to the state shown in FIG. 53, and FIG. ) And FIG. 57 (b) show a state in which the transmission rod 2592 of the switch member 2590 is arranged at the second position, and corresponds to the state shown in FIG. In the state where the rod 2592) is in the first position, the tip of the transmission rod 2592 is not projected from the front surface (front surface, right side surface in FIG. 53) of the base body 2591 (see FIG. 47 (a)). In this case, the push-in piece 2583 of the push-in member 2580 is not pushed in by the transmission rod 2592 and is retracted to the back side (left side in FIG. 53). 1 is arranged. Therefore, in the switching device 2600, the biting spheres 670a and 670b are disposed in the escape space 661 by the urging force of the pushing-side urging spring 680, and thereby can rotate relative to the bearing portion 535. The state is set (see FIGS. 40A and 40C).

  Thus, in the state where the switching device 2600 is set in the rotatable state (the state in which the switch member 2590 (transmission rod 2592) is in the first position as shown in FIG. 53), the switching device 2600 is placed on the bearing portion 535. Since the rotation is enabled (that is, the operation end point is not changed (set)), the handle ring 2540 is increased from the initial position θ0 to the operation position θ1 in the increasing direction as in the first embodiment. When the turning operation is performed, the handle side projection 546 of the handle ring 2540 pushes the restricting projection 630 of the switching device 2600 in the increasing direction, thereby rotating the switching device 2600 in the increasing direction in conjunction with the handle ring 2540. (See FIG. 28A and FIG. 28B).

  On the other hand, when the handle ring 540 is rotated in the decreasing direction, the switching device 2600 is driven by the urging force of the switching device urging spring 539 (see FIG. 35) as in the case of the first embodiment. Is rotated in the decreasing direction. That is, when the handle ring 2540 is rotated in the decreasing direction from the operation position θ1 to the initial position θ0, the switching device 2600 is also rotated in the decreasing direction by the biasing force of the switching device biasing spring 539, and the restricting protrusion 630 is disposed at a rotational position where it abuts against the handle-side protrusion 546 (see FIGS. 28A and 28B).

  Therefore, as shown in FIG. 53, when the switching device 2600 is set in a rotatable state (the switch member 2590 (transmission rod 2592) is in the first position), the handle ring 2540 is in the increasing or decreasing direction. In any case, the switching device 2600 is rotated in conjunction with (synchronized with), and the rotation position (phase) of the handle ring 2540 and the switching device 2600 is matched ( FIG. 28 (a) and FIG. 28 (b)).

  As shown in FIG. 53, in the state where the transmission rod 2592 of the switch member 2590 is in the first position, the transmission rod 2592 protrudes to the back side (left side in FIG. 53), and accordingly, the linear motion conversion member 2800 Since the pressing surface portion 2804 is also retracted to the back side, the linear motion conversion member 2800 is rotated counterclockwise in FIG. 53 (counterclockwise) about the shaft 2802. Thereby, as shown in FIG. 56 (a), the operation / display piece 2570 is also rotated counterclockwise in FIG. 56 (a) around the base end (that is, the connecting square portion 2802a of the shaft 2802 of the linear motion conversion member 2800). As a result, as shown in FIG. 56 (b), the operation and display piece 2570 has extended tips at the first scale portion S1 and the second scale portion. It coincides with the first scale portion S1 of S2 (points to the first scale portion S1).

  Therefore, the player places the switch member 2590 in the first position based on the relationship between the operation-use display piece 2570 and both scale portions S1, S2 (that is, the position of the operation end point of the handle ring 2540 is changed). Is not easily identified).

  53, when the handle base 530 is pushed downward with respect to the handle mount 520 about the shaft support portion (the shaft 563 and the bearing 523), the extension of the interlocking surface portion 2803 of the linear motion conversion member 2800 is extended. The installation tip is slid along the back surface of the variable resistor (not shown) of the handle base 530, thereby being retracted toward the back surface (left side in FIG. 53), and the linear motion conversion member 2800 moves the shaft 2802. It is rotated clockwise (clockwise) in FIG. 53 as the center.

  Thereby, the pressing surface portion 2804 of the linear motion conversion member 2800 is advanced toward the front side (the right side in FIG. 53), and the transmission rod 2592 of the switch member 2590 is pushed toward the pushing member 2580 by the pressing surface portion 2804. As shown in FIG. 54, the transmission rod 2592 of the switch member 2590 is disposed at the third position.

  From the state shown in FIG. 54, the operation force of the player to push down the handle base 530 is loosened, and the downward displacement of the handle base 530 is released (that is, the handle base 530 is displaced upward, the horizontal 55), the transmission rod 2592 of the switch member 2590 is pulled back by the urging force of the transmission rod urging spring 2593 (see FIGS. 47 (b) and 47 (c)). The second position is disposed (see FIG. 55).

  As shown in FIG. 55, in a state where the transmission rod 2592 of the switch member 2590 is in the second position (a state where the transmission rod 2592 passes through the third position from the first position and is disposed in the second position), the tip of the transmission rod 2592 is A position protruding from the front surface (front surface, right side surface of FIG. 55) of the base body 2591 (see FIG. 47C), and the pushing member 2580 is advanced (pressed) to the front surface side (right side of FIG. 55) by the amount of the protrusion. Therefore, in the switching device 2600, the biting spheres 670a and 670b are arranged in the biting space 651 (that is, the biting spheres 670a and 670b are inserted into the biting space 651 by the pressing piece 2583 of the pressing member 2580. Thus, the engagement fixed state (see FIGS. 40 (b) and 40 (d)) that cannot rotate relative to the bearing portion 535 is set.

  In the state where the switching device 2600 is set to the engaged and fixed state, as described above, the biting spheres 670a and 670b gradually decrease in the circumferential direction between the inner peripheral surface of the bearing portion 535 and the biting surface 650. The rotation of the switching device 2600 (main body 610) relative to the bearing portion 535 is restricted (blocked) by being caught in the gap.

  Therefore, in a state where the handle ring 2540 is rotated to the operation position θ1 (see FIG. 28B), the handle base 530 is pushed downward with respect to the handle mounting base 2520, and the transmission rod 2592 of the switch member 2590 is operated. Is shifted from the first position to the second position, so that the switching device 2600 is set to the engaged and fixed state, and the switching device 2600 is turned to the rotation position corresponding to the operation position θ1 (that is, the handle base 530 is the handle mounting base). As a result of the push-down operation with respect to 2520, the transmission rod 2592 can be fixed to the rotation position at the time when the transmission rod 2592 is disposed at the second position (see FIG. 28C).

  As described above, when the switching device 2600 is set in the engagement fixed state and the rotation position is fixed, the switching device 2600 can rotate the handle ring 2540 even if the handle ring 2540 is rotated in the decreasing direction. It is not interlocked (synchronized) with the movement, and is held at the rotation position corresponding to the operation position θ1 (see FIGS. 29A and 21B). That is, the handle ring 2540 can be rotated in the decreasing direction and the operation direction independently of the switching device 2600 (see FIG. 29A).

  In this case, for example, when the switching device 2600 is held (fixed) at the rotation position corresponding to the operation position θ1 (see FIG. 29B), the handle ring 2540 returned to the initial position θ0 is increased in the increasing direction. When the rotation operation is performed, the operation position θ1 is the operation end point. In other words, when the handle ring 2540 rotates in the increasing direction reaches the operation position θ1, the handle side protrusion 546 is brought into contact with the restricting protrusion 630, and further rotation in the increasing direction is restricted. (See FIG. 28C).

  As shown in FIG. 55, in a state where the transmission rod 2592 of the switch member 2590 is in the second position, the transmission rod 2592 is pushed into the front side (right side in FIG. 55), and accordingly, the linear motion conversion member 2800 Since the pressing surface portion 2804 is also moved forward, the linear motion conversion member 2800 is rotated clockwise (clockwise) in FIG. 55 about the shaft 2802. As a result, as shown in FIG. 57 (a), the operation / display piece 2570 is also rotated clockwise in FIG. 57 (a) around the base end (that is, the connecting square portion 2802a of the shaft 2802 of the linear motion conversion member 2800). As a result, as shown in FIG. 57 (b), the operation / display piece 2570 has extended tips at the first scale portion S1 and the second scale portion S2. Are matched with the second scale portion S2 (points to the second scale portion S2).

  Therefore, the player places the switch member 2590 in the second position based on the relationship between the operation / use display piece 2570 and the scale parts S1 and S2 (that is, the position of the operation end point of the handle ring 2540 is changed). Can be easily identified.

  Here, from the state shown in FIG. 55 (the state where the transmission rod 2592 of the switch member 2590 is arranged at the second position), the state shown in FIG. 53 (the state where the transmission rod 2592 of the switch member 2590 is arranged at the first position). ) Is changed (returned) by pushing the handle base 530 downward with respect to the handle mounting base 2520 around the shaft support portion (the shaft 563 and the bearing 523), and as shown in FIG. After the transmission rod 2592 is disposed at the third position, the downward pressing operation of the handle base 530 is released (that is, the handle base 530 is displaced upward to return to the horizontal state). . That is, by this operation, as shown in FIG. 53, the transmission rod 2592 of the switch member 2590 is pulled back by the urging force of the transmission rod urging spring 2593 (see FIGS. 47A and 47B). It is arranged (returned) from the second position to the first position (see FIG. 46).

  In this case, for example, in the state where the switching device 2600 is held (fixed) at the rotation position corresponding to the operation position θ1 (see FIG. 29B), the above-described operation (transmission rod 2592 is moved from the second position to the second position. When the switching device 2600 is switched from the engaged and fixed state to the rotatable state and is rotatable with respect to the bearing portion 535, the operation of returning the first position to the first position is performed. In response to the urging force of the switching device urging spring 2539, the switching device urging spring 2539 is returned to the initial position (the rotation position where the restricting protrusion 630 contacts the handle-side protrusion 546) (see FIG. 28A).

  The switching device 2600 is always rotated in conjunction with (synchronized with) the pushing piece 2583 of the pushing member 2580 via the coupling between the connecting hole 620 and the connecting shaft 2582 of the pushing member 2580. Similarly to the case, even when the handle ring 2540 is being rotated, the handle base 530 is pushed down to the handle mounting base 2520 to switch from the engaged fixed state to the rotatable state (ie, The switching device 2600 can be returned to the initial position and the change of the operation end point can be canceled). Thus, even when the handle ring 2540 is being rotated, it is unnecessary to temporarily return the handle ring 2540 to the initial position in order to cancel the change (setting) of the operation end point. Therefore, for example, when it becomes necessary to reset the position of the operation end point to another position, the resetting operation is performed while maintaining the turning operation of the handle ring 2540 (that is, continuing the game). Can be done quickly.

  Further, an operation for switching the switching device 2600 from the engaged fixed state to the rotatable state (cancellation of the change of the operation end point, that is, a return operation for returning the switching device 2600 to the initial position), and the fixed state from the rotatable state to the engaged fixed state. Both the operation for switching to the state (the changing operation for changing (setting) the operation end point) are achieved by the downward pressing operation of the handle base 530 with respect to the handle mounting base 2520. That is, it can be achieved by operating the same member in the same direction. Thereby, similarly to the case of the first embodiment, the change operation and the return operation can be easily performed. In particular, since the state due to the change operation and the state due to the return operation are switched alternately, it becomes effective to improve operability that these two states can be switched by repeating the same operation. Further, since the same member is operated in the same direction, the direction in which the handle base 530 can be operated with respect to the handle mounting base 2520 can be limited to only one direction, and thus the structure is simplified accordingly. Thus, the product cost can be reduced.

  As described above, the operation / use display piece 2570 also serves as an operation unit operated by the player in order to switch the switching device 2600 to the rotatable state or the engaged / fixed state. That is, instead of pressing the handle base 530 downward with respect to the handle mounting base 2520, the switching device can be switched by rotating the operation / display piece 2570 about the shaft 2802 (the connecting square portion 2802a). Switching between the states 2600 (rotatable state or engagement fixed state) can be executed.

  For example, as shown in FIGS. 53 and 56, in the state where the switch member 2590 (transmission rod 2592) is in the first position, the operation / display piece 2570 is in a position where the extended tip indicates the first scale portion S1. Is arranged. When the operation / display piece 2570 is rotated from the state shown in FIGS. 53 and 56 around the shaft 2802 (connection square portion 2802a) toward the second scale portion S2, the linear motion conversion member 2800 is pivoted. 53 is rotated clockwise (clockwise) in FIG. 53 around 2802, and the pressing surface portion 2804 of the linear motion conversion member 2800 is advanced toward the front side (right side in FIG. 53). As a result, the transmission rod 2592 of the switch member 2590 is pushed toward the push-in member 2580 by the pressing surface portion 2804, and the transmission rod 2592 of the switch member 2590 is disposed at the third position (FIGS. 47A and 47 (B). b)). In this state, the operation / display piece 2570 is rotated to a position where the extended tip exceeds the second scale portion S2.

  When the player loosens the operating force for rotating the operation / use display piece 2570 from the state where the switch member 2590 (transmission rod 2592) is arranged in the third state, as shown in FIG. 55 and FIG. The transmission rod 2592 of the member 2590 is pulled back by the urging force of the transmission rod urging spring 2593 (see FIGS. 47 (b) and 47 (c)) and disposed at the second position (see FIG. 46). As the switch member 2590 (transmission rod 2592) is arranged at the second position, the extended tip of the operation / display piece 2570 points to the second scale portion S2.

  On the other hand, as shown in FIGS. 55 and 57, in the state where the switch member 2590 (transmission rod 2592) is in the second position, the operation / display display piece 2570 is in a position where the extended tip indicates the second scale portion S2. Has been placed. From the state shown in FIGS. 55 and 57, the operation / use display piece 2570 is directed to the opposite side to the first scale portion S1 (that is, in the right direction in FIGS. 55 and 57) with the shaft 2802 (connection square portion 2802a) as the center. When the rotation operation is performed, the linear motion conversion member 2800 is rotated clockwise (clockwise) in FIG. 55 about the shaft 2802, and the pressing surface portion 2804 of the linear motion conversion member 2800 is directed to the front side (right side in FIG. 53). To move forward. As a result, the transmission rod 2592 of the switch member 2590 is pushed toward the push-in member 2580 by the pressing surface portion 2804, and the transmission rod 2592 of the switch member 2590 is disposed at the third position (FIG. 47B and FIG. c)).

  That is, in this state, similarly to the case where the above-described switch member 2590 (transmission rod 2529) is disposed from the first position to the second position, the operation-and-use display piece 2570 has the extended tip of the second scale portion S2. It is rotated to a position beyond it (that is, a position closer to the handle ring 2540 than the second scale portion S2).

  When the player loosens the operating force for rotating the operation / use display piece 2570 from the state where the switch member 2590 (transmission rod 2592) is arranged in the third state, as shown in FIG. 53 and FIG. The transmission rod 2592 of the member 2590 is pulled back by the urging force of the transmission rod urging spring 2593 (see FIGS. 47 (a) and 47 (b)) and disposed at the first position (see FIG. 46). As the switch member 2590 (transmission rod 2592) is arranged at the first position, the extended tip of the operation / display piece 2570 points to the first scale portion S1.

  In this way, an identification member (operation / display display piece 2570) for displaying whether the position of the operation end point has been changed (set) or released and identifying the player is changed to the position of the operation end point (setting). ) And the operation member that is operated by the player to release it, the number of parts can be reduced accordingly, and the product cost can be reduced.

  In this case, a change operation for changing (setting) the position of the operation end point (that is, the switch member 2590 (transmission rod 2592) arranged at the first position shown in FIGS. 53 and 56 is shown in FIGS. 55 and 57. The operation of disposing the operation / use display piece 2570 means that the change (setting) of the position of the operation end point has been released (that is, the transmission rod 2592 is disposed at the first position). Indicates the second scale portion S2 which means that the position of the operation end point has been changed (ie, the transmission rod 2592 is disposed at the second position) from the position indicating the first scale portion S1 to be performed. Since it is achieved by the operation of arranging the position, it is possible to operate the player while intuitively recognizing that the operation is a change operation. As a result, inadvertent misoperation can be suppressed.

  Similarly, a release operation for releasing the change (setting) of the position of the operation end point (that is, the switch member 2590 (transmission rod 2592) arranged at the second position shown in FIGS. 55 and 57 is shown in FIGS. 53 and 56. The movement of the operation and display piece 2570 is changed (set) (that is, the transmission rod 2592 is arranged at the second position). The first scale portion S1 means that the change (setting) of the position of the operation end point has been released from the position indicating the second scale portion S2 to be performed (that is, the transmission rod 2592 is disposed at the first position). This is achieved by the operation of placing it at the position pointing to the player, so that the player can intuitively recognize that the operation is a release operation. As a result, inadvertent misoperation can be suppressed.

  In this case, the release operation for canceling the change (setting) of the position of the operation end point causes the operation / use display piece 2570 to be directly directed from the position indicating the second scale part S2 to the position indicating the first scale part S1. Instead, as described above, it is necessary to once move to the position indicating the first scale part S1 after operating toward the side opposite to the first scale part S1 (that is, the right direction in FIGS. 55 and 57). is there. That is, since it is necessary to separately perform one operation (operation) in the opposite direction, the position of the operation end point changed (set) by the player (that is, the launch intensity of the game ball can be launched at a desired launch intensity) It can be prevented in advance that the rotation position of the handle ring 540 is released by an inadvertent operation of the player.

  Note that the switching device 2600 is used to change (set) the operation end point of the handle ring 2540 and adjust the rotation position of the handle ring 2540 with reference to the position of the operation end point (return to the original rotation position). As for the adjustment method, the operation for switching the states of the switching devices 600 and 2600 is different (that is, the push operation of the button member 570 in the first embodiment, and the push-down operation of the handle base 530 in the second embodiment). Except for a certain point, since it is the same as that described with reference to FIGS. 30 and 31 in the first embodiment, the description thereof is omitted.

  As described above, according to the handle device 2051 in the second embodiment, the switching device 2600 is switched between the rotatable state and the engagement fixed state (that is, the operation end point position is changed (set) and released). Since the operation for moving the handle ring 2540 can be performed by displacing the handle base 530 with respect to the handle mounting base 2510, the operation for changing (setting) and releasing the position of the operation end point is performed. The operation amount can be maintained easily (that is, the operation amount of the turning operation is deviated and the launch intensity of the game ball is prevented from changing carelessly).

  Specifically, after the player adjusts the launch intensity of the game ball to a desired launch intensity by rotating the handle ring 2540, the player keeps the handle base 530 while maintaining the state. In order to change (set) and release the operation end point, an operation for changing the handle ring 2540 or a hand other than the hand for operating the handle ring 2540 can be used. There is no need to perform an operation to operate the operation means (operator). As a result, the operation end point position can be changed (set) and released quickly, and the operation end point position can be adjusted to the desired rotation operation position (ie, the launch intensity of the game ball can be adjusted to the desired launch intensity). It is possible to accurately change (set) to the rotation operation position of the handle ring 2540 that has been set.

  In particular, in the present embodiment, the handle base 530 is pushed down with respect to the handle mount 2520, so that the push-down operation can be performed using the weight of the fingers and arms holding the handle ring 2540. The operability can be improved. In this case, since the handle ring 2540 is disposed at a relatively low position of the pachinko machine 10 and the operation position is relatively low for the player, the structure for performing the downward push operation as in this embodiment is the player. Is easy to apply force. Therefore, the operability can be improved also from this point.

  Further, since the urging force for returning to the horizontal position (displacement upward) is applied to the handle base 530 by the base urging member SP, after the handle base 530 is pushed down, Can be returned to the horizontal position using the urging force of the base urging member SP by releasing the operating force downward or releasing the hand. As a result, it is possible to reduce the operation burden on the player.

  Next, a third embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. In the first embodiment, the case has been described in which the launch intensity of the game ball is adjusted by rotating the handle ring 540. However, the adjustment of the launch intensity of the game ball in the third embodiment is performed by sliding the operation element 3800. It is done by operating. In addition, the same code | symbol is attached | subjected about the part same as said each embodiment, and the description is abbreviate | omitted.

  FIG. 58 (a) is a top view of the handle device 3051 in the third embodiment, and FIG. 58 (b) is a side view of the handle device 3051 as viewed in the direction of the arrow LVIIIb in FIG. 58 (a). FIG. 59 is a cross-sectional view of the handle device 3051 taken along the line LIX-LIX in FIG.

  58 (a) and 58 (b), the front surface of the lower plate unit 15 (that is, the mounting surface of the handle device 3051) is schematically illustrated by a two-dot chain line, and the operating element 3800 is movable. For convenience, the state of being slid to the approximate center in FIG. In FIG. 59, only the handle mounting base 3500 is viewed in cross section, and the cross sections of other components are omitted.

  As shown in FIGS. 58 and 59, the handle device 3051 includes a handle mounting base 3500, a rotary shaft portion 3700 rotatably supported on the handle mounting base 3500, and an operation connected to the rotary shaft portion 3700. The main body 3810 of the operation element 3800 is disposed in a posture that protrudes horizontally on the front surface of the pachinko machine 10 (see FIG. 1).

  The handle mounting base 3500 includes a lower base 3510, an intermediate base 3520, and an upper base 3530. The intermediate base 3520 is overlapped with the lower base 3510 and the upper base 3530 interposed therebetween. The upper and lower ends (upper side and lower side in FIG. 58 (b)) are sealed, and the side surface (right side in FIG. 58 (b)) has an opening.

  A storage portion 3540 is disposed on the lower surface of the handle mounting base 3500 (lower base 3510). The storage unit 3540 stores a variable resistor (not shown) that detects the amount of rotation (rotational position) of the rotating shaft 3700 by a change in electrical resistance. The game ball is launched at a strength (launch strength) corresponding to the resistance value of the variable resistor. Further, a closing member 3550 is disposed between the lower base 3510 and the intermediate base 3520, and the opening on the side surface of the handle mounting base 3500 is closed by the closing member 3550.

  The rotating shaft portion 3700 is rotatably disposed inside the handle mounting base 3500 in a vertical posture in which the axial center direction is along the vertical direction (vertical direction in FIG. 59). A connecting piece 3780 protrudes from the lower end surface of the rotating shaft portion 3700, and the connecting piece 3780 is connected to a variable resistor housed in the housing portion 3540. Therefore, when the rotation shaft portion 3700 is rotated, the resistance value of the variable resistor is changed corresponding to the rotation amount (rotation position) of the rotation shaft portion 3700.

  The operating element 3800 is attached to the handle mounting base 3500 via the rotary shaft portion 3700 so as to be slidable. That is, the operating element 3800 is rotated in the virtual plane perpendicular to the axis of the rotary shaft 3700 as shown in FIG. 58 (a) by rotating the rotary shaft 3700 around the axis. In the section from the initial position θ0 to the maximum position θmax, sliding displacement is possible in the directions of arrows I and D. That is, the direction of arrow I corresponds to the increasing direction that increases the firing strength of the game ball, and the direction of arrow D corresponds to the decreasing direction that decreases the firing strength of the game ball.

  When the operator 3800 is slid and displaced (sliding operation) in the direction of the arrow I or the arrow D by the player, the rotating shaft portion 3700 is rotated around the axis, and the storage portion 3540 is rotated according to the rotation amount (rotating position). The resistance value of the variable resistor is changed. Thereby, the firing strength of the game ball is increased or decreased. When the slide operation by the player is released, the operation element 3800 is slid in the direction of arrow D by the biasing force of the slide direction biasing spring 3581 and returned to the initial position θ0.

  As described above, the rotary shaft 3700 is disposed along the vertical direction (gravity direction), so that the slide displacement of the operation element 3800 (main body portion 3810) is a horizontal plane (in the gravity direction). Along a vertical plane).

  The operation element 3800 can be displaced in the vertical direction (the vertical direction in FIG. 59) with respect to the handle mounting base 3500 around the portion (connection shaft 3990) pivotally supported by the rotary shaft portion 3700. That is, the operator 3800 is formed so that the held portion 3830 can be pushed downward (in the direction of arrow G in FIG. 58B) with the connecting shaft 3990 as the rotation center (see FIG. 64). In the present embodiment, the operation of pushing down the operator 3800 (held portion 3830) is performed downward in the direction of gravity. Therefore, the operation of pushing down the operation element 3800 (held part 3830) causes the weight of the player's hand to act on the held part 3830 of the operation element 3800, or returns the wrist holding the held part 3830 downward. Only can be done easily.

  A switching device 3600 is disposed above the rotating shaft 3700. The switching device 3600 is a member for changing (setting) the position of the operation end point of the operation element 3800, similarly to the switching devices 600 and 2600 in each of the above embodiments, and is inserted through the bearing portion 3535, and the bearing portion 3535. On the other hand, it is possible to switch between two states, a rotatable state in which relative rotation is possible and an engagement fixed state in which relative rotation is impossible.

  The switching device 3600 is switched to a rotatable state or an engagement-fixed state by pressing the operating element 3800 (held portion 3830), thereby changing (setting) or releasing the position of the operation end point. Is done. A structure for changing (setting) or canceling the position of the operation end point by depressing the operation element 3800 will be described later.

  Note that when the held portion 3830 is pushed down (in the direction of arrow G), the spring-up direction biasing spring 3880 of the operating element 3800 is elastically extended and deformed, and the operating force in the push-down direction by the player is relaxed. Then, due to the elastic recovery force of the spring-up direction biasing spring 3880, the operation element 3800 (held portion 3830) is displaced upward (in the direction opposite to the arrow G), and the initial position (main body portion 3810) shown in FIG. Is returned to a horizontal position).

  The operation element 3800 is provided with a firing stop switch 3891 and a right-handed switch 3892. Regardless of the slide position (operation amount) of the operation element 3800, the player can stop the firing of the game ball during the pressing by pressing the firing stop switch 3891, and can also stop the right-handed switch 3892. By pressing, the game ball can be launched at the maximum firing intensity during the depression.

  Next, the handle mounting base 3500 will be described with reference to FIGS. 60 (a) is a side view of the lower base 3510, and FIG. 60 (b) is a top view of the lower base 3510 as viewed in the direction of the arrow LXb in FIG. 60 (a). These are sectional drawings of the lower base 3510 in the LXc-LXc line of FIG.60 (b).

  As shown in FIG. 60, the lower base 3510 includes a barrel portion 3511 formed in a cylindrical shape, a bottom wall 3512 that closes a lower opening of the barrel portion 3511, and an outer surface from the outer peripheral surface of the barrel portion 3511. Fastening flange 3513 and fastening seat portion 3514 projecting to the top, a bearing portion 3515 erected upward from the upper surface of the bottom wall 3512, and a support shaft erected upward on the side of the bearing portion 3515 The guide wall portion 3517 is provided with a predetermined distance between the portion 3516 and the inner peripheral surface of the body portion 3511 so as to stand upward from the upper surface of the bottom wall 3512.

  An opening 3511a is formed on the front (front) side of the body portion 3511 by cutting out a part thereof. The opening 3511a is a notch portion for securing a displacement space in the sliding direction (arrows I and D directions) and the pressing direction (arrow G direction) of the operation element 3800 (see FIGS. 58 and 59). In the top view shown in (b), it is formed over a central angle range of approximately 170 degrees.

  The lower base 3510 is formed as an opening in which the opening 3511a is continuous (continuous) with the opening on the upper side (FIG. 60 (c)) of the trunk portion 3511, so that the entire opening area can be secured. As a result, it is possible to improve workability when the rotary shaft portion 3700, the operation element 3800, the rotary shaft portion connecting gear 3571, the sliding direction biasing spring 3581, and the like are mounted and assembled in the lower base 3510. .

  The fastening flange 3513 is a plate-like body projecting outward from the outer peripheral surface of the trunk portion 3511 at the upper end (upper side in FIG. 60 (a)) of the trunk portion 3511, and a pair is arranged with a phase difference of 180 degrees. In addition, an insertion hole 3513a is formed in each of the pair of fastening flanges 3513. Similar fastening flanges 3523 and 3533 are also arranged on the intermediate base 3520 and the upper base 3530, and these fastening flanges 3513, 3523, and 3533 are overlapped with each other and inserted into their insertion holes 3513a, 3523a, and 3533a. By fastening and fixing with the fastening bolt B, the bases 3510, 3520, and 3530 are connected and fixed to form the handle mounting base 3500 (see FIG. 58).

  The fastening seat portion 3514 is a portion projecting outward from the outer peripheral surface of the trunk portion 3511 at the lower end (lower side in FIG. 60 (a)) of the trunk portion 3511, and the rear side (opening 3511a) of the trunk portion 3511. The phase is 180 degrees different from the other). The outer surface of the fastening seat portion 3514 (the rear surface, the left surface in FIGS. 60A and 60B) is a flat surface (hereinafter referred to as “seat surface 3514a”) parallel to the axial center of the trunk portion 3511. The seat surface 3514a thus formed serves as an attachment surface (seat surface) when the handle device 3051 is fastened and fixed to the front surface of the lower plate unit 15 (see FIG. 58).

  An insertion hole 3512a having a circular shape in front view is formed in the center of the bottom wall 3512. Via the insertion hole 3512a, the connecting piece 3780 of the rotating shaft portion 3700 is connected to the variable resistor in the storage portion 3540 (see FIG. 59). The bearing portion 3515 is formed in a cylindrical shape concentric with the insertion hole 3512a of the bottom wall 3512, and the lower end side of the rotating shaft portion 3700 is rotatably supported by the inner peripheral surface of the bearing portion 3515 (see FIG. 6).

  The support shaft portion 3516 is a portion for rotatably supporting a rotation shaft portion connecting gear 3571 formed as a spur gear (see FIG. 59), and is formed in a shaft shape having a circular cross section. Specifically, the support shaft portion 3516 includes a small-diameter portion located on the distal end side and a large-diameter portion formed larger in diameter than the small-diameter portion, and the rotation shaft portion connecting gear 3571 is rotatable in the small-diameter portion. Is pivotally supported. The rotating shaft connecting gear 3571 has a stepped surface between the small diameter portion and the large diameter portion of the support shaft portion 3516, and a retaining ring (not shown) such as an E ring fitted at the tip of the small diameter portion of the support shaft portion 3516. By being arranged between these, movement in the axial direction is restricted (cannot be extracted).

  Note that a sliding direction biasing spring 3581 formed as a torsion spring is held on the support shaft portion 3516 in an elastically torsionally deformed state on the lower surface side of the rotating shaft portion connecting gear 3571 (see FIG. 59). . An urging force (elastic recovery force) is applied to the rotation shaft portion connecting gear 3571 from the sliding direction urging spring 3581, and the urging force is transmitted to the rotation shaft portion via the connection gear portion 3770 of the rotation shaft portion 3700. 3700 (that is, the operation element 3800) is acted in the direction of returning to the initial position θ0.

  Therefore, when the operating element 3800 is slid in the increasing direction (arrow I direction in FIG. 58), the urging force of the sliding direction urging spring 3581 provides a resistance to the sliding operation, while the sliding operation is performed. When released, the operating element 3800 is slid in the decreasing direction (direction of arrow D in FIG. 58) by the urging force of the sliding direction urging spring 3581, and returned to the initial position θ0.

  The guide wall portion 3517 is a member for guiding the sealing member 3550 (see FIG. 63) in the circumferential direction together with the guide wall portion 3527 (see FIG. 61) of the intermediate base 3520, and is formed in a circular cylindrical shape in a top view. And is erected from the upper surface of the bottom wall 3512 at a position concentric with the body portion 3511. Therefore, a gap of a certain size (an annular space when viewed from above) is formed between the outer peripheral surface of the guide wall portion 3517 and the inner peripheral surface of the trunk portion 3511, and the lower end of the sealing member 3550 is inserted into this gap. (See FIG. 59). When the operating element 3800 is slid, the closing member 3550 is guided in the gap between the guide wall portion 3517 and the trunk portion 3511 and moved in the circumferential direction.

  61 (a) is a side view of the intermediate base 3520, FIG. 61 (b) is a top view of the intermediate base 3520 as viewed in the direction of the arrow LXIb in FIG. 61 (a), and FIG. FIG. 62 is a cross-sectional view of the intermediate base 3520 along the line LXIc-LXIc in FIG. 61 (b).

  As shown in FIG. 61, the intermediate base 3520 includes a disk part 3521 formed in a disk shape, an outer wall part 3522 arranged along the outer edge of the lower surface of the disk part 3521, and a disk part 3521. The disc portion 3521 is spaced a predetermined distance from the fastening flange 3523 projecting outward from the outer peripheral surface, the insertion hole 3524 drilled in the center of the disc portion 3521, and the inner peripheral surface of the outer wall portion 3522. And a guide wall portion 3527 that is erected downward from the lower surface of the main body.

  The outer diameter of the disc portion 3521 is the same as the outer diameter of the barrel portion 3511 of the lower base 3510 and the barrel portion 3531 of the upper base 3530, and in the assembled state of the handle mounting base 3500, the disc portion 3521 of the intermediate base 3520. Is sandwiched between the axial end surfaces of the body 3511 of the lower base 3510 and the body 3531 of the upper base 3530 (see FIGS. 58 and 59).

  The outer wall part 3522 is a part for shielding the inner space of the lower base 3510 from the outside (see FIGS. 58B and 59), and the cylindrical body concentric with the disk part 3521 has a central angle of about 170 degrees. And is fitted into the opening 3511a in the trunk portion 3511 of the lower base 3510 (it is fitted into the opening 3511a). The rigidity of the handle mounting base 3500 as a whole can be enhanced by the internal fitting structure of the outer wall portion 3522 with respect to the opening 3511a.

  Further, by forming a portion corresponding to the outer wall portion 3522 not in the lower base 3510 but in the intermediate base 3520, as described above, while ensuring the rigidity of the handle mounting base 3500 as a whole, Since the opening area of the entire side base 3510 can be secured, the rotation shaft portion 3700, the operation element 3800, the rotation shaft portion connecting gear 3571, and the slide direction biasing spring 3581 are accordingly incorporated in the lower base 3510. The workability when mounting and assembling can be improved.

  The fastening flange 3523 is a plate-like body that protrudes outward from the outer peripheral surface of the disc portion 3521 and is set to the same plate thickness as the disc portion 3521, and a pair is disposed with a phase difference of 180 degrees. The pair of fastening flanges 3523 are respectively provided with insertion holes 3523a. As described above, the fastening flange 3523 is overlapped with the fastening flanges 3513 and 3533 of the lower base 3510 and the upper base 3530 and fastened and fixed by the fastening bolts B (see FIG. 58).

  The insertion hole 3524 rotatably supports the rotation shaft portion 3700 by its inner peripheral surface (see FIG. 59). A cylindrical bearing portion 3521a is disposed on the lower surface of the disc portion 3521 at a position concentric with the insertion hole 3524, and the rotating shaft portion 3700 is also rotatably supported by the inner peripheral surface of the bearing portion 3521a. Is done. That is, since the insertion hole 3524 is extended in the axial direction (vertical direction in FIG. 61 (c)) by the bearing portion 3521a, the bearing area can be secured correspondingly, so that the bearing strength and bearing accuracy of the rotating shaft portion 3700 are improved and durable. It is possible to improve the performance.

  The guide wall portion 3527 is a member for guiding the sealing member 3550 (see FIG. 63) in the circumferential direction together with the guide wall portion 3517 (see FIG. 60) of the lower base 3510, and has a circular cylindrical shape when viewed from above. It is erected from the lower surface of the disc portion 3521 at a position that is formed and concentric with the outer wall portion 3522. Therefore, a gap (annular space in a bottom view) is formed between the outer peripheral surface of the guide wall portion 3527 and the inner peripheral surface of the outer wall portion 3522, and the upper end of the sealing member 3550 is inserted into this gap. (See FIG. 59). When the operating element 3800 is slid, the closing member 3550 is guided in the gap between the guide wall portion 3527 and the outer wall portion 3522 and moved in the circumferential direction.

  62 (a) is a side view of the upper base 3530, FIG. 62 (b) is a bottom view of the upper base 3530 in the direction of the arrow LXIIb in FIG. 62 (a), and FIG. FIG. 63 is a cross-sectional view of the upper base 3530 along the line LXIIc-LXIIc in FIG. 62 (b).

  As shown in FIG. 62, the upper base 3530 has a barrel portion 3531 formed in a cylindrical shape, an upper wall 3532 that closes the upper opening of the barrel portion 3531, and an outer surface extending from the outer peripheral surface of the barrel portion 3531. The fastening flange 3533 and the fastening seat portion 3534 to be taken out, the bearing portion 3535 erected downward from the lower surface of the upper surface wall 3532, and the support shaft portion 3536 erected downward on the side of the bearing portion 3535. And formed with.

  The fastening flange 3533 is a plate-like body projecting outward from the outer peripheral surface of the trunk portion 3531 at the lower end (lower side in FIG. 62 (a)) of the trunk portion 3531. A pair of fastening flanges 3533 are different in phase by 180 degrees. The pair of fastening flanges 3533 are respectively provided with insertion holes 3533a. As described above, the fastening flange 3533 is superimposed on the fastening flanges 3513 and 3533 of the lower base 3510 and the upper base 3530 and fastened and fixed by the fastening bolt B (see FIG. 58).

  The fastening seat portion 3534 is a portion projecting outward from the outer peripheral surface of the trunk portion 3531 at the upper end (upper side in FIG. 62A) of the trunk portion 3531, and is disposed on the back side of the trunk portion 3531. . The outer side surface (the left side surface in FIGS. 62A and 62B) of the fastening seat portion 3534 is formed as a flat surface (hereinafter referred to as “seat surface 3534a”) parallel to the axis of the trunk portion 3531. Such a seating surface 3534a becomes an attachment surface (seat surface) when the handle device 3051 is fastened and fixed to the front surface of the lower plate unit 15 (see FIG. 5).

  The bearing portion 3535 is formed in a cylindrical shape concentric with the outer wall portion 3531, and a switching device 3600 is rotatably inserted into the inner peripheral side thereof (see FIG. 59). The support shaft portion 3536 is a portion for pivotally supporting a switching device connecting gear 3572 formed as a spur gear (see FIG. 59), and is formed in a shaft shape having a circular cross section.

  Specifically, the support shaft portion 3536 includes a small-diameter portion located on the distal end side and a large-diameter portion formed larger in diameter than the small-diameter portion, and the switching device connecting gear 3572 is rotatable in the small-diameter portion. It is pivotally supported. The switching device connecting gear 3572 includes a step surface between the small diameter portion and the large diameter portion of the support shaft portion 3536 and a retaining ring (not shown) such as an E-ring fitted to the tip of the small diameter portion of the support shaft portion 3536. By being arranged in between, the movement in the axial direction is restricted (keep undrawn).

  Note that a switching device biasing spring 3582 formed as a torsion spring is held on the support shaft portion 3536 on the upper surface side of the switching device coupling gear 3572 in an elastically torsionally deformed state (see FIG. 59). A biasing force (elastic recovery force) is applied to the switching device connecting gear 3572 from the switching device biasing spring 3582, and the biasing force causes the switching device 3600 to move to the initial position (the engaging projection 3630 has the rotation shaft portion 3700. (Position engaged with the step surface 3711c) (see FIG. 77 (a)).

  63 (a) is a front view of the closing member 3550, and FIG. 63 (b) is a bottom view of the closing member 3550 as viewed in the direction of arrow LXIIIb in FIG. 63 (a). These are sectional drawings of the sealing member 3550 in the LXIIIc-LXIIIc line | wire of Fig.63 (a).

  As shown in FIG. 63, the closing member 3550 shields the opening 3511a formed on the front (front) side of the lower base 3510, thereby preventing the inside of the handle mounting base 3500 from being visually recognized from the outside. Member (see FIG. 58B), and is formed in a cylindrical shape.

  The outer diameter of the sealing member 3550 is slightly smaller than the inner diameter of the body 3511 of the lower base 3510 and the outer wall 3522 of the intermediate base 3520, and the inner diameter is the guide wall 3517 of the lower base 3510. In addition, the outer diameter of the guide wall portion 3527 of the intermediate base 3520 is made slightly larger. Therefore, the lower end and the upper end (the lower side and the upper side in FIG. 63 (a)) of the sealing member 3550 can be inserted into the above-described gap formed on the outer peripheral side of the guide wall portions 3517 and 3527. It is possible to move along the gap described above (that is, in the circumferential direction).

  The sealing member 3550 is formed with a notch 3551 in a part of the circumferential direction. The notch 3551 is a notch for inserting the main body 3810 of the operation element 3800 and securing a displacement space in the push-down direction (see FIGS. 58 and 59), and a lower end of the closing member 3550 (see FIG. 63 (a) is formed as a rectangular cutout extending from the lower side.

  The width dimension of cutout portion 3551 (FIG. 63 (a) left-right dimension) is set to be slightly larger than the width dimension of main body 3810 of operator 3800 (FIG. 58 (a) vertical dimension). Therefore, the operation element 3800 is slid in the increasing direction or the decreasing direction (FIG. 58 (a), the arrow I direction or the arrow D direction) while allowing the operation element 3800 to be pushed down (the direction of arrow G in FIG. 58 (b)). When closing, the closing member 3550 is moved in the circumferential direction in conjunction with the sliding operation.

  Next, with reference to FIGS. 64 to 68, the rotating shaft portion 3700 and the operation element 3800 will be described. FIGS. 64A and 64B are partial cross-sectional side views of the rotating shaft portion 3700 and the operation element 3800, and FIG. 64A shows a state in which the operation element 3800 is at the initial position in the push-down direction. FIG. 64B corresponds to the state in which the operation element 3800 is pushed down.

  As shown in FIGS. 64A and 64B, the operation element 3800 and the rotating shaft portion 3700 are connected via a connecting shaft 3990. Thereby, the operation element 3800 can be displaced (operated) in two directions. That is, first, by rotating the operation element 3800 around the connecting shaft 3990, the held portion 3830 is displaced downward (in the direction of arrow G, see FIG. 58 (b)) (the push-down operation is performed). To do). Secondly, by rotating the operating element 3800 integrally with the rotation shaft portion 3700 around the axis of the rotation shaft portion 3700, the held portion 3830 is moved in the sliding direction (arrow I and arrow D directions, It is possible to displace (perform a slide operation) as shown in FIG.

  FIG. 65A is a side view of the rotating shaft portion 3700, and FIG. 65B is a rear view of the rotating shaft portion 3700 when viewed in the direction of the arrow LXVb in FIG. FIG. 10 is a partial cross-sectional rear view of the push-up member 3410. 66A is a top view of the rotating shaft portion 3700 when viewed in the direction of the arrow LXVIa in FIG. 65A, and FIG. 66B is a rotating shaft portion 3700 along the line LXVIb-LXVIb in FIG. FIG. 65 (b) and 65 (c) show a state where the push-up member 3410 is removed for easy understanding.

  As shown in FIGS. 65 and 66, the rotation shaft portion 3700 is formed with a rod-shaped shaft main body portion 3710, an insertion hole 3720 formed in the shaft main body portion 3710, and an opening on the back side of the shaft main body portion 3710. Opening 3730, hook portion 3740 disposed on the outer peripheral surface of shaft main body portion 3710, operating element restricting portion 3750, guide shaft 3760, connecting gear portion 3770, and connection projecting from the lower end surface of shaft main body portion 3710. A piece 3780.

  The shaft main body portion 3710 is formed as a solid rod-like body having a circular cross section connected coaxially to a cylindrical portion 3711 formed in a cylindrical shape and a lower end of the cylindrical portion 3711 (lower side in FIG. 66B). And a real part 3712, which are integrally formed from a resin material.

  On the upper end surface (upper side surface in FIG. 66 (b)) of the cylindrical portion 3711, the height position in the axial direction (vertical direction in FIG. 66 (b)) of the shaft main body 3710 is higher than the reference surface 3711a. A raised surface 3711b raised upward is formed, whereby a pair of stepped surfaces 3711c connecting the reference surface 3711a and the raised surface 3711b are formed on the upper end side of the cylindrical member 3711.

  As will be described later, the rotation shaft portion 3700 is formed so that the stepped surface 3711c can be engaged with the restricting projection portion 3630 of the switching device 3600. In a state in which the switching device 3600 is set in a rotatable state, the step surface 3711c is engaged with the restricting protrusion 3630, whereby the rotation shaft portion 3700 is rotated (sliding operation in the increasing direction of the operation element 3800). When the switching device 3600 is rotated in conjunction with the switching device 3600 and the switching device 3600 is set to the engaged and fixed state, the stepped surface 3711c is engaged with the restricting protrusion 3630, whereby the rotation shaft 3700 is rotated (operated). The sliding operation in the increasing direction of the child 3800) is restricted (see FIG. 77 (c)). As a result, an operation end point is formed.

  The reference surface 3711a and the raised surface 3711b are flat surfaces perpendicular to the axial direction of the shaft main body portion 3710, and the pair of step surfaces 3711c are parallel to each other and parallel to the axial direction of the shaft main body portion 3710. A flat surface. In addition, the pair of stepped surfaces 3711c are arranged with a phase difference of 180 degrees. However, in this embodiment, one step surface 3711c of the pair of step surfaces 3711c is engaged with the regulation protrusion 3630 of the switching device 3600.

  A guide groove 3715 is recessed in the inner peripheral surface of the cylindrical portion 3711. The guide groove 3715 is a groove for holding the transmission rod 3420 (see FIG. 73) at the first position or the second position. The detailed configuration of the guide groove 3715 will be described later.

  The insertion holes 3720 are holes having a circular cross section through which the connecting shaft 3990 is inserted, and a pair of holes are formed in a straight line in the cylindrical portion 3711 of the shaft main body portion 3710. The connecting shaft 3990 is formed from a true casting material into a shaft shape having a circular cross section. The opening 3730 is an opening for securing an arrangement space for the push-up member 3410. As shown in FIG. 65B, the opening 3730 is formed as a rectangular opening in the cylindrical portion 3711 of the shaft main body 3710. Protrusions 3731 for pivotally supporting the push-up member 3410 so as to be rotatable are respectively provided on the pair of opposed inner side surfaces of the opening 3730.

  Here, as shown in FIG. 65 (c), the push-up member 3410 is formed in a rectangular shape in the rear view, and as shown in FIG. 66 (b), a plate-like body having an L-shaped cross section with the lower end side bent. The recesses 3411 are respectively provided on the upper ends of the opposed pair of outer surfaces. By fitting the protrusion 3731 of the opening 3730 into the recess 3411, the push-up member 3410 is pivotally supported in the opening 3730 with the protrusion 3731 and the recess 3411 as the rotation center (see FIG. 64). The push-up member 3410 is disposed in a posture in which the bent portion on the lower end side is directed toward the axial center side of the cylindrical portion 3711 of the shaft main body portion 3710.

  The hook portion 3740 is a portion for engaging and holding one end of a spring-up direction biasing spring 3880 formed as a coil spring (see FIG. 64), and a portion having an L-shaped cross section bent upward is provided. A pair is arranged at a predetermined interval. The manipulator restricting portion 3750 is a rod-shaped portion for restricting the displacement of the manipulator 3800 with the connecting shaft 3990 as the rotation center, and is disposed on the back side of the shaft main body portion 3710 and below the opening 3730. .

  That is, the spring-up direction biasing spring 3880 is stretched between the hook portion 3740 of the rotating shaft portion 3700 and the hook portion 3840 of the operation element 3800 in an elastically stretched state, and is operated by the player. After 3800 is pushed down (in the direction of arrow G, see FIG. 58 (b)) (see FIG. 64 (b)), when the push-down operation is released, the operating element 3800 is moved in the spring-up direction biasing spring 3880. Is pushed upward (in the direction opposite to the arrow G, see FIG. 58 (b)). In this case, the operation element restricting portion 3750 receives the lower surface of the main body portion 3810 of the operation element 3800, thereby restricting the displacement of the operation element 3800 in the flip-up direction. Thereby, the operation element 3800 is held at the initial position in the push-down operation (see FIG. 64A).

  As described above, the manipulator restricting portion 3750 is a portion that receives the manipulator 3800 (the lower surface of the main body portion 3810) that is flipped up by the biasing force of the spring-up direction biasing spring 3880, and thus a large load is applied. In other words, in this embodiment, the operation element restricting portion 3750 is disposed not in the thin cylindrical portion 3711 but in the solid solid portion 3712. Thereby, the rigidity can be secured and the operator 3800 (the lower surface of the main body portion 3810) that is flipped up can be firmly received. As a result, durability can be improved.

  The guide shaft 3760 is a part for guiding the displacement direction when the operation element 3800 is displaced in the push-down direction or the opposite direction so that the held portion 3830 is smoothly displaced. The portion 3750 is disposed on the front side of the solid portion 3712 opposite to the solid portion 3712. When the operation element 3800 is pushed down, the guide shaft 3760 moves in the guide groove 3870 of the operation element 3800 (see FIG. 64B), so that the displacement of the operation element 3800 is moved along the guide groove 3870. I can guide you. As a result, rattling of the operation element 3800 can be suppressed, and the operation when the operation element 3800 is pushed down can be stabilized. Accordingly, the burden on the connecting shaft 3990 can be reduced and damage to the connecting shaft 3990 can be suppressed.

  The connection gear part 3770 is a part formed as a spur gear, and meshes with the rotation shaft part connection gear 3571 (see FIG. 59). As described above, the urging force from the sliding direction urging spring 3581 is transmitted from the rotating shaft connecting gear 3571 to the connecting gear 3770, whereby the rotating shaft 3700 is rotated and the operation element 3800 is moved to the initial position θ0. It returns to (see FIG. 58 (a)).

  The connecting piece 3780 is a shaft-like body fixed to the lower end surface of the shaft main body portion 3710 and is connected to a variable resistor (not shown) via the insertion hole 3512a of the lower base 3510 as described above. Is done. Thereby, the operation amount of the slide operation of the operation element 3800 is converted into the rotation amount of the rotating shaft portion 3700 and transmitted to the variable resistor.

  67 (a) is a side view of the operation element 3800, and FIG. 67 (b) is a top view of the operation element 3800 in the direction of the arrow LXVIIb in FIG. 67 (a). 68 (a) is a partial enlarged cross-sectional view of the operation element 3800 along the line LXVIIIa-LXVIIIa in FIG. 67 (b), and FIG. 68 (b) is an operation element 3800 along the line LXVIIIb-LXVIIIb in FIG. 67 (b). FIG.

  As shown in FIGS. 67 and 68, the operation element 3800 includes a main body portion 3810 including a base portion 3811 and a leg portion 3812, an insertion hole 3820 formed in the leg portion 3812 of the main body portion 3810, and the main body portion 3810. A held member 3830 erected from the base portion 3811, a hook portion 3840 and a support wall 3850 disposed on the outer surface of the base portion 3811 of the main body portion 3810, and a cam member installed between the leg portions 3812 of the main body portion 3810. 3860 and a guide groove 3870 disposed on the inner surface of the leg portion 3812 of the main body portion 3810.

  The main body 3810 includes a long box-shaped base 3811 and a pair of legs 3812 extending along the longitudinal direction from the base side of the base 3811 (left side of FIGS. 67 (a) and 67 (b)). Is provided. A held portion 3830 is erected substantially vertically on the distal end side (the right side of FIGS. 67A and 67B) of the base 3811. The pair of leg portions 3812 are disposed to face each other substantially parallel to each other with a predetermined interval therebetween, and a rotating shaft portion 3700 is disposed between the facing portions of the pair of leg portions 3812 (see FIG. 64).

  The pair of leg portions 3812 are respectively provided with insertion holes 3820 along the opposing direction (the vertical direction in FIG. 67 (b)). The rotation shaft portion 3700 is disposed between the pair of leg portions 3812 facing each other, and the connecting shaft 3990 inserted from one insertion hole 3820 of the pair of leg portions 3812 is passed through the insertion hole 3720 of the rotation shaft portion 3700. At the same time, the operating element 3800 is connected to the rotating shaft portion 3700 via the connecting shaft 3990 by being inserted through the other insertion hole 3820 of the pair of leg portions 3812, and below the held portion 3830 (arrow G). Direction, see FIG. 58 (b)), and can be pushed down (see FIG. 64).

  The extended distal end side (left side in FIG. 67 (a)) of the pair of leg portions 3812 is formed to be curved in an arc shape in the side view shown in FIG. 67 (a), and the outer peripheral surface of the curved portion in the arc shape. The elastic film member 3893 is adhered to each other. The elastic film member 3893 is a member formed in a film shape from an elastic material such as a rubber material. When the held portion 3830 of the operation element 3800 is pushed down and the leg portion 3812 is pushed upward, the elastic film member 3893 is brought into close contact with the lower surface of the disc portion 3521 of the intermediate base 3520 (see FIG. 76).

  Thus, the displacement of the operation element 3800 in the slide operation direction can be regulated using the adhesion force (friction force) of the elastic film member 3893. Therefore, as will be described later, when the position of the operation end point is changed (set), it is possible to prevent the operation amount of the slide operation of the operation element 3800 from changing carelessly. That is, it is possible to prevent the operation position of the slide operation from being shifted and the launch intensity of the game ball from changing carelessly. Thereby, the position of the operation end point can be accurately changed (set) to a desired position (that is, the slide operation position of the operation element 3800 when the game ball launch intensity is adjusted to the desired launch intensity). .

  The held portion 3830 is a portion that is gripped by a player's finger or palm when the operating element 3800 is slid or pushed down, and is formed as a rod-like body having a substantially rectangular cross-section with a corner chamfered in an arc shape. Is done. As described above, since the held portion 3830 is formed as a rod-like body, the held portion 3830 can be easily held (gripped), and as a result, when the operating element 3800 is operated to slide and push down. The operability can be improved.

  Further, since the held portion 3830 is erected along the vertical direction from the main body portion 3810, the held portion 3830 can be held (gripped) by the player in a natural posture. In particular, since the held portion 3830 is erected upward from the main body portion 3810, when gripping the held portion 3830, the outer edge portion of the palm is placed on the upper surface of the main body portion 3810 (on the upper side of FIG. 67 (a)). Surface). Thus, the player's fatigue can be reduced, and when the operator 3800 is pushed down, for example, even if the held portion 3830 is not gripped, a hand can be placed on the upper surface of the main body portion 3810. As a result, the push-down operation can be easily performed.

  The above-described firing stop switch 3891 and right-handed switch 3892 are respectively disposed on the standing tip of the held portion 3830 and the back side of the held portion 3830 (the side facing the coupling shaft 3990 (see FIG. 64)). Thus, the player can easily operate the firing stop switch 3891 with the thumb or index finger and the right-handed switch 3892 with the index finger or middle finger while the gripper 820 is naturally gripped.

  The hook part 3840 is a part for engaging and holding the other end of the spring-up direction biasing spring 3880 having one end engaged and held by the hook part 3740 (see FIG. 65) of the rotating shaft part 3700 (see FIG. 64). ), And is formed in an L-shaped cross section that is bent downward.

  The support wall 3850 is a wall portion for supporting the spring-up direction biasing spring 3880 from below, and is formed to be curved in a convex arc shape upward in a side view shown in FIG. As described above, the support wall 3850 is curved in an arc shape, so that the distance of the spring-up direction biasing spring 3880 is measured (the distance measured along the spring-up direction biasing spring 3880 between the hooks 3740 and 3840). Can be made longer (see FIG. 64A). Therefore, in the limited space, the spring-up direction biasing spring 3880 having a longer overall length can be used. As a result, the biasing force can be increased and the durability of the spring-up direction biasing spring 3880 can be improved. Can be achieved.

  The cam member 3860 is a member for pushing up the push-up member 3410 disposed on the rotary shaft portion 3700 so as to be displaceable (see FIG. 64), and is a rod-like member installed between the pair of leg portions 3812. From the center in the longitudinal direction (FIG. 67 (b) vertical direction) of the installation portion 3861 to the base 3811 side (that is, the side where the rotating shaft 3700 is disposed, the right side of FIG. 67 (b)). And a push-up cam 3862 that is extended, and these are integrally formed. The cam member 3860 is formed separately from the main body portion 3810, and both ends of the installation portion 3861 are fastened and fixed to the leg portions 3812 of the main body portion 3810 by fastening bolts (not shown).

  The push-up cam 3862 is formed in a triangular shape in cross section, and is arranged in a posture with the top of the triangular shape facing upward as shown in FIG. In a state where the rotary shaft 3700 is connected to the main body 3810 (between a pair of leg portions 3812) via the connecting shaft 3990, the push-up cam 3862 has a triangular top at the rotation shaft (protrusion) of the push-up member 3410. 3731 and the concave portion 3411, which are arranged at positions below the vertical direction in FIGS. 65 (b) and 65 (c)), and the slope on one side of the triangle (right side in FIG. 68 (a)) is the push-up member. It arrange | positions in the position which supports the lower end of 3410 (refer Fig.64 (a)).

  The cam member 3860 has a slope on one side (right side in FIG. 68 (a)) of the triangular shape of the push-up cam 3862 when the operation element 3800 is pushed down (in the direction of arrow G, see FIG. 58 (b)). Using the top (upper side in FIG. 68 (a)), the push-up member 3410 disposed on the rotating shaft 3700 is pushed upward (see FIGS. 64 (a) and 64 (b)).

  As described above, the push-up cam 3862 is formed in a triangular shape in cross-section, and the push-up member 3410 is pushed upward by using the slope and the top thereof, so that the operation element 3800 is not pushed down in a normal state. (Refer to FIG. 64 (a)), the push-up member 3410 can be arranged further downward, and the overall height dimension (axial dimension, vertical dimension of FIG. 64 (a)) is reduced, and the operation element When the 3800 is pushed down (see FIG. 64 (b)), the push-up member 3410 can be pushed upward, so that the stroke required for the push-down operation of the operator 3800 can be reduced and the operability can be reduced. In addition, it is possible to increase the lifting / lowering stroke of the transmission rod 3420 (see FIG. 73) and to reliably switch the state of the switching device 3600. Kill (see FIG. 76 from FIG. 74).

  The guide groove 3870 is a concave groove for guiding the guide shaft 3760 (see FIG. 65) of the rotary shaft portion 3700, and is provided as a groove having a rectangular cross section on the opposing surfaces of the pair of leg portions 3812. It is curved and extended in a circular arc shape centering on. Therefore, when the operation element 3800 is pushed down (see the arrow G direction, see FIG. 58 (b)) (see FIGS. 64 (a) and 64 (b)), the guide shaft 3760 of the rotating shaft portion 3700 is operated. However, by being guided along the guide groove 3870, rattling of the operation element 3800 can be suppressed and the operation of pushing down the operation element 3800 can be performed smoothly. Accordingly, the burden on the connecting shaft 3990 can be reduced and damage to the connecting shaft 3990 can be suppressed.

  Note that the main body portion 3810 and the held portion 3830 have a two-part structure in which the center in the width direction (the vertical direction in FIG. 67 (b)) is a split surface (matching surface). That is, the main body portion 3810 and the held portion 3830 are formed symmetrically with respect to the first component forming one side of the main body portion 3810 and the held portion 3830 and the first component with the dividing plane as a symmetry plane. 3810 and a second part forming one side of the held portion 3830. By joining the first part and the second part with each other between the divided surfaces, a launch stop switch 3891 and the like are provided therein. It is formed in a hollow shape having a space for wiring electrical connection lines.

  Next, the switching member 3600, the pushing member 3430, and the transmission rod 3420 will be described with reference to FIGS. FIG. 69 is a partial enlarged cross-sectional view of the handle device 3051.

  As shown in FIG. 69, on the handle mounting base 3500, a switching device 3600, a pushing member 3430, and a transmission rod 3420 are arranged in series on the same axis in order from the top. The switching device 3600 is inserted into the bearing portion 3535 of the upper base 3530, and the pushing member 3430 and the transmission rod 3420 are inserted into the cylindrical portion 3711 of the rotating shaft portion 3700 (the shaft main body 3710).

  First, the switching device 3600 and the pushing member 3420 will be described with reference to FIGS.

  70 (a) is a top view of the switching device 3600, FIG. 70 (b) is a side view of the switching device 3600 as viewed in the direction of the arrow LXXb in FIG. 70 (a), and FIG. It is a bottom view of the switching apparatus 3600 in the arrow LXXc direction view of FIG.70 (b). 71A is a cross-sectional view of the switching device 3600 along the line LXXIa-LXXIa of FIG. 70A, and FIG. 71B is a side view of the switching device 3600 when viewed in the direction of the arrow LXXIb of FIG. FIG.

  72 (a) is a front view of the pushing member 3430, and FIG. 72 (b) is a side view of the pushing member 3430 as viewed in the direction of the arrow LXXIIb in FIG. 72 (a). These are sectional drawings of the pushing-in member 3430 in the LXXIIc-LXXIIc line | wire of Fig.72 (a).

  70 and 71, the illustration of the biting spheres 670a and 670b, the push-side biasing spring 680, and the biting-side biasing spring 690 is omitted.

  Here, the switching device 3600 is connected in place of the shape of the restriction protrusion 3630 from the shape of the restriction protrusion 630 in the first and second embodiments, instead of the spring receiver 640 in the first and second embodiments. Except for the point that the gear portion 3640 is provided, the switching devices 600 and 2600 in the first embodiment and the second embodiment are formed substantially the same technically. Further, the pushing member 3430 is technically substantially the same as the pushing member 2580 in the second embodiment. Therefore, substantially the same parts are denoted by the same reference numerals, and description thereof is omitted.

  As shown in FIGS. 70 and 71, the switching device 3600 is protruded radially outward from the main body 610, the connection hole 620 formed through the main body 610, and the outer peripheral surface of the main body 610. The control protrusion 3630 and the connecting gear 3640, and the biting surface 650 and the flank 660 formed by recessing the outer peripheral surface of the main body 610 are provided.

  The outer diameter of the main body 610 is set to be slightly smaller than the inner diameter of the bearing 3535 (see FIG. 69) of the upper base 3530. Therefore, the main body 610 is inserted into the bearing portion 3535 of the upper base 3530 and is rotatably held in the bearing portion 3535 (see FIG. 74).

  The restricting protrusion 3630 is a portion that comes into contact with the step surface 3711c (see FIGS. 77 and 78) in the cylindrical portion 3711 of the rotating shaft 3700 (shaft main body 3710), and is formed as a rod-shaped body having a circular cross section. It is disposed radially outward from the outer peripheral surface of the main body 610 and protrudes downward from the lower surface of the main body 610 (the lower surface in FIG. 71 (b)).

  The connection gear portion 3640 is a plate-like body formed by projecting radially outward from the outer peripheral surface of the main body portion 610, and a switching device connection gear 3572 (see FIG. 69) is formed on the outer peripheral surface of the plate-like body. Engageable spur gears are engraved. Note that the lower surface of the connection gear portion 3640 (FIG. 70C, the surface on the front side in FIG. 70) is flush with the lower surface of the main body portion 610 (the surface on the front side in FIG. 70C). It is formed as a flat surface whose position in the axial direction coincides and is perpendicular to the axis.

  As shown in FIG. 72, the pushing member 3430 includes a base body 2581, a connecting shaft 2582 and a pushing piece 2583 that are disposed on the upper surface of the base body 2581. The outer diameter of the base body 2581 is set to be slightly smaller than the inner diameter of the cylindrical portion 3711 of the rotating shaft portion 3700 (shaft body portion 3710), and the switching device 3600 is rotated in the bearing portion 3535. In this case, the inside of the cylindrical portion 3711 of the rotating shaft portion 3700 can be rotated, and when the upper portion is pushed upward by the transmission rod 3420 from the lower surface side, the inside of the cylindrical portion 3711 of the rotating shaft portion 3700 is switched. It can be slid toward the device 3600 (see FIGS. 74 to 76).

  The switching device 3600 is engaged and fixed by the engagement spheres 670 a and 670 b being pushed into the engagement space 651 by the pushing pieces 2583 of the pushing member 3430, so that the switching device 3600 is engaged with the bearing portion 3535 of the upper base 3530. While the relative rotation is disabled, the pressing piece 2583 of the pressing member 3430 is retracted, and the biting spheres 670 a and 670 b are disposed in the escape space 661, so that the rotation can be switched to the upper base 3530. Relative rotation with respect to the bearing portion 3535 is possible. Since the switching structure of the switching device 3600 is the same as in the first and second embodiments (see FIGS. 15 and 40), description thereof is omitted.

  Next, the transmission rod 3420 will be described with reference to FIG. 73 (a) is a side view of the transmission rod 3420, and FIG. 73 (b) is a top view of the transmission rod 3420 as viewed in the direction of the arrow LXXIIIb in FIG. 73 (a).

As shown in FIG. 73, the transmission rod 3420 is a member disposed on the inner peripheral side of the cylindrical portion 3711 in the shaft main body portion 3710 of the rotating shaft portion 3700 (see FIG. 69), and is formed in a columnar shape with a circular cross section. Is done. On the outer peripheral surface of the cylindrical body, guide protrusions 3421 are projected from a plurality of locations (three locations in the present embodiment). Each guide protrusion 421 is a part for moving along a guide groove 3715 (see FIG. 66B) formed on the inner peripheral surface of the cylindrical portion 3711 in the rotating shaft portion 3700, and is formed in the same shape. In addition, they are arranged at equal intervals in the circumferential direction (in this embodiment, at intervals of 120 degrees).

The lower end (the lower part of FIG. 73 (a)) of the transmission rod 3420 is formed in a conical shape coaxial with the columnar part. Thereby, since the transmission rod 3420 can be brought closer to the push-up member 3410 on the inner peripheral side of the cylindrical portion 3711 of the rotating shaft portion 3700 (see FIG. 69), the limited space on the inner peripheral side of the cylindrical portion 3711 Can be used effectively, and the overall size can be reduced.

  The transmission rod 3420 is held at the first position or the second position by the guide protrusion 3421 being guided along the guide groove 3715 formed on the inner peripheral surface of the cylindrical portion 3711. Specifically, every time the push-up member 3410 is pushed upward, the position is changed from the first position to the second position or from the second position to the first position (see FIGS. 74 to 76). The structure in which the guide protrusion 3421 is guided in the guide groove 3715 and the transmission rod 3420 is held in the first position or the second position is the same as the structure in the second embodiment (see FIGS. 41 to 47). ), The description is omitted. That is, the transmission rod 3420 and the guide groove 3715 are technically identical to the transmission rod 2592 and the guide groove 2591b in the second embodiment.

  Next, with reference to FIGS. 74 to 76, a switching structure for switching the switching device 3600 to a rotatable state or an engaged and fixed state by a pressing operation of the operation element 3800 will be described. In the description of this switching structure, FIGS. 77 and 78 are referred to as appropriate.

  74 and 75 are partial cross-sectional side views of the handle device 3051. FIG. 74 shows a state where the transmission rod 3420 is in the first position, and FIG. 75 shows a state where the transmission rod 3420 is in the second position. Is done. FIG. 76 is a partial cross-sectional side view of the handle device 3051, in which the operating element 3800 is pushed downward and the transmission rod 3420 is disposed at the intermediate position.

  77 and 78 are partially enlarged perspective views of the rotation shaft portion 3700 and the switching device 3600. FIG. 77A shows a state where the rotary shaft 3700 (operator 3800) is at the initial position θ0 and the switching device 3600 is in a rotatable state, and FIG. 77B shows the rotary shaft portion. FIG. 77 (c) shows a state where 3700 (operation element 3800) is rotated (sliding operation) to the operation position θ1 and the switching device 3600 is in a rotatable state, and FIG. 77 (c) shows the rotation shaft 3700 (operation element 3800). Is rotated to the operating position θ1 (sliding operation) and the switching device 3600 is changed to the engaged and fixed state, FIG. 78A shows the rotating shaft portion 3700 (operator 3800) as the operating position. FIG. 78B shows a state in which the switching device 3600 is changed to the engaged and fixed state within the range of θ0 to θ1, and in FIG. 78B, the rotation shaft portion 3700 (operator 3800) is at the initial position θ0. And cut The state example apparatus 3600 is changed to the engagement fixing state, are shown respectively.

  As shown in FIGS. 74 to 76, the switching device 3600 is inserted into the bearing portion 3535 of the upper base 3530 as described above, and the connecting shaft 2582 of the push-in member 3430 is inserted into the connecting hole 620 of the switching device 3600. It is inserted so as to be relatively movable in the axial direction and not relatively rotatable in the circumferential direction.

  In the present embodiment, the connection shaft 2582 of the push-in member 3430 is inserted into the communication hole 620 of the switching device 3600 regardless of whether the transmission rod 3420 is disposed at the first position or the second position. The state (that is, the state where the communication hole 620 and the connecting shaft 2582 are coupled so as not to rotate relative to each other) is maintained. Therefore, even if the switching device 3600 is rotated with respect to the bearing portion 3535, the rotational position (phase) of the pushing piece 2583 of the pushing member 3430 with respect to the escape space 661 of the switching device 3600 can be always matched.

  As a result, regardless of the rotation position (phase) of the switching device 3600, the transmission rod 3420 is moved upward (ie, pushed by the transmission rod 3420) when the operation element 3800 is pushed down. By pushing the member 3430 upward), the pushing piece 2583 of the pushing member 3430 can be reliably moved into the biting space 651 of the switching device 3600.

  That is, regardless of the sliding position of the operating element 3800, the switching device 3600 can be brought into the engaged and fixed state by depressing the operating element 3800. Therefore, when the launch intensity of the game ball reaches a desired launch intensity by the slide operation of the operation element 3800, the operation end point is changed (set) while the operation position (operation amount) of the slide operation is maintained. Can be done. As a result, the operation end point can be changed (set) quickly and at an accurate position.

  As shown in FIG. 74, in a state where the transmission rod 3420 is in the first position, the pushing piece 2583 of the pushing member 3430 is disposed in the escape space 661 of the switching device 3600. Therefore, in the switching device 3600, the biting spheres 670a and 670b are arranged in the escape space 661 by the urging force of the pushing-side urging spring 680, and thereby the rotation that can rotate relative to the bearing portion 3535. The movable state is set (see FIGS. 15A and 15C or FIGS. 40A and 40C).

  Thus, in the state where the switching device 3600 is set in a rotatable state (a state where the transmission rod 3420 is in the first position), the switching device 3600 is rotatable with respect to the bearing portion 3535. 77 (a) and 77 (b), when the operator 3800 (rotary shaft 3700) is rotated in the increasing direction from the initial position θ0 to the operating position θ1, the step surface of the rotating shaft 3700 3711c is rotated while pushing the restricting projection 3630 of the switching device 3600 in the increasing direction (the arrow direction in FIG. 77B), so that the switching device 3600 is rotated in the increasing direction in conjunction with the rotating shaft 3700. Let It is assumed that the operation position θ1 is an operation position that does not reach the maximum position θmax of the slide operation range of the operation element 3800. The same applies to the following.

  On the other hand, when the operating element 3800 (rotating shaft 3700) is rotated in the decreasing direction, the switching device 3600 follows the rotating shaft 3700 by the biasing force of the switching device biasing spring 3582 (see FIG. 69). Then, it is rotated in the decreasing direction. For example, as shown in FIGS. 78 (a) and 78 (b), the operation element 3800 (rotating shaft 3700) decreases from the operation position θ1 to the initial position θ0 (the direction opposite to the arrow in FIG. 78 (b)). When the slide device is slid (rotated), the switching device 3600 is also rotated in the decreasing direction by the urging force of the switching device urging spring 3582, and the restricting projection 3630 comes into contact with the step surface 3711c of the rotating shaft portion 3700. It is arranged at the rotation position.

  That is, as shown in FIG. 74, in a state where the switching device 3600 is set in a rotatable state (a state where the transmission rod 3420 is in the first position), the operation element 3800 moves in either the increasing direction or the decreasing direction. Even in the case of a slide operation, the switching device 3600 is rotated in conjunction with (synchronized), and the rotation position (phase) of the operating element 3800 (rotating shaft portion 3700) and the switching device 3600 are matched ( 77 (a) and 77 (b)).

  As shown in FIG. 75, in the state where the transmission rod 3420 is in the second position, the switching device 3600 has its biting spheres 670a and 670b disposed in the biting space 651 (that is, by the pushing piece 2583 of the transmission rod 3420). The biting spheres 670a and 670b are pushed into the biting space 651) and set to the engaged and fixed state (see FIGS. 15 (b) and 15 (d) or FIGS. 40 (b) and 40 (d)). The

  In a state where the switching device 3600 is set to the engagement fixed state, the biting spheres 670 a and 670 b are opposed to the inner peripheral surface of the bearing portion 3535 and the biting surface 650 by the biasing force of the biting side biasing spring 690. Since the switching device 3600 (main body 610) is in any rotation direction (for example, the arrow A direction and the arrow shown in FIG. 15D). (B direction), the circumferential end of the biting surface 650 acts so that the biting spheres 670a and 670b are further bitten between the opposite ends of the biting surface 650 and the inner peripheral surface of the bearing portion 3535. (See FIGS. 15 (b) and 15 (d) or FIGS. 40 (b) and 40 (d)), the rotation of the switching device 3600 (main body 610) with respect to the bearing 3535 is restricted (blocked).

  Therefore, as shown in FIG. 77 (b), when the operating element 3800 (rotating shaft portion 3700) is rotated to the operating position θ1, the position of the transmission rod 3420 is set to the first position by the pressing operation of the operating element 3800. By changing from the position to the second position, the switching device 3600 is set to the engaged and fixed state, and as shown in FIG. 77 (c), the switching device 3600 is moved to the rotation position corresponding to the operation position θ1 (that is, The transmission rod 3420 in the first position can be fixed to the rotation position at the time when it is changed to the second position.

  As described above, when the switching device 3600 is set in the engagement fixed state and the rotation position thereof is fixed, as shown in FIGS. 78 (a) and 78 (b), the operator 3800 (rotary shaft portion) 3700) is operated to slide (rotate) in the decreasing direction, the switching device 3600 is not interlocked (synchronized) with the rotation of the rotation shaft 3700, and is held at the rotation position corresponding to the operation position θ1. That is, the position of the operation end point is changed (set) to the operation position θ1.

  Therefore, in this case, for example, as shown in FIG. 78 (b), in the state where the switching device 3600 is held (fixed) at the rotation position corresponding to the operation position θ1, the operation element returned to the initial position θ0. When the 3800 (rotating shaft portion 3700) is slid in the increasing direction (rotated), the rotation position of the rotating shaft portion 3700 is the operation end point θ1. That is, as shown in FIG. 77 (c), when the sliding operation in the increasing direction reaches the operation position θ 1, the step surface 3711 c of the rotating shaft portion 3700 is brought into contact with the restricting projection portion 3630 of the operation shaft 3800. Further sliding operation in the increasing direction (rotation of the rotating shaft portion 3700 in the arrow direction in FIG. 77C) is restricted.

  Here, the change (setting) of the transmission rod 3420 in the first position to the second position is performed as follows. That is, as shown in FIG. 74, when the operating element 3800 is pushed downward (in the direction of arrow G in FIG. 58B) from the state where the transmission rod 3420 is in the first position, as shown in FIG. The transmission rod 3420 is pushed upward by the push-up member 3410. In the transmission rod 3420, the guide protrusion 3421 is guided along the shape of the guide groove 3715, and abuts against a predetermined wall portion (guide restriction wall portion Wc, see FIG. 46) of the guide groove 3715. As a result, the downward pressing operation of the operating element 3800 becomes impossible, so that when the player loosens the operating force and the downward pressing operation of the operating element 3800 is released, the transmission rod 3420 is pushed on the pushing side. It is pushed back downward by the biasing force (elastic recovery force) of the spring 680. As a result, the guide protrusion 3421 is guided along the shape of the guide groove 3715 and reaches a predetermined position (position P2, see FIG. 46) of the guide groove 3715. That is, as shown in FIG. 75, the transmission member 3420 is disposed at the second position.

  Similarly, the change (setting) of the transmission rod 3420 in the second position to the first position is performed as follows. That is, as shown in FIG. 75, when the operating element 3800 is pushed downward (in the direction of arrow G in FIG. 58B) from the state where the transmission rod 3420 is in the second position, as shown in FIG. The transmission rod 3420 is pushed upward by the push-up member 3410. In the transmission rod 3420, the guide protrusion 3421 is guided along the shape of the guide groove 3715, and abuts against a predetermined wall portion (guide restriction wall portion Wg, see FIG. 46) of the guide groove 3715. As a result, the downward pressing operation of the operating element 3800 becomes impossible, so that when the player loosens the operating force and the downward pressing operation of the operating element 3800 is released, the transmission rod 3420 is pushed on the pushing side. It is pushed back downward by the biasing force (elastic recovery force) of the spring 680. As a result, the guide protrusion 3421 is guided along the shape of the guide groove 3715 and reaches a predetermined position (position P1, see FIG. 46) of the guide groove 3715. That is, as shown in FIG. 74, the transmission member 3420 is disposed at the first position.

  In this case, for example, as shown in FIG. 78 (b), in the state where the switching device 3600 is held (fixed) at the rotation position corresponding to the operation position θ1, the transmission rod 3420 is moved from the second position to the first position. When the operation of arranging the position is performed, the switching device 3600 is switched from the engaged and fixed state to the rotatable state, and is rotatable with respect to the bearing portion 3535. Therefore, the biasing force of the switching device biasing spring 3582 In response to this, as shown in FIG. 77 (a), it is returned to the initial position (the rotational position where the restricting projection 3630 contacts the stepped surface 3711c of the rotating shaft portion 3700).

  Alternatively, for example, as shown in FIG. 78 (a), the switching device 3600 is held (fixed) at the rotation position corresponding to the operation position θ1, and the operation element 3800 (rotary shaft portion 3700) is operated. When the above-described operation of placing the transmission rod 3420 from the second position to the first position is performed in a state where the slide operation (rotation) is performed up to the position θ1, the switching device 3600 can rotate from the engagement fixed state. And the rotation of the bearing portion 3535 is enabled to receive the urging force of the switching device urging spring 3582, and as shown in FIG. In response to the slide operation of the operating element 3800, the rotating shaft 3700 is returned to the rotating position at which the rotating shaft 3700 is rotating.

  Therefore, when the operating element 3800 (rotating shaft portion 3700) is slid (rotated) in the increasing direction or decreasing direction from this state, the switching device 3600 is also rotated (synchronized) with the rotation. Is done.

  As described above, according to the handle device 3051, the operation end point can be canceled even during the slide operation of the operation element 3800 (during a game in which a game ball is launched). For example, in order to cancel the operation end point There is no need to return the operation element 3800 to the initial position. Therefore, when it becomes necessary to reset the position of the operation end point once set to another position (for example, fine adjustment), the slide operation of the operation element 3800 is maintained (that is, the game is continued). The resetting operation can be performed quickly. Alternatively, for example, when the right-handed operation is required, the operation end point that restricts the slide operation in the increasing direction of the operation element 3800 can be canceled while maintaining the slide operation of the operation element 3800. A state in which the sliding operation in the increasing direction of the child 3800 is possible can be quickly formed. That is, it is possible to quickly switch to the slide operation operation of the operation element 3800 in the operation direction that maximizes the launch intensity of the game ball.

  Further, the switching device 3600 is switched from the engaged fixed state to the rotatable state (the operation end point is released, that is, the return operation for returning the switching device 3600 to the initial position), and the rotatable state is changed to the engaged fixed state. Both the switching operation (the changing operation for changing (setting) the operation end point) are achieved by the pressing operation of the operation element 3800. That is, it can be achieved by operating the same member in the same direction. As a result, the change operation and the return operation can be easily performed. In particular, since the state due to the change operation and the state due to the return operation are switched alternately, it becomes effective to improve operability that these two states can be switched by repeating the same operation. Further, since the same member is operated in the same direction, the operation direction of the operation element 3800 required for the change operation and the return operation can be limited to only one direction. The structure can be simplified and the product cost can be reduced.

  Next, referring to FIGS. 79 and 80, the position of the operation end point is changed (set) using the switching device 3600, and the position of the slide operation of the operation element 3800 is adjusted based on the position of the operation end point. A method of adjusting (returning to the original slide operation position) will be described.

  79 and 80 are schematic diagrams schematically showing the state of the slide operation of the handle device 3051. In each figure, the left diagram is a schematic front view of the handle device 3051, and the right diagram is the operator. It is a schematic diagram which shows typically the relationship between the position of 3800 slide operation, and the operation end point. 79 and 80, “[first position] or [second position]” indicates the position of the transmission rod 3420. “Initial position θ0” is an initial position in the direction of the slide operation of the operator 3800, and “Maximum position θmax” is a maximum position at which the operator 3800 can perform a slide operation when the operation end point is not changed (set). It is. The “operation end point” is an end point of the slide operation of the operation element 3800 formed by setting the switching device 3600 to the engagement fixed state.

  As shown in FIGS. 79 (a) and 79 (b), in the state where the transmission rod 3420 is in the first position, the switching device 3600 is in a rotatable state (FIG. 74, FIG. 15 (a) and FIG. 15 (c)), the operation element 3800 can be slid in the range from the initial position θ0 to the maximum position θmax.

  In the state shown in FIGS. 79A and 79B, the position of the slide operation of the operation element 3800 is adjusted according to the gaming state. As a result, as shown in FIG. If it is determined that the firing intensity of the game ball can be adjusted to a desired firing intensity by setting the operation position θ1, the player can maintain the state shown in FIG. 79 (b) while maintaining the state shown in FIG. 79 (c). As shown, the transmission rod 3420 is set to the second position by the downward pressing operation of the operating element 3800. As a result, when the switching device 3600 is set in the engaged and fixed state (see FIGS. 75, 15B, and 15D), the operation end point is at a position corresponding to the operation position θ1 of the operation element 3800. Changed (set).

  As described above, according to the handle device 3051, the operation end point can be set. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 80A, for example, in order to take a break, the slide operation position of the operation element 3800 is returned to the initial position θ0. Even if the game is interrupted, the original rotation position (that is, the rotation position where the launch intensity of the game ball is adjusted to the desired launch intensity and the operation position θ1 before interrupting the gaming machine) It can be stored as “operation end point”.

  Therefore, when the position of the slide operation of the operator 3800 is adjusted to the original slide operation position (that is, the operation position θ1 before the game is interrupted) (the states of FIGS. 79B and 79C are reproduced). 80 (b), the player slides the operation element 3800 to the operation end point (that is, the slide operation of the operation element 3800 is restricted by the operation end point, as shown in FIG. 80B). If the slide operation is performed until the first slide operation cannot be performed), the slide operation position of the operation element 3800 can be quickly and easily adjusted to the original slide operation position (operation position θ1).

  For example, a method is conceivable in which a scale line is provided on the handle mounting base 3500 along the movement locus of the operation element 3800, and the operation element 3800 is slid by using the scale line as a target position. Thus, it is not necessary to finely adjust whether the position of the slide operation of the operator 3800 coincides with the target position (scale line) or not, and the position can be accurately adjusted to the desired slide operation position. it can. Further, according to the present embodiment, the slide operation may be performed up to a position where the slide operation cannot be performed, and the target position is not passed, so that the operation speed of the operation element 3800 can be increased. It is possible to quickly adjust to the position of the slide operation (return to the original slide operation position quickly).

  When returning the position of the operation end point to the maximum position θmax, as described above, in the state shown in FIG. 80A or 80B, the operation element 3800 is pushed down to a position where it can be pushed down. By releasing the push-down operation after the push-down operation is performed, the transmission rod 3420 is returned to the first position, and the position of the operation end point can be returned to the maximum position θmax as shown in FIG. it can.

  Although the present invention has been described based on the above embodiment, the present invention is not limited to the above embodiment, and various modifications can be easily made without departing from the spirit of the present invention. It can be guessed.

  The pachinko machine 10 may be configured by combining or replacing part or all of the configuration in one of the above embodiments with part or all of the configuration of the other embodiments.

  In each of the above-described embodiments, the connecting hole 620 of the switching devices 600 to 3600 and the connecting shafts 575 and 2582 inserted through the connecting hole 620 are trapezoidal in cross section, thereby enabling positioning in the rotational direction. However, the present invention is not necessarily limited thereto, and the cross-sectional shapes of the connection hole 620 and the connection shafts 575, 2582 may be other shapes. Other shapes include, for example, unequal polygons, shapes in which keys and key grooves are formed, and the like.

  You may implement this invention in the pachinko machine etc. of a different type from said each embodiment. For example, once a big hit, a pachinko machine that raises the expected value of the big hit until a big hit state occurs (for example, two times or three times) including that (for example, a two-time right item, a three-time right item) May also be implemented. Further, after the jackpot symbol is displayed, it may be implemented as a pachinko machine that generates a special game that gives a player a predetermined game value on the condition that a ball is won in a predetermined area. Further, the present invention may be implemented in a pachinko machine that has a special area such as a V zone and has a special gaming state as a necessary condition that a special ball is awarded to the special area. Further, in addition to the pachinko machine, the game machine may be implemented as various game machines such as an alepatchi, a sparrow ball, a slot machine, a game machine in which a so-called pachinko machine and a slot machine are integrated.

  In the slot machine, for example, a symbol is changed by operating a control lever in a state where a symbol effective line is determined by inserting coins, and a symbol is stopped and confirmed by operating a stop button. Is. Accordingly, the basic concept of the slot machine is that it is provided with a display device for confirming and displaying the identification information after variably displaying the identification information string composed of a plurality of identification information, and resulting from the operation of the starting operation means (for example, the operation lever). The variation display of the identification information is started, and the variation display of the identification information is stopped and fixedly displayed due to the operation of the operation means for stop (for example, the stop button) or when a predetermined time elapses. It is a slot machine that generates a special game that gives a player a predetermined game value on the condition that the combination of identification information at the time is a specific condition. In this case, the game medium is typically a coin, medal, etc. Take as an example.

  In addition, as a specific example of a gaming machine in which a pachinko machine and a slot machine are fused, a display device is provided that displays a symbol after a symbol string composed of a plurality of symbols is variably displayed, and has a handle for launching a ball. What is not. In this case, after throwing a predetermined amount of spheres based on a predetermined operation (button operation), for example, the change of the symbol is started due to the operation of the operation lever, for example, due to the operation of the stop button, or With the passage of time, the variation of the symbol is stopped, and a special game that gives a predetermined game value to the player is generated on the condition that the determined symbol at the time of stoppage is a so-called jackpot symbol. In this case, a large amount of balls are paid out to the lower tray. If such a gaming machine is used in place of a slot machine, only a ball can be handled as a gaming value in the gaming hall. Therefore, the gaming value seen in the current gaming hall where pachinko machines and slot machines are mixed Problems such as the burden on equipment due to the separate handling of medals and balls and restrictions on the location of the gaming machine can be solved.

  The concept of various inventions included in the above-described embodiment in addition to the gaming machine of the present invention is shown below.

  In a gaming machine that includes an operation element operated by a player and whose launch intensity is adjusted according to the operation amount of the operation element, the operation element can be operated in a section from an initial position to an operation end point. The game machine A1 is characterized in that the position of the operation end point can be changed.

  According to the gaming machine A1, the operation amount of the operator can be adjusted accurately and quickly to a desired operation amount.

  Here, as a method of adjusting the operation amount of the operation element to a desired operation amount, for example, a method of providing a scale line along the movement locus of the operation element, or a reference at an arbitrary position along the movement locus of the operation element A method of fixing the piece is conceivable. According to these methods, the operation amount of the manipulator can be reduced by operating the manipulator using the scale line or the reference piece as the target position (that is, the operation position of the manipulator coincides with the scale line or the reference piece). It can be easily adjusted to a desired operation amount.

  However, in the method described above, the accuracy of adjusting the operating element depends on the skill of the player. That is, since it is necessary to finely adjust the operation position of the operator with respect to the target position while visually determining whether or not the operation position of the operation element matches the target position (scale line or reference piece) Adjustment is difficult. Further, for example, if the operating speed of the operating element is increased, the operating position may pass, so that the operating speed of the operating element needs to be reduced in the vicinity of the target position, and quick adjustment is difficult.

  On the other hand, according to the gaming machine A1, the operation element can be operated in the section from the initial position to the operation end point, and the position of the operation end point can be changed. ) By changing (setting) the position of the operation end point to a position corresponding to (), if the player operates the operation element to the operation end point (that is, the operation is restricted by the operation end point and further operations are performed). If the operation element is operated to a position where it becomes impossible to perform the operation), the operation amount of the operation element can be easily adjusted to a desired operation amount.

  Thereby, for example, it is not necessary to make fine adjustment while visually determining whether or not the operation position of the operation element matches the target position, and it is possible to accurately adjust to a desired operation amount. Moreover, since the target position is not passed, the operation speed of the operator can be increased, and the desired operation amount can be quickly adjusted.

  More specifically, as a result of adjusting the operation amount of the operation element, when the launch intensity of the game ball becomes a desired launch intensity, the position corresponding to the state (the operation element having the desired launch intensity is obtained). The position of the operation end point is changed (set) to the position corresponding to the operation amount. Thus, for example, even after the game is interrupted for a break and the operating element is returned to the initial position, the player can operate the operating element only by operating the operating element to the operation end point as described above. The operation amount of the child can be returned (adjusted) to the original operation amount (that is, the operation amount before the game is interrupted), and the return operation can be performed accurately and quickly.

  In the gaming machine A1, an operating end point changing means for changing the position of the operating end point to a position corresponding to the operation amount of the operating element when the operating element is being operated is provided.

  According to the gaming machine A2, in addition to the effect achieved by the gaming machine A1, in the state where the operating element is being operated, the operation end point is changed (set) to the position corresponding to the operating amount of the operating element. Since the means is provided, the position of the operation end point can be changed (set) while the operation amount of the operation element is maintained when the launch intensity of the game ball reaches a desired launch intensity. Thereby, the change (setting) of the position of the operation end point can be performed quickly and at an accurate position.

  In the gaming machine A2, the operation element is formed to be displaceable in a second direction different from an operation direction for adjusting the firing strength of the game ball, and the operation end point changing means is configured such that the operation element is When operated in the direction of 2, the position of the operation end point is changed to a position corresponding to the operation amount of the operation element.

  According to the gaming machine A3, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine A2, the operating element is displaced in a second direction different from the operating direction for adjusting the launch intensity of the gaming ball, so that the operation end point changing means Since the change (setting) of the position of the operation end point is performed, such a change operation can be easily performed. That is, after the player has operated the operating element to adjust the firing intensity of the game ball to a desired firing intensity, the player may then operate the operating element in the second direction from that state. Therefore, for example, it is not necessary to perform an operation of changing the operation element or an operation of operating another operation means with a hand opposite to the operation of the operation element. As a result, an operation (change operation) for changing the position of the operation end point by the operation end point changing unit can be easily performed.

  The gaming machine A3 includes a mounting member disposed in the gaming machine main body and a base member disposed so as to be displaceable with respect to the mounting member, and the operating element can be rotated with respect to the base member. The launch strength of the game ball is adjusted according to the amount of rotation of the operation element, and the base member is displaced with respect to the mounting member, thereby being displaced in the second direction. A gaming machine A4 characterized by being enabled.

  According to the gaming machine A4, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine A3, the operating element is disposed on the base member that is displaceable with respect to the mounting member so as to be rotatable, and the operating element is moved in the second direction. The displacement (that is, the operation for changing (setting) the position of the operation end point to the position corresponding to the operation amount of the operation element) is performed by the base member being displaced with respect to the mounting member. The operation for changing (setting) the position (displacement in the second direction) is performed while maintaining the operation amount of the rotation operation of the operation element (that is, the operation amount of the rotation operation is shifted, This can be easily performed while suppressing inadvertent changes in the firing intensity).

  That is, after the player adjusts the launch intensity of the game ball to a desired launch intensity by rotating the operator, the player may then perform an operation of displacing the operator in the second direction from that state. In order to change (set) the operation end point, there is no need to carry out an operation of changing the operation element or an operation of operating another operation means with a hand opposite to the operation of the operation element. As a result, it is possible to quickly change (set) the position of the operation end point and to perform an accurate position.

  In the gaming machine A4, the base member is pivotally supported by the mounting member, and is displaceable between a first position and a second position above the first position with the pivotally supported portion as a center. And the biasing force applied from the biasing means is biased in a direction to return to the second position, and the displacement of the operating element in the second direction causes the base member to move to the mounting member. On the other hand, the gaming machine A5 has a direction from the second position toward the first position against the urging force of the urging means.

  According to the gaming machine A5, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine A4, the displacement from the second position toward the first position is performed around the portion where the base member is pivotally supported by the mounting member. The second direction (the operation direction different from the operation direction for adjusting the launching intensity of the game ball) can be easily performed by, for example, an operation of bending the wrist. As a result, an operation (displacement in the second direction) for changing (setting) the position of the operation end point is performed while maintaining the operation amount of the rotation operation of the operation element (that is, the operation amount of the rotation operation is This can be performed more easily while suppressing the inadvertent change in the launch intensity of the game ball. As a result, it is possible to quickly change (set) the position of the operation end point and to perform an accurate position.

  In particular, since the biasing force for returning the displacement position to the second position is applied to the base member from the biasing means, the operating element is displaced in the second direction (that is, the base member is used as the mounting member). After being displaced (pressed down) in the direction toward the first position with the pivotally supported portion as the center, the second position can be obtained using the biasing force of the biasing means by removing the downward pressing force. Can be returned to. As a result, it is possible to reduce the operation burden on the player.

  On the other hand, the operation of displacing the operation element in the second direction (displacement (pressing down) the base member against the urging force of the urging means) is performed using the weight of the finger or arm that holds the operation element. Therefore, the operability can be improved. Further, since the operation element is disposed at a relatively low position of the gaming machine main body and the operation position is relatively low for the player, an operation to be displaced downward is more likely to exert a force. Therefore, the operability can be improved also from this point.

  The gaming machine A3 includes an attachment member disposed in the gaming machine main body, the operation element is disposed so as to be slidable with respect to the attachment member, and a game according to an operation amount of the slide operation of the operation element A gaming machine A6 characterized in that the launch intensity of the ball is adjusted.

  According to the gaming machine A6, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine A3, the operating element is disposed on the mounting member so as to be slidable. Therefore, when adjusting the operability of the operating element, that is, the launching intensity of the gaming ball. The operability can be improved. The operation element is not limited to a shape that the player can hold with fingers, but may have another shape. Examples of the other shape include a dish-like shape on which the player can place the palm and back of the hand.

  In this case, as described above, the position of the operation end point is changed (set) by the operation element being displaced in the second direction different from the operation direction of the slide operation for adjusting the firing strength of the game ball. Therefore, the setting operation can be easily performed. That is, the player operates the operating element in the operating direction of the slide operation to adjust the firing intensity of the game ball to a desired firing intensity, and then displaces the operating element in the second direction from that state. In order to change (set) the position of the operation end point, it is necessary to move the operation element or operate another operation means with the hand opposite to the operation of the operation element. Absent. Therefore, an operation for changing (setting) the position of the operation end point (displacement in the second direction) is performed while maintaining the operation amount of the slide operation of the operator (that is, the operation amount of the slide operation is shifted, This can be easily performed while suppressing inadvertent changes in the firing intensity). As a result, it is possible to quickly change (set) the position of the operation end point and to perform an accurate position.

  In the gaming machine A6, the operating element is pivotally supported by the mounting member, and is displaceable between a first position and a second position above the first position with the pivotally supported portion as a center. And is biased in a direction to return to the second position by the biasing force applied from the biasing means, and the displacement of the manipulator in the second direction causes the manipulator to move to the mounting member. On the other hand, the gaming machine A7 has a direction from the second position toward the first position against the urging force of the urging means.

  According to the gaming machine A7, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine A6, the displacement from the second position toward the first position is performed around the portion where the operating element is pivotally supported by the mounting member. The second direction (the operation direction different from the operation direction for adjusting the launching intensity of the game ball) can be easily performed by, for example, an operation of bending the wrist. As a result, the operation for changing (setting) the position of the operation end point (displacement in the second direction) is performed while maintaining the operation amount of the slide operation of the operator (that is, the operation amount of the slide operation is shifted). , While suppressing the inadvertent change in the launch intensity of the game ball). As a result, it is possible to quickly change (set) the position of the operation end point and to perform an accurate position.

  In particular, since the urging force for returning the displacement position to the second position is applied to the operation element from the urging means, the operation element is displaced in the second direction (that is, the operation element is used as the attachment member). After being displaced (pressed down) in the direction toward the first position with the pivotally supported portion as the center, the second position can be obtained using the biasing force of the biasing means by removing the downward pressing force. Can be returned to. As a result, it is possible to reduce the operation burden on the player.

  On the other hand, the operation of displacing the operation element in the second direction (displacement (pressing down) the operation element against the urging force of the urging means) is performed using the weight of the finger or arm holding the operation element. Therefore, the operability can be improved. Further, since the operation element is disposed at a relatively low position of the gaming machine main body and the operation position is relatively low for the player, an operation to be displaced downward is more likely to exert a force. Therefore, the operability can be improved also from this point.

  In any one of the gaming machines A2 to A7, a button member that is pushed in by a player is provided, and the operation end point changing means is a position corresponding to an operation amount of the operation element when the button member is pushed down. The gaming machine A8 is characterized in that the position of the operation end point is changed.

  According to the gaming machine A8, in addition to the effect of any of the gaming machines A2 to A7, a change operation for changing the position of the operation end point to a position corresponding to the operation amount of the operator by pressing the button member Since this is performed by the operation end point changing means, such a change operation can be performed separately from the operation of the operator. That is, such a changing operation can be performed while maintaining the operation amount of the operation element (that is, suppressing the accidental change in the launch intensity of the game ball due to the operation amount of the operation element being shifted). . The button member may be disposed on any of the operation member, the base member on which the operation member is disposed, or the mounting member on which the base member is disposed. In the case of being arranged on the operation element, the operation of the operation element and the operation of the button member can be performed more easily with only one hand. When arranged on the base member or the attachment member, the influence on the operation amount of the operation element due to the operation of the button member can be suppressed.

  The gaming machine A8 includes a hemispherical front cover, the operation element is formed so as to be rotatable, the front cover is disposed on a front side of the operation element, and a button member is provided on a top portion of the front cover. A gaming machine A9, wherein:

  According to the gaming machine A9, in addition to the effects achieved by the gaming machine A8, a hemispherical front cover is disposed on the front side of the operation element, and a button member is disposed on the top of the front cover. The button member can be easily pushed in with the palm of the hand using the operation of returning the wrist while maintaining the state of being gripped with fingers. Therefore, when the operation amount of the turning operation of the operating element is adjusted to the operation amount at which the launching intensity of the game ball becomes a desired firing intensity, the operation amount of the turning operation of the operating element is maintained (that is, The button member can be pushed in while suppressing the operation amount of the turning operation from deviating and the game ball launch intensity from being changed inadvertently. As a result, it is possible to quickly change (set) the position of the operation end point and to perform an accurate position.

  In the gaming machine A9, the front cover includes an opening formed at a top portion for exposing the button member, and the button member is pushed by a player so as to correspond to an operation amount of the operation element. In the state in which the position of the operation end point is changed, at least a part of the button member protrudes from the edge of the opening of the front cover.

  According to the gaming machine A10, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine A9, when the button member is pushed to change the position of the operation end point to the position corresponding to the operation amount of the operation element, the button member is There is no need to push it to a position beyond the edge of the opening of the front cover (a position where the entire button member enters the front cover). That is, when the button member is pushed in, it is possible to suppress the edge of the opening of the front cover from being obstructed and to improve the operability.

  In the gaming machine A9 or A10, the front cover includes an opening formed at a top portion for exposing the button member, and the button member is positioned at a position corresponding to an operation amount of the operation element. The second push-in position for changing the position is formed so that it can be pushed further into the third push-in position, and at least the position of the operation end point can be returned to the maximum position by pushing the button member to the third push-in position. In addition, at the third push-in position, the button member is immersed in the front cover rather than the edge of the opening of the front cover. According to the gaming machine A11, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine 8 or 9, the button member is pushed from the second pushing position to the third pushing position so that the position of the operation end point can be returned to the maximum position. In this case, it is necessary to push the button member to a position where the button member is immersed beyond the edge of the opening of the front cover (a position where the entire button member enters the front cover). Therefore, when the button member is pushed to the third pushing position, the edge of the opening of the front cover can be prevented, so that the button member at the second pushing position is inadvertently brought to the third pushing position. The pushing operation can be suppressed. As a result, the end point position that has been changed (set) to the position corresponding to the operation amount of the operator is inadvertently returned to the initial position (or in a state where it can be restored) due to an inadvertent pressing operation of the button member. Can be suppressed.

  In the gaming machines A2 to A11, the game is characterized by comprising operation end point return means for returning the position of the operation end point changed to the position corresponding to the operation amount of the operator by the operation end point changing means to the maximum position. Machine A12.

  According to the gaming machine A12, in addition to the effect of any of the gaming machines A2 to A11, an operation for returning the position of the operation end point changed to the position corresponding to the operation amount of the operator by the operation end point changing means to the maximum position. Since the end point return means is provided, the position of the operation end point can be returned to the maximum position by using the operation end point return means. That is, the operation element can be operated up to an operation position at which a game ball can be launched with a predetermined maximum firing intensity.

  In the gaming machine A12, the operation end point return means is capable of returning the position of the operation end point to the maximum position in a state where the operation element is operated.

  According to the gaming machine A13, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine A12, the operation end point return means can return the position of the operation end point to the maximum position when the operation element is operated. In order to return the position of the end point to the maximum position, there is no need to temporarily return the operation element operated to a predetermined operation amount to the initial position. Therefore, for example, when it becomes necessary to reset the position of the operation end point to another position, the resetting operation can be quickly performed. Or, for example, when a right-handed stroke is required, the operation end point is released (that is, returned to the maximum position), and the operation element is operated in the operation direction that maximizes the launch intensity of the game ball. Can be done quickly.

  In the gaming machine A13, the operation element is formed to be displaceable in a third direction different from an operation direction for adjusting the firing strength of the game ball, and the operation end point return means is configured such that the operation element is The gaming machine A14 is configured to return the position of the operation end point to the maximum position by being operated in the direction of 3.

  According to the gaming machine A14, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine A13, the operating element is displaced in a second direction different from the operating direction for adjusting the launch intensity of the gaming ball, so that the operation end point return means Since the operation end point is returned to the maximum position, the return operation can be easily performed while the game is continued (that is, the game ball is fired at a desired launch intensity). That is, the player can operate the operation element in the third direction in the state where the operation intensity of the game ball is adjusted to the desired emission intensity by operating the operation element. In order to perform the return to the maximum position, for example, it is not necessary to perform an operation of changing the operating element or an operation of operating another operating means with a hand opposite to the hand operating the operating element. As a result, the operation (return operation) for returning the position of the operation end point to the maximum position by the operation end point return means can be easily performed while continuing the game.

  In the gaming machine A14, the operation element is formed to be displaceable in a second direction different from an operation direction for adjusting the firing strength of the game ball, and the operation end point changing means is configured such that the operation element is By operating in the direction of 2, the position of the operation end point is changed to a position corresponding to the operation amount of the operation element, and the second direction and the third direction are the same direction. A gaming machine A15 characterized by this.

  According to the gaming machine A15, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine A14, the second direction and the third direction are the same direction, and the position of the operation end point is changed to a position corresponding to the operation amount of the operator. Since the change operation and the return operation for returning the position of the operation end point changed by the change operation to the maximum position can be performed by the same operation, the change operation and the return operation can be easily performed. That is, since the state due to the change operation and the state due to the return operation are alternately switched, it is effective in improving the operability that these two states can be switched by repeating the same operation. In addition, since the second direction and the third direction are the same direction, it is possible to reduce the operable direction of the operation element, thereby simplifying the structure and reducing the product cost. Can be achieved.

  The gaming machine A12 or A13 includes a button member that is pushed in by a player, and the operation end point return means returns the position of the operation end point to the maximum position when the button member is pushed down. Characteristic gaming machine A16.

  According to the gaming machine A16, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine A12 or A13, a return operation for returning the position of the operation end point to the maximum position is performed by the operation end point return means by pressing the button member. Such a return operation can be performed separately from the operation of the operator. That is, such a return operation can be performed while maintaining the operation amount of the operation element (that is, suppressing the inadvertent change in the launch intensity of the game ball due to the operation amount of the operation element being shifted). .

  In the gaming machine A16, the change of the position of the operation end point by the operation end point changing means and the return of the position of the operation end point to the maximum position by the operation end point returning means are alternately performed by pushing the button member. A gaming machine A17 characterized by being executable.

  According to the gaming machine A17, in addition to the effects achieved by the gaming machine A16, the change of the position of the operation end point by the operation end point changing means and the return of the position of the operation end point to the maximum position by the operation end point returning means Since the operations can be executed alternately by the push-in operation, it is possible to easily perform the change operation and the return operation. That is, since the state due to the change operation and the state due to the return operation are alternately switched, it is effective for improving the operability that these two states can be switched by repeatedly operating the button member having one. Become. In addition, since one button member can be used in this manner, the number of parts can be reduced and the structure can be simplified, and the product cost can be reduced accordingly.

  In any one of the gaming machines A1 to A17, a gaming machine A18 is formed so that the player can identify whether the position of the operation end point has been changed from the maximum position.

  According to the gaming machine A18, in addition to the effect of any of the gaming machines A1 to A17, it is formed so that the player can identify whether the position of the operation end point has been changed from the maximum position. It is possible to suppress a situation in which a game is played without knowing that the adjustment range is restricted, and it is difficult for a player to suffer a disadvantage.

  That is, when the operation element can be operated in the section from the initial position to the operation end point, in the configuration in which the position of the operation end point can be changed, the player determines that the position of the operation end point has been changed. If a game is played without being noticed, the game is played in a state where the adjustment range of the launch intensity of the game ball is restricted, that is, in a state where the launch of the game ball at a predetermined maximum launch intensity is not possible. As a result, the player may suffer a disadvantage.

  On the other hand, according to the gaming machine A18, since the player can identify whether the position of the operation end point has been changed from the maximum position, the position of the operation end point has been changed from the maximum position (that is, It is possible to prevent the player from suffering a disadvantage by preventing the player from playing the game without noticing that the adjustment range of the launch intensity of the game ball is regulated.

  The gaming machine A18 includes a button member that is pushed in by a player, and the button member is pushed in so that the position of the operation end point can be changed from the maximum position, and the position of the operation end point is maximum. In the state changed from the position, the push-in position of the button member is different from the state in which the position of the operation end point is at the maximum position.

  According to the gaming machine A19, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine A18, the operation end point position can be changed from the maximum position by pushing the button member, and the operation end point position is changed from the maximum position. Compared with the state where the operation end point is at the maximum position, the push position of the button member is different, so based on the difference in the push position of the button member, whether the operation end point position has been changed from the maximum position Can be identified. Accordingly, it is possible to suppress the player from playing the game without noticing that the position of the operation end point has been changed from the maximum position, and to make it difficult for the player to suffer a disadvantage.

  In this case, according to the gaming machine A19, an operation member (button member) operated to change the position of the operation end point from the maximum position is identified for identifying whether the position of the operation end point is changed from the maximum position. Since it is also used as an identification member, the number of parts can be reduced accordingly, and the product cost can be reduced.

  The gaming machine A19 includes a wall portion disposed on the outer peripheral surface side of the button member, and an opening formed in the wall portion so that at least a part of the outer peripheral surface of the button member is visible, In a state where the position of the operation end point is changed from the maximum position, the form of the object visually recognized through the opening is different from the state where the position of the operation end point is at the maximum position. A20.

  According to the gaming machine A20, in addition to the effect achieved by the gaming machine A19, when the position of the operation end point is changed from the maximum position, it is visually recognized through the opening as compared with the state where the position of the operation end point is at the maximum position. Since the form of the target to be played is different, the player can easily and reliably identify whether the position of the operation end point has been changed from the maximum position based on the difference in the form of the visually recognized target.

  That is, in the configuration in which whether the position of the operation end point has been changed from the maximum position is identified based on the difference in the push-in position of the button member, the determination criterion is the difference in the push-in amount, so the two states are clear. It is difficult to distinguish between

  On the other hand, according to the gaming machine A20, since the form of the object visually recognized through the opening is different, the determination criterion can be binarized, and the two states can be easily distinguished clearly. This allows the player to easily and reliably identify whether the position of the operation end point has been changed from the maximum position. As a result, the game can be performed without noticing that the position of the operation end point has been changed from the maximum position. It is possible to prevent the player from playing a game and to make it difficult for the player to suffer a disadvantage.

  Note that the form of the object visually recognized through the opening is different, for example, in the two states of the state where the position of the operation end point is at the maximum position and the state where the position of the operation end point is changed from the maximum position, In the state, only the outer peripheral surface of the button member is visually recognized through the opening, and in the other state, only the members other than the outer peripheral surface of the button member are visually recognized through the opening (that is, the button member is The binarization is performed based on whether or not the outer peripheral surface is visually recognized, and the configuration is distinguished based on these binary values).

  Second, in one state and the other state, the outer peripheral surface of the button member is visually recognized, but the color of the outer peripheral surface of the visually recognized button member is different between one state and the other state (that is, The color of the button member visually recognized through the opening (for example, a configuration that is binarized by white and black and distinguishes based on the binary) is exemplified.

  Third, in one state and the other state, the outer peripheral surface of the button member is visually recognized, but the area (percentage occupied in the opening) of the outer peripheral surface of the button member that is visually recognized is Different configurations depending on the state (that is, a configuration that is binarized by the area of the button member visually recognized through the opening (the area that the outer peripheral surface of the button member occupies in the opening) is distinguished based on these two values) Is done.

  Fourthly, in one state and the other state, the outer peripheral surface of the button member is visually recognized, but the shape drawn in the opening by the outer peripheral surface of the visually recognized button member is in one state and the other state. A different configuration (that is, a configuration in which the outer peripheral surface of the button member is binarized by a shape drawn in the opening and distinguished based on the binary values) is exemplified.

  Fifth, in one state and the other state, the outer peripheral surface of the button member is visually recognized, and the area of the outer peripheral surface of the button member visually recognized and the shape drawn by the outer peripheral surface of the button member are the same. The position of the outer peripheral surface of the button member in the visually recognizable opening is different between one state and the other state (that is, binarized by the position of the outer peripheral surface of the button member in the opening, and is distinguished based on these two values. Configuration) is exemplified.

  In the gaming machine A18, when the position of the operation end point is at the maximum position, the game machine A18 is disposed at the first position, and when the position of the operation end point is changed from the maximum position, the interlock is disposed at the second position. A gaming machine A21 comprising a member.

  According to the gaming machine A21, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine A18, the interlocking member is disposed at the first position when the operation end point is at the maximum position, and the operation end point is changed from the maximum position. Since it is arranged at the second position in this state, the player can easily and reliably identify whether the position of the operation end point has been changed from the maximum position based on the difference in the arrangement of the interlocking members. . As a result, it is possible to suppress the player from playing the game without noticing that the position of the operation end point has been changed from the maximum position, and to prevent the player from suffering a disadvantage.

  In the gaming machine A21, the interlocking member is formed so as to be operable by a player, and the interlocking member disposed at the second position is operated and disposed at the first position, so that the position of the operation end point is reached. Is returned to the maximum position.

  In the gaming machine A21 or A22, the interlocking member is formed so as to be operable by a player, and the interlocking member disposed at the first position is operated and disposed at the second position, whereby the operation element The gaming machine A23 is characterized in that the position of the operation end point is changed to a position corresponding to the operation amount.

  According to the gaming machine A22, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine A21, the interlocking member is formed to be operable, and the interlocking member disposed at the second position is operated and disposed at the first position. The position of the end point can be returned to the maximum position. That is, the operation element can be operated up to an operation position at which a game ball can be launched with a predetermined maximum firing intensity. Further, according to the gaming machine A23, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine A21 or A22, the interlocking member is formed to be operable, and the interlocking member disposed at the first position is operated and disposed at the second position. Thus, the position of the operation end point can be changed to a position corresponding to the operation amount of the operation element.

  In this case, according to the gaming machine A22 or the gaming machine A23, the identification member (interlocking member) for identifying whether the position of the operation end point is changed from the maximum position is returned to the maximum position. Since it is also used as an operation member operated to change the position of the operation end point, the number of parts can be reduced correspondingly, and the product cost can be reduced.

  As described above, according to the gaming machine A22, the return operation for returning the position of the operation end point to the maximum value is linked to the second position indicating the state where the position of the operation end point is changed from the maximum position. Since the operation is performed by placing the member at the first position indicating the state where the operation end point is at the maximum position, the player is operated while intuitively recognizing the return operation. As a result, inadvertent misoperation can be suppressed.

  Similarly, according to the gaming machine A23, the changing operation for changing the position of the operation end point to the position corresponding to the operation amount of the operation element is arranged at the first position indicating the state where the position of the operation end point is at the maximum position. This is achieved by performing an operation to place the interlocking member at the second position indicating the state where the position of the operation end point has been changed from the maximum position. And inadvertent misoperation can be suppressed as a result.

  In the gaming machine A6 or A7, when the operation element is displaced in the second direction, the position of the operation end point is changed by the operation end point changing means, and the slide operation of the operation element can be regulated. A gaming machine A24 that is formed.

  According to the gaming machine A24, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine A6 or A7, the operating element is displaced in the second direction, so that the change by the operation end point changing means is performed and the sliding operation of the operating element is restricted. Since it is formed in such a manner, when the operation end point position is changed (set) by the operation end point changing means, it is also possible to regulate that the position of the slide operation of the operator changes (displaces). it can. Therefore, the position of the operation end point can be accurately changed (set) to the intended position while suppressing the position of the slide operation from changing from the intended position (displacement).

  In the gaming machine A6 or A7, the operating element is formed in a rod shape that can be gripped by a player.

  According to the gaming machine A25, in addition to the effects played by the gaming machine A6 or A7, since the operating element is formed in a rod shape that can be gripped by the player, the operating element can be easily held. It is possible to improve the operability when operating the operating element in a predetermined direction (for example, a sliding operation direction or a second direction).

  In the gaming machine A25, the operating element includes a main body part that is slidably supported on one side by the mounting member, and a held part that is erected upward from the other side of the main body part and is held by the player And a gaming machine A26.

  According to the gaming machine A26, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine A25, the operating element is erected upward from the other side of the main body portion so that the held portion held by the player is raised. Can be held (gripped) by the player in a natural posture, and the slide operation and the operation in the second direction can be easily performed. In particular, since the held portion is erected from the other side of the main body, when gripping the held portion, the outer edge portion of the palm can be placed on the main body, thereby reducing fatigue. In addition, when performing the operation in the second direction (operation to push down), the weight of the hand can be applied to the main body, and the operation can be facilitated.

  In the gaming machine A6 or A7, the operating element includes a placement surface formed in a shape that allows a player to place a part of a hand.

  According to the gaming machine A27, in addition to the effects played by the gaming machine A6 or A7, the operation element has a mounting surface formed in a shape on which a player can place a part of the hand. Even a player who cannot hold the player can slide the operator using the placement surface of the operator. That is, in the conventional gaming machine that adjusts the launch strength of the game ball by rotating the rotary handle, it is difficult for a player who cannot grasp the operation portion to play the game, and the operator is slid as in the present invention. It is formed so that it can be operated, and the structure that adjusts the launch intensity of the game ball according to the operation amount of the slide operation of the operation element, and the operation part cannot be grasped by forming a mounting surface on the operation element This is the first time that a player can play a game.

  In the gaming machine A6 or A7, the operating element is slid in a downwardly inclined direction from the initial position toward the operation end point.

  According to the gaming machine A28, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine A6 or A7, the operation element is slid in the downwardly inclined direction from the initial position toward the operation end point, so that the operation amount of the sliding operation is increased. The operation in the direction to be performed (that is, the operation to increase the launch intensity of the game ball) can be easily performed using the weight of the hand. In addition, when the operating element is slid to the end point of the operation and the firing strength of the game ball is kept constant, the weight of the hand is used to counter the urging force that attempts to return the operating element to the initial position. This can reduce the player's fatigue. This configuration is particularly effective when the player performs a slide operation using the placement surface of the operation element (that is, when the player cannot hold the held portion) like the gaming machine A27. .

  In the gaming machine A6 or A7, the operating element is slid in a direction inclined upward from the initial position toward the operation end point.

  According to the gaming machine A29, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine A6 or A7, the operation element is slid in the direction of rising and tilting from the initial position toward the operation end point. It is possible to eliminate the act of hanging to keep the launching strength of the game ball constant.

  That is, in the structure in which the operation element is formed so as to be slidable and the launching intensity of the game ball is adjusted according to the operation amount of the slid operation of the operation element, if the direction of the slide operation is horizontal or inclined downward, For example, by hanging a shopping bag on the child, it is possible to maintain the operation element at the operation end point by using the weight of the shopping bag even if the player releases his hand from the operation element. Be disturbed.

  On the other hand, according to the gaming machine A29, the direction of the slide operation of the operation element is inclined upward, so that, for example, when a shopping bag is hung on the operation element, the player holds the operation element by hand. Unless otherwise, the operator can be returned to the initial position by the weight of the shopping bag. As a result, it is possible to prevent the operation element from being maintained at the operation end point with the player releasing his hand, and to ensure a fair game.

  A gaming machine B1 according to any one of the gaming machines A1 to A29, wherein the gaming machine is a slot machine. Above all, the basic configuration of the slot machine is “equipped with variable display means for confirming and displaying the identification information after dynamically displaying an identification information string composed of a plurality of identification information, and for operating the starting operation means (for example, an operation lever). As a result, the dynamic display of the identification information is started, and the dynamic display of the identification information is stopped due to the operation of the stop operation means (stop button) or after a predetermined time has elapsed. The game machine is provided with special game state generating means for generating a special game state advantageous to the player on the condition that the confirmed identification information is specific identification information. In this case, examples of the game media include coins and medals.

  A gaming machine B2 according to any one of the gaming machines A1 to A29, wherein the gaming machine is a pachinko gaming machine. Above all, the basic configuration of a pachinko gaming machine is provided with an operation handle, and a ball is launched into a predetermined game area according to the operation of the operation handle, and the ball is placed in an operation port disposed at a predetermined position in the game area. As a necessary condition for winning (or passing through the operating port), the identification information dynamically displayed on the display means is determined and stopped after a predetermined time. In addition, when a special gaming state occurs, a variable winning device (specific winning opening) disposed at a predetermined position in the gaming area is opened in a predetermined manner so that a ball can be won, and a value corresponding to the number of winnings is obtained. Examples include those to which values (including data written on magnetic cards as well as premium balls) are given.

Any one of the gaming machines A1 to A29, wherein the gaming machine is a fusion of a pachinko gaming machine and a slot machine. Among them, the basic configuration of the merged gaming machine includes “a variable display means for confirming and displaying the identification information after dynamically displaying an identification information string composed of a plurality of identification information, and a starting operation means (for example, an operation lever). Due to the operation of the identification information, the change of the identification information is started, and the dynamic display of the identification information is stopped due to the operation of the operation means for stop (for example, the stop button) or when a predetermined time elapses. Special game state generating means for generating a special game state advantageous to the player on the condition that the fixed identification information at the time of stoppage is specific identification information, and using a ball as a game medium, and the identification information The game machine is configured such that a predetermined number of balls are required at the start of the dynamic display, and a large number of balls are paid out when the special gaming state occurs.
<Others>
<Means>
The gaming machine described in the technical idea 1 includes an operation element operated by a player, and the launch intensity of the game ball is adjusted according to the operation amount of the operation element. It is possible to operate in the section up to the operation end point, the position of the operation end point can be changed, and the player can identify whether the position of the operation end point has been changed from the maximum position.
The gaming machine described in the technical idea 2 includes a button member that is pushed in by a player in the gaming machine described in the technical idea 1, and the position of the operation end point is determined by pushing the button member. When the position of the operation end point is changed from the maximum position, the push position of the button member is different from the state where the position of the operation end point is at the maximum position.
The gaming machine described in the technical idea 3 is the gaming machine described in the technical idea 2, in which a wall portion disposed on the outer peripheral surface side of the button member, an opening formed in the wall portion, and an outer peripheral surface of the button member. An opening at least partially visible, and in a state where the position of the operation end point is changed from the maximum position, the position of the operation end point is compared with a state where the position is at the maximum position through the opening. The form of the object to be visually recognized is different.
<Effect>
According to the gaming machine described in the technical idea 1, it is easy to adjust the operation amount of the operator to the original operation amount.
Here, as a method of adjusting the operation amount of the operation element to a desired operation amount, for example, a method of providing a scale line along the movement locus of the operation element, or a reference at an arbitrary position along the movement locus of the operation element A method of fixing the piece is conceivable. According to these methods, the operation amount of the manipulator can be reduced by operating the manipulator using the scale line or the reference piece as the target position (that is, the operation position of the manipulator coincides with the scale line or the reference piece). It can be easily adjusted to a desired operation amount.
However, in the method described above, the accuracy of adjusting the operating element depends on the skill of the player. That is, since it is necessary to finely adjust the operation position of the operator with respect to the target position while visually determining whether or not the operation position of the operation element matches the target position (scale line or reference piece) Adjustment is difficult. Further, for example, if the operating speed of the operating element is increased, the operating position may pass, so that the operating speed of the operating element needs to be reduced in the vicinity of the target position, and quick adjustment is difficult.
On the other hand, according to the technical idea 1, since the operation element can be operated in the section from the initial position to the operation end point, the position of the operation end point can be changed. By changing (setting) the position of the operation end point to a position corresponding to (position), if the player operates the operation element up to the operation end point (that is, the operation is restricted by the operation end point, and more If the operation element is operated to a position where the operation cannot be performed), the operation amount of the operation element can be easily adjusted to a desired operation amount.
Thereby, for example, it is not necessary to make fine adjustment while visually determining whether or not the operation position of the operation element matches the target position, and it is possible to accurately adjust to a desired operation amount. Moreover, since the target position is not passed, the operation speed of the operator can be increased, and the desired operation amount can be quickly adjusted.
More specifically, as a result of adjusting the operation amount of the operation element, when the launch intensity of the game ball becomes a desired launch intensity, the position corresponding to the state (the operation element having the desired launch intensity is obtained). The position of the operation end point is changed (set) to the position corresponding to the operation amount. Thus, for example, even after the game is interrupted for a break and the operating element is returned to the initial position, the player can operate the operating element only by operating the operating element to the operation end point as described above. The operation amount of the child can be returned (adjusted) to the original operation amount (that is, the operation amount before the game is interrupted), and the return operation can be performed accurately and quickly.
Furthermore, since the player can identify whether the position of the operation end point has been changed from the maximum position, the situation where the game is played without knowing that the adjustment range of the launch intensity of the game ball is regulated is suppressed. It is possible to make it difficult for the player to suffer a disadvantage.
That is, when the operation element can be operated in the section from the initial position to the operation end point, in the configuration in which the position of the operation end point can be changed, the player determines that the position of the operation end point has been changed. If a game is played without being noticed, the game is played in a state where the adjustment range of the launch intensity of the game ball is restricted, that is, in a state where the game ball cannot be fired at a predetermined maximum launch intensity. As a result, the player may suffer a disadvantage.
On the other hand, according to the technical idea 1, since the player can identify whether the position of the operation end point has been changed from the maximum position, the position of the operation end point has been changed from the maximum position (ie, It is possible to prevent the player from suffering a disadvantage by preventing the player from playing the game without noticing that the adjustment range of the launch intensity of the game ball is regulated.
According to the gaming machine described in the technical idea 2, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine described in the technical idea 1, the position of the operation end point can be changed from the maximum position by pushing the button member, and the position of the operation end point In the state where the position is changed from the maximum position, since the push position of the button member is different compared to the state where the position of the operation end point is at the maximum position, the position of the operation end point is determined based on the difference in the push position of the button member. Can be identified by the player as to whether or not has been changed from the maximum position. Accordingly, it is possible to suppress the player from playing the game without noticing that the position of the operation end point has been changed from the maximum position, and to make it difficult for the player to suffer a disadvantage.
In this case, according to the technical idea 2, the operation member (button member) operated to change the position of the operation end point from the maximum position is identified to determine whether the position of the operation end point is changed from the maximum position. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the number of parts and reduce the product cost.
According to the gaming machine described in the technical idea 3, in addition to the effects achieved by the gaming machine described in the technical idea 2, the state where the operation end point is at the maximum position when the operation end point is changed from the maximum position. Since the form of the object visually recognized through the opening is different from the above, the player can easily determine whether the position of the operation end point has been changed from the maximum position based on the difference in the form of the visually recognized object. It can be reliably identified.
That is, in the configuration in which whether the position of the operation end point has been changed from the maximum position is identified based on the difference in the push-in position of the button member, the determination criterion is the difference in the push-in amount, so the two states are clear. It is difficult to distinguish between
On the other hand, according to the technical idea 3, since the form of the object visually recognized through the opening is different, it is possible to binarize the judgment criterion and to easily distinguish the two states clearly. . This allows the player to easily and reliably identify whether the position of the operation end point has been changed from the maximum position. As a result, the game can be performed without noticing that the position of the operation end point has been changed from the maximum position. It is possible to prevent the player from playing a game and to make it difficult for the player to suffer a disadvantage.
Note that the form of the object visually recognized through the opening is different, for example, in the two states of the state where the position of the operation end point is at the maximum position and the state where the position of the operation end point is changed from the maximum position, In the state, only the outer peripheral surface of the button member is visually recognized through the opening, and in the other state, only the members other than the outer peripheral surface of the button member are visually recognized through the opening (that is, the button member is The binarization is performed based on whether or not the outer peripheral surface is visually recognized, and the configuration is distinguished based on these binary values).
Second, in one state and the other state, the outer peripheral surface of the button member is visually recognized, but the color of the outer peripheral surface of the visually recognized button member is different between one state and the other state (that is, The color of the button member visually recognized through the opening (for example, a configuration that is binarized by white and black and distinguishes based on the binary) is exemplified.
Third, in one state and the other state, the outer peripheral surface of the button member is visually recognized, but the area (percentage occupied in the opening) of the outer peripheral surface of the button member that is visually recognized is Different configurations depending on the state (that is, a configuration that is binarized by the area of the button member visually recognized through the opening (the area that the outer peripheral surface of the button member occupies in the opening) is distinguished based on these two values) Is done.
Fourthly, in one state and the other state, the outer peripheral surface of the button member is visually recognized, but the shape drawn in the opening by the outer peripheral surface of the visually recognized button member is in one state and the other state. A different configuration (that is, a configuration in which the outer peripheral surface of the button member is binarized by a shape drawn in the opening and distinguished based on the binary values) is exemplified.
Fifth, in one state and the other state, the outer peripheral surface of the button member is visually recognized, and the area of the outer peripheral surface of the button member visually recognized and the shape drawn by the outer peripheral surface of the button member are the same. The position of the outer peripheral surface of the button member in the visually recognizable opening is different between one state and the other state (that is, binarized by the position of the outer peripheral surface of the button member in the opening, and is distinguished based on these two values. Configuration) is exemplified.

10 Pachinko machines (game machines)
51,2051,3051 Handle device (operating device)
520, 2520 Handle mounting base (mounting member)
530 Handle base (base member)
540, 2051 Handle ring (operator)
550 Front cover 550a Opening 550b, 554b confirmation window ( opening )
570 Button member 577 Internal fitting wall (wall)
600, 2600, 3600 switching device (part of operation end point changing means)
3800 Operating element 3880 Bounce-up direction biasing spring (biasing means)
3810 Main body portion 3830 Held portion SP Base biasing spring (biasing means)
θ0 Initial position

Claims (3)

In a gaming machine that includes an operation element operated by a player, and in which the launch intensity of the game ball is adjusted according to the operation amount of the operation element,
The player can operate in the section from the initial position to the operation end point, the position of the operation end point can be changed, and the player can determine whether the position of the operation end point has been changed from the maximum position. A gaming machine characterized by being formed to be identifiable.   A button member that is pushed by a player is provided, and the button member is pushed to change the position of the operation end point from the maximum position, and the position of the operation end point is changed from the maximum position. 2. The gaming machine according to claim 1, wherein in the state, the push-in position of the button member is different from the state in which the position of the operation end point is at the maximum position.   A wall portion disposed on the outer peripheral surface side of the button member, and an opening formed in the wall portion so that at least a part of the outer peripheral surface of the button member is visible, and the position of the operation end point is 3. The gaming machine according to claim 2, wherein in the state changed from the maximum position, the form of the object visually recognized through the opening is different from the state in which the position of the operation end point is in the maximum position. .

Images